Home

Bricscad V10

1. Revert to defaults 4 option Add a Quad Item Group e Do one of the following e Right click the Custom command group name then choose Append quad item group in the context menu to add a new group at the bottom of the list e Right click a group item name then choose Append quad item group in the context menu to add a new group above the selected item group The Add Quad Item Group dialog box displays e Type a name in the Group name field 74 User Guide Add Quad Item Group Display quad items from this group On all entities On specific entities Add Entity Type s Add Custom Remove Group name MyQuadGroup R e Do one of the following e Select On all entities to apply the new group to all entity types and click the OK button to create the new item group e Select On Specific entities to apply the new group to one or more specific entity types and proceed with the next step e Click the Entity Type s button and select one or more entity types FA Add Entity Alias Add alias es for W One entity ARC ARCALIGNEDTEXT ARC_DIMENSION e Check either One entity or Multiple entities or both e Check one or more entity types in the list e Click the OK button 75 76 BricsCAD V14 Add Quad Item Group Display quad items from this group 6 On all entities On specific entities QOBIECT ARC OBJECT CIRCLE OBJECTS _ARC OBJECTS CIRCLE Add Entity
2. Press and hold the left mouse button Move the mouse to rotate the view option Right click to display a context menu Exit Pan oom Constrained Sphere Sphere To abort the Real Time X command do one of the following e Right click e Press Enter space bar or Esc OG Rotating a view about the view Y axis 1 Do one of the following e Click the Real Time Y tool button 4 on the Real Time Motion toolbar e Choose Real Time Motion gt Real Time Y in the View menu e Type rtroty in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads gt gt Press ENTER or Esc to complete or right click to display context menu Press and hold the left mouse button Move the mouse to rotate the view option Right click to display a context menu Exit rr Pan Zoom w Constrained Sphere Sphere 4 To abort the Real Time Y command do one of the following e Right click e Press Enter space bar or Esc 133 BricsCAD V14 Rotating a view about the view Z axis 1 Do one of the following e Click the Real Time Z tool button Ey on the Real Time Motion toolbar e Choose Real Time Motion gt Real Time Z in the View menu e Type rtrotz in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads gt gt Press ENTER or Esc to complete or right click to display context menu 2 Press and hold the left mouse button Move the mouse to rotate the view 3 option Right click to display a context
3. Choose Polyline in the prompt menu or type P and press Enter The command bar reads Select 2D polyline to chamfer Select a polyline All vertices of the selected polyline are filleted Filleting two parallel lines 394 Do one of the following e Click the Fillet tool button i on the Chamfer Fillet flyout of the Modify toolbar e Choose Fillet in the Modify menu e Type fillet or F in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Fillet lt current fillet settings gt Settings Polyline Radius Trim Undo Multiple lt Select first entity gt Select the first entity line or ray The command window reads Select second entity Select the second entity line ray or infinite line The fillet is executed at the endpoint closest to the point were the first entity is selected The length of the second entity is adjusted User Guide Editing Polylines The PEDIT command modifies any type of two dimensional or three dimensional polyline such as rectangles polygons and donuts as well as three dimensional entities such as pyramids cylinders and spheres Editing a polyline can be e opening or closing a polyline e changing its overall width or the widths of individual segments e converting a polyline with straight line segments into a flowing curve or an approximation of a spline e editing individual vertices adding removing or moving vertices e adding new segments to an existing polyline e
4. E F C BricsCAD Training Bricscad Trai lt overrides gt gg Layer States DIM_cM 2 Linetypes DOORS aA Multiline Styles B Multileader Styles Ag Text Styles Name Annotative Yes Lines and Arrows Text sg Visual Styles Fit b Lights Primary units pit Materials Alternate units pe RenderPresei aes Tobe 2 External References Preview E Images i PDF Underlays e 0 e HTa Dependencies Page Setups j Section Planes The current dimension style is marked with an asterisk 2 option Select a dimension style to see a preview 3 option Select a dimension style then right click e Choose New to create a new dimension style e Choose Delete to delete the selected dimension style 283 BricsCAD V14 Choose Cut selected dimension style in the current drawing then paste it in another open drawing Choose Copy then paste it in another open drawing Choose Paste to copy a previously cut or copied dimension style in the current drawing Choose Rename to rename of the selected dimension style Choose Set current in the context menu to make it the current dimension style Choose Save overrides to current style to save all current overrides to the current style Choose Save to new style to create a new dimension style as a copy of the selected dimension style 4 option Modify a dimension style definition 5 option Select lt overrides gt to define overri
5. New entities are drawn using the current lineweight Linetype BYLAYER Entities which have a linetype BYLAYER adopt the linetype of their layer This allows you to change the linetype of all such entities by adjusting the linetype of the layer Linetype BYBLOCK Entities created using linetype BYBLOCK are drawn as continuous lines until you include them into a block The entities then inherit the block s linetype setting when you insert the block into a drawing Linetype SCALE Non continuous linetypes consist of lines gaps and dots put together in a variety of patterns In complex linetypes also text or shapes can be included In the linetype definition the length of the lines and gaps are defined in drawing units To display the linetype correctly it needs to be scaled to match the dimensions of your drawing The linetype scaling factor is defined by the Linetype Scale LTSCALE system variable BricsCAD will always put a dash at the start and end of a line polyline arc or spline The linetype pattern is also nicely centered so that both ends of the entity look the same Because linetypes are affected by scale paper space becomes a problem A linetype scale that looks fine in model space is possibly going to look wrong in paper space This problem is solved by the Paperspace Linetype Scale PSLTSCALE system variable When set to O zero or OFF linetypes are scaled the same in model space and in layouts when set to 1 or ON l
6. Type O zero in the final step of the above procedure to undo the rotation of the viewport display To align viewports Command MVSETUP 166 1 Type mvsetup in the command bar The command bar reads Enter an option Align Create Scale viewports Undo Do on of the following e Type A in the command bar then press Enter e Choose Align in the prompt menu The command bar reads Enter an option Angled Horizontal alignment Vertical alignment Rotate view Undo Do one of the following e To align two viewports horizontally e Choose Horizontal alignment in the context menu or type H in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Specify basepoint e Pick a point in the reference viewport The command bar reads Specify point in viewport to be panned e Pick a point in the viewport to be aligned The display in the viewport is moved vertically to align the two points horizontally e To align two viewports vertically User Guide e Choose Vertical alignment in the context menu or type V in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Specify basepoint e Pick a point in the reference viewport The command bar reads Specify point in viewport to be panned e Pick a point in the viewport to be aligned The display in the viewport is moved horizontally to align the two points vertically To align model space and paper space points Command ALIGNSPACE Aligning 1 point k Typ
7. ty 1 f Rahn TETRA te 2 4 ae Color Byayer BIEN SS Engine assemblydwg D T oie s pm x Layer 0 Si COPYEDATA Unetype Bytayer op z EA E5 E3 List app names Linetype scale 1 P Plot style F gt CA a Cancel lineweight Bylayer z EE Ae j Hs Hypertink ii a gt x Matenel crankshaft El ceomeen a B Postion 0 84 0 amp X 0 g y 34 Y 2 o 5 z l Scale X i GJ Scale Y 1 ii Scale Z i De Name F RO A Path Rd 2 Annotative as Rotation 270 0000 Block unit ters Unit factor Bplodable B E A T E COPYEDATA 7 5 pa i z r r z z Copy Entity Data to List application names lt Name of application gt Le 8 Components of the BricsCAD application window 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Menu Bar Toolbar docked Drawing windows Drawing viewports Properties Bar Toolbar floating Command bar Status Bar Prompt Menu Open Close the command bar Do one of the following e Choose Command Bar in the View Menu e Move the cursor to a docked toolbar then right click and choose Command Bar in the context menu e Double click the Status field at the left hand side of the Status Bar The Command Window closes if it was open and vice versa BricsCAD V14 NOTES x 2 PLINE 3 5 Start of polyline 4 Close button Press and hold the left mouse button to move the command bar Command History List field the content of the history list field can be copied to th
8. 2 Diameter Symbol option buttons Click to add the diameter symbol 3 Material Condition buttons Click to open the Material Condition palette Material Condition 304 User Guide Working with Texts BricsCAD provides a variety of tools that deal with adding and editing text You can work with single lines of text in your drawings as well add multiple paragraphs The TEXT command creates single line text while the MTEXT command creates text entities which consist of multiple lines Text Styles A text style determines the appearance of the text characters in your drawing It defines text properties such as the font height and obliquing angle New text is created using the current text style by default but you can choose a different text style in the insert text procedures or assign a different text style when editing the text Text Font Two font types can be used SHX fonts and TTF fonts SHX font compiled shape font files sit in the Fonts folder of the BricsCAD installation folder e g C Program Files Bricsys BricsCAD Fonts TTF True Type Font files sit in the Fonts folder of Windows e g C Windows Fonts Text Variables System variables can be set using the Settings dialog Some system variables which apply to text entities are Variable Variabl cg Name e Title FONTALT Alternat e the font which will be used if a text font cannot be found e font HIDETEXT Specifies whether the HIDE command
9. Create 2 viewports Create 3 viewports Create 4 viewports Object Polygonal Cancel option To add 1 viewport do one of the following e Click to specify the first corner of the viewport then specify the opposite corner A single viewport which fits in the specified rectangle is created e Choose Fit to view in the prompt menu or type F then press Enter A single viewport which fits in the current drawing display window is created option To create 2 viewports do one of the following e Choose Create 2 viewports in the prompt menu e Type 2 in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Two viewports Horizontal lt Vertical gt The command bar reads Fit to screen lt First corner of bounding rectangle gt e Click to specify the first corner of the bounding rectangle then specify the opposite corner Two viewports which fit in the specified bounding rectangle are created e Choose Fit to view in the prompt menu or type F then press Enter Two viewports which fit in the current drawing display window are created option To create 3 viewports do one of the following e Choose Create 3 viewports in the prompt menu e Type 3 in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Three viewports Horizontal Vertical Above Below Left lt Right gt User Guide Option _ The command bar reads Fit to screen lt First corner of bounding rectangle gt e Click to specify the first co
10. Main a ee file C Users Louis AppData Roaming Bricsys Bricscad VW 14 64 QO Search 4 B Copy Copy with Base Point E Menu Item Title C amp opy Diesel Tool ID copydip Help Copies the selection to the Clipboard Command c c_copycip Image copydip Revert to defaults 9 30 User Guide The components of the Customize dialog are File menu Main customization file name and location Browse for main customization file button Search field type a search string then click the looking glass icon click again for the next hit Section tabs Content of the currently selected section Available tools tree Properties grid displaying the properties of the selected item oe a gt ee eo Revert to defaults Reloads default menus toolbars etc overwriting the customized default cui file 10 Ee changes and closes the Customize dialog Cancel closes the Customize dialog without saving changes 31 BricsCAD V14 Loading and unloading CUI files Commands MENULOAD CUILOAD MENUUNLOAD and CUIUNLOAD When you install BricsCAD the default cui compact cui and bonus cui files are copied to the Support folder of your Roamable root folder When you launch BricsCAD the first time the default cui file is loaded automatically There are two procedures to load a CUI file e Load main CUI file which replaces all existing content with the content of the new CUI file e Load partial CUI file which appends
11. To control the display of constraint bars 1 Click the 2D Constraint bar tool button l on the 2D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select option to Show Hide Reset constraints A prompt menu displays CONSTRAINTBAR 2 Do one of the following e Choose Hide or Show in the context menu e Type H or S in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entities 3 Select entities then press Enter NOTE Constraint bars are always hidden when opening a drawing To control the position of a constraint bar By default constraint glyph bars are created close to the midpoint of the entity and are kept at that relative position when the entity position changes You can drag the constraint bar to a different location This new relative position is then maintained until the Reset option of the CONSTRAINTBAR command restores the default position of the constraint bar To relocate a constraint bar 1 Place the cursor on the constraint bar 2 Press and hold the left mouse button to move the constraint bar 3 Release the left mouse button at the desired location To restore the default position of the constraint bars 1 Click the 2D Constraint bar tool button l on the 2D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select option to Show Hide Reset constraints A prompt menu displays CONSTRAINTBAR 2 Do one of the following e Choose Reset in the prompt menu e Type R in the command bar
12. e Click in the drawing e Enter the coordinates then press Enter e Key in the distance then press Enter Use ORTHO or Polar Tracking to control the angle To copy entities using grips 1 Select the entity or entities 2 Select the grip or grips you want to manipulate 3 Click the grip you want to use as the base point for the move The Grip Stretch command is launched 4 Do one of the following e Right click then select Move in the context menu e Hit the Space bar or Enter key to cycle through the Grips Editing commands until Move is active The GRIP_MOVE prompt box displays GRIP_MOVE Base Point Copy The command bar reads Enter move point Base point Copy Undo exit 5 Do one of the following e Choose Copy in the context menu e Type C then hit the Space bar or Enter key 6 Do one of the following to define the displacement point e Click in the drawing e Enter the coordinates then press Enter e Key in the distance then press Enter Use ORTHO or Polar Tracking to control the angle 7 Repeat the previous step to create more copies or press the Space bar or Enter key to stop To mirror entities using grips 1 Select the entity or entities 2 Select the grip or grips you want to manipulate 343 BricsCAD V14 Ji 4 D Click the grip you want to use as the base point for the mirroring The Grip Stretch command is launched Do one of the following e Right click then sel
13. in the context menu e Set the insert options in the Drawing Explorer Options dialog box Drawing Explorer Options Led Insert Block When inserting blocks from the Explorer Align Fixed Scale Fixed Rotation 0 oK cane 4 Do one of the following Select a block then do one of the following e Click the Insert Block button 64 on the Details toolbar e Right click and select Insert from the context menu e When in Icon View double click the block To select an external drawing do one of the following Fi e Click the Insert External tool button tH on the Details toolbar e Choose Insert External in the Edit menu e Right click then choose Insert External in the context menu The Drawing Explorer Blocks window closes The command bar reads Multiple blocks Scale lt Insertion point for block gt A prompt menu displays 421 BricsCAD V14 INSERT 5 Follow the instructions in the command bar to insert the block The Drawing Explorer Blocks window reopens 6 option Insert more blocks 7 Close the Drawing Explorer Blocks window Inserting blocks from another drawing Sy Block Manager Internet connection needed 1 Open the Drawings Explorer In the Drawings pane click the Fo ders tab option If not yet available in the Local Folders tree add the folder of the drawing Expand the folder Click the Expand icon in front of the drawing The Blocks icon of the draw
14. 1 Do one of the following e Click the Real Time Constrained Sphere tool button eph or the Real Time Sphere tool button S on the Real Time Motion toolbar e Choose Real Time Motion gt Real Time Constrained Sphere or Real Time Motion gt Real Time Sphere in the View menu e Type rtrot rtrotf or rtrotctr in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads gt gt Press ENTER or Esc to complete or right click to display context menu Press and hold the left mouse button Move the mouse to rotate the view e Using the Real Time Constrained Sphere command horizontal mouse movement parallel to the screen X axis rotates the 3D model about the world Z axis e Using the Real time Sphere Center command you are prompted to specify a center point for the rotation first option Right click to display a context menu Exit oF Ban J oom gt Constrained Sphere Sphere 4 To abort the Real Time Sphere commands do one of the following 132 e Right click then choose Exit in the context menu e Press Enter space bar or Esc User Guide Rotating a view about the view X axis M 4 Do one of the following e Click the Real Time X tool button E on the Real Time Motion toolbar e Choose Real Time Motion gt Real Time X in the View menu e Type rtrotx in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads gt gt Press ENTER or Esc to complete or right click to display context menu
15. 150 T dial 50 E Name di Expression 200 Value 200 Description Length horizontal leg 2 Select a parameter User Guide The properties the selected parameter display in bottom part of the Mechanical Browser 3 option Select the Name field then type a new name 4 option Select the Expression field then type a new value or expression 5 option Select the Description field then type a new description 81 BricsCAD V14 To edit a single dimensional constraint 1 Double click the dimensional constraint The command bar reads _ddedit The Edit Text dialog box displays 4 Edit Text 2 Type anew value in the Text field then press Enter or click the OK button The new value is applied and the geometry is rebuild accordingly To edit multiple dimensional constraints 1 Type ddedit or ed in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entity to modify 2 Click the a dimensional constraint The Edit Text dialog box displays d Edit Text Text 3 Type a new value in the Text field then press Enter or click the OK button 4 option Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit more dimensional constraints 5 Press Enter or right click to stop editing dimensional constraints All edited dimensional constraints are updated simultaneously The geometry is rebuild accordingly Using expressions to define dimensional constraints Each dimensional constraint is named automatically
16. Drawing points 1 Do one of the following e Click the Point tool button on the Draw toolbar e Choose Point in the Draw menu e Type point in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Settings Multiple lt Location of point gt A prompt menu displays POINT Point Settings Multiple points Cancel 2 Specify the location of the point The point is created NOTE Ifthe Point Display Size setting is set to 0 zero use the Regen tool to resize the display of the points to 5 of the screen size after zooming in or out Polygons Command POLYGON Polygons are closed polylines comprised of a minimum of three and a maximum of 1 024 equal length sides In BricsCAD you can draw polygons using the following methods e Centre Vertex first define the center point then the vertex radius of the circumscribed circle method e Center Side N first define the center point then the midpoint of a side radius of the inscribed circle method e Edge b4 define the length of the side of the polygon 201 BricsCAD V14 Drawing polygons 1 Do one of the following e Click the Polygon Center Vertex tool button 2 on the Polygons flyout of Draw toolbar e Choose Polygon in the Draw menu e Type polygon in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Polygon Multiple Width of line lt Number of sides gt lt 4 gt A prompt menu opens POLYGON Width of lin
17. Exactly used the specified line spacing regardless of in individual Text styles Command STYLE When you add text to a drawing it uses the current text style which determines the font size angle orientation and other properties of the new text entity Every drawing has a default text style named Standard which initially uses the txt shx font You cannot delete or rename the Standard style but you can modify it If you change the font or orientation of an existing style all existing text entities created using that style are automatically updated to reflect the change Changing any other property has no effect on existing text You can create and use an unlimited number of additional text styles To open the Text Style Explorer dialog Do one of the following e Inthe Tools gt Drawing Explorer menu choose Text Styles e Double click the Sty e field in the Status Bar e Type style in the command bar and press Enter The Drawing Explorer Text Styles dialog opens To create a text style 1 Open the Text Style Explorer dialog 2 Do one of the following e Click the New tool button L4 in the Details section of the Drawing Explorer dialog e Select an existing style then right click and choose New in the context menu A NewStyle text style is created using default properties 3 Type a name in the Text Style Name field replacing the NewSty e default name 4 Define the text style properties 5 Close the
18. Making a parallel copy through a point Do one of the following e Click the Offset tool button l on the Modify toolbar e Choose Offset in the Modify menu e Type offset in the command bar The command bar reads Offset Through point lt Distance gt lt current distance gt Choose Through point in the context menu or type 7 then press Enter The command bar reads Select entity Select the entity The command bar reads Through point Specify the point to create the parallel copy through The parallel copy is created The command bar reads Select entity Do one of the following e Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create more parallel copies e Right click or press Enter to stop Arraying Entities Commands ARRAY and ARRAY The Array command copies a selection set in a rectangular or polar circular pattern Fora rectangular array you must specify the number of rows and columns and also the spacing between subsequent rows and columns To create a polar array you will be prompted to specify the center point of the array the rotation step and the number of items in the array or the angle to fill You can choose to rotate the selection set about the center point or to keep its original orientation Creating a rectangular array 372 Do one of the following e Click the 2D Array tool button a0 on the Modify toolbar e Choose 2D Array in the Modify menu e Type AR or array in the command bar then press Enter User Guid
19. Suppress angle DIMAZIN Suppresses trailing zeros in angular dimensions trailing zeros Alternate Units Settings Description Variable Alt enabled DIMALT Adds alternate units to the dimension text Alt units DIMALTU Sets the unit type for the alternate units Alt precision DIMALTD Sets the precision for the alternate units Alt scale factor DIMALTF Sets the scale factor for the alternate units E g if the primary units are imperial and the alternate units are decimal mm then the alternate units scale factor must be set to 25 4 Alt round DIMALTRND Roundoff rule for the alternate units in linear dimensions E g if set to 0 1 alternate units will be rounded to the nearest 0 1 unit If set to 0 alternate units are not rounded Alt prefix DIMAPOST Text string placed in front of the alternate dimension text Alt suffix DIMAPOST Text string placed after the alternate dimension text Alt suppress DIMALTZ Suppresses the zero that is placed before the decimal separator in alternate units If on a distance of 0 0124 will display as 0124 Alt suppress DIMALTZ Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal values in alternate units If on a distance of 125 00 displays as 125 and 82 50 displays as 82 5 if Dim Precision is 2 Alt suppress zero DIMALTZ Suppresses zero feet values in imperial units feet Alt suppress zero DIMALTZ Suppresses zero inch values in imperial units inches Tolerances Settings Description Variable Tolerance d
20. The command bar reads Tablet configured To calibrate the tablet To calibrate the digitizing tablet you must specify at least two points The more additional points you specify the more accurate the digitizing process Additional points are particularly recommended when digitizing a non orthogonal image such as an aerial photograph 1 Do one of the following e Choose Tablet in the Settings menu then choose Calibrate in the flyout menu Tablet Off Configure e Type tablet in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Tablet ON OFF CALibrate ConFiGure lt On gt a prompt menu displays 508 User Guide TABLET Type cal in the command bar and press Enter or choose Calibrate in the prompt menu The command bar reads Digitize point 1 2 Click a point on the digitizing tablet The command bar reads Enter coordinates for point 1 3 Do one of the following e Click a point in the BricsCAD drawing window e Enter the coordinates x y in the command bar The command bar reads Digitize point 2 4 Repeat step 3 to specify the following calibration point The command bar reads Digitize point 3 or ENTER to end 5 Do one of the following e Repeat step 4 to specify an additional calibration point You can specify up to 10 calibration points e Press Enter to conclude the calibration process The command bar reads if 2 calibration points are specified Tablet calibrated if 3 or
21. Visual 5 tyle 2dWireframe Shade plot As displayed 2 Click the settings field of a property to modify 162 User Guide Properties Name Description gt gt gt Center XYZ coordinates of the center point of the viewport To specify the center of the viewport graphically drag the center handle of the viewport Height Height of the viewport in drawing units To specify the height of the viewport graphically drag the top or bottom handle of the viewport Width Width of the viewport in drawing units To specify the width of the viewport graphically drag the left or right handle of the viewport On Controls the display of the content of the viewport Clipped Allows to create non rectangular viewports Display locked Locks the scaling of the viewport content to preserve the scaling factor Standard scale Lets you choose a standard scaling factor The SCALELISTEDIT command allows to edit the available scales in the current drawing Custom scale Lets you define the scaling factor in a decimal format Displays the current scaling factor UCS per viewport If Yes lets you define a UCS for this viewport Shade Plot Defines how the viewport will be plotted The options are As displayed Legacy wireframe Legacy hidden Rendered 2dWiretrame 3dWireframe 3D Hidden Realistic Conceptual High Quality Modeling You must choose the width and height of a paperspace viewport with respect to the vi
22. e xDelete segment deletes the segment under the cursor op e Stretch segment moves the segment under the cursor G a e Stretch vertex moves the vertex closest to the cursor 399 BricsCAD V14 Starting the polyline vertex editing mode Do one of the following e Click the Edit Polyline tool button LA on the Modify toolbar e Choose Edit Polyline in the Modify menu e Type editpline or pedit in the command window then press Enter The command bar reads Select polyline to edit Select the polyline The command bar reads Edit polyline Edit vertices Close or Open Decurve Fit Join Linetype Mode Reverse Spline Taper Width Undo lt exXit gt A prompt menu displays Choose Edit vertices in the prompt menu or type E and press Enter The command bar reads Next Previous Angle Break Insert Move Regen SElect Straighten Width exit lt Next The Editpline prompt menu changes PEDIT Next vertex Previous vertex Angle Break Insert vertex Move Regen Select Straighten Width A triangle indicates the start point of the polyline The first vertex of the polyline is selected Convert a straight polyline segment into an arc 400 Start the polyline vertex editing mode Select the start vertex of the segment you want to convert Choose Next vertex Previous vertex in the prompt menu to select a vertex The X indicates the currently selected vertex Choose Angle in the prompt menu or type A and pres
23. 2 Type anew name for the palette in the Name field 3 Press Enter to confirm 49 BricsCAD V14 To delete a tool palette 1 Right click tool palette tab and choose Delete Palette in the context menu 2 Click the OK button on the Confirm Palette Deletion box Adding a hatch pattern Select the palette you want to add a hatch pattern to Open the Hatch and Gradient dialog box Select either Predefined or Custom from the Type list button Double click the Swatch field on the Hatch and Gradient dialog box The Hatch Pattern Palette displays 5 Select the hatch pattern you want to add then right click gt wy A Hatch Pattern Palette m Se BONDO1 BONDO IR a ae PL woe i m Fs J 1 irs mar oo al an so CONCRETE amp S_ CONCRETE S_CONCREIE S Z Z 5_CONCRETE S COMCRETE amp CONCRETE 6 Choose Add to Current Tool Palette The hatch pattern is added on the current tool palette 7 option Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add more hatch patterns Adding a block Blocks can be added from the current drawing or from any drawing To add a block from the current drawing 1 Choose Drawing Explorer Blocks in the Tools menu On the Drawing Explorer Blocks dialog box select the block or blocks you want to add 3 Right click and choose Add to Current Tool Palette in the context menu 50 User Guide To add a block from any drawing L If not already available add the containing
24. 3 Specify the rotation point The command bar reads Copy Base angle lt Rotation angle gt A prompt menu displays ROTATE 4 option Choose Copy in the prompt menu or type C then press Enter to create a rotated copy of the selection set 5 Do one of the following e Choose Base angle in the prompt menu e Type B inthe command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Base angle lt 0 gt 6 To specify the base angle do one of the following e Type the base angle in the command bar e Click the rotation point again then click a second point The command bar reads New Angle 7 Do one of the following e Type the new angle in the command bar e Click a point to define the new angle Rotating in 3D 1 Do one of the following e Click the 3D Rotate tool button Tr on the Modify toolbar e Choose 3D Rotate in the Modify menu e Type rotate3d in the command bar The command bar reads Select entities to rotate 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Select axis by Entity Last View Xaxis Yaxis Z axis lt 2 points gt 3 Press Enter to define the rotation axis by specifying two points 4 Specify the first rotation axis point 5 Specify the second rotation axis point The command bar reads Reference lt Rotation Angle gt 6 Specify the rotation angle The selection set is rotated clockwise looking in the rotation axis direction 361 BricsCAD V14 Mirror
25. 4 Choose the External Reference Type e Attachment If the current drawing is attached as an xref to another drawing an attachment becomes a nested xref e Overlay An overlay is ignored when the drawing to which it is attached is then attached as an xref to another drawing 5 Choose whether to specify the Insertion Point on screen or in the X Y Z fields 6 Choose whether to specify the Scale on screen or in the X Y Z fields Check the Uniform Scale option to specify the scale in the X field 7 Choose whether to specify the Rotation angle on screen or in the Angle field 8 Click the OK button to attach the Xref Depending on the options in steps 5 6 and 7 you are prompted to specify the insertion point scale and or rotation angle NOTE he Unit field under Block Unit is set by the INSUNIT Insertion Units system variable in the external reference The Factor field expresses the relation between the value of the INSUNIT system variable in the xref and the parent drawing 442 User Guide Managing Xrefs Command XREF The Xref command opens the External References section of the Drawing Explorer dialog box GX bles cha amp h E Se Reference Name Loaded Size References Type Date Saved Path Found Path 1 ELEVATION EAST 99 0Kb 1 Attach 17 5 2013 9 C Projects Template mel C Projects Barcelona Drawing Elevaton_East dwg 2 o El osik ji fattah 17 5 2013 CAProjecta Starter Templ C Projects Barcelona Dr
26. A prompt menu displays DIVIDE Insert blocks Cancel 3 Choose Insert blocks in the prompt menu or type B and press Enter The command bar reads Name of block to insert 412 User Guide 4 Type the name of the block in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Align blocks with entity lt Y gt A prompt menu displays DIVIDE Yes Align blocks No Do not align Cancel 5 Do one of the following Choose Yes Align blocks in the prompt menu or press Enter to align the blocks with the selected entity Choose No Do not align in the prompt menu or type N and press Enter to place the blocks not rotated The blocks are placed along the selected entity to divide the entity 4h 4A fh Ae Blocks aligned top or not aligned bottom 413 BricsCAD V14 Blocks attributes and external references Blocks attributes and external references provide mechanisms for managing entities in your drawings and for including additional information with the standard drawing entities Blocks Blocks allow you to combine numerous entities into a single entity and reuse it inserting multiple copies A block definition is only saved once in a drawing If a block definition is redefined all instances of the block will be updated automatically Block definitions can be copied between drawings Attributes With attributes you can associate text such as part numbers or prices with blocks and then extract the tex
27. Do one of the following e Select the Context Menus subgroup of the menu group then right click and choose Append context menu in the context menu e Select an existing context menu then right click and choose Insert context menu in the context menu New context menus are added above the selected existing context menu or as the first context menu if you select the Context Menus subgroup 39 BricsCAD V14 3 Select a menu in the menu list of the Add context menu dialog Add Context Menu Use this menu As regular context menu 0 As context menu on specific entities Add Context Remove Menu title 4 option Select As regular context menu then click the Add Context button The Add context alias dialog box displays Choose e CMCOMMAND to replace the default Command context menu e CMDEFAULT to replace the default Default context menu e CMEDT to replace the default Edit context menu e GRIPS to replace the default Grips context menu e SNAP to replace the default Entity Snap context menu Click the OK button to confirm Optionally repeat the previous step to add another alias Select an alias then click the Remove button to remove the alias 40 5 User Guide Edit Menu Aliases Use this menu As regular context menu 0 As context menu on specific entities option Select As context menu on specific entities then click t
28. Hyperlink Ey 3D Visualization Material ByLayer El Pattern Type Predefined ANSI31 Pattern name ANSTS1 Annotative Yes Annotative scale 1 1 Angle 0 0000 Scale 1 El Origin point 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 Spacng 1 Double No Assodatve Yes Island detection Nested Bf Mise 0 O O Elevation 0 0 Area 2483 1 Hatch properties 275 BricsCAD V14 B General Color _ ByLayer E Layer 0 Linetype ByLayer Linetype scale i Plot style ByColor Lineweight ByLayer Ey 3D Visualization Material ByLayer El Pattern Gradient name E Linear Annotative Yes Annotative scale 1 1 E Origin point 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 Y 0 0 Assodatve Yes Island detection Nested Color 1 E RGB 0 0 255 Color 2 _ RGB 255 255 255 Gradient angle 0 0000 Centered Yes isc Elevation 0 0 Area 4415 5 Gradient fill properties 2 Select the property you want to modify in the Properties bar The selected property field is activated 3 Modify the selected property 4 Do one of the following e Repeat steps 2 and 3 to modify another property e Press the Esc key to stop editing the hatch NOTES o If you select multiple hatches you can you edit them simultaneously Properties which are different display as varies in the BricsCAD Properties bar If you edit such property all edited hatches will then share this property e Linetype Linetype scale and Lineweight apply to User Defined pattern types only To edit
29. Material ByLayer El Geometry E Center 3037 46 877 95 0 3037 46 877 95 Radius Diameter Circumference Area El Normal Properties of a circle 2 Click the property you want to modify The settings field of the selected property is activated 3 Type a new value in the settings field of the selected property or choose a setting from the list box then press the Enter key or select another property The entity is updated 4 option repeat steps 2 and 3 to modify another property 5 Press the Escape key to stop NOTES e Properties of which the value displays in grey cannot be modified e Step 3 Properties such as the General properties which are chosen from a list are updated instantly 18 User Guide 1 Select the line 2 Onthe Properties Bar under Geometry do one of the following e Select the X Y or Z field then enter a value e Select either Start point or End point Ej General SEWER Bylayer Linetype scale 2 54 ByColor Bylayer Hyperlink Thickness El 3D Visualization Material El Geometry El Start point ByLayer 2008 47 850 45 0 3008 47 850 43 0 3106 4 752 5 0 3106 4 fo2 o 0 97 95 97 95 0 97 93 97 93 g Length 138 5 315 0 0 qF A y 2 N g g An X indicates the point being edited e Click the Pick Point button B e Specify the point in the drawing a Press the Escape key to stop NOTE This proc
30. PN De aae e e O e WU N Create a Partial CUI file option Add toolbox es in a Menu Group option Add tools in a toolbox option Add main menu s option Add sub menu s option Add context menu s option Add toolbar s option Add flyout s to toolbar s option Add control s to toolbar s option Add keyboard shortcuts option Add existing tools to menus toolbars or shortcuts option Create new tools in menus toolbars or shortcuts option Change the tool order in menus and toolbars 35 BricsCAD V14 To create a Partial CUI file 1 Inthe Customize dialog do one of the following e Inthe File menu choose Create new partial CUI file e Place the cursor on Menu group then right click an choose Create new partial CUI file in the context menu The Create a Customization File dialog opens By default the new partial CUI file will be created in the Support folder of the Roamable root folder 2 option Select a different folder to save the CUI file Type a name for the new CUI file in the File name field 4 Click the Save button The newly created Partial CUI file is loaded and a Menu Group of the same name is created in the Menus tree Too bars tree Keyboards tree and Available Tools tree To add a toolbox in a menu group 1 In the Customize dialog select a menu group 2 Right click and choose Append toolbox in the context menu Customize 2 Sm File M
31. Relative Absolute e Type coords in the command bar then press Enter Type 2 and press Enter e Open the Settings dialog and expand the Display Viewing settings sub category under Drafting in the Drawing settings class Set the Coordinates setting to Coordinates in polar form for point distance and angle selection Length 7 3224 Angle 316 Unit Settings Commands UNITS and UNITS The Units command sets units of linear and angular measurements through the Settings dialog box The Units command sets units of linear and angular measurements in the command bar The INSUNITS system variable defines a drawing units value for automatic scaling when inserting blocks or attaching Xrefs Entering angles The AUNITS system variable defines the angular unit type You can enter angles in any of 5 formats e Decimal degrees 37 456 AUNITS 0 e Degrees Minutes Seconds 37 27 22 or 37d27 22 AUNITS 1 e Gradians 41 6178g AUNITS 2 e Radians 0 6537r AUNITS 3 e Surveyor s Units N52 32 38 E or N52d32 38 E AUNITS 4 Surveyor s units are measured from the North N or the South S to the East E or to the West W 68 User Guide B90 LS a i M m OAA a O y mm th r a T T T The Quad cursor menu The Quad cursor menu aka the Quad is an alternative to grip editing of entities offering a much richer set of editing operations while requiring fewer clicks without cluttering the
32. Specify a point to place the field in the drawing To edit a field 1 Edit the table cell or Mtext entity that contains the field 2 Do one of the following e Double click the field e Right click the field then choose Edit Field in the context menu e Select the field then press Ctrl F The Field dialog box displays 3 Adjust the properties of the field 4 Click the OK button to apply the changes To update a field 1 Do one of the following e Click the Update Field tool button 9 on the Redraw Regen toolbar e Choose Update Fields in the Tools menu e Type updatefield in the command bar The command bar reads Select field s to update 2 Select the field s you want to update then right click or press Enter The selected fields are updated To convert a field to text 3 Edit the table cell or Mtext entity that contains the field 4 Select the field 5 Right click then choose Convert Field to Text in the context menu 326 User Guide Tables Commands TABLE TABLE TABLEDIT TABLEEXPORT TABLEMOD TABLESTYLE A table is an entity that is composed of rows and columns much like a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet A table entity can be created as an empty table or you can import data from a CSV Comma Separated Values file The appearance of the table text and gridlines is controlled with a table style Table styles are saved in the DWG file A default table consists of a Title cell A a row o
33. The Plot Style Table Editor can be opened even if BricsCAD is not open To open the Plot Style Table editor 476 Do one of the following e Click the Edit Plot Style button Ei on the Print dialog e Choose Plot Style Manager in the File menu then double click a CTB or STB file e Ina Windows Explorer window double click a CTB or STB file The Plot Style Table Editor displays the plot styles contained in the specified plot style table The Plot Style Table Editor includes the following tabs e The General tab e The Form View tab e the Lineweights tab User Guide The General tab The General tab lists general information about the plot style table Plot Style Table Editor MyPens ctb General Form View Lineweights Plot style table file name MyPens ctb Description File Information Path C Wsers Louis AppData Roaming BricsysBricscad W 12 en_US PlotStyles MyPens ctb Number of styles 255 Legacy can be used to import old DWGs Scaling E Apply global scale factor to non IS0 linetypes 1 Open Save As Save amp Close Cancel Name Description _ _ gt gt O Plot style table file Displays the name of the plot style table file you are editing name Displays a description you want to include about the plot style table File Info Displays information about path number of plot styles and the version number of the Plot Style T
34. The command bar reads Enter an option Name LOcation Height Target LEns Clipping View lt exit gt Do one of the following e Press Enter to create the camera view using a default name e g Cameral1 e Enter an option e Name Prompts you Enter name for new camera lt Cameral gt Type a name at the command prompt then press Enter e Location Prompts you Specify camera location lt current location gt Click a point or enter new coordinates of the camera location then press Enter e Height Prompts you Specify camera height lt current height gt Enter a new height Z coordinate for the camera location e Target Prompts you Specify target location lt current location gt Click a point or enter new coordinates of the target location then press Enter e Lens Prompts you Specify lens length in mm lt 50 00 gt Enter an new lens length then press Enter e Clipping Prompts you Enable front clipping plane lt Yes gt No Choose Yes to define the front clipping plane Prompts you Specify front clipping plane offset from target plane lt 0 00 gt Type value in the command bare or specify the distance by clicking two points Prompts you Enable back clipping plane Yes lt No gt Choose Yes to define the front clipping plane Prompts you Specify front clipping plane offset from target plane lt 0 00 gt Type value in the command bare or specify the distance by clicking two points e View Prompts you Sw
35. Tool name Command __ Description M faomea pmanenen mension pots dimension points DIMARC Creates arc length dimensions DIMLEADER Creates a leader with or without text nf Quick QLEADER Draws leaders Lets you specify the properties of the Leader leader through a dialog box and reuse them for a series of leaders A Multi leader MLEADER Creates Mleaders multi leaders using a multi leader style Ce DIMCENTER Draws center lines in circles and circular arcs S Diameter DIMDIAMETER Creates diametrical dimensions in circles and circular arcs i DIMRADIUS Creates radial dimensions in circles and circular arcs DIMBASELINE Creates stacked linear dimensions Continue DIMCONTINUE Creates a chain of linear dimensions starting from an existing linear dimension entity E 7 A Q c 0p EELEE EEEE DIMORDINATE Creates ordinate dimensions TOLERANCE Defines the layout of geometric tolerances Make DIMEDIT Oo Makes the extension lines of the selected dimension s Oblique oblique DIMEDIT E Defines the dimension text of the selected dimension s LJ Edit Dimension Text Rotates the dimension text of the selected dimension s Rotate DIMEDIT R Dimension Text Lets you reposition the dimension text Reposition DIMTEDIT Dimension Text Restore Text DIMEDIT Undoes the rotation or repositioning of the dimension Position text of the selected dimension s Apply Style DIMSTYLE Appl
36. Z o LAYON Turns on all layers that have been turned off LAYOFF 6 Turns off layers associated with selected i entities LAYFRZ T Freezes layers associated with selected i entities LAYTHW Thaws all frozen layers Locks layers associated with selected entities LAYLCK LAYULK T Unlocks layers associated with selected entities LAYISO Isolates layers associated with selected entities LAYUNISO 2 Restores layers isolated by the LAYISO command Gs Using the Layer Tools Internet connection needed 125 BricsCAD V14 Redrawing and Regenerating a Drawing Commands REGEN REGENALL REGENAUTO REDRAW and REDRAWALL The Regen command regenerates the current viewport short for regenerate The Regenal command regenerates all viewports short for regenerate all The Regenauto command controls when BricsCAD regenerates the drawing automatically The Redraw command redraws the current viewport to clean it up The Redrawal command redraws all viewports to clean them up As a matter of fact the screen display of a drawing is a simplified version of the drawing database From time to time it is necessary to synchronise the screen display and the drawing database The REGENMODE system variable controls whether BricsCAD regenerates the drawing automatically You can change the status of REGENMODE through the RegenAuto command If REGENMODE is ON BricsCAD regenerates the display automatically but in a few cases a for
37. a 5 I E E E E i E To select a grip move the mouse over it then click Selected grips display in a different color which is defined by the HOTGRIP system variable A selected grip is called a hot grip By default hot grips display in red The midpoint grip on lines and infinite lines the startpoint grip on rays the center grip on circles arcs ellipses and elliptical arcs the grip on points and the insertion point grip of texts mtexts blocks and Xrefs can be used to quickly move such entities Nore When DRAGSNAP is ON dragged entities display at the current entity snap location Selecting multiple grips 1 Select all entities you want to edit 2 Press and hold the Shift key then click the first grip The selected grip displays in red 3 Keep the Shift key pressed then click more grips All selected grips display in red m m S z E ESE a I l a TA Pa E E I l 1 4 r I a r in i l E x a o E E F E i I l l I n E E gt I l i 1 3 rs n I l P fs I aed r F I 8 m E E E G E E 4 Release the Shift key then click the hot grip you want to use as the base point The hot grips move simultaneously 341 BricsCAD V14 Grip Edit Command Options Box Base Prompts you to specify a new base point other than the selected grip Point Copies the selected entities and keeps the originals By default C Copy multiple copies can be create
38. base pointO and an endpoint displacement point to define the relocation of the entities You can also move the entities using a direction vector Some entities can be moved using grips The grip you select depends on the type of entity For example to move a line entity select the midpoint grip To move a curved entity such as an arc circle or ellipse select the center point grip Not all entities can be moved using grips Using the Move command 1 Do one of the following e Click the Move tool button c on the Modify toolbar e Choose Move in the Modify menu e Type move or M in the command bar The command bar reads Select entities to move 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Vector lt Base point gt 3 Specify the base point The selection set is now attached to the cross hairs The command bar reads Displacement point 4 Do one of the following to specify the displacement point 357 BricsCAD V14 e Click the displacement point e Use Direct Distance Entry type the displacement distance then press Enter The distance is measured in the cursor direction Use ORTHO or POLAR TRACKING to constrain the movement of the cross hairs The selection set is moved Moving entities using grips 1 Select the entity 2 Click the grip The selected grip displays in the Se ected Grip Color defined by the GRIPHOT system variable default RED The entity moves with the
39. e Click the Extend tool button 7 on the Extend Stretch flyout of Modify toolbar e Choose Extend in the Modify menu e Type extend or EX in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select boundary entities for extend lt ENTER to select all gt 2 Select the boundary entities then press Enter or right click The command bar reads Fence Crossing Edge mode Projection eRase Undo lt Select entity to extend or shift select to trim gt A prompt menu displays EXTEND Fence Crossing Edge mode Projection Erase Undo Cancel 379 BricsCAD V14 3 Click the entity you want to extend near the end that can make the extension The entity is extended or Press and hold the shift key to trim the entity 4 Repeat step 3 to extend more entities 5 Right click or press Enter to conclude the Extend command NOTES Entities which are selected when you launch the Extend command will be used as boundary entities If you select an entity near the end that cannot make an extension to one of the boundary entities the Extend command is aborted Trimming Entities Command TRIM and EXTEND The Trim command lets you clip or trim entities by cutting entities If the Edge Mode EDGEMODE system variable is On you can trim entities by an implied edge of the cutting entities If the cutting entity is not in the same plane as the entity you want to trim the Projection Mode PROJMODE system variablele define
40. original block If you explode a block that contains attributes the attributes are lost but the original attribute definitions remain To explode a block 1 Do one of the following e Click the Explode tool button T on the Modify toolbar e Choose Explode in the Modify menu e Type explode in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entities to explode 2 Select the block s 3 Press Enter or right click to explode the blocks NOTE Exploding dissociates component entities to their next simplest level of complexity nested blocks or polylines in a block become blocks or polylines again Setting the Explodable property of a block 1 Do one of the following e Choose Drawing Explorer gt Blocks in the Tools menu e Type expblocks in the command bar then press Enter The Drawing Explorer Blocks dialog displays 2 If necessary click the Detail View tool button in the Drawing Explorer Blocks toolbar 3 Click the checkbox in the Explodable field of a block to toggle the property 429 BricsCAD V14 Dynamic Blocks In V11 or higher BricsCAD partly supports dynamic blocks you can insert dynamic blocks from your existing dynamic blocks libraries and edit the custom properties in the Properties Bar The creation of new dynamic blocks is not possible yet Editing dynamic blocks 1 Select the dynamic block in the drawing The properties of the selected block display in the Prope
41. then press Enter The command bar reads Xline Bisect Horizontal Vertical Angle Parallel lt Point along line gt A prompt box displays XLINE Horizontal 2 Specify the start point of the infinite line The infinite line is created A new infinite line through the same start point displays dynamically 3 option Specify the direction of the infinite line The infinite line is created A new infinite line through the same start point displays dynamically 4 option Repeat step 3 to draw a series of infinite lines through the same start point 5 Right click to stop drawing infinite lines 6 option Right click to restart 197 BricsCAD V14 Lines Command LINE A line consists of two points a start point and an endpoint Using the Line command you can draw a series of connected lines but each line is considered a separate line entity Drawing lines 1 Do one of the following e Click the Line tool button i on the Draw toolbar e Choose Line in the Draw menu e Type ine in the command bar then press Enter e Type L in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads ENTER to use last point Follow lt Start of line gt A prompt menu displays LINE Follow Cancel 2 Specify the start point The line displays dynamically 3 Specify the end point The line is drawn and the following line displays dynamically starting in the endpoint of the first line e Using Ortho Mode or Pol
42. 2560 Determines whether layer and or spatial indexes are created and saved The layer index lists all entities in the drawing and what layer they are on The Spatial index stores the location of all the entities in 3D space The indexes are used to load Xrefs if demand loading is enabled If a layer index exists entities on layers which are Off or Frozen are not loaded If a Spatial index exists entities in clipped Xrefs which are outside the clipping boundary are not loaded The demand loading of Xrefs is controlled through the XLOADCTL system variable Creating indexes slows down the saving of a drawing but increases the speed of Xrefs Therefore create indexes only for drawings that will be used as an external reference O No indexes 1 Layer index only 2 Spatial index only 3 Layer index and Spatial index XLOADCTL ISAVEBAK ISAVEPERCENT NFILELIST PROXYGRAPHICS PROXYNOTICE Xref load control Incremental save backup Save percent Recent File List Proxy graphics Proxy notice User Guide Controls demand loading of entities in external references If demand loading is turned on you will experience a performance increase When clipping external references which are saved with a spatial index INDEXCTL 2 or 3 entities in the external reference within the clipped area are loaded only If the clipping area is modified more or less entities are loaded from the reference drawi
43. 9 Render output file Savein Rendering e f E Name Date taken Tags a No items match your search Documents Computer N Favorites ei ti File name 3earbox bmp T Save as type Bitmap File bmp Select an output folder in the Save in field Click the Save as type list button and select an image file type bmp jpeg or png Click the Save button The Render Output File dialog closes Type the desired resolution for the output file in the Width and Height fields 4 Click the OK button to create the file Rendering Materials Command MATERIALS Material definitions are saved in the drawing Each drawing contains the Global material It is not possible to delete or rename the Global material You can edit the properties of the Global material though Materials glossary 514 e Diffuse color the color that the object reveals under pure direct white light It is perceived as the color of the object itself e Ambient color the color of the object in the shadow under ambient light rather then direct light User Guide Color Diffuse i e Highlights highly reflective highlights in the color of the material Metallic Highlights left and Non metallic Highlights right e Shading how the color and brightness of a surface varies with lighting e Texture Mapping adds detail to a surface which is not included in the 3D model itself e Diffuse map adds a structure
44. Another feature of Direct Editing operations is that they can be easily applied with the Quad cursor menu This tool provides a set of operations for the currently selected entities At the same time the Quad provides the other basic solid editing operations such as copy boolean union and subtract Direct modeling operations apply to all ACIS solid geometry whether created in BricsCAD or imported and can be combined with regular solid modeling operations for example SOLIDEDIT 3D Constraints Commands DMCONSTRAINTSBAR DMUPDATE DMFIX3D DMCOINCIDENTSD DMCONCENTRIC3D DMPARALLEL3D DMPERPENDICULAR3D DMTANGENTS3D DMDISTANCE3D DMRADIUS3D DMANGLE3D Variational Direct Modeling BricsCAD offers powerful tools for parametric direct solid modeling using geometric constraints solving aka variational direct modeling Solid models can be modified by defining constraints between its elements edges and faces aS soon as constraint is added BricsCAD automatically modifies the model accordingly and these constraints are kept satisfied upon following modifications of the model The key advantage of variational direct modeling is that all constraints are taken into account simultaneously and the model behavior does not depend on the constraints creation order It allows you to parameterize any feature of the 3D model and to do not care about the model creation history Dimensional constraints allow controlling the dimensions of the model when su
45. ByLayer 3 Z a a a a o a a ee a af of CenterF2 I Solid line 6 Dash dot _ s eee o i Hidden ee IM 8 oie FO CC 2 Click the New tool button L in the Details toolbar The Linetypes dialog opens 3 option Click the File button on the Linetypes dialog to load a different linetype file lin 4 Select a linetype then click the OK button The linetype is added 5 option Click the linetype name to rename the linetype 6 option click the linetype description to edit the description of the linetype NOTE he MEASUREMENT system variable controls the which linetype file will be used to copy a new linetype definition to the drawing Default lin is used if MEASUREMENT is OFF Imperial Iso lin is used if MEASUREMENT is ON Metric The linetype files lin sit in the Support folder of the Roamable root folder 184 User Guide Setting the Entity Linetype Scale 1 On the BricsCAD Properties Bar select Linetype scale Make sure no entity is selected 2 Type anew value in the Linetype scale field Properties Bar No Selection z B B General Z OOOO O Color _ ByLayer Layer 0 Linetype ByLayer Linetype scale 2 54 Lineweight ByLayer NOTE Linetype definitions in a lin file are expressed in drawing units inches in default lin millimeters in iso lin If your drawing units are centimeters set the linetype scale to 0 1 when using linetype definition
46. Cancel 2 option Choose Fillet Settings in the prompt menu or type S and press Enter Specify the Fillet radius in the Settings dialog window 392 User Guide E Chamfer Fillet Chamfer first distance 2 0000 Chamfer second distance 3 0000 Chamfer length 2 5000 Chamfer angle 30 Chamfer mode Distance Distance illet radius Trim mode Trim selected edges to the endpoints of chamfer lines and fillet arcs Close the Settings dialog window The command bar reads Fillet lt current fillet settings gt Settings Polyline Radius Trim Undo Multiple lt Select first entity gt 3 Select the first entity or polyline segment The command window reads Select second entity 4 Select the second entity or polyline segment The fillet is created Filleting all vertices of a polyline 1 Do one of the following e Click the Fillet tool button on the Chamfer Fillet flyout of the Modify toolbar e Choose Fillet in the Modify menu e Type fillet or F in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Fillet lt current fillet settings gt Settings Polyline lt Select first entity gt A prompt menu displays 393 BricsCAD V14 Select all entities Last entity in drawing Inside window Crossing window Outside window Window polygon Crossing polygon Outside polygon Window arde Crossing drde Outside crde Paint Fence Cancel option Adjust the Fillet Settings
47. Choose Drawing Explorer gt Coordinate Systems in the Tools menu The Drawing Explorer Coordinate Systems dialog opens Click the New tool button on the Drawing Explorer dialog The BricsCAD Explorer dialog closes The command bar reads Current Entity Origin View X Y Z ZAxis lt 3point gt A prompt menu displays Press Enter to define the UCS using points The command bar reads New origin lt current origin gt Specify the origin point of the UCS The command bar reads Point of positive X axis lt current point gt Specify a point to define the positive X axis The command window reads Point in X Y plane with positive Y value lt current point gt Specify a point to define the positive Y axis The UCS is defined The BricsCAD Explorer dialog reopens Click in the UCS Name field of the newly defined UCS to replace the lt NewUCS gt default name Close the BricsCAD Explorer dialog Command Options See the EXPUCS and UCS commands To restore the WCS 1 Type UCS in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads 3point Delete Entity Origin Previous Restore Save View X Y Z Zaxis lt Wo rld gt A prompt menu displays Do one of the following e Press Enter to accept the default option e Choose World in the prompt menu e Type W in the command bar and press Enter 117 BricsCAD V14 To restore a UCS NOTE Choose Drawing Explorer gt Coordinate Systems in the Too s menu Th
48. Close the Drawing Explorer dialog 8 option Type oops in the command bar then press Enter to bring back the selected block entities To save a block to a separate file 1 Do one of the following e Click the Save Block tool button Gd on the Tools toolbar e Choose Save Block in the Tools menu e Type wblock in the command bar then press Enter The Write Block to File dialog opens Write Block to File Destination File Name and path C Brics CAD Support new block dwg Insert units Block Source O Block 0 Entire drawing 9 Entities Entities Base Point Select entities Pick paint A No entities selected Retain 0 Convert to block Delete 2 Click the browse button exh next to the Name and path field The Save Block dialog opens 3 On the Save Block dialog select a folder and type a name in the File name field then click the Save button The Save Block dialog closes 4 Insert units set the insertion unit for the block see also To insert a block 5 To select the source entities for the new block do one of the following e Click the Block radio button then select a block from the drop down list e Click the Model space radio button to select all the entities in the model space of the current drawing e Click the Entities radio button then click the Se ect Entities button Tr The Write Block to File dialog temporarily closes to let you select entities in the drawing 417 Br
49. DIOCK asrini eA Aa a E AA A taeanagaees 267 Toinsert a section as a 3D DIOCK eirrroierrerianeia ieira EA A a AE E ETE EEA 267 TOreplace an GXIStinG DIOGK uaria ea aan A A EN 267 TO ExXpOre a SECON LO A NE ape AEE aE TAEAE EEA EEN 268 Pl ACCU neien aaa LOO Defining the MEASUREMENT Setting erorar a e E iw erates OAE EEA 269 DetininGg the MAXAATC A SEttNO eurra AE AE 269 xi BricsCAD V14 Creating Hatches and Gradient Fills cccccceennneseeeccccennnnessesssess LO General procedure to create hatches and gradient fillS cccccseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneenees 270 TOdenne Nate Proper ES wae fanuiterauxesiuavas tadee as name SE aucauaaadas A AA A 271 To define gradient fill PropertieS cccccccsce seen eee eeeseen seen eeeeeseaeeeenaeneeeseeaennennteesieeaanaees 273 To define the boundary for a hatch or gradient fill ccccceeseeeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeugeeetseggenees 274 Editing a hatch or gradient fill ssssnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn DID To edit a hatch or gradient fill in the properties Dar cc eececccces cess cece eee eeeee eee eeeeeeeenaeeeees 275 To edit a Naten ina dialog DOX isaswarccoceaisesiwas etevatadiavndasesemianevessesawmarder ciasnaeeaorsandens es 276 TOedita gradient Alime dialog DOX soiis roe E een eans tim encore eee sane eeaaans 277 DIMENSIONS ecccecciwcecocccwtetacecavecectonveractenvetectenvetectanverectenvetectanveracen ee O Dimensioning CONGCDUS wise ciccducdetinan
50. DOCKS siro a a A A A sue Sale sate ew eu awe ames 412 Blocks attributes and external references ssssccnscecnnccennnsennnsesss 414 BIOCKS wiasacae lana toue rei N ew ae iadaaaial shed E A ATEA TNE A 414 AADU S orite A T A A EA A 414 EXEC idl PeverenCeS rana en E a a A a 414 BIOCKS piaccio pennan aa a an A Creating BIOCKS vriiissieriieniteseieitaer nne a a General procedure to create a DIOCK sassssssssssnsnsnsnsnnnsnsnnnnnnnnsnsnsnsnnnsnsnsnsnnnsnsnnnnnsnnnsnnnnnnnn 415 TO Created DIOCK IMisal Gira WING sean tenia EE E wears need cada nee naman eee anew kaneaatama te 415 To create a block using the Blocks Explorer cc cccccccec cece eee cess eens eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenanaaeeees 416 To save a bIOck to a Separate File 0 0 cece ceceecenceeseueuceeeeucueeeeeueurenseucurenseucurenseugureessuguress 417 Inserting BIOCKS wiaiisss cetcivsereieisectaeiivenviedienschiaeenariieissareeieweeresieiae et LO General procedure CO INSEFt a DIOCK iin anarei a a A a 419 TONS CrE A DIOCK aeiaai rp E ET E a E E E ees 420 To insert a block using the Drawing EXplOrer ssssssessnssrsrsrsnsnrsnrrrnrnnenrnrsrerrnrnrenenerrerenes 421 LASErEINGHIMECEDAl DIOCKS nominen A T E E 421 Inserting DIOCKS from another dr awiNg i ecnin iana A A A E tennant eens 422 To insert a block aligned with an entity nssssssnsnnnsnnsrsnnnsnsnrsnsrrnnnnsnenrrnsnennnnsnenrrnsnenne 423 To insert multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array s s
51. Defau t width e Type the width in pixels in the Width field E Toolbar Control Control Dimension Style Width Default Nore ype Default or O zero in the Width field to restore the default width of the control field To add a keyboard shortcut 1 Inthe Customize dialog click the Keyboard tab If collapsed expand the menu group e g BRICSCAD 3 Do one of the following e Select the menu group then right click and choose Append shortcut in the context menu The new shortcut will be added at the end of the shortcut list e Select an existing shortcut in the toolbar then right click and choose Insert shortcut in the context menu The new shortcut will be added above the selected existing shortcut 44 User Guide Do one of the following e Proceed with the Add an existing tool procedure e Proceed with the Add a new tool procedure In the Properties grid of the new shortcut select the Key field then press the key combination you want to assign to the shortcut ID G Creates an unnamed group of the selected entities Qroup 373 custom_2 To add an existing tool to a menu toolbar or shortcut 1 In the Customize dialog select the item you want to add an existing tool to In the Available Tools pane expand the toolbox that contains the tool you want to add Drag the tool to the target item e Drop the tool on top of the item name to append the tool e Drop the tool on top of another tool to insert
52. Determines whether circles arcs ellipses elliptical arcs and arc segments of polylines display as true curves or as a series of vectors Lineweight Display LWDISPLAY Controls whether lineweights display on the screen Default Lineweight LWDEFAULT Defines the default lineweight Lineweight Units LWUNITS Defines whether lineweights are expressed in millimeters or inches Current Entity CELWEIGHT Sets the lineweight for new entities Lineweight Current Entity CELTSCALE Sets the linetype scaling factor for new entities Linetype Scale Linetype Scale LTSCALE Sets the linetype scaling factor for all entities in the drawing global linetype scale Current Entity CELTYPE Sets the linetype for new entities Linetype Current Layer CLAYER Sets the layer for new entities The current properties display in the Properties Bar and in the Entity Properties toolbar 175 BricsCAD V14 Properties Bar A No Selection T E General O O O Color ByLayer A Layer 0 Linetype ByLayer Linetype scale 2 54 Lineweight ByLayer Properties Bar Entity Properties Z OaM 0 GA ByLayer Byla Entity Properties toolbar Fill Mode Command FILL The Fill command toggles the display of filled and hatched areas Specifies whether multilines traces solids hatches including solid fill and wide polylines are filled in If FILLMODE is OFF all filled entities display and print as outlines Y
53. Enter In the Settings dialog window e Specify the Chamfer length e Set the Chamfer angle e Set the Chamfer mode to Length Angle El Chamfer Fillet Chamfer first distance 0 5000 Chamfer second distance 0 5000 Chamfer length 2 5000 Chamfer angle 30 Chamfer mode Length Angle Fillet radius 0 5000 Trim mode Trim selected edges to the endpoints of chamfer lines and fillet arcs Close the Settings dialog window The command bar reads Chamfer lt current chamfer settings gt Settings Polyline lt Select first entity gt Select the first entity or polyline segment The command window reads Select second entity User Guide 6 Select the second entity or polyline segment The chamfer is created Chamfering all vertices of a polyline 1 Do one of the following e Click the Chamfer tool button C on the Chamfer Fillet flyout of the Modify toolbar e Choose Chamfer in the Modify menu e Type chamfer or CHA in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Chamfer lt current chamfer settings gt Settings Polyline lt Select first entity gt A prompt menu displays CHAMFER Chamfer Settings Select all entities Last entity in drawing Inside window Crossing window Outside window Window polygon Crossing polygon Outside polygon Window arde Crossing drde Outside drde Paint Fence 2 option Adjust the Chamfer Settings 3 Choose Polyline in the prompt menu or t
54. Factor gt L 2 3 Choose Base in the prompt menu of type B and press Enter The command bar reads Base scale lt 1 gt Click point 1 then point 2 to define the base scale The pentagon scales dynamically Click point 3 The edge of the pentagon now equals the side of the square 385 BricsCAD V14 Breaking Entities Command BREAK The Break command remove a portion of an entity thus breaking it into two parts You can break arcs circles ellipses lines polylines rays and infinite lines Breaking a circle converts it to an arc A ray is broken into a ray and a line an infinite line is broken into two rays When breaking entities you must specify two points for the break By default the point you use to select the entity becomes the first break point however you can use the First option to select a break point different from the one that selects the entity To break an entity 1 Do one of the following e Click the Break tool button on the Modify toolbar e Choose Break in the Modify menu e Type break or BR in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entity to break 2 Click the entity you want to break The command bar reads First break point lt Second break point gt A prompt menu displays BREAK First Same as first point Cancel 3 Click a second point on the entity The entity is broken The portion between the two break points is removed Joining Ent
55. Files Bricsys BricsCAD Vx User Profile Manager Background Black ai Background White Default Fresh White screen background color in both Model Space and Paperspace In the User Profile Manager dialog e The Current Profile is marked e Create Creates a new profile using default settings e Set Current Sets the selected profile as the current profile which will be used the next time you start BricsCAD e Copy Click to make a copy of the selected profile e Delete Click to delete the selected profile e Export Click to save the selected profile to a file on your computer disk or network The file is saved with an arg extension e Import Click to open a profile that has been saved to arg file e Start Starts BricsCAD with the selected user profile 59 BricsCAD V14 e OK Closes the User Profile Manager dialog e Double click a profile in the list of the available profiles to start BricsCAD using this profile Creating user profiles To create a new user profile 1 Launch the User Profile Manager 2 Click the Create button on the User Profile Manager dialog window NOTE The Create Profile dialog opens Create profile Profile name Type a name for the new profile in the Profile name field option Type a description for the new profile in the Description field Click the OK button to create the profile The new profile is added in the available profiles list The new
56. If the Pattern Type is Predefined or Custom select a Pattern Name in the Hatch pattern palette then double click the pattern or click the OK Button 271 BricsCAD V14 272 Hatch pattern palette ANCHORLOCK ANSIS1 7 sip j gp UW ANSI32 ti ANSIS5 option If the Pattern Type is Predefined or Custom do one of the following e Type a scale in the Scale settings field e Choose the scale from the drop down list option Do one of the following e Type an angle in the Angle settings field e Choose the angle from the drop down list option If the Pattern Type is User defined specify the Pattern Spacing option If the Pattern Type is User defined select the Cross Hatch option Define the Hatch Origin The options are e Use current origin The origin as defined by the HPORIGIN system variable is reused e Specified origin Click the Pick new origin button Ah then pick a point in the drawing The new origin is stored in the HPORIGIN system variable User Guide To define gradient fill properties 1 Onthe Hatch and Gradient dialog click the Gradient tab Hatch and Gradient Color One color i Two colors Ti olala T Orientaton Centered Angle 0 0000 Boundaries Pick points in boundaries Select boundary entities Remove boundary entities Boundary set Current viewport New Boundary retention C Retain boundaries as Polylines Islands Nest
57. Invisible attribute flag Attributes with the Invisible flag set do not display nor print User Guide If the ATTMODE Attribute Display Mode variable is set to 2 all attributes display including Hidden attributes e option Set the Constant attribute flag Attributes with the Constant flag set cannot be edited e option Set the Verify attribute flag Attributes with the Verify flag set must be explicitly validated when a block containing such attributes is inserted e option Set the Preset attribute flag When inserting a block you are not prompted to define attributes of which the Preset flag is set You can edit attribute afterwards though e option Set the Lock Position attribute flag to lock the position of the attribute within the block reference Unlocked attributes can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing and multiline attributes can be resized e Define the Text properties Text Style Justification Annotative Text height and Rotation Click the OK button to create the attribute in the drawing The Define Attribute dialog closes option Right click to reopen the Define Attribute dialog then repeat steps 2 and 3 to create another attribute Using sheet set properties in a title block w Create the sheet set Define the custom sheet set and sheet properties Open a sheet layout from the sheet set Create the title block source entities in the paper space layout e Create
58. Island option A Nested option Adjust the Boundary tolerance Ignore Boundary tolerance Tolerance 0 0001 Units option Select the Associative option option Select the Create Separate Hatches option In case multiple boundaries are detected or multiple entities are selected in step 9 separate hatches are created instead of a single hatch option Choose a Draw order option None Send to back Bring to front Send behind boundary Bring in front of boundary This option is reset to Send behind boundary when the drawing is closed and reopened option Click the Se ect button Te to select a Boundary set The Hatch and Gradient dialog temporarily closes to let you select entities see also the note below option Click the Specified Origin radio button then click the Pick a new origin button a The Hatch and Gradient dialog temporarily closes to let you specify a new origin Do one or more of the following e Click the Pick Points button CO The Hatch and Gradient dialog closes The command bar reads Select a point to define a boundary or hatch area o Specify a point in each of the areas you want to hatch The command bar reads Select a point to define a boundary or hatch area o Right click or press Enter to stop adding areas The Hatch and Gradient dialog displays again e Click the Select Boundary Entities button 4 The Hatch and Gradient dialog closes The command bar
59. Move and Rotate operations The dynamically presented result of the operation respects existing constraints as well If some faces or edges disappear in a direct modeling or in a Boolean solid editing operation 3D constraints applied to such entities are removed However if there is an exact correspondence between the initial faces and the faces obtained in a result of a Boolean operation 3D constraints are automatically applied to new entities If 3D constraints prevent modification of the model with a particular direct modeling operation e g a Push Pull operation applied to a face with a Fix constraint the status line of the 3D Constraints Bar receives a No Solution status Depending on the value of the DMRECOGNIZE system variable BricsCAD automatically recognizes geometrical relations between surfaces of a solid and preserves them during direct modeling operations see Design Intent Recognition 248 User Guide Design intent recognition P Design Intent recognition Internet connection needed Direct modeling operations allow to change geometry of 3D solid models easily when a single face of a solid is modified with a particular operation other faces are modified accordingly in order to keep design intent of the model and its topological and geometrical validity For example consider a model with a number of holes of the same radius When the radius of a cylindrical face is modified with a push pull operation or by changing the va
60. QPRINT PAGESETUP PUBLISH The Plot command plots drawings to printers and to files through prompts at the command bar this command is meant for scripts and routines The Print command prints drawings to plotters and files through a dialog box The Qprint command prints the drawing with the default plot configuration without displaying the Print dialog box short for quick print The PageSetup command creates and edits page setups for plotting drawings in the Drawing Explorer Sy Printing Internet connection needed A standard print procedure consists of the following steps e Choose either a Layout tab or the Model tab e Do one of the following to open the Print dialog o Choose Print in the File menu o Type print in the command bar then press Enter o Press Ctri P e Select a Page Setup name 1 The following steps are optional and only necessary if you want to use overrides on the selected page setup definition e Choose a Printer or Plotter Configuration 2 e Choose a Plot style table 3 e Choose a Paper Size 4 The image reflects the position and orientation of the drawing on the selected paper size e Choose the Paper Units 5 e Choose the Drawing Orientation 6 e Define the Plot offset 7 e Specify the Area to plot 8 e Define the Plot Scale 9 e Check the Plot Options 10 e When printing model space choose a Shade Plot mode 11 This option is disabled when printing a paper space l
61. Quad or move the pointer 2 To edit a setting select the setting then do one of the following e Type anew value e Click the check box e Choose an option 3 Close the Settings dialog The Quad layout The layout of the Quad cursor menu depends on e The entity type under de cursor e The current Workspace e Geometric events such as intersection or tangency In general the Quad has three appearances last command command history and full e When the cursor hovers over an entity the Quad displays the command most recently used with this entity type 1 Right click to launch the command e Move the cursor to the Quad to display the four most recently used commands with this entity type Click an icon to launch the command e Move the cursor over the blue field below the icons to expand the Quad cursor menu The first command group expands Sheet Metal Custom 2D Editing Dimensions 20 Constraints Click an icon to launch a command Depending on the current value of the QuadExpandGroup user preference either click another command group or move the cursor to another command group 71 BricsCAD V14 Direct Modeling Sheet Metal Custom D Editing Dimensions 2D Constraints e option Click the Close icon Meisa ull of a command group to hide this command group in the Quad for the current workspace Click the OK button on the Confirm dialog box to hide the command group Confirm em
62. Select the entities then right click or press Enter The Array dialog box reopens Choose a Calculate option Angle between Angle to fill or Number of items The settings field of the selected option is dimmed Fill out the Settings fields or press the Pick Points buttons is to define the settings graphically The Array dialog box closes temporarily to let you pick point in the drawing option Check the Rotate items as copied option 375 Oe oF L _ J Entities rotated left or not right about the center point of the array 8 option Define an Entity base point Polar array with base point dot and center point cross Arraying Entities in 3D Command 3DARRAY The 3DArray command creates multiple copies a selection set in three dimensions Entities are arrayed in a three dimensional rectangular rows columns and levels pattern or a two dimensional polar circular pattern The polar pattern is created by copying entities about a specified axis You can choose to rotate the selection set about rotation axis or or to keep its original orientation Creating a 3D rectangular array 1 Do one of the following e Click the 3D Array tool button 2 on the Modify toolbar e Choose 3D Array in the Modify menu e Type 3darray in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entities to array 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Type of array
63. Sheet metal design allows you to model sheet metal parts and generate their unfolded representations with manufacturing information You can create complex sheet metal parts with BricsCAD easily and rapidly because the design process is different from manufacturing process Do not think in terms of a planar Sheet that should be cut and bent but model your part directly as you create solid bodies with Direct Modeling tools Creating a sheet metal part in BricsCAD consists of the following basic steps e Create a base flange from a closed planar profile e Create flanges 233 BricsCAD V14 e Pull its edges to create additional edge flanges with bends e Create partial flanges with automatic creation of the corresponding bend reliefs e Pull several adjacent edges to create several flanges at once with automatic creation of corner reliefs and junctions between them e Make holes by drawing closed profiles on faces of the flanges and pushing them through the flanges e Adjust material thickness and bend radius using pre defined parameters e Apply Direct Modeling operations and 3D constraints to further adjust your design while always maintaining the design intent in terms of sheet metal features e Automatically generate unfolded representation of your part and send it to a CAM system by exporting the corresponding 2D drawing with bend annotations in a dwg or dxf file Sheet Metal Features Form features are smart regions gr
64. Start angle or End angle field then press Enter Press the Esc key to stop editing the ellipse Elliptical Arcs Command ELLIPSE A An elliptical arc is a portion of an ellipse The default method for drawing an elliptical arc is to specify the endpoints of one axis of the ellipse and then specify a distance representing half the length of the second axis Then you specify the start and end angles for the arc measured from the center of the ellipse in relation to its major axis Other methods to draw elliptical arcs can be found in the Ellipse submenu of the Draw menu and in the Elliptical Arcs toolbar General procedure to draw an elliptical arc 194 Do one of the following e Click the Elliptical Arc tool button on the Draw toolbar e Launch the Ellipse command using the Arc option The command bar reads Center lt First end of ellipse axis gt A prompt menu displays ELLIPSE Specify the first end or the ellipse axis The command bar reads Second end of axis Specify the second end of the ellipse axis The command bar reads Rotation lt Other axis gt A prompt menu displays ELLIPSE Rotation Cancel Specify the length of half the other axis of the ellipse The command bar reads Parameter lt Start angle of arc gt The prompt menu changes ELLIPSE Parameter Cancel Specify the start angle of the elliptical arc The elliptical arc is drawn dynamically when you move the crosshairs Th
65. Text Style Explorer dialog 306 User Guide To edit a text style 1 Open the text style explorer dialog 2 Select the text style Define the text style properties 4 Close the Text Style Explorer dialog as To make a text style current 1 Open the text style explorer dialog 2 Do one of the following e When in Detail view click the blank tile in front of the text style name A blue filled circle indicates the text style is set current e When in Detail view or Icon view 222 right click then choose Set current in the context menu NOTE Alternatively you can right click the Text style field in the Status Bar then choose the new current style The current style is marked in the style list When you use the Sty e option in the create text procedures the selected style will become the current text style To delete a text style 1 Open the text style explorer dialog 2 Select the text style 3 Do one of the following e Click the Delete tool button 2 in the Details section of the Drawing Explorer dialog e Right click then choose Delete in the context menu If the text style is not used in the drawing or in a dimension style the text style is deleted else an alert box displays Delete Main Titles Sl You are about to delete text style MAIN TITLES If you want to keep the entities currently using this text style you can assign another text style to these entities Delete t
66. The Rtzoom command zooms the drawing in real time You can change the magnification of your drawing at any time by zooming The cursor it ae changes to a magnifying glass A when a Zoom tool is active Zoom out to reduce the magnification so you can see more of the drawing or zoom in to increase the magnification so you can see a portion of the drawing in greater detail Changing the magnification of the drawing affects only the way the drawing is displayed it has no effect on the dimensions of the entities in your drawing See also View manipulation using the mouse Using the zoom command 1 Do one of the following e Choose zoom in the View menu e Type zoom in the command bar e Type Z in the command bar The command bar reads In Out All Center Dynamic Extents Left Previous Right Window lt Scale nX nXP gt A prompt menu opens ZOOM 2 Do one of the following e Type the zoom factor followed by X E g type 2x to magnify the display 2 times typing 0 5x changes the display to half its original size e In paper space viewports type the zoom factor followed by XP to define the zoom factor relative to the viewport thus defining the scale of the viewport content e Pick two corners of a box on the existing view in order to enlarge that area to fill the display 128 User Guide Real time zooming i Do one of the following e Click the Real Time Zoom tool button 2 in the View toolbar e Type rtzoo
67. This will hide group 2D Constraints from the quad in the current workspace If you want to show it again later on you can always do so in the Customize dialog under the Workspace tab Don t show this again See To edit the workspace command groups to switch closed command groups on Customizing the Quad The number of available command groups in the Quad is defined through the current workspace Only the content of the Custom command group can be modified The content of the other command groups is hard coded and cannot be modified To edit the workspace command groups 1 a 72 Move the cursor over a toolbar then right click and choose Customize in the context menu Click the Workspace tab on the Customize dialog box Expand the workspace you want to edit Expand the Quad Group Order list Command groups that are currently switched off display in grey User Guide Customize a T sopre R H Quad Group Order O On Switch m E O j Quad Group Order 5 To edit visibility state of a command group right click a command group then choose Switch On or Switch Off in the context menu 73 BricsCAD V14 To edit the Custom command group 1 Move the cursor over a toolbar then right click and choose Customize in the context menu 2 Click the Quad tab on the Customize dialog box 3 Expand the Custom command group Customize File Available tools El BRICSCAD H O File
68. To add a main menu 4 5 6 NOTE In the Customize dialog click the Menus tab Do one of the following e Click the Main Menus subgroup of the menu group then right click and choose Append main menu in the context menu e Select an existing menu in the Main Menus subgroup then right click and choose Insert main menu in the context menu New menus are added above the selected existing menu or as the first menu if you select the Main Menus subgroup Type a name in the Title field of the Add main menu dialog Add main menu Title My Drawing Tools Click the OK button option Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add more menus Click the Apply button to save the definition s The new main menu is not added to the Menu bar until at least one menu items is added to it To add a submenu to a menu oF In the Customize dialog click the Menus tab If collapsed expand the menu group e g BRICSCAD If collapsed expand the Main menus group of the menu group Do one of the following e Select the menu then right click and choose Append submenu in the context menu e Select an existing item in the menu then right click and choose Insert submenu in the context menu New submenus are added above the selected existing item or as the first item if you select the menu Type a name in the Title field of the Add submenu dialog Click the OK button To add a context menu In the Customize dialog click the Menus tab
69. Type s Click the OK button to create the new item group option Add a command to an item group Select a tool in the right hand pane of the Customize dialog box then drag the tool to the item group Customize File 7 Click the OK button on the Customize dialog to save the changes User Guide 2D Constraints Parametric constraints are used to maintain relationships and control dimensions of 2D geometry There are two types of constraints Geometrical constraints control relationships between entities Dimensional constraints are used to control the dimensions of an entity such as length angle radius or diameter In the example below The width and opening angle are controlled by dimensional constraints a e Coincident geometrical constraints 6 are applied to the endpoints of the arc and the polyline and to the center point of the arc and the polyline vertex The polyline segments have an equal geometrical constraint One segment of the polyline has a horizontal geometrical constraint e The polyline vertex has a fix A geometrical constraint Parametric constraints allow to e Maintain geometric design intent e Make multiple versions of a design by applying different values to dimensional constrains Two versions of the same fully constrained drawing representing a roundabout 77 Br icSCAD V14 NOTE Itis recommended to first apply geometric constraints then dimen
70. Xrefs In the Insert Block dialog e The Unit field under Block Unit is set by the INSUNITS Insertion Units system variable in the source drawing or the Block Unit property of a block definition see To create a block in a drawing e The Factor field expresses the relation between the value of the INSUNITS variable in the source drawing and the target drawing E g if INSUNITS is Millimeters in the source and the target the value of the Factor field is 0 1 e If INSUNITS in the source drawing is Unspecified INSUNITSDEFSOURCE is used instead e If INSUNITS in the target drawing is Unspecified INSUNITSDEFTARGET is used instead The values of INSUNITSDEFSOURCE and INSUNITSDEFTARGET are saved in the registry and therefore apply to all drawings in which INSUNITS is unspecified unitless 419 BricsCAD V14 To insert a block 1 Do one of the following e Click the Insert Block tool button 5h on the Insert toolbar e Choose Insert Block in the Insert menu e Type insert in the command bar then press Enter The Inserts dialog opens Insert Block Name O01 Enttes Path C Bricscad Training Bricscad TrainingCD Exerdses 01_ Entities dwg Insertion Point Scale Specify On screen Specify On screen Specify On screen x x 1 0000 Angle 0 Y 10000 Block Unit ean Unit Centimeters Uniform Scale Factor 2 Inthe Inserts dialog do one of the following e Select an existing block definition in t
71. and hold the Shift key to remove entities from the selection set OFF You cannot add entities to a selection set The newly selected entity or entities replace the existing selection set However if you press and hold the Shift key you can add entities If you select an entity that was already selected while pressing the Shift key this entity is removed from the selection set Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt ON The Window Inside and Crossing Window options of the Se ect command are chosen by default This method is referred to as Automatic Windowing OFF You need to explicitly specify a selection method Defines the size of the small square at the end of the selection cursor If you select an entity by clicking the Pick Box must touch or overlap the entity The default size of the Pick Box is 3 Controls the method of drawing a selection window ON Allows to define a selection window by dragging press and hold the left mouse button to define the first corner of the rectangle then move the mouse to define the size of the selection window and release the mouse button to define the opposite corner OFF Define the selection window by clicking two opposite corners Controls whether you select objects before or after you issue a modification command ON Allows to first compose a selection set then launch a modification command OFF You must first start the command then com
72. angle displays in bold 135 BricsCAD V14 The view is updated as you click 4 To set the Horizontal view angle do one of the following NOTE e Select a 45 mode angle in the inner area then click to confirm your choice An arrow indicates the selected horizontal view direction The perspective of the arrow reflects the vertical view direction e Ifin 15 or 5 mode in select a view direction in the outer area then click to confirm your choice The selected angle displays in bold The view is updated as you click Use the Isometric Views toolbar for standard view rotations top front back left right and isometric views Restoring Plan View Ls NOTES 136 Do one of the following e Click the Plan View tool button fe on the View toolbar e Choose Plan View in the View menu e Type plan in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Plan view of UCS World lt current UCS gt A prompt menu opens Press Enter to restore the plan view with respect to the current coordinate system e If the WCS is the current coordinate system the Current and World options have the same result e If the UCSFOLLOW variable is set to ON the plan view is generated whenever the UCS changes Layer States Command LAYERSTATE User Guide IB rhe Layer State Manager Internet connection needed Layer states let you save and restore configurations of layer properties and states You might wan
73. antenna a E A A a 138 Toeditalavyer State Aarra n E E A AEE A EAN A TE A 139 TO restore a loyer Stale nrin a E AA TOE E 139 To copy layer states to another drawing s sssssssssssessrsnsrssenrsnsresnnnsnenrsnenennnnrnenrrnenene 139 TOexport a IAVEI State nriran a e ar a a a a 140 TOMPO layer Stal E a n A N O A nam eeaseaaa 140 Na amed VICWS siicisesceinacierniararcendanessnniacendccdseieendstaisanssenianoraiedanedse AL EXDIONN GP VIEWS mirain sr ana A T O NAE A TEE e AERA AETA 141 Saving a VIEW ssiru oa a e a e ar a a a a aaa N aR 141 RESCOMMG cae VIGW 4 oe ana a a a a r A D 142 Defining the view D ck round irira oeii nae E tin ake tad 00a Gane AAAA 143 TOsedit the VIEW DACKGFOUNGsdiinaresteeessvusdanagee eceneaudas eaten raaiwaees capevaatan rE Arra 145 WOPrKSDAGES dirrirr rsrsrsr EINEN AnNa Lae ManagiNg WORKSDACCS arene EE E EE O E i 145 Setting the curent WORKSD ACE nra a a A TA 146 Creating a WOrkS pace isussuccatensstevcadaantesense ressavhernedes tanta r aa ee aaa 147 EGIUING A WORKS DaGentaiactatstoti ara arses T AAAA mua uaa ones el auaatae ee caaamieae ornate 147 Delet a WORKS DAC C anren TE A E A AEA A 148 vii BricsCAD V14 DeETING a VIC Wor isdiseie iediauieiedeiviniedeivinieduivinveduiviniedeiviniedeivinieeuivinieds LO DehPING a Camera VEW ais se sacendas caate adap ete chia wae tun tans naeeisiadtnn tae E ees 150 To toggle the perspective property Of VIEW ccccececceeceucuceeecucucenseucuvenseucurenseuuurenseug
74. attributes 2 Create a block You can attach attributes to a block Include the attributes when the program prompts you to select the entities to be included in the block definition If a block contains attributes the program prompts you each time you insert the block so you can specify different values for the attributes each time you insert it into a new drawing 3 Insert the block in a drawing 4 option Edit the attributes in a block 5 Extract attribute information Ss Working with Attributes Internet connection needed Defining Attributes Command ATTDEF and ATTDEF The Attdef command defines how a block s attributes will be created through a dialog box The Attdef command creates block s attribute definitions at the command prompt General procedure to define attributes specify the characteristics of the attribute including its name prompt and default value specify the location define the text formatting optionally set the attribute flags hidden fixed validate or predefined To define an attribute 1 Do one of the following e Click the Define Attributes tool button amp on the Tools toolbar e Choose Define Attributes in the Tools menu e Type attdef in the command bar then press Enter The Define Attribute dialog opens 431 BricsCAD V14 432 Define Attnibute Attribute Flags Invisible Constant verify Preset Lock position Text Multiple lines Tex
75. cell type To apply a style to a table See To edit a table using the Properties bar To delete a table style 1 Open the Drawing Explorer Table Styles dialog displays 2 Select the table style you want to delete Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple table styles 3 Do one of the following e Right click then choose Delete in the context menu e Click the Delete button in the Details menu on the Drawing Explorer Table Styles dialog NOTE _ It is not possible to delete a table style that is being used in the drawing 337 BricsCAD V14 Modifying Commands Overview All entity modification tools can be found either on the Modify toolbar or in the Modify menu MOVE Moves entities to another location in the same drawing or into another drawing COPY Draws a duplicate or multiple duplicates of the selected entities OFFSET Creates a parallel or offset copy of curves and lines Tool name Move Opy Offset Changes the scale of existing entities either enlarging them or reducing them proportionately in x y and z Scale SCALE directions ROTATE Rotates entities around a specified point ROTATE3D Rotates entities around a three dimensional axis MIRROR oo or copies the reflected image of entities about a ine MIRROR3D o or copies the reflected image of entities about a plane ARRAY Creates multiple copies of entities in one of two symmetrical patterns rectangular rows and columns or
76. conga aGeuiah ie seaacat aan E E anbadaGanae gasaareuaeeeseaeried teed 520 Spotlight hotspot and falloff DrOPertieS ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteegeeetteegentetegs 520 PROLOMELIIG PFODErUES saori Gsairtedanlss E N ane a see ew aulen aise cam niniaeaw ese tuaaan 521 GeOMEEFY DIOP CFCS cas ensccccaata a A ce eaneeaan sea vated cubs awa sac ta aaa tat aaaaeae os 521 Attenuation Properti ES inann a aa E sian termes iia de tanta Gereumereuseeanant 521 To open the light list in the Drawing Explorer ssssssssssrensssssnrsnssrsnnnsnenrrnsnennnnerenrrnrnene 522 TOdenNe a HoE uaea a A T A a 524 TO edita Hdnteinaa dana eens euwtal a gta na 525 Todefine the S n Properties visciweidsoesantveiwanas n teem a a A A a a 526 TOdeine the gGeograpnic locat ON E a E ea 526 The BricsCAD Application Window The layout of the BricsCAD application window can be fully customized You can e open close the command window e open close the status bar e customize the status bar e modify drawing settings in the status bar e display hide scroll bars BricsCAD Platinum beta NOT FOR RESALE License l o e es Edit View jnsert Settings Toots Draw Model Dimension Modify Parametric Mechanical Sheet Metal Window Help SRA GGl d DOAA X a Al ie Ge Oo al SPPAD Eenmaa ABa gS E E crSer BB EBEA Bylayer Bylayer v K A POL47H0 K YA x ae Bock Reference z f
77. contain elements such as the block name the x y and z coordinates of its insertion point the layer on which it is inserted etc You can include any of these fields The template file must include at least one attribute name Each line in the template file must start with the field name Block name and insertion point values must begin with BL The next nonblank character must be either a C indicating a character string field or an N indicating a numeric field This character is then followed by three digits indicating the width of the field in characters The final three digits indicate the number of decimal places for numeric fields In the case of character fields the last three digits must be zeros 000 A typical template file is similar to the one shown here B TYPE MANUFACTURER ID COST Field name Field format Block name must be preceded by BL Coordinate fields must be preceded by BL Attribute tags Indicates the field data type C for character fields N for numeric fields Field width number of characters Number of decimal places for numeric fields OOO for character fields Oun AeA WNeH DW D gt 439 BricsCAD V14 To extract attribute information 1 Do one of the following e Click the Extract Attributes tool button on the Tools toolbar e Choose Extract Attributes in the too s menu e Type attext in the command bar then press Enter The Extract Attributes dialog open
78. cross hairs r a oe e k 7 E ar E i C a C E E i 1 Li i E E Mubtitine text Wuhan teki 3 Click to relocate the entity NOTE The following entities can be moved using grips lines infinite lines and rays circles and circular arcs ellipses and elliptical arcs 3D solids text and multi line text blocks 358 User Guide Moving entities between drawings Entities can be moved between drawings in one of three ways Use CUTCLIP to cut the entities from the source drawing then either PASTECLIP PASTEORIG or PASTEBLOCK to paste the entities into the target drawing NOTE Use Ctrl Tab press and hold the Ctrl key then press the Tab key to cycle between open drawings Using Cut and Paste to move entities between drawings 1 In the source drawing select the entities you want to move 2 Do one of the following e Right click then choose Cut in the context menu e Choose Cut in the Edit menu e Press Ctrl X press and hold the Ctrl key then press X The entities are deleted in the source drawing and copied to the Clipboard 3 Switch to the target drawing 4 Do one of the following e Right click then choose Paste in the context menu e Choose Paste in the Edit menu e Press Ctri V press and hold the Ctrl key then press V The bottom left corner of the bounding rectangle of the selection is attached to the cross hairs in the target drawing 5 Do one of the following e Specif
79. cycle through the Grips Editing commands until Scale is active The GRIP_SCALE prompt box displays GRIP_SCALE Reference exit Cancel The command bar reads Enter scale factor Base point Copy Undo exit Type the scale factor in the command bar then press Enter to scale the selection 345 BricsCAD V14 Selecting Entities Before you can modify one or more entities they must be selected Quick Select allows to select entities using different criteria such as such as entity type color line type or any other entity property A number of system variables control the selection methods Selection and grip settings When you select entities in a drawing the selection method and the display of selected entities e g whether grips display or not is controlled by a number of settings Selection settings Selection settings sit in the Se ection settings group of the Program Options settings category in the Settings dialog Settings ERIB E m amp 4 E Selection Add selected entities to current selection set Pick automatic Pick box Pick drag Pick first El Pick style 1 2 Draw selection window automatically at the Select Entities prompt 5 0 Draw selection window using two points i First select entities then issue a command Ox0001 1 Group selection Associative hatch selection Not yet supported Match options for SELECTSIMILAR 0 0001 1 E Selection area Selection area Show s
80. defined 436 User Guide Editing attributes attached to blocks Command EATTEDIT The Eattedit command edits the attributes in blocks You are prompted to select a block with editable attributes When you select such block the Attribute Editor dialog displays If the selected block does not contain attributes or if the selected entity is not a block you are prompted to select another block Using the Attribute Editor 1 Do one of the following e Click the Edit Block Attributes tool button DP on the Attributes toolbar e Choose Edit Block Attributes in the Tools Attributes menu e Type eattedit in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select a block or Double click a block containing attributes then go to step 3 2 Select a block with attributes The Attribute Editor dialog opens Attribute Editor Block Desklabel Tag Prompt Value Type Desk type President Manufacturer Produced by Bulo ID Model Number XQ 248 25 7190 Cost Price F29E Value President O aaaaaa Select block Text Options Layer Type Color C ByLayer Lineweight ByLayer kd Linetype By Layer Plat style ByLayer 3 Select an attribute in the list The current value of the selected attribute displays in the Value field 4 option Type a new value in the Value field 5 option Click the Properties tab to modify Layer
81. defined on your system comma or semicolon Logarithm base Exponent base e Exponent base 10 Power function Random decimal 0 1 85 BricsCAD V14 Using Geometric Constraints A geometric constraint is a non numerical relationship between the parts of a geometric figure Geometric constraints e associate geometric entities together two by two coincident concentric collinear parallel perpendicular tangent smooth symmetric equal e specify a fixed angle horizontal vertical e specify a fixed location fix When a geometric constrained is applied to an entity e the position of the entity is adjusted according to the applied constraint e an icon displays next to the entity to indicate the applied constraint If multiple geometric constraints are applied the icons are joined to a constraint bar e If the SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable is set to 1 or 3 a blue icon displays next to the cursor when you move the cursor over entities that have constraints applied to them 40 In the image below the endpoints of the three lines and the arc are joined by coincident constraints The midpoint of the circle and the arc are made concentric Two lines are forced to be tangent to the arc One line has a vertical constraint parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system one line has a horizontal constraint parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system 86 User Guide
82. e 8 If checked press and hold the Shift key to acquire entity tracking points e Track path Controls the display of the polar and entity snap tracking paths Display full screen object snap tracking path Display object snap tracking path only between the alignment point and the From point to the cursor location Do not display polar tracking path Do not display polar or object snap tracking paths Using Polar Tracking to draw a line option Check the Polar Tracking settings option If not already on click the POLAR field in the Status Bar Launch the Draw Line tool Specify the start point of the line Polar tracking lines display at the specified intervals and additional angles oe Ys If the cursor is on or next to a tracking line e The current distance and angle from the start point display next to the cursor when e Across marker X indicates the current point 5 Do one of the following to define the endpoint of the line When the appropriate tracking line displays e Click when the cursor is at the desired position e Type the length of the line in the command bar and press Enter NOTE Turning on Polar Tracking automatically disables Orthogonal Mode Using Snap Track Lock Holding down the Shift key pressed while a snap track marker line is displayed will keep this Snap tracker locked any Snap point that is picked will be projected perpendicularly onto the tracking line A locked tracking line changes to
83. entity Repeat step 3 to trim more entities Right click to conclude the Trim command Entities which are selected when you launch the Trim command will be used as cutting entities Changing the length of an entity Command LENGTHEN The Lengthen command lets you change the length of lines open polylines and arcs You can also modify the included angle of arcs Change the length of an entity dynamically if 2 Do one of the following e Click the Lengthen tool button 7 on the Modify toolbar e Choose Lengthen in the Modify menu e Type lengthen in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Edit length DYnamic Increment Percent Total lt Select entity to list length gt A prompt menu displays LENGTHEN option Click an entity The current length of the selected entity displays in the command bar In case an arc is selected the current length and the included angle display in the command bar 381 BricsCAD V14 Do one of the following e Choose Dynamic in the prompt box e Type DY in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Mode lt Select entity to change gt Click the entity near the end you want to change The length of the entity changes dynamically Click to define the new length Modify the included angle of an arc 382 Do one of the following e Click the Edit Length tool button 7 on the Modify toolbar e Choose Edit Length in the Modify m
84. expblocks in the command bar The Blocks Explorer display options You can choose between Detail View list and Icon View thumbnails to see the blocks in the current drawing 427 BricsCAD V14 Open the Detail View of the Blocks Explorer Click the Detail View button 5 in the Drawing Explorer toolbar The Detail View button is now pressed indicating the block details are displayed A preview of the selected block displays in the Preview sub window of the Drawing Explorer Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Open Drawings ba x th amp a of gt eee oF C BricsCAD Training Bricscad Trair Block Name Annotative Match Explodable References Insertion point bc Layers 62773 48 74972 94 0 o0 oe Layer States ae Linetypes a Multiline Styles ar Multleader Styles crane 10000 p crane23000_p crane 29000 _p BIBIE 1 2 1 1 Varies 166775 48 897 72 94 0 00 rane 7000p ei 23773 48 90722940 00 OOO DB_11 00 087_ARR_Mi lt 1 61273 49 80222 96 0 00 3 Ag Text Styles imensi 1 151973 48 89972 94 0 0C 1 0 00 0 00 0 00 dr_arrangement02_p BIBIE dr_battomvalve_key_p sg Visual Styles nh Lights E Materials z RenderPresets Blocks al External References Images POF Underlays zo Dependencies Fage Setups Section Planes Open the Icon View of the Blocks Explorer Click the Icon View butto
85. files of the same name Images in folder 1 have a size of 256 x 256 pixels folder 2 contains images of 512 x 512 pixels images in folder 3 have a size of 1024 x 1024 pixels If the Diffuse map setting of a material uses the image name only not path you can control the quality of a rendered image by setting the TextureMapPath user preference to folder 1 2 or 3 Tile mode light synch Controls the synchronization of lighting in all model space viewports Internal use only 511 BricsCAD V14 Rendering tools Name tp Render Photorealistic rendering using materials and lights je ter hide Hidden line view If the previous shademode option was 2Dwireframe wireframe representation is restored if you zoom or pan If the previous shademode option was other than 2Dwireframe the hidden line representation is kept until a different shade mode is chosen p Shade _ Shades the entities between the polygon faces Curved lisa are segmented 2D Shademode 2 Wireframe representation Wireframe Shademode 3 Wireframe representation creme E Hidden shademode H Hidden line view ig am Flat shademode F Shades the entities between the polygon faces Curved surfaces are segmented Gouraud shademode G Shades the entities between the polygon faces Curved surfaces are smoother and more realistic G Flat shademode L Combines flat shading and wireframe lines and curves Edges IOA Gouraud shademode O Combines go
86. fr moderne dic jnl _NL dic To add a new custom dictionary 1 Open a text editor such as Notepad 2 option Type the words you want to use in your custom dictionary Each word must be on a separate line 3 Save the file to the the Support folder of the Roamable root folder Make sure the file extension is cus 322 User Guide Working with Fields Commands FIELD UPDATEFIELD MTEXT and TABLE A field is a variable text that When a field is updated it displays the latest value of the data source it refers to Fields can be used to insert drawing properties custom properties or object properties in multiline texts or tables or as an attribute in a block Fields in attributes are especially useful in title blocks using drawing sheet set subset and sheet properties title blocks can be filled out automatically See the DWGPROPS command to learn more about default and custom drawing properties See the SHEETSET command to learn more about default and custom sheet set subset and sheet properties If no value is available a field displays hyphens If the FIELDDISPLAY system variable is ON fields display on a light gray background which does not print The FIELDEVAL system variable controls when fields are updated E Field update mode Ox001F 31 Wi 1 Updated on open 2 Updated on sawe Updated on plot 8 Updated on use of ETRANSMIT 16 Updated on regeneration Held update mode Defin
87. image below SS The piston is correctly positioned inside the cylinder and connected to the crankshaft by the connecting rod We will now fix the distance between the cylindrical face of the crankshaft and the lower face of the cylinder by applying a dimensional constraint 1 Click the Distance tool button A on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select a pair of subentities 2 Select the cylindrical face of the crankshaft 1 and the lower planar face of the cylinder 2 as indicated in the image below The command bar reads Enter distance value lt 133 622 gt A dynamic distance entry field displays 229 BricsCAD V14 3 Type 110 in the dynamic entry field The lower face of the cylinder is now fixed at a distance of 110 from the cylindrical face of the crankshaft We will fix the cylinder at its current position 4 Click the Fix tool button on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select an edge face or 3D solid 5 Move the cursor over the cylinder then hit the TAB key until the body of the cylinder highlights as a whole see image below In step 4 1 we have applied a fixation constraint to the body of the crankshaft which removes all degrees of freedom from the crankshaft To make it possible to rotate the crankshaft around its axis it is necessary to remove this constraint and replace it by two fixation constraints one to the cylindrical face of the cranks
88. in comparison with a real world engine model of a piston engine BricsCAD Platinum Piston Engine dwg FASTI E Library Ta ta A z JNROOINVS S E Piston Engine B E Constraints o Coincident_5 Concentric_6 Concentric_10 p Coincident_14 Concentric_15 A Fix_11 Fix_10 A Distance_10 i Fix_13 shaft 1 crank 1 cylinder 1 axis 1 piston 1 Name Pro X O e e Visible Visual style shaft 1 Component name shaft Description Yes SCAD Piston IV 3 10 15 16 22 6 3 4 0 Standard Standard 3D Modeling SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR ESNAP STRACK LWT TILE TABLET DUCS DYN QUAD w Component insert By Viewport gt l File Edit View Insert Settings Tools Draw Model Dimension Modify Parametric Mechanical Sheet Metal Window Help GRABS 4 OHRAAYR X ee HPORBHlO B PPAA COCLOB OGIAAMER a Defaut A L v G TA O ByLayer v ByLayer v Select axial entity or define axis by 2Points Xaxis Yaxis zaxis lt 2Points gt Y Pick start point in the rotation plane Step 1 Preparing for the exercise 1 2 You need a BricsCAD Platinum license for this tutorial Make sure the Mechanical and 3D Constraints toolbars are open Mechanical A 5 X o Pr ID AlB CGE 4 e 0 s gt eelit User Guide 219 BricsCAD V14 3D Constraints H S 0U0bLHG AG4 To open a toolbar move t
89. information from a drawing General information about the drawing Information about the entities in the drawing General drawing information Commands DWGPROPS SETVAR STATUS TIME The Dwgprops command opens the Drawing Properties dialog box showing the general information and user defined properties stored with a drawing The Setvar command displays or changes the values of system variables short for set variables The Status command reports the status of the drawing drawing name the status of the most important system variables and the total number of entities in the drawing The Time command reports on time in the drawing current time creation time last update total editing time and user elapsed time Information about entities Commands STATUS AREA MASSPROP ID LIST The Status command reports the total number of entities in the drawing Using Quick Select you can see the number of entities for each category The Area command finds the area and perimeter or length of 2D entities The Massprop command reports the area perimeter and other mathematical properties of 3D solids and 2D regions short for mass properties The JID command reports the x y z coordinates of picked points The List command lists the properties of selected entities 489 BricsCAD V14 Creating a drawing Commands NEW NEWWIZ and QNEW In BricsCAD you can create new drawings Using a default template drawing Starting from sc
90. is active e Enable a one time entity snap for a single selection by choosing an entity snap when another command is active You can also use a one time entity snap to override a running entity snap When using entity snaps the program recognizes only visible entities or visible portions of entities You cannot snap to entities on layers that have been turned off or to the blank portions of dashed lines If the APBOX system variable is on the entity Snap Aperture Box is added to the crosshairs when one or more entity snaps are active When you move the cross hairs the program snaps to the snap point closest to the center of the Snap Aperture Box The Snap Marker indicates the current snap point The DRAGSNAP system variable controls the snap behavior while dragging providing an increased WYSIWIG experience DRAGSNAP controls whether rubberband dynamics are displayed at the current cursor location or at the current entity snap location DRAGSNAP applies to all modify commands that display dynamics such as COPY PASTECLIP PASTEBLOCK MOVE ROTATE MIRROR SCALE and STRETCH e DRAGSNAP 0 Default dragged entities display at the cursor location e DRAGSNAP 1 dragged entities display at the current entity snap location Hatch pattern snap snapping to hatch pattern geometry is controlled by the OSOPTIONS system variable The default value of OSOPTIONS is 3 e OSOPTIONS 0 Object snapping is enabled for hatch entities and geometry
91. is measured from the previous position of the face Repeatedly press the TAB key to cycle through the distances to other references planes if any Reference planes are parallel to the face being pushpulled Press and hold the Shift key then press the TAB key to cycle in reverse order Making holes Typically holes are made using the SUBTRACT command When pushpulling a closed 2D entity that lies on a face of a solid a hole is created when you push the 2D entity through the solid To make a circular hole through a solid 1 Make sure Dynamic UCS is active 2 Launch the Circle command 254 6 User Guide Move the cursor to the face of the solid you wan to create the circular hole in The UCS automatically aligns to the face the cursor is on Draw a circle on the face of the solid Hover over the circle then choose Push Pull in the Direct Modeling command group of the Quad cursor menu Direct Modeling as Ss gt amp PSS OS OS SOS SS SoS Sos B OSS OTS 20 Editing Dimensions 4 se 2D Constraints CT SSO SS CS Push the circle inside the solid 5 gt lt aS S a oe lt lt w Wa S Ps SSN SSS en OSS OSS wo Oe Nos SS CSS OS SS Do one of the following e Type a distance in the dynamic field to define the depth of the hole e Push the circle through the solid to create a through hole option Choose Push Pull in the Direct Modeling com
92. its content to the content of the currently loaded main CUI file NOTE You can load an IntelliCAD menu file if you select MNU files mnu mns in the Files of Type list box of the Choose a Customization file dialog in the Load main CUI file Load partial CUI file and Manage Customization Groups procedures The menu file will be converted to a CUI file automatically To load a main CUI file 1 Do one of the following e Click the Load Menu tool button El on the Tools toolbar e Choose Load Menu in the Tools menu e Type menu in the command bar then press Enter e Open the Customize dialog then click the Browse button e Open the Customize dialog then choose Load main CUI file in the File menu The Choose a Customization file dialog displays Choose a Customization File Look in di Support Oo F EP tu a Name Date modified Type di ToolPalettes 26 09 2013 12 36 File folder LEET Xhardware 30 10 2013 11 20 File folder i A ram Ba_AddOns cui 3 12 2013 11 10 BricsCAD Customization file mam Bonus cui 25 09 2013 16 59 BricsCAD Customization file Computer am COmpact cui 26 08 2013 20 57 BricsCAD Customization file ram default cui 27 11 2013 17 16 BricsCAD Customization file E mm empty cui 25 06 2013 14 10 BricsCAD Customization file Favorites mm Minimal cui 25 06 2013 14 10 BricsCAD Customization file mm tablet acadLike cui 25 06 2013 14 10 BricsCAD Customization file te a tablet cui 25 06 2013 14 10 BricsC
93. layout name lt Layout1 gt 2 Do one of the following e Type a unique name for the layout then press Enter The name can be up to 255 characters in length and can contain letters numbers the dollar sign hyphen and underscore _ or any combination e Right click or press Enter to accept the default name e g Layout1 The new layout tab is added 3 Create at least one viewport see Creating viewports in a layout If the CREATEVIEWPORTS system variable is ON a viewport is added automatically in a new layout Copying layouts 1 Right click the layout tab you want to copy A context menu displays 2 Choose Copy in the context menu The command bar reads Enter new layout name 3 Type a new unique name in the command bar then press Enter A copy of the selected layout is added Importing layouts 1 Right click the Model tab or one of the layout tabs A context menu displays 168 User Guide 2 Choose From Template in the context menu The Select Template From File window opens 3 Browse to the drawing that you want to import layouts from 4 Click the Open button on the Select Template From File window The Insert Layout s window opens 5 Select the layout s you want to import Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple layouts 6 Click the OK button on the Insert Layout s window The selected layouts are imported Renaming layouts 1 Right click the layout tab you want to
94. lines ae a line that starts at a point and extends to infinity a Infinite XLINE Creates a line through a given point oriented ata Line specified angle and extending to infinity in both directions g Polyline PLINE Creates a single open or closed entity composed of lines and or arcs 3D 3DPOLY Creates 3D polylines Polyline BOUNDARY Calculates a closed polyline from a boundary set Polyline tee oman pema o E3 Rectangle REcTANG Creates Rectangles Creates donuts ES Fills closed areas with solid fills in nine different Fill patterns and one or two colors oy Revision REVCLOUD Creates revision clouds Cloud Hl Oy g Table TABLE Creates a table entity in the drawing through a dialog box TEXT Places single lines of text in the drawing Multiline MTEXT Places multi line text in the drawing through a dialog Text box 188 User Guide Arcs Command ARC The default method for drawing circular arcs is to specify three points the start point a second point and the endpoint Other methods to draw arcs can be found in the Arc submenu of the Draw menu and in the Arcs toolbar General procedure to draw an arc 1 Do one of the following e Click the Arc tool button o on the Draw toolbar e Type arc in the command bar then press Enter e Type A in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Enter to use last point Center Follow lt Start of arc gt A prompt
95. matched to the color of entities This system is older and less flexible than named plot styles but is the default in all new drawings Creates a CTB file STB Named Plot Style Table bases plots on plot styles Plotting parameters can be given to every entity and every layer This system is new and more flexible but may be incompatible with other software that reads DWG files Creates an STB file e Choose Create from existing table then choose a file in the drop down list box or click the browse button to select an existing CTB or STB file Plot Style Table Editor Select Open plotstyle table Create new from scratch Create new from existing table Select file Open an existing plot style table file 5 Type a name in the Table name field then click the OK button The Plot Style Table Editor dialog displays To create a new plot style table in the Print dialog 6 Open the Print dialog 7 Click the Create new plot style button ES on the Print dialog The Add Plot Style Table dialog displays Add Plot Style Table Table name W Launch Editor W Use this plotstyle for the current drawing A new color dependent plot style table will be created CTE It will contain 255 plot styles that have initially been set to the default values Use the Editor to modify any of the plot styles 8 Type aname in the Table name field then click the OK button If the Launch Editor option is chosen the Plot Style T
96. menus Whether a prompt menu displays and its location is controlled through the PROMPTMENU system variable Type promptmenu in the command bar then type a value of 0 to 5 see table below and press Enter OO No prompt menus 1 Display prompt menu at user defined location Display prompt menu at top left corner 3 Display prompt menu at top right corner 4 Display prompt menu at bottom left corner 5 Display prompt menu at bottom right corner You can move the prompt menu by dragging it future prompt menus will appear where you last placed it To edit the PROMPTMENU system variable in the Settings dialog 1 Do one of the following e Click the Settings tool button EE in the Standard toolbar e Choose Settings in the Settings menu e Type settings in the command bar then press Enter The Settings dialog opens 13 BricsCAD V14 2 Do one of the following e Goto the Prompt Menu system variable under Program Options gt Display e Type prompt menu in the search field e Click the down arrow at the right hand side of the prompt menu settings field then select the option of your choice in the list The PROMPTMENU system variable is saved in the registry and therefore applies to all NOTE drawings Properties Bar Command STATBAR Si The Properties Bar Internet connection needed In the Properties Bar you can e Set the current properties color layer linetype linetype scale and lineweig
97. more than 4 calibration points are specified Select transformation type Orthogonal Affine if 4 calibration points are specified Select transformation type Orthogonal Affine Projective 6 Select the transformation type Transformation refers to the calculation of the points on the screen that correspond to points you digitize on the tablet 509 BricsCAD V14 Orthogonal left To be used with accurate paper drawings Orthogonal transformation maintains all angles and preserves relative distances If only two calibration points are specified orthogonal transformation is generated automatically Affine middle Maintains parallel lines but not necessarily the angles between intersecting lines Projective right Does not maintain parallel lines nor angles 510 User Guide Rendering Commands RENDER SHADEMODE RENDERPRESETS Rendering is the process of generating an image from a 3D model The model contains the geometry viewpoint texture lighting and shading information The result is a digital image which can be saved as a raster image file bmp jpeg or png Rendering in BricsCAD is based on the Redway3d rendering engine By default the rendering engine will try to leverage the hardware on the graphics card If experiencing problems please switch off the RenderUsingHardware user preference It is recommended to install the most recent drivers for your graphics card The IsRedSdkHardwareRenderingSupported user p
98. or pattern to a surface to simulate a material e Transparency map sets the transparency of a texture from 0 black to 100 white and anything between grey scales 515 BricsCAD V14 transparency map e Bump map simulates a certain roughness or bumpiness on surfaces brick pattern diffuse map only brick pattern diffuse map and bump map applied transparency map e Reflectivity the property of a surface to reflect light e Transparency sharp transmission of light through solid objects e Translucency scattered transmission of light through solid objects e Refraction bending of light when passing through transparent objects 516 User Guide Refraction index 1 000 Refraction index 2 000 e self illumination it appears as if a surface is emitting its own light No light is cast on other objects 1 Do one of the following e Click the Materials tool button on the Rendering toolbar e Choose Drawing Explorer gt Materials in the Tools menu e Type materials in the command bar then press Enter The Drawing Explorer Materials window opens 2 If necessary click the Detail View tool button E5 or choose Details in the View menu on the Drawing Explorer window 3 Click the New button L4 in the Drawing Explorer toolbar A new material is added 4 Type aname for the new material in the Name field 5 option Type a description in the Description field 6 Do one of the following
99. or to a previously created selection To create a selection set 1 2 352 Click the Quick Select tool button CE on the Properties bar The Properties bar mode is set to Quick Select Properties Bar M Apply to current selection set Dee O0 Color Layer Linetype Linetype scale Plot style Line weight Hyperlink j 3D Visualization Material option Click the Apply to current selection option if you want to filter an existing selection set User Guide Properties Bar Sl General Color Linetype Plot style ll Ei SD Visualization Material 3 Click the Se ection List button to see a list of all entity types in the current drawing or current selection set see previous step A list of all entities in the drawing and the number of entities of each type displays Properties Bar Block Reference 30 Cirde 20 Diametric Dimension Radial Dimension Rotated Dimension 226 Hatch 148 Leader Line 993 Polyline 555 Text 52 typerlink El 3D Visualization Material 4 Select an entity type in the list e g Line Line properties show in the Properties Bar 353 BricsCAD V14 Properties Bar j General Color L Linetype Linetype scale Plot style i ill H HF HF Thickness j 3D Visualization Material El Geometry E Start point 0 i m mm aiii cf 3 0 FH HH H HH OH 354 User Guide 5 Specify
100. paper units and drawing units E g if you want to plot at a 1 50 scale in a drawing of which 1 DU 1 cm the plot scale 1 5 if 1 DU 1 m the plot scale 20 1 or 1 0 05 Plot scale Fit print area to size of page Scale Printed Millimeters Drawing units 1 50 i 50 To set the plot options Click to toggle the plot options On Off Plot options Plot object lineweights Plot with plot styles Plot paperspace last 4 Save changes to layout Plot stamp Hide paperspace objects Plot object lineweights If Plot with plot styles is off object lineweights are plotted Plot with plot styles Settings of the assigned STB or CTB file are used Plot paperspace last Entities in Model space are plotted first paperspace entities last Save changes to All changes made in the Print dialog are saved in the layout layout This option toggles the Save changes to layout variable Plot stamp Adds a header and or footer Click the Edit plot stamp button Ef to define the plot stamp Hide paperspace Removes hidden lines from 3D entities in paper space objects This option is disabled when printing model space 468 User Guide To set the shade plot mode Under Shade viewport options click the list button then select an option As displayed Legacy wireframe Legacy hidden Rendered 2dWireframe 3dWireframe Realistic Conceptual Draft Low Medium High Presentation NOTE This option applies to model space printing on
101. particular bend ssssssesssssssrsnsrrnrenenenrererenrnrenrnrererenns 245 To Untold the Sheet Metal Body crrrrennrirenarininiii ian e e EAE A A AE A ENEA 246 Direct Modeling OverviewW sssssussssus2unusuunnnnnnnununnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnn 247 SD CONSTFAINMES esra a a a a aaa a aana A Vanational Direct ModElNgi issiron en AEO E E EEA 247 Mechanical BROWSEF ic aveatesadentssaiaadseeaaneeanweansesaawaraheseinaulaaeaasee seanawentmaniegaenmentaanneneaiaas 248 SD CONSAN SYPE S caret soe ite E i tats Olan acces suntan esau cattle tone ace rmeees unease 248 SD COnsthaints and DIEC MOJEN eeka ute ae a E need E amin sean eater teed oak ones 248 Design intent recognitiOn s ss 2u22u2u20222 2 222 249 Direct Modeling operations sss DOOD Selecting GOON GULY se casscesccedecvasccccuesecesisticcecstseecsccirsarcasdsaserssittiareateneursciiarsasieneneurniuse 254 Pome i gelms i i e meereerre rrr rerrreereerrrrrrrrrrrereerrrrrrrrcrrrerreerrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrcrrrrrreerrrrr rrr ye 254 Making NOIES nire Rna EEA A A E E AEA EEE eeiaatiea eas 254 To make a circular hole through a solid s sssasosnnnennsnnnrnnnrsnnnrsnrrrnrnrenenrsrerenrnrenrnrenerenan 254 Dereta NOES aiai Taa A a E N N aA 256 TFOdelete a CreuUlar Nolen e a a E AE E Saad attend anaes aes 256 To delete a rectangular Nole sretna a aaa aaa a A 257 WOrking with SECTIONS vinsiiirccsecinsciisrinsneteren
102. point is placed in the xy plane Z 0 If you place the character in front of the entry x y the coordinates are calculated with respect to the previous point This technique is called Relative Cartesian coordinates Using relative Cartesian coordinates to draw a rectangle 1 Launch the RECTANGLE command 2 Specify the first corner of the rectangle 3 In the command bar type lt width gt lt height gt e lt width gt the width of the rectangle in drawing units measured along the x axis e lt height gt the height of the rectangle in drawing units measured along the y axis Working with cylindrical coordinates In a cylindrical coordinate system we use three perpendicular axes the x axis the y axis and the z axis All axes originate in the origin point of the coordinate system The x axis and the y axis define a horizontal plane while the x axis and the z axis and the y axis and the z axis define vertical planes A point is defined using the following format R lt alpha z e R distance to the origin in the xy plane e lt alpha the angle between R and the x axis positive angles are measured counter clockwise ez the height above the xy plane If the z coordinate is omitted cylindrical coordinates are referred to as polar coordinates If you place the character in front of the entry the coordinates are calculated with respect to the previous point This technique is called Relative Cylindrical coordinate
103. polar circular Rotate 3D Rotate a a ae iA Mirror K 3D Mirror O 00 Array Creates multiple copies of entities in three dimensions Entities are arrayed in a three dimensional rectangular rows columns and levels pattern or a two dimensional polar circular pattern in three dimensional space BREAK Splits an entity into two entities JOIN Joins two entities two or more lines or two or more arcs into one entity TRIM Erases the portions of selected entities that cross a specified boundary ALIGN Aligns selected entities with other entities in three dimensional space EXTEND Lengthens lines arcs polylines or rays to meet another entity 3D Array 3DARRAY oin Trim A Align Extend Edit Length LENGTHEN Changes the length of a line polyline freehand entity or arc STRETCH Moves a portion of a drawing while retaining connections to other parts of the drawing MEASURE Divides a selected entity into segments by placing markers points or blocks at specified intervals along its length or circumference Stretch Measure Places markers points or blocks along a selected entity The markers evenly divide the entity into the specified number of equal parts Divide DIVIDE Creates a chamfer or a beveled edge at the intersection of two 3D solids lines rays or infinite lines Chamfer CHAMFER Creates a fillet or rounded corner at the intersection of 3D solids two lines
104. policy PSTYLEPOLICY 3 Do one of the following e Choose Associate an entity s plot style with its color for Color dependent plot styles e Choose No association between color and plot style for Named plot styles To create a drawing using a template drawing 1 Do one of the following e Choose New wizard in the Fife menu e Type newwiz in the command window then press Enter 2 Onthe Create New Drawing dialog choose Start from template then click the Next button The New Drawing Wizard enables you to set up anew drawing configured to your needs li Start from Scratch E Start from Template Xe Use a Wizard Tip Start fom template creates a new drawing as a copy of a drawing template you select 3 Do one of the following e Choose a template drawing in the Select a template list By default this is the content of the Template folder in the Local root folder Edit the Template Path variable to set your template folder differently e Click the Browse button to select a template drawing You can choose between dwg and dwt file types The drawing is created as a copy of the selected template To create a drawing using the New command 1 Do one of the following e Choose New in the File menu e Type new in the command bar then press Enter The Select template dialog opens showing the content of the Template folder as defined in the Template Path variable 492 User Guide 2 Sel
105. processes text entities MIRRTEXT Mirror Determines whether text is mirrored by the MIRROR command or text nok MTEXTED Multiline Sets the primary and secondary text editors to use for multiline text text entities editor MTEXTFIXED Multiline Controls whether BricsCAD zooms rotates and or pans the view to fit the Mtext being edited text fixed QTEXTMODE tas how text entities are displayed If ON displays text as a Ox angle TEXTFILL Text fill Determines whether True Type fonts e either filled or outlined aN By ail Filled Text Outlined ext TEXTQLTY Text Defines the smoothness of True a fonts for plotting and quality rendering 305 BricsCAD V14 TEXTSIZE Text size Sets the default height for new text entities TEXTSIZE has no effect if the current text style has a fixed height TEXTSTYLE Stores the name of the current text style style TSPACEFAC Text Specifies the line spacing distance of multiline text measured as space factor of the text height factor Values between 0 25 and 4 are accepted character sizes TSTACKALIG eile the vertical alignment of stacked text bottom center or N op TSTACKSIZE Specifies the percentage a which the stacked text fraction height is relative to the current height of the selected text Values between 25 and 125 are accepted TSPACETYPE Specifies the type of line spacing used for multiline text At least adjusts line spacing based on the tallest character s in a line
106. rays or infinite lines Fillet FILLET 338 User Guide F Edit PEDIT Edits a two dimensional or three dimensional polyline Polyline or a polygon mesh g Explode EXPLODE Ungroups a block polyline polyface mesh solid or hatch creating separate entities for each element S7 Region REGION Converts a closed entity into a two dimensional region Fd Change CHANGE Changes the location size color elevation layer linetype linetype scale lineweight and three dimensional thickness of entities E Properties PROPERTIES Opens the BricsCAD Properties Bar if not already open Entity Modification Settings Entity modification settings are found in the Entity modification settings group of the Drawing settings category in the Settings dialog Settings Copy mode 0 Repeat automatically Explode mode Explode nonuniformly scaled blocks Mirror text Mirror text Polyline edit accept 0 Display prompt El Chamfer Fillet 0 Distance Distance Chamfer first distance 1 Chamfer second distance 1 Chamfer length Chamfer angle Fillet radius Trim mode Offset Offset distance Offset erase Offset gap type Splines Spline frame Spline segments Spline type Trim Extend Edge mode Projection mode 1 0 0000 1 Trim selected edges to the endpoints of chamfer lines and fillet arcs 1 C Offset erase 0 Extend polyline segments C Display control polygon for splines and spline fit polylines 8 E Cu
107. result when selecting A first middle or B first right NOTE If more arcs share the same center point and radius you can select them in step 3 Press Enter after selecting the last arc 387 BricsCAD V14 Chamfering and Filetting Commands CHAMFER and FILLET The Chamfer command connects two nonparallel entities with a line to create a beveled edge The Fillet command connects two entities with an arc of a specified radius to create a rounded edge If both entities you are working with are on the same layer the chamfer or fillet is drawn on that layer If they are on different layers the chamfer or fillet is drawn on the current layer You can choose whether to trim the selected edges to the endpoints of the chamfer lines and fillet arcs or not CJL Chamfered rectangle left and filleted rectangle right with trimmed edges Chamfer and fillet settings 1 Open the Settings dialog 2 Do one of the following 388 In the Drawings settings category choose Chamfer Fillet in the Entity Modification settings sub category Type chamfer or fillet in the search field on the Settings dialog window 3 Ao A chamfer El Entity modification Copy mode 0 Repeat automatically Explode mode Explode nonuniformly scaled blocks Mirror text Mirror text Polyline edit accept 0 Display prompt E Chamfer Fillet Chamfer first distance 10 00 Chamfer second distance 10 00 Chamfer length 0 00 Chamfer angl
108. s dmChamfer Sharp edges of a Creates a chamfer between adjacent faces sharing a solid sharp edge s dmExtrude Closed 2D entities Creates solids by extruding the selected 2D entities Closed 2D entities se a solid by revolving a 2D entity about an xis dmDelete Faces of a solid Deletes the selected entities When faces of a solid n Closed 2D entities object are deleted the gap is filled by extending the Solids adjacent faces Selecting geometry e Press and hold the TAB key to select obscured geometry e The PREVIEWTOPDOWN system variable controls whether individual faces of 3D solids highlight first or the entire 3D solid When the Shift and Ctrl keys are pressed simultaneously and not held down longer than 500 milliseconds they toggle the PREVIEWTOPDOWN setting e Shift space click cycles the preview of faces edges and entities in that order e If a direct modeling command is entered at the command prompt or selected in a menu or toolbar you need to press the Enter key or right click to conclude the selection procedure e If launched from the Quad cursor menu the command is executed when you click to confirm the selection of the currently highlighted geometry press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple entities To control dimensions When using the dmPushPull command a dynamic dimension displays Type the desired distance or radius in the dynamic field then press Enter to confirm The initial distance
109. section elevation to replace the block by a 2D section elevation block e Choose 3D cutaway section to replace the block by a 3D cutaway section block Click the OK button The selected block is replaced 267 BricsCAD V14 To export a section to a file 268 1 2 Launch the Section Plane to Block command Set the Destination to Export to file Click the Browse button iy then do the following in the Se ect export file dialog box e Select a folder e Type a name in the File name field e Click the Save button Under Source Geometry do one of the following e Choose Include all entities to include all 3D solids in the drawing e Choose Select entities then click the Se ect button te to select 3D solids Under Section plane click the Se ect button Tr then select a section plane entity in the drawing Under Section type do one of the following e Choose 2D cross section elevation to replace the block by a 2D section elevation block e Choose 3D cutaway section to replace the block by a 3D cutaway section block Click the OK button Section is saved to a drawing User Guide Hatching When you add hatching to a drawing BricsCAD fills entities or enclosed areas with a predefined pattern or lines First you specify the hatch pattern and other options and then you choose which entities or enclosed areas that you want to hatch NOTES e Depending on the pattern hatchings are memory intensive a
110. selection set 8 option Repeat step 7 to create more copies of the selection set Paste a selection as a block in the target drawing 1 In the source drawing do one of the following e Choose Copy with Base Point in the Edit menu e Type copybase in the command bar then press Enter e Press and hold the Ctr en Shift keys then press C The command bar reads Select base point 370 User Guide 2 Specify the base point origin point The command bar reads Select entities to copy to the clipboard Select the entities Press Enter to conclude the selection of entities Switch to the target drawing Do one of the following e Choose Paste as Block in the Edit menu e Type pasteblock in the command bar then press Enter e Press and hold the Ctr and Shift keys then press V oY Sa a The selection set is attached to the cursor The command window reads Select insertion point 7 Specify the insertion point The selection is pasted as a block 8 option Repeat steps 5 and 6 to paste another copy as a block NOTE If you paste multiple copies of the same selection set each block is named differently Making Parallel Copies Command OFFSET The Offset command creates a copy of linear entities and align them parallel to the original entities at a specified distance You can make parallel copies of arcs circles ellipses elliptical arcs lines two dimensional polylines rays and infinite lines Making p
111. sheet properties exist All fields that refer to default or custom sheet set subset or sheet properties are filled out automatically If no value is available a field displays hyphens see also Placing blocks with attributes Editing attribute definitions Command DDEDIT The Ddedit command edits single line text text short for dynamic dialog editor multi line text attribute definitions and attribute You can edit an attribute definition only before it is saved as part of a block definition To edit tag prompt or default text of an attribute 1 Do one of the following e Type ddedit in the command bar then press Enter and select the attribute e Double click the attribute The Edit attribute definition dialog opens Seg Athibute DeM ROOMNUMBER Enter the roomnumber 00 01 434 User Guide 2 option Type a new name in the Tag field Lowercase letters are converted to uppercase automatically 3 option Type a new prompt in the Prompt field If you leave the Prompt field empty the attribute Tag will be used as the prompt instead 4 option Type a new text in the Default field 5 Press the OK button to save your changes To edit an attribute definition 1 Click the attribute The attribute properties display in the Properties Bar Properties Bar ubweteinin E General 3D Visualization al Text O O OOOO Tag Type No Desk type Arial Geometry Misc 2 Modi
112. simultaneously 4 If the Regen On Off button is not pressed click the Regen tool Eh in the Images Explorer toolbar NOTE Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple images Removing images Since an image is first attached then inserted in the drawing you can delete an image without detaching it Detach images 1 Launch the Image Explorer 2 Select the image s that you want to detach 3 Do one of the following e Click the Delete tool button X in the Images Explorer toolbar e Right click and select Delete in the context menu NOTE Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple images 461 BricsCAD V14 Image Utilities To set the image transparency 1 Do one of the following e Click the Image Transparency tool button a on the Images toolbar e Choose Image Transparency in the Images menu e Type transparency in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select images 2 Select the images you want to set the Transparency property of The command bar reads Enter transparency mode ON OFF lt current mode gt A prompt menu displays TRANSPARENCY 3 Do one of the following e Press Enter to accept the current mode e Choose On in the prompt menu or type ON in the command bar then press Enter to switch the Transparency property of the selected images on e Choose Off in the prompt menu or type OFF in the command bar then press Enter to switch the Transparen
113. so you can easily turn on plot styles again Actual plot Style table files are not deleted and for drawings that use named plot style tables entities and layers retain their assigned plot styles 1 Choose Model or the layout in which you want to turn the plot style table on off 2 Do one of the following e Choose Print in the File menu e Type print in the command bar then press Enter 3 Click the Plot with plot styles plot option Plot options Plot entity lineweights Plot paperspace last Hide paperspace entities Plot stamp The Plot Styles Manager Commands STYLESMANAGER The Plot Styles Manager is a window that lists plot style table files CTB and STB files The Plot Styles Manager allows you to Create Color dependent Plot Style CTB and Named Plot Style files STB using the Create a Plot Style Table wizard Edit existing Plot Style Table files To open the Plot Styles Manager Do one of the following e Choose Plotstyle manager in the Fife menu e Type stylesmanager in the command bar then press Enter 481 BricsCAD V14 To create a new plot style table 1 Open the Plot Styles Manager 2 Double click the Create a Plot Style Table shortcut Organize Include in library Share with Burn New folder ae Fae Mame Date modified Type E Desktop ial Create a Plot Style Table 29 11 2013 17 18 Shortcut m Downloads ES default ctb 29 11 2013 1543 BricsCAD Plot Color
114. style table in the Print dialog sssesssssnssrnnnsrnnnnennnrsrsrrnrnrerenrrrsrenes 483 TOcata Pot SVIS tD G nnana aaa EA TEN 484 To edit a plot style table in the Print dialog ccc cecccc cece cece eeee cess seen ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeessananeeees 484 Batch OG ce iintiaeiaasiia rans aida tae eae eee Oe Managing DFaWwiINGS sericea AGD Opening and SAVING drawingsS vaccccccccccccncnnnnnneeeseeeeeeseccceessessssssess FOD Using the Drag and Drop option MenU s ssesssssesssosssnnessneesanosannessunnasnnsennnnaunneaannsuannans 488 Getting drawing information sss 2 2 222 22202 2 222222 FOO General drawing IN Orma OM erri nas a NEE a TA E E 489 Information aDout CNUUESssiceislanccedsrteamvartecdatianratestininaensorlasivsrnesawiaderdaatetemesdsaniantaas 489 Creating a drawing srisivsinicirieecictirreniirsmereenieenweneen AO To create a drawing using a default template drawing s sssssssssssrenensnrsrerenrnrenenerrsrenes 490 FIPSEMGCAOGS arin aa E a aiie EE E omen N ENA 490 Second Method orriren erie naa re a AANE R a a a a dat 490 To set the default template drawing sssssssssssssssnnsnssrensnsnrnnsnsrrsnnnenenrsnsnennensnenrrnrnene 490 TO cre tea drawing from Scrateh oiriin ni a A A EA a a ai 491 TO SECME PIOC SLY IG DOUNGCY ioiai a a A a E TR a a a 492 To create a drawing using a template drawing s sssssrsrsrsnssrsnrrrnnerenenrererrnrnrenrnrrnerrnns 492 To create a drawing using the New comm
115. the Concentric tool button on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select a pair of subentities 6 Move the cursor over two cylindrical faces of the crankshaft 1 and the connecting rod 2 as indicated in the image below Hit the TAB key until the correct face highlights then click and move the cursor to the second face The connecting rod is automatically moved to the right position according to our design intent 224 10 User Guide Click the Concentric tool button PB on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select a pair of subentities Move the cursor over two cylindrical faces of the piston 1 and the pin 2 as indicated in the image below Hit the TAB key until the correct face highlights then click and move the cursor to the second face Click the Tangent tool button Uh on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select a pair of subentities Move the cursor over two cylindrical faces of the piston 1 and the pin 2 as indicated in the image below Hit the TAB key until the correct face highlights then click and move the cursor to the second face 225 BricsCAD V14 D 11 Click the Coincident tool button s on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select a pair of subentities 12 Move the cursor over two planar faces of the connecting rod 1 and the piston 2 as indicated in the image below Hit the TAB key until the correc
116. the Layout to which you want to assign a specific plotter configuration file Do one of the following e Choose Page Setup in the File menu e Type pagesetup in the command bar then press Enter Choose one of the following from the Printer Plotter configuration list e A system printer e A configuration file PC3 file e None uses Default 473 BricsCAD V14 4 Click the OK button NOTE When BricsCAD cannot find the plotter configuration file assigned to the drawing it changes the configuration file assigned to your drawing to None uses Default When you print the drawing the settings of the default printer will be used instead When choosing the None use Default option a plotter configuration file Default pc3 will be used It contains the plot settings found in the registry at the moment it was first created Plot Style tables Plot Style Tables are used in BricsCAD to control printing attributes A plot style table is a collection of plot styles assigned to a Layout or the Model tab There are two types of plot style tables Color dependent plot style tables CTB Color Table Named plot style tables STB Style Table Although each layout may use a different plot style table each drawing may have only one type of plot style table type assigned to it All layouts in a drawing must use all CTB files or all STB files exclusively One drawing may not mix and match these file types The type of plot st
117. the color defined by the SnapMarkerColor user preference Using temporary tracking points When Polar Tracking is ON temporary tracking points can be used to pick points at locations where no existing geometry is available to snap directly to while you know the desired offset distance s from snap points on existing geometry in the neighborhood TT option whenever prompted to enter a point type TT on the command line then press Enter to define a single temporary tracking point After the tracking point has been picked normal command execution continues Repeat typing TT to enter additional temporary tracking points TK option whenever prompted to enter a point type TK on the command line then press Enter to define one or more temporary tracking points When eventually the desired location has been reached enter the point by pressing the Right Mouse button or the Enter key BricsCAD V14 Using the TT option E 6 Launch a draw command e g Line The command bar reads ENTER to use last point Follow lt Start of line gt Type TT in the command bar then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Specify temporary tracking point Use an Entity Snap to pick a point on existing geometry A small red cross indicates the temporary tracking point Move the cursor in the desired direction Depending on the value of the POLARANG and POLARADDANG system variables tracking lines display from the first temporary tracking po
118. the mouse and keyboard shortcuts In perspective mode you can walk inside the 3D model In isometric mode you can only zoom in very close but not go inside Mouse Key Action Result O Z O ZO O Whee Zoom in 7 out Middle Button or press and hold while Real time pan RTPAN command wheel moving the mouse Middle Button or double click Zoom extents wheel Ctrl Shift Left press and hold while Real time zoom in out RTZOOM command Button moving the mouse Ctrl Shift Right press and hold while Real time pan RTPAN command Button moving the mouse Ctrl Shift press and hold while Real time sphere RTROTF command Middle Button or moving the mouse wheel Shift Middle press and hold while Real time constrained sphere RTROT Button or wheel moving the mouse command Ctrl Right Button press and hold while Real time rotate about the screen Z axis moving the mouse RTROTZ command Walk through navigation Alt Left Button press and hold while Walk left right and forward backward moving the mouse RTWALK command Alt Middle Button press and hold while Move up down and left right RTUPDOWN moving the mouse command Ctrl Middle Button press and hold while Look around RTLOOK command moving the mouse Ctrl Arrow Keys press the arrow keys Walk left right and forward backward while holding the Ctrl RTWALK command key Ctrl Shift Arrow press the arrow keys Look up
119. the new tool above the existing tool option Edit the tool in the settings grid e g to add a diesel expression in the Diesel field esnap nearest Snaps to the nearest point on an entity _nearest esnap nearest To create a new tool in a menu toolbar or shortcut 1 2 In the Add dialog choose Create new tool Select the Toolbox in which you want to create the new tool 45 BricsCAD V14 FA Add tool Select available tool Create new tool Toolbox Draw Title InternalWalls Help Creates internal walls using Mines Command c c_4ayersm InteriorWalls Mline Image mline Pa Infinite Line l 9 Paolyline Multiline C Boundary Polyline T Spline e Fi Sketch 3 Type a name for the new tool in the Title field of the Add tool dialog 4 option Type a help string in the Help field of the properties grid 5 Type a command or command macro in the Command field of the properties grid In the screenshot above the Command field contains a macro that makes the InteriorWalls layer current then launches the M ine command If the layer does not exist yet it is created first 6 Click the Browse button exh then select an image for the new tool Do one of the following e Select Builtin then choose one of the built in icons Tool image a mMleaderedit_remove_vertex mleaderedit_stretch_ vertex 2 mleaderstyle move e Select Bitmap file and choose a bmp gif jpg jpe
120. the selected printer 465 BricsCAD V14 To choose the paper units Select either Inches or Millimeters Paper size C 420 00 x 594 00 The paper size image indicates the size position and orientation of the plot area on the selected paper size NOTE The Scale and Plot offset setting units are changed according to the chosen Paper units To choose the paper orientation Select either Portrait or Landscape e Portrait The drawing or layout x axis is aligned with the shortest edge of the selected paper size e Landscape The drawing or layout x axis is aligned with the longest edge of the selected paper size The paper size image changes accordingly When in a layout click the App y button to update the display To define the plot offset Select either Center on page or type the plot offset in the X and Y fields The offset is calculated from the bottom left corner of the paper Plot offset Center on page X 0 00 mm Y 0 00 mm When in a layout click the Apply button to update the display 466 User Guide To specify the area to plot Prints the portion of the drawing that displays in the current viewport or a saved view Prints all entities in the drawing Limits Prints to the limits defined in the drawing This option is only available when printing in Model space Layout Prints the current layout This option is only available when printing in Paper space View Window Prints
121. the text background color Text height DIMTXT Sets the height of the dimension text in drawing units Draw frame DIMGAP Toggles the text frame on off A frame is drawn if DIMGAP is negative In the Drawing Explorer gt Dimensions settings dialog the draw frame around text option is enabled automatically when the value in the Text offset field changes from zero to a non zero value around text 286 User Guide Text offset DIMGAP Sets the offset distance around the dimension text and the distance between annotation and hook line created using the Leader command A negative value for DIMGAP draws a box around the dimension or annotation text If DIMTVP gt O only negative values for DIMGAP draw text frame make sense Text pos vert DIMTAD Defines the vertical text position with respect to the dimension line Text pos hort DIMJUST Defines the horizontal position of the text with respect to the extension lines Text offset DIMTVP Sets the vertical position of dimension text above or below vertical the dimension line when DIMTAD 0O The offset equals the product of DIMTVP and the height of the dimension text DIMTXT Text inside align DIMTIH Defines whether text that is placed inside the extension lines is aligned with the dimension line or placed horizontally Text outside DIMTOH Defines whether text that is placed outside the extension align lines is aligned with the dimension line or placed horizontally The verti
122. then press Enter The command bar reads Select entities 3 Select entities then press Enter 87 BricsCAD V14 Working with the constraint bar Using the constraint bar you can e Control a constraint Move the cursor over a constraint icon A tooltip displays indicating the constraint type 1 The associated entity highlights 2 The corresponding icon on the constraint bar of the associated entity highlights 3 Tra 1 e Delete a constraint Move the cursor over the constraint icon then right click Click Delete The constraint is deleted and the icon is removed from this constraint bar and from the constraint bar of the corresponding entity e Hide the constraint bar of an entity Move the cursor of the constraint bar then click the C ose button my Eg Deleting constraints h To delete a single constraint right click the constraint icon then click the Delete button To delete all constraints from a selection set 1 Click the Delete 2D Constraints icon X on the 2D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select entities to delete all constraints 2 Select the entities you want to delete the constraints from 3 Right click to stop selecting entities and delete all constraints from the selection set 88 User Guide Using fix constraints A fix geometric constraint 3 forces a point or an entity to a fixed location e Ifa fix geometric constr
123. then type R and press Enter The command bar reads Angle of dimension text 2 Type the rotation angle then press Enter The command bar reads Select entities to rotate text 3 Select the dimensions and press enter To reposition the dimension text 1 Do one of the following me A e Click the Reposition Dimension Text tool in the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Reposition Dimension Text in the Dimensions menu e Type dimtedit in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select dimensions to reposition text 2 Select the dimension The dimension text moves dynamically 3 Click to reposition the dimension text To restore the text position 1 Do one of the following a AA e Click the Restore Text Position tool 4 in the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Restore Text Position in the Dimensions menu e Type dimedit in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select dimensions to restore text to default position 2 Select the dimensions and press enter To make the extension lines oblique 1 Do one of the following e Click the Make Oblique tool ET in the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Make Oblique in the Dimensions menu e Type dimedit in the command bar press Enter then type O and press Enter The command bar reads Select dimensions to make oblique 2 Select the dimensions and press enter The command bar reads Enter obliquing angle 3 Type the obliquing an
124. they are located in relation to the drawing s underlying Cartesian coordinate system Every drawing has a fixed coordinate system called the World Coordinate System WCS You can also define arbitrary coordinate systems located anywhere in three dimensional space These are called user coordinate systems UCS and can be located anywhere in the WCS and oriented in any direction To specify points and distances using the keyboard you can use the following formats e Cartesian coordinates x y z e Cylindrical coordinates R lt alpha z e Spherical coordinates R lt alpha lt beta If you place the character in front of the entry the coordinates are calculated with respect to the previous point This technique is called Relative Coordinates Working with Cartesian coordinates In the Cartesian coordinate system we use three perpendicular axes the x axis the y axis and the z axis All axes originate in the origin point of the coordinate system The x axis and the y axis define a horizontal plane while the x axis and the z axis and the y axis and the z axis define vertical planes A point is defined by its distances to the yz xz and xy planes These distances are called the xyz coordinates of a point 97 BricsCAD V14 98 SAAN cSERUEREREEE Q y If you want to enter the absolute Cartesian coordinates of a point type the x y and z coordinates separated by commas 45 5 57 3 60 If you omit the z coordinate the
125. to define the color of the material e Check the Inherit option to use the entity color e Click the colored tile to open the Select color dialog 7 Set the Highlights type Metallic or Non Metallic 8 Define the properties of the material 517 BricsCAD V14 Materials Render_Scene_Start dwa xX amp amp Oy a ee i Refraction Index Non Metallic Self Illumination Reflectivity Elotte me pao masonry brick running sand png Transparency map Texture Map ka lsum mep masonry brick running sand png Map Transformation Scale Materials can be assigned to a layer and to entities If the Material property of an entity is BYLAYER The material assigned to the layer of the entity will be used By default new entities get the BYLAYER material setting New layers get the Global material assigned 1 Select the entity 2 In the Properties bar under 3D Visualization gt Material click the down arrow and select the material in the Material list 518 E 3D Visualization User Guide Brick2 Blue Metal Brick1 Brick ByBlock ByLayer Floor 1 To assign a material to a layer 3 4 oy 6 Lights Do one of the following e Click the Explore Layers tool button E in the Entity Properties toolbar Choose Layers gt Layers in the Settings menu Type layer in the command bar then press Enter The Drawing Explorer Layers d
126. to place the table The table is created and the Text Formatting toolbar displays see Create multiline text 8 Do one of the following e Start editing the text in the table see Edit the table content e Click outside the table to close the Text Formatting toolbar 9 option Select the table and drag the grips to adjust the dimensions of the table To create a table from an Excel spreadsheet 1 Open the spreadsheet in Microsoft Office Excel 2 Select the cells you want to create a table from 3 Copy the selection to the clipboard e Press Ctrl C e Right click and choose Copy in the context menu 328 User Guide 4 In BricsCAD choose Paste special in the Edit menu The Paste Special dialog box displays Soe Source Uren R1K1 R5K5 As Microsoft Excel werkblad Picture Metafile bitmap Paste Link Script Tet Display As Icon 7 CSV AML Spreadsheet Result Inserts the contents of the clipboard into your document as a formatted table 5 Choose XML Spreadsheet in the As option list 6 Click in the drawing to insert the table Editing a table using grips When a table is selected multiple grips display 1 Moves the table 2 Modifies the width uniformly 3 Modifies the height uniformly 4 Modifies the width and height uniformly 5 Modifies the width of a column penance nde apanese ca 2 Ba m Sene eee m aaa a A PERR a EErEE T l E E E EEE E Poeeeawsuene aerae poe
127. to the second layer The first layer is purged from the drawing Repairing a drawing Commands AUDIT and RECOVER The Audit command analyzes the integrity of the current drawing and optionally tries to fix errors The Recover command repairs a damaged drawing then opens the drawing To analyze the integrity of the current drawing L Do one of the following e Choose Audit in the File Drawing Utilities menu e Type audit in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Fix any errors detected Yes lt No gt 499 BricsCAD V14 NOTE Do one of the following e Choose Yes in the context menu or type Y then press Enter to analyze the integrity of the current drawing and fix the errors detected e Choose Wo in the context menu or type N then press Enter to analyze the integrity of the current drawing The drawing is analyzed option Press F2 to open the Prompt History window in order to read the audit report objects audited Total errors found during audit fixed Set the AUDITCTL settings variable to 1 to let Audit create an ASCII file describing problems and the action taken This report with the file extension adt is placed in the Same directory as the current drawing Use the Recover command to repair the errors that Audit cannot fix To repair a drawing Do one of the following e Choose Recover in the File Drawing Utilities menu e Type recover in the command bar then
128. upon its creation The naming is as follows distance d1 d2 d3 radius radi rad2 rad3 diameter dial dia2 dia3 angular ang1 ang2 ang3 The name of a constraint can be used as a parameter in a mathematical expression to define another dimensional constraint The dimensions of the bracket below are controlled through the radi radius d1 distance and angi angular dimensional constraints The radius of the hole rad2 and the length of the second leg d2 are defined by expressions Geometrical constraints force the width of the second leg and the hole in it to be equal to the first leg 82 User Guide fad2 rad1 30 radi s80 e OO o Creating a new parameter 1 Select either the part name or Parameters in the Mechanical Browser then right click A context menu displays 2 Select Add new parameter in the context menu A new parameter is created 3 Edit the properties of the new parameter E Parameter Name vi Expression 1 0 Value 1 Description NOTES e The constants Pi and e can be used in expressions e The CLEANUNUSEDVARIABLES command purges parameters that are not used in constraint expressions or linked to dimensions 83 BricsCAD V14 Using operators in expressions The following operators can be used in expressions Subtraction or Negative pe Multiplication Exponentiation Modulo or Remainder operator The expression 5 2 would evaluat
129. want to edit Select a search path then click the up Ea or down EJ buttons to change the order of the search paths Assigning a project to the current drawing 1 Open the Project settings 2 Type the name of an existing project in the Project name settings field PROJECTNAME system variable 66 User Guide Drawing Accurately Gs Drawing Accurately Internet connection needed In BricsCAD the following drawing aids are available e Dynamic dimensions e Coordinate Input e Snap and Grid e Drawing Limits e Ortho Mode e Entity Snaps e Polar Tracking e Entity Snap Tracking e User Coordinate Systems e Direct Distance Entry Using Orthogonal Mode Orthogonal Mode restricts the movement of the cursor to be parallel to the X axis or the Y axis of the current coordinate system For example with the default O degree orientation angle O at the three o clock or east position when the Orthogonal Mode setting is enabled lines are restricted to 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees or 270 degrees As you draw lines the rubber banding line follows either the horizontal or vertical axis depending on which axis is nearest to the cursor type the length of the line in the command bar then press Enter NOTES e When you enable the Isometric snap style cursor movement is restricted to orthogonal equivalents within the current isometric plane e You can rotate the Orthogonal Mode axes using the Snap Angle set
130. wipeout To create a wipeout from a polyline 1 Do one of the following e Click the Wipeout tool button ab on the Draw toolbar e Choose Wipeout in the Draw menu e Type wipeout in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Frames Polylines lt Start point gt The Wipeout context menu displays 213 BricsCAD V14 WIPEOUT Do one of the following e Choose Polyline in the context menu e Type P then press Enter The command Bar reads Select a closed polyline Click a closed polyline Only polylines composed of line segments can be selected The command bar reads Delete selected polyline Yes lt No gt 4 Do one of the following e Type Y then press Enter or choose Yes in the context menu to create the wipeout and delete the selected polyline e Press Enter or choose No in the context menu to create the wipeout and delete the selected polyline To control the display of the edges of wipeouts 214 Do one of the following 13 on the Draw toolbar e Choose Wipeout in the Draw menu e Type wipeout in the command bar then press Enter e Click the Wipeout tool button f The command bar reads Frames Polylines lt Start point gt The Wipeout context menu displays WIPEOUT Do one of the following e Choose Frames in the context menu e Type F then press Enter The command bar reads Enter display mode OFF lt ON gt Do one of the following e Choose OFF in the co
131. with negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS e OSOPTIONS 1 Object snapping is disabled for hatch entities e OSOPTIONS 2 Object snapping is disabled for geometry with negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS e OSOPTIONS 3 Object snapping is disabled for hatch entities and geometry with negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS NOTE Press the TAB key without moving the mouse to cycle through all possible entity snaps If the DYNMODE variable has a positive value Dynamic Dimensions switched ON entity Snap cycling is not possible Click the DYNMODE field in the Status Bar to toggle the display of dynamic dimensions To define the Entity Snap settings 1 Open the Settings dialog In the Settings dialog expand the Program Options settings class 3 Under Program Options expand the Display settings group then scroll down to the Entity Snap settings 104 marker size marker thickness Snap marker color Auto tracking vector color Snap marker in all views Snap tooltips Snap Snap User Guide 6 3 20 i ivi _ Display snap marker in all views Enable snap tooltips Under Drawing expand the Drafting settings group then go to Coordinate Input gt Entity Snaps El Entity snaps Entity snap mode Entity snap aperture box Entity snap aperture Pdf entity snap Endpoint 3 ilihis _ Display Aperture box 10 Enable PDF entity snap Define the Entity Snap settings SnapMarkerSi
132. wiv ealiatesies reser a rra a a a raean 106 ENUY SANIP MOGES aioa E E E A AO te ware canuese ues 107 Working with multiple Entity Snap modeS s ssssssssesssssssrensnsnsnrrnsrennnnssenrensnenrenrrenrnnne 108 To snap to the extension of TWO ENTITIES sssssssssssssssnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnnnsnensnnneneneneneneneneneneno 108 Usno Me FEON ODU ON neiii O AA A A de ee tan E EE A E IA ia AA 109 Using the Paralelentity Snap ecrini a ra r aa aa aaa 109 USING Midpoint naD emere taa O vides Garde A a r Rune a E a a a 109 PO lar TracCKiNO errien aaa L LO Todefine the Polar Tracking Setting S rorrerieriia iinis e EA A AAE O TEA ENAA 110 Using Polar Tracking to draw alie rantein aa a A A O A een 111 usmod Shap hack LOCK po iuicctacenntneveteananmuns ET Lanne ceueinleSeamilavenuaraasaaete 111 Using tempoftary tracking DOIM S weds ciearvacecauealtaceyedesuaee dean tenerus ckeetaalawenealaeteabee e 111 DS Getme Ul ODOM riana a cam es camara areas uaureaumenona amet cueeaewatie ea neegeamna 112 Usmo the T IO DEON aicatnicassschans cies A tos euaaeond sone aahnsud ose SaGaloane umetreua AE 112 Entity Sila TRACKING iiirscetiavieeetiriseetiariaeeireet eae teee ee LS Using Entity Shap TraCKiNGwccssiciascedswtiassaasweseoervatads seaaes caamianawernttad mctenans a eaa 113 User Coordinate SYStCMS iintsicdsieviiednicvienisivetininiitiisietnieinei LS Byname UCS cctscauss slated ce soe aie aka E Sac sued aera na Seto ea oes asee ee ds 116 Todefine a User Coordinate SYS
133. zero width polyline constant width polyline tapered width polyline NOTE When Fill Mode is turned OFF all filled entities such as wide polylines and planes display and print as outlines Drawing polylines 1 Do one of the following e Click the Polyline tool button 5 on the Draw toolbar e Choose Polyline in the Draw menu e Type pline in the command bar then press Enter e Type PL in the command bar then press Enter 203 BricsCAD V14 204 The command bar reads ENTER to use last point Follow lt Start of polyline gt A prompt menu displays PLINE Specify the start point of the polyline The prompt menu changes PLINE 3 Specify the second point of the polyline The prompt menu changes PLINE option Repeat step 3 to add more straight segments option Do one of the following to start drawing arc segments e Type A then press Enter e Choose Draw arcs in the prompt menu The prompt menu changes PLINE An arc segment displays dynamically The arc is tangent to the previous line segment Specify the endpoint of the arc option Repeat step 6 to add more arc segments User Guide 8 option Do one of the following to start drawing line segments e Type L then press Enter e Choose Draw lines in the prompt menu 9 Specify the endpoint of the line segment 10 Right click or choose Done in the prompt menu to stop 11 option Right click to restart Creating boundary pol
134. 03 EXDOll TO PDE sirrien aAa aaO OS EXPO TO PDE SCCUINGS 2 iaa n AE E E AA N E AE ARA 503 EXPONO a davna to PDF iren a N a A a a a 504 xxi BricsCAD V14 aide pee tr er rrr rr err errr errrCerrrrrrer ere rer rrrrrrrrerrrr errr er lL DIGICIZING TADlOUseisestcscicscicreend gassaesd see ecesd Seescewdceaseersceeweesdsesasesie DOS VOWSeca GIGITIZING tablet IN BRICSCAD ruceni aa E a a a aa 505 To download the tablet overlay and CUI fileS s sussnnsrunsssnnnrsnrrrnnnnenrnrererenrnrenrnrrrerrnns 506 TOOTS Overlay CUTII rirnori tr aaen ae ANAE EA AAE EAEE 507 TO SWItCh the tablet ONZ OFF morrera aaa a a a aaa a aa 507 To COnnGuire the Tab Cl riua e E a A A a N a A 507 TO Calibrate the LaDlet cs cssdcciciamvaadseeeanivaiwands a r aa a aa A R 508 Rendering ossia OL L setting the render preferences ai irroiria A T A E A 511 ReNderno tOO Saa a e A E A E N a eNA 512 T render a VIEW DOM sixatavew dad iacnaagd re aE AAEN ETE es 513 LO Save a FENGeChING O AiG uein ee a E A 513 Rendering Material wiciiscdesscestervcnccecnsscestarcccassanssuusseusscussiessneseanes D LA Mate als Glossa enun aT A a a E a 514 DenNDING Material serinin a a r a aE aA Aaaa 517 ASSIONNO Maer S a T O N E enamine 518 TOsasSsigin a materal to an entity sorore a E E A 518 To assign a material CO a l y sirsrdiirinrinrd aan A a a tcaven anda deeaadveles 519 xxii HONNO GOSS AV nerta AA ce ites A E omoreeen tiie Naw nee eeaas 519 General DEODCRUES siren aj cickacs
135. 10 08 44 with the most recent ones from Bricscad 2 If you have decided not to update one or more files an alert window displays Do one of the following e Click the Yes button if you want to update one of these files later In this case this procedure is restarted the next time you start BricsCAD e Click the No button if you don t want to be reminded 29 BricsCAD V14 Understanding the Customize Dialog What are the CUI files Files with the CUI extension are Customize User Interface files for BricsCAD These XML format files replace the previously used menu definition files mnu mns CUI files can be edited with the build in interactive editor launched by the CUSTOMIZE command You can migrate CUI files between BricsCAD versions and combine them between different computers NOTE The Load partial CUI file procedure accepts IntelliCAD menu files mnu mns and converts them to CUI files Opening the Customize dialog To open the Customize dialog do one of the following e Choose Customize in the Tools menu e In Windows Hover over a toolbar or a blank portion of the toolbar area then right click and choose Customize in the context menu e In Linux Hover over a blank portion of the menu bar status bar or toolbar area then right click and choose Customize in the context menu e Type customize in the command window then press Enter e Type cui in the command window then press Enter Eile 4
136. 3 A Q crankshaft E A Y piston 1 ts P pint aa 55 connecting rod Ge K J d gt o A a if oo E oa cj ae cS g MC component sert y A Name cylinder 1 eS A Component name ih i Desonpton Veble Yes M m visual style By Wewport i 4 pi M Model A Layout Layout Fie mi D 5 t s 200M 3 q Zoon In Out All Center Dynamic Extents Left Previous Right Scale Window lt Scale nX nxi a E r Ready 679 7 825 4 0 0 Bytayer Bylayer Standard SO 30 Modeling SNAP GRID CATHO POLAR ESNAP STRACK LWT TILE Step 4 Positioning the components 1 Click the Fix tool button on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select an edge face or 3D solid Move the cursor over the crankshaft then do one of the following e Hit the TAB key until the whole solid is selected e Press and hold the Shift key then hit the TAB key The position of the crankshaft is now locked as indicated in the Constraints tree in the Mechanical Browser Clicking the constraint highlights the solid face or edge it applies to Click the Coincident tool button a on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select a pair of subentities Move the cursor over two planar faces of the crankshaft 1 and the connecting rod 2 as indicated in the image below Hit the TAB key until the correct face highlights then click and move the cursor to the second face 223 BricsCAD V14 nt A z ee 5 Click
137. 6 User Guide Joining Polylines Commands PEDIT and JOIN Using the Join option of the Edit Polyline tool you can add an arc a line or a polyline entity to an existing open polyline forming one continuous polyline entity To join an entity to a polyline that entity must already share an endpoint with an end vertex of the selected polyline When you join an entity to a polyline the width of the new polyline segment depends on the width of the original polyline and the type of entity you are joining to it A line or an arc inherits the width from the polyline segment to which it is joined A polyline joined to a tapered polyline retains its own width values A polyline joined to a uniform width polyline inherits the width from the polyline to which it is joined The Join command joins lines LW polylines 2D polylines 3D polylines circular arcs elliptical arcs splines and helixes at their common endpoints The type of the resulting entity depends on the types of the input entities and on their coplanarity To join an arc line or polyline to an existing polyline 1 Do one of the following e Click the Edit Polyline tool button LA on the Modify toolbar e Choose Edit Polyline in the Modify menu e Type editpline or pedit in the command window then press Enter The command bar reads Select polyline to edit 2 Select the parent polyline The command bar reads Edit polyline Edit vertices Close or Open Decurve Fit Joi
138. AD Customization file Recent Items My Documents File name Files of type CUI files cui 2 Do one of the following e Double click a CUI file e Select a CUI file then click the Open button 32 The selected CUI file is loaded 3 Close the Customize dialog To load a partial CUI file 1 NOTE Open the Customize dialog then choose Load partial CUI file menu The Choose a Customization file dialog displays Do one of the following e Double click a CUI file e Select a CUI file then click the Open button The partial CUI file is loaded option Repeat steps 1 and 2 to load another partial CUI file Do one of the following User Guide in the File e Click the OK button ok to confirm the loading of the partial CUI file s and close the Customize dialog e Click the Cancel button to Cancel close the Customize dialog and unload the partial CUI file s To unload a partial CUI file 1 2 Open the Customize dialog If a CUIX file is selected in step 2 it will be converted to a CUI file on the fly When a CUIX file contains bitmaps they are copied into a RESZ resource file which are supported as an alternative to resource DLL zip file containing tool bitmaps works on all platforms The following image formats are supported BMP JPG PNG ICO GIF TIFF XBM XPM In the Menus Toolbars or Keyboard section select the partial CUI file you want to unload 33 BricsCA
139. AlgnnNg aM entity Ma D rarr a AANA EA TAO EA EATEN EA 364 CHANGING ENcitiCS cisrssiivserscsvpivsgacsvcsrscsveisspcarsieissarsnerpeeieirna SOC TO Change text entities carrara nen ea aA eaae A R 366 TOTOO DIOCKS iiron onae A a E EA N 366 XV BricsCAD V14 CODVING ENTITIES vincristine GOT Copying Entities in a Drawing wcccccccnnsscccecnnesecccnnnessscsnneesssssssesssss DOF TOCODYy a selecHon Selera a a a a N N ss 367 Tomake madltiple CODICS ira e E a a a 368 TO pastea Selection SEE AS cc DIOCK orrirreieire iaa a ANEA A EAE AEA 368 Copying Entities Between DrawingS s s 909 Using Copy and Paste to copy entities between drawingS sssssssssssnsnsnsnrnrnsnrnrnrnerrrrnrnne 369 Using Copy and Pasteorig to copy entities between CrawinGS ccsecceseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeueueetees 370 Using Copybase and Paste to copy entities between drawings cccceceeseeeeeeeseeeeteeseneenees 370 Paste a selection as a block in the target drawing ssssssssssrsrsrsnsnsensensenrenrnrnrnenenrnenrnenenne 370 Making Parallel COpieS cccccensssseeseccscnneeesessceensnessesssesesseesesees L Making a parallel copy at a specified distance c cece cceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeteeaaeeeeseggenes 371 Making a parallel copy through a POINE cc cece cece eessee seen ee eeeeeeeeeeneneeessseaanenaeteetseeaannees 372 Arraying ENGities sissien S A Cre ung a rectoandular ar ayons a N E E aunt cadaentde hue e
140. BricsCAD V14 BRICSCAD User Guide K Table Of Contents The BricSCAD Application WINCGOW cccssssscccnnnessecennesesseeneneessessenees L Open Close Tne Command Daliasies techismanesa tank ee Dera tucaawinnuaaes due a tad eeaaawraces nunca enue 1 TO Set the command NINE Properti eS ireren na itea EE E AE ET AAA 2 Open Close thestatus Dalee a E o NO 3 WOKING WIEN The S tattis Dal noinein a a a A A alia T a a 3 WO CUSTOMIZE Ne status Dar orari EA Sa bal tance eae eae aate 5 Display Or MGS SCrOll Dal Sian 2s5 staan aut eanmnged can ee ents wuah beeen abuawanous auveuee sents a AAE 6 TOOIDANS siiterccanetetcrni stance erucan beta mecn eee eean ee teaecn nd taaecn aea 7 TOOIDar FIV OUUS 2a ccrarinsicaaden vara a a a oie naan Moria alond tual eeanaau ume a eaaatatnenes 9 Opening a LOO ID al eies a cnaads Gautier soeeanweke ein aason tan sede anunen esau saw eet came uses aamoeneeras 11 CIOSING a LOO DOI saaa saatsad aa eeinauntuatendus vias R T E onds a a a 12 TASET COGS sth T E es los A aise E ete svete ee 12 To set the position and visible property Of a toolbar cece cccecc cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaanneeees 12 Prompt Men s cicstistciastinredsscieredanedenedeiineandeter L TO control the display Of prompt MENUS siserrisirei uinte aaa a EA EEA AA buns 13 Properties Bar ninr A TO Open tHe Properties Bal aiatixinve taki E a aaa a a a a aa aa e R 14 TO adjust the size or the Properties Bal sirrien aaa AA AEA A ees 17
141. Color Lineweigth and or Linetype 6 option Click the Text Options tab to edit the text properties Properties Text Options Justification Left E Backwards Height 95 5235 Width Factor 1 Rotation 0 Oblique Angle 0 E Annotative 437 BricsCAD V14 7 option Click the Apply button to apply the changes option Repeat steps 3 through 6 to edit another attribute 9 Do one of the following e Click the OK button to close the Attribute Editor dialog and apply the changes e Click the Apply button to apply the changes and keep the Attribute Editor dialog open e Click the Cancel button to close the Attribute Editor dialog Changes that are not applied yet are not saved Sa e Click the Se ect button Bh to select another block The Attribute Editor dialog temporarily closes to let you select another block in the drawing Editing attributes in the Properties bar 1 Select a block containing attributes The current value of the attributes display in the Properties bar 2 Click the attribute you want to edit The settings field of the selected attribute is active Properties Bar General 3D Visualization Geometry j Attributes Type President Manufacturer Bulo ID XQ 248 25 7190 Cost 729 3 Type a new value t
142. D V14 Customize File fl BRICSCAD Available tools O BRICSCAD flO File E O a F q a El MYPERSONALCUI Load partial CUI file Create new partial CUI file Jnload BA ADDONS Name BA ADDONS File C Wsers Louis AppData Roaming Bricsys BricscadW 14 en_US Support Ba_ AddOns cui 3 Right click and select Unload lt selected partial CUI gt in the context menu 4 Do one of the following e Click the OK button 9K to confirm the unloading of the partial CUI file and close the Customize dialog e Click the Apply button d Amy h to confirm the unloading of the partial CUI file and keep the Customize dialog open e Click the Cancel button to canca close the Customize dialog and reload the partial CUI file Managing customization groups 1 Type Menuload in the command bar then press Enter 34 User Guide 2 The Customization groups dialog opens Customization Groups Loaded Customization Groups BRICSCAD BONUS Load Customization Group From File C Users tester AppData Roaming Bricsys Bricscad W3 a Load option To load a partial CUI file click the browse button deh to select a partial CUI file then click the Load button option To unload a partial CUI file select the partial CUI file in the Loaded Customization Groups list then click the Unload button Click the Close button to stop Creating custom tools General procedure to create custom tools
143. DITEXT The Edit vertices option of the Pedit command modifies individual polyline vertices When you select this option the program switches into a special vertex editing mode and places an X on the first vertex The X indicates the vertex you are editing The Next and Previous options move the X to the next or previous vertex You can edit only one vertex at a time When editing vertices you can modify the polyline in the following ways Convert a straight polyline segment into a curve Break a polyline into two separate polylines Insert a new vertex in a polyline Move a vertex in a polyline Delete vertices in a polyline Change the width of a polyline segment The Peditext command is used in 2D Editing command group of the Quad cursor menu Editing a polyline using the Quad 1 Move the cursor over the polyline 2 When the Quad cursor menu displays do one of the following e Right click to repeat the previous Quad command e Move the cursor to the Quad and move to the 2D Editing command group Custom 2D Editing Add vertex Adds a vertex to the polyline segment Dimensions 20 Constraints 3 Select a command e Add vertex adds a vertex to the segment under the cursor e Add vertex at end adds as a new vertex at the end of the polyline This option is only available if the cursor is on one of the endpoints of a polyline e Adjust Bulge Modifies the bulge factor of the segment under the cursor
144. Dimensions settings 20 Quad Display e click to toggle the display of the Quad On QUAD or Off QUAD e right click then choose Settings to edit the Quad settings 21 Annotation Scale e displays the current annotation scale CANNOSCALE system variable e right click then choose an annotation scale in the list Choose Custom in the list to launch the SCALELISTEDIT command NOTE Orthogonal mode field 10 is switched off if Polar Tracking field 11 is on and vice versa To customize the status bar 1 Click the down arrow button at the right hand side of the status bar The status options display BricsCAD V14 2 Cursor coordinate values Current Layer Current Color Current Linetype Current Text Style Current Dimension Style Current Workspace Snap Grid Ortho Polar ESnap STrack Lineweight Paper Model Tablet Dynamic UCS Dynamic Input Quad S S S S SSAA SSS S RP S S SJS S SJS x Annotation Scale Do one of the following e Click an unmarked field name to add it to the status bar e Click a marked field name to remove it from the status bar Display or hide scroll bars To toggle scroll bars on off i 2 option Hold down the Shift key then press the F4 function key option Choose Scroll Bars in the View menu Open Text Window Command Bar Shift F2 Status Bar Shitt F3 Pr
145. E A dimension style is a collection of settings and definitions which determine the type of arrowheads text style color of text lines and arrowheads unit type precision etc Dimension styles are saved in the drawing You can create edit and delete dimension styles Dimension styles can be copied between drawings NOTES You cannot delete the current dimension style You cannot delete a dimension style that is used in the drawing Each drawing contains at least one dimension style Exploring dimension styles 1 To open the Dimension Styles Explorer do one of the following e Choose Dimension Styles in the Tools gt Drawing Explorer menu e Double click the Dimension Style field in the Status bar e Right click the Dimension Style field in the Status bar then choose Properties in the context menu e Type dimstyle in the command bar then press Enter 290 User Guide fa Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Drawings Dimension Styles House dwg OS Mia eS E cts Open Drawings E F C BricsCAD Training Bricscad Trai i Layers 5 Layer States peti Linetypes gi Multiline Styles D Multileader Styles Ay Text Styles Dimension Styles Aaaama o rg Visual Styles Q Lights EHE Materials RenderPresets i Blocks faa External References Images li PDF Underlays fe Dependencies Page Setups Section Planes HAA E The current dimension style is marked with
146. Existing blocks Name Source file Scale Rotation SIPL1i1 SIPL11 Cr Blocks2D Kitchen dwg 1 0 0000 Prompt for rotati No Explode General Color Layer Linetype Plot style Lineweight No C ByLayer use current use current use current Block tool properties 0 00 mm Tool Properties Name Hexagon Description Draws a hexagon E Command Command string c c_polygon 6 E General Color C ByLayer Layer use current Linetype use current Linetype scale 0 Plot style use current Lineweight 0 00 mm Text style use current Dim style use current Command tool properties 2 Edit the tool properties 3 Click the OK button to confirm Managing tools To manage the tools on a tool palette do the following 1 Right click the tool A context menu displays Cut Copy Delete Rename Update tool image Specity Image Properties 2 Choose an option in the context menu To specify a tool image 1 Right click the tool and choose Specify Image in the context menu A file dialog box displays 2 Select the image file then click the Open button User Guide NOTE 0 restore the original tool image Right click the tool and choose Remove Image in the context menu 55 BricsCAD V14 To move a tool To move a tool from one palette to another do the following 1 Right click the tool on the source palette and choose Cut in the cont
147. External References Images PDF Underlays vd ea Dependences Lite Page Setups Section Planes fA C BricsCAD House plans Plan_Level1 dwa Details Plan_Level0 dwg mx ild mhla Ei Fe Type il EA Layers cee 4 I Multiline Styles A Multileader Styles Ag Text Styles Ea Dimension Styles Fy Table Styles j 9 m Coordinate Systems 10 views ETE SS Visual Styles 12 amp Lights 13 lt Materials 14 ke RenderPresets 15 E Blocks 16 kl External References pa 17 Images 18 TE PDF Underlays 1 E Dependencies 20 Page Setups 21 Section Planes To open the Drawing Explorer To open the Drawing Explorer window do one of the following e Click the Drawing Explorer tool button HE on the Standard toolbar The Drawing Explorer window opens showing the details of the most recently used category e Click the Layer Linetype Text Style or Dimension Style field in the Status Bar The Drawing Explorer window opens showing the details of the clicked definitions category in the current drawing See Customizing the Status Bar to enable disable fields in the Status Bar e Choose a Drawing Explorer in the Tools menu then select a category in the flyout The Drawing Explorer window opens showing the details of the
148. GuOGQ E Sectio ns Setting S Gi d dh 89 O tho AlY 7 amp fO HXAA A D AZA Sheet Metal Ea Q AS AA A Standa Standard rd Tools Tools j H ead LeeL BERERE G View SBiI PAPLA G LOB VGIO AM aA Toolbar Flyouts On some tool buttons a small black arrow at the bottom right corner of the icon indicates a flyout is available A flyout holds a group of related tools Press and hold the left mouse button to expand the flyout and choose one of the flyout tools The tool that was last chosen remains visible in the collapsed toolbar Each of the flyouts can be opened as a separate toolbar Parent Flyout Draw Lines Polylines Polylines S20 hws BricsCAD V14 Polygon Polygons n ee E 3D Surfaces k Settings Layers Entity Properties Attributes View Real Time Real Time Motion Ea Motion POELLAD Redraw Regen Redraw Regen a R fel Es Generated Generated Vie Views Mechanical Mechanical Mechanica Ea Visualization KZZ 10 User Guide Opening a toolbar 1 In Windows Hover over a toolbar or a blank portion of the toolbar area then right click In Linux Hover over a blank portion of the menu bar status bar or toolbar area then right click A context menu displays BRICSCAD 2 BIMT oolbars Mechanical Browser lt Command Bar Properties Bar Tool Palettes Bar w Status Bar Customize 1 Main CUI file 2
149. JOINING ENTITIES siridir a a O TO TOIN lt CONNEAK IINE Sarrien anana a aa a a a a a T 386 TOJON OIF Cites oye EE a EE A A euties sarnan aaa oe anaes ae 387 Chamfering and Filetting ssssnssunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn DOO Chamfer and Miet Settings au cisevaveradieis rar nna i A E A E E AAAA 388 XVI Table of Contents Chamtfering Entities iiiisisiisiiwssideciessiciiawsiwidiwesiiniieriviivisinnisns SOF Chamfering using the distance distance method ccccccccscesseneeeeeessensnneneeeessaguaaantenegs 389 Chamfering using the length angle Method ccc cee eee ee eesseeseneeeeeeeesensnaeeeeeessauaaannenegs 390 Chamfering all vertices Of a polyline ccc cccecsce seen eee teeeseeeenneeeeeesseenenneneeeesseauaaannesegs 391 FIGUING ENtitieS iiivetitsiiesintniiieiiniinrineNie ED OO 2 Filleting two entities or polyline segments cc cece eee e cence eee eee e ence eeeeeeeeeeseoeeneeeeeeeeunnes 392 FIleting alll vertices OF DOYVING rioris a a a Gulab A E A E E T 393 Filleting two parallel NES riirii iernare ranae aa ieira ei 394 Editino POIylINES siviindsiieidididiniiuwsdiuciivesineidideniiininiieneiinni O95 Converting an entity into a polyline ssssususususnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn SOD Converting an entity Mtoa DoNViNe niensis aaa a a a aa a es 395 Opening and closing polylines ssssunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn DOO TO Close OF pen a POlVIING eritre reikia aa a a a aA 396
150. Light List button BP on the Lights toolbar Choose Drawing Explorer gt Lights in the Tools menu Choose Light List in the View Rendering Lights menu Type ightlist or LL in the command bar then press Enter User Guide Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Lights Render_Scene_Start dwg X Edit properties of the Active Viewport Sun Rx b a 7s Sun Light Hame El General z Status off Distantiight_BackLeft n i a ca Intensity factor 1 Distantlight_BackRight Color RGB 255 255 255 Distantlight_FrontRight Shadows On Pointlight_High Sun Angle Calculator Paintlight_Low Date 21 06 2010 Spotight_BackLeft Time 12 00 Spotlight_BackRight Daylight saving Spotlight_Linear Azimuth Spotight_None Altitude El Source vector Spotlight_Square Spotight1 1 Ye AE E a A a e B E E Rendered Shadow Details Type Soft area Softness 1 Geographic Location Time Zone UTC Universal Coordinated Time Latitude 50 8000 North Longitude 4 3500 East Tool Description name Closes the Drawing Explorer Lights dialog then guides you to the creation of a new light in the drawing Deletes the selected light Select in Closes the Drawing Explorer Lights drawing dialog and selects the light s glyph in the drawing The properties of the light display in the Properties Bar Qo Light ON Click to switch light off Q Light Click to switch light on OFF 523 BricsCAD V14 To define
151. MAJENA sa naedanannees A anaes ku AA a Aai 463 To toggle the clipping boundary of an iMage sssssssssssssssssnrsnsrrsnnnsenenrrnsnennnnsnenrenrnenne 463 PrintNet A 04 TO OPEM THEPATIENT A ls Seana 465 FO CHOOSe the Paper SIZE serren a ca ee eee E maa E twee Seas ean Oe 465 TOECHOOSE Le paper UMCS creii a e A a ed ont EA eae 466 TO choose the paper OFlENlATON esesrianeriu na aAa AAE A E ware AAAA 466 rFOdenethe DIO OMS Cl acae a N A eas 466 TOMMSDECILY thear rcaito DIOl 1 te 5 ha tines a NA A e a A E N 467 TO define the Hot Scale cirein re aaa E ARAA TaN EAA Eada 467 TOSetthe DOC OPUlONS S eanna er a E A E 468 To settheshade DIO MOGS wa vrai rianan sa a a ATOA E a a EA 469 T o define the PlOl SLAMp rrsiienierriernene r a aR a AA akan aateaee anes 469 Nan apPlES anaE e a E A e E I EEA A 470 TO SDECIY LNG NUIMDER Ol CODIES wescn rate scciates ened aa a tan a aa aa eae Ge 470 TO SECra Preview orth DIOL OULDUE rierien a A vented e a A tesaains 471 PIOtLEr Configurati N sits cisctetievsarettiwsatetirscetienisnarnicdens tereenngebieernaw OZ L To create a plotter configuration THe cernar tradi tei torantanrieeea steer nal eae a 471 Fogd a PlOCES I CONTIG UAL OF sistas cca te a wricate E E E Saad eaten nae es 473 TOLASSION a Plotter CON GUPALLOM reaa wat aadd na vatads soncsasaeemmen ae a aoi 473 PICU Style taDles viciisisecciarierecacariasicecvineskevscieitevsaurannereertieesienman 7 Color dependent plot style tables CTB file c
152. N MIPE Fren meN mea ae Se ton Prete re me Main rotor gin roto J T m 4 mi _ The ViewBase command generates associative orthographic and standard isometric views of a 3D solid model in a paper space layout The ViewSection command creates a cross section view based on a standard drawing view generated by the ViewBase command in a paper space layout The ViewUpdate command Updates a selection of drawing views obtained by ViewBase and ViewSection when VIEWUPDATEAUTO 0 The ViewExport command exports the content of drawing views obtained by ViewBase and ViewSection to the Model Space of the drawing This command can be used in paper space only NOTE Drawing views created in V14 2 will show correctly in BricsCAD V13 The most recent V13 2 version is recommended V14 2 drawing views do not display in V12 and older BricsCAD versions 170 User Guide Commands and Toolbars Tools to generate drawing views of your 3D solid model are available on the Generated Views toolbar which is a flyout of the View toolbar Generated Vie AA And the View Generated Views menu Generate Drawing Views 3 Generate Section View rel Update Drawing Views ng Export Drawing Views to Model Space Standard Drawing Views Standard views include multiview orthographic and isometric projections In a technical drawing a multiview orthographic
153. NOTES option Adjust the Toolbar properties El Toolbar Title My Drawing Tools Alias TB_MyDrawingTools Position Floating Visible Hide Rows 1 Xval Yval e Title The toolbar name must include alphanumeric characters with no punctuation other than a dash amp endash or an underscore _ The Title along with the Alias enables the toolbar to be referenced programmatically e Position Defines the display position of the toolbar when the CUI file is loaded The options are Floating Top Left Bottom or Right The latter four refer to the window edge where the toolbar will be docked e Display Defines whether the toolbar displays or not when the CUI file is loaded e Rows Specifies the number of rows when the toolbar position is floating View bars with controls cannot have multiple rows e Xval When the position is Floating specifies the X coordinate in pixels measured from the left edge of the screen to the left side of the toolbar e Yval When the position is Floating specifies the Y coordinate in pixels measured from the top edge of the screen to the top of the toolbar Click the Apply button to save the definition s The new toolbar is loaded only if the Display property is set to Show See Opening a Toolbar for more information on opening toolbars User Guide To add a flyout to a toolbar 1 In the Customize dialog click the Toolbars tab If collapsed expand the menu group e g BRICSCAD 3 Do one o
154. OMING sissscsescettecasinaiaedsoteasiearraahs aavatedtawensananemanarerresaaundaediaesainaedsom anaes 129 Dynamic ZOOMING eataa eed einer ating a a ted NaN olan none nakelias 129 View manipulation using the mouse and keyboard s2s52 130 Setting the ZOOM Factor Variable srra rini iaiia E e ee eeeeeeeenene ee eeeseeeennnneeeesseagaaanneeegs 130 Setting the Middle Button Pan vVariable cccccccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeesseeeanneneeeesseeganannenggs 131 VIEW ROCAUION isisisi irnia AFA ARA tae OL Restoring orthographic and isometric VIEWS ccccceessee seen eee eeeeeeeeeneteeeseeeaanenneteesteeaanaees 131 ROCALING sar VIEW MEE oiiicc ce aas ie ccanwasicncavaawen nauacsoadusunde cosa nig eaiacenes dheas a EE ETA 132 Rotating a view about the view X AXIS Lo ccecc cece eect e cece eee nese eee e eee eee E DSS e eee e ESSE EEE EES 133 Rotating a view about the view Y AXIS ccc cccsseccceeeceeeusseccsuecceveessccveusuresseeecusseuvenensesgausans 133 Rotating a view about the View Z AXIS v cccccssecccssccesecssccuueecaveccssecsveurressassccrseuveuennesaaunans 134 Using Preset VIEW DOINUS reser enea a westuda dotadedas venue weasel esa eai d aoa a 134 RESTON Plam VIEW anaes oa aoa ER EA ae ehcea ee Ra cena lela aoe hea AE oa tute elena aceboy 136 Laver STIO S wisiiscewictcissncccnsecatarssnncceresscceeverssetsrassner reaver Loe Opening the Laver States Explorer rainen aa a hepa eee ae wana Aa 137 TOsSaAVETHe current layer Stale ireren ina A
155. Open the Text Style Explorer dialOgnerneipnnisni aaa AA a aaa 306 TO create aitex C SEVIS renra E a A A a E E A A a 306 Toedit a text Style suiro a a a a A Ea E Nt 307 Tomake a text stie CUrrent eraa E E A T TAE 307 To delete a text SEV E aO A E A E AA 307 CreauinG TEX Cisse OOO TOscreate single lihe text sidcaviicnsvedinncinsnusca vad eeteurveaudasea naw riaavawe ca pevaawtanoveadeunesued aat 308 SINGLE TING text JUSETMCAHON cacsarsaniss a see maiiuasdanea oumhunesatealesau tannins esiateneuunes 309 TO Create MURINE TOX anean teaas a A T seaGne ese ieagudenteaesen2iGan mimes saaauhameaset baa 309 Text formatting toolbar tools and settings ccccccce eee e eee e eee eeeee ee eeeeeeeeeesesseseeuneneeebasnes 310 MURIE text FUSEMCALION ernn a tae vaucenpented mar rate de etaaan mune inmate he cteuonan ini conmasaanes 311 Including special text characters ANd SyMDOIS cccccecceescceeeeeeeneeeeseessneeneeeessecunaantenegs 311 Special TOXE CMa ra O S 2 v4ase ats dacines 201 AA meateaicanauaabontan seamen Gaeta E 311 SYMBOLS ais i GO GS SINOS taxis ius Pence ina ENAA ah esate NE ae ctued alee ay Bate Wie Mla aladdin catalan 312 Ona sa DACKGFOund MaSK rorarii eE A A EAA A 312 Editing COX pissaitsctscnisauiaradtarineniirriasersivinteitintenisivinnoariimeeeo LS One Gite eX EL ONI Y wasaacavecs cavkinenes nae vauaemavonbe nes nace eed mateue ata sanceceea ni auaweeeaan vate OT 313 Toedita selecto of MtExt entUs rrari Gitkcen beady cae ee nan
156. Opening and closing a polyline using the BricsCAD Properties bar ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeneenees 396 JoiNINO POINVIINES esre N a OT To join an arc line or polyline to an existing polyline sssssssssnssrsrenennnrsnsrenrnrerrnrersrenes 397 Changing the polyline width sssssnnnssunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn SOO To apply a uniform width to a polyline ssssssasssssssnsnrrrnrsrsnrnrsnrrrnrnnenrnrsrerrnnnrenrnrrrerenas 398 To taper a polyline uniformly along its length ssensssnnssensnsnnnnsnssrnnnnssenrsnsnennnnsnenrrnsnenae 398 Editing polyline vertiCeS sssss2222222u2 2 202 252u2u2usussu u sussnusnnees 99O Editing a DOVIne USING LNG OUAG rerien EN e aa Ea O e EA 399 Starting the polyline vertex editing mode ssssssssssssssrsnsrsnenrrnrrrsnnnsnenrrnrnrnnnnrsenrrnrnrnne 400 Convert a straight polyline segment into an arC ssssssssssssensnsssnrsnsrennnnrsenrrnsnerrnnrrenrrnne 400 Break a polyline into two Separate POlyliINeS ccccccccce cece cece eeeeee seen eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanaaeeees 401 Ins rt a NEW vertex ini a DOV IMCss c sss acvaveanataeatcineesdadawpa ter a a sentient et anetanas 401 MOVE a vertex Ina DOLV INN Cetin cassirevets a anecanented eter ine de eiunae many hanaudenpeeeeones a 402 Delete vertices Ih a DOVINE aina a canetataetenaias anes A kaaan ea ace tue NERA aaa REA 402 Change the width of a polyline segment ccc cccccce esse ener eee eesenneneeeeeseenenneneeeesseeuna
157. Partial CUI file s In the context menu choose either the Main CUI file e g BRICSCAD or one of the Partial CUI files if any A list of available toolbars in the selected CUI file displays Toolbars that are already open are checked If the list does not fit on the screen click the arrow keys on the top and the bottom to scroll 2D Constraints 3D Constraints 3D Faces 3D Solid Editing 3D Solids 3D Surfaces Arcs Attributes Circles Color Design Intent v Dimensions Direct Modeling wv Draw vw Draw Order Select the toolbar on the context menu The toolbar opens option Dock the toolbar by dragging the toolbar by its title bar to one of the edges of the BricsCAD application window 11 BricsCAD V14 NOTES If you select a toolbar that was already open it will be closed To prevent a toolbar from docking press and hold the Ctrl key while dragging the toolbar _ 3 Drag a toolbar by the grip at its left or top edge To dock a toolbar vertically in Linux the Position property of the toolbar must be set to Left or Right to undock Closing a toolbar 1 NOTE In Windows Place the cursor on a toolbar then right click In Linux Place the cursor on the menu bar then right click A context menu displays Choose BRICSCAD on the context menu Toolbars that are open are checked In the toolbar list uncheck the toolbar you want to close Floating toolbar can be closed by clicking the Cl
158. Polar lt Rectangular gt 376 User Guide 3 Choose Rectangular in the prompt menu or type R in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Number of rows in the array lt 1 gt 4 Type the number of rows in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Number of columns lt 1 gt 5 Type the number of columns in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Number of levels lt 1 gt 6 Type the number of levels in de command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Vertical distance between rows 7 To define the distance between rows of the array do one of the following e Type the distance in the command bar and press Enter e Specify the distance by clicking two points The command bar reads Horizontal distance between columns 8 To define the distance between the columns of the array do one of the following e Type the distance in the command bar and press Enter e Specify the distance by clicking two points The command bar reads Depth between levels 9 To define the distance between the levels of the array do one of the following e Type the distance in the command bar and press Enter e Specify the distance by clicking two points The array is created Rectangular 3D Array row spacing A column spacing B level spacing C NOTE Positive values in steps 7 8 and 9 are measured along the positive X Y and Z axis of the current UCS Negative values are measured in
159. S viii OO Open the Images Ex PIOrer scctescunineachinnovsnas a aa E TOEA Wada Deen EENAA 456 Images Explorer display Options cccccccsssssssseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenneneeneSOOSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSESS 456 Open the Detail View of the Images Explorer ccccceeeeecscesseeeeeeeeeseensnaneeeeesseeugaannenegs 457 Open the Icon View of the Images Explorer cccee cece eee eesseeeeeneeeeeeeseenenaeneeeesseeguaanneeegs 457 Open the Tree View of the Images Explorer cccce cece ee eesecesnneeeeeeesecesnaeneeeeseeegaaannenegs 458 Placing IMAGES in a drawing s 2 2222u22u22u20u20u2uuuuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 458 XIX BricsCAD V14 Bor fete am U nl d Ml gate le peer rere rere rrerrrrrrr reer errr rrr rrr reer rrr rrerrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr err rrr rrr try 460 Load Unload a single IMAG S vecrawoiacatamoctianns E I outacenen dies Mae eskeoisannniactiesaneaes 460 Load Unload multiple IMAGES viaiiccsceissiierwians evavarsdaseenaaiaeeraneesevenawindeeandidaveraniaaeaadee es 460 Removing RUE eee ECP Eee P eC rR Ere r rrr rere reer rrr rrr ecrererrerrrrr rrr erererecrrrrrrrrerrrrrr ceri re rrr errr errr ere 461 Detach Mage saroi A AA Sagopa ase unk waa N mata 461 Image UtIltieS imine OZ TO Set the iMage transparency waivecrreicsvwscaverss ve ra ATARE NERES ANAA TEETE Ada 462 Modify the Image Frame Setting pniccccotssaikciccasik canes maton da ina eee eee aaa acs Pada meaeeueaes 462 TOCID aN
160. SCURRENT system variable Managing workspaces Workspaces are defined in the Workspace tab page on the Customize dialog Do one of the following e Open the Customize dialog then select the Workspace tab e Right click the Current Workspace field in the Status Bar then choose Customize Workspaces in the context menu 145 BricsCAD V14 Customize A O Workspaces E O 2D Drafting 3D Modeling EO Quad Group Order P Mechanical Browser m Annotative l pe Ty Show Mechanical Browser PF Direct Modeling a Ty Hide Mechanical Browser P 3D Constraints P Assembly Modeling F Sheet Metal E ai Enable Xref Selection Preview 9 Bil Of Materials H O Sheet Metal i H O Direct Modeling El On Switch Tool ID Mmcad_browser_show Help Shows Mechanical Browser Command c c_bmBrowser show Image mcad_browser Revert to defaults 3 workspaces are available in the Default cul e 2D Drafting e 3D Modeling e Sheet Metal A workspace definition is composed of e The Quad Group Order which defines the order and availability of the Quad command groups e The On Switch sequence which defines the system variables and user preferences to be set and the commands to be executed when switching to the workspace Setting the current workspace Do one of the following e Right click the Current Workspace field in the Status Bar then select a workspace in the context menu D Drafting 1D Modeling heet Metal My
161. SPINES ricivia aaa aaa 2 Lo Drawno DINES aae aA TA A EEN TAEA AAE ANAD 211 Prace S csaa a A ee Drawing ACS ia E E cera E NEE E E oink Malad EEA 212 WIDCOULS aironi Ea a 2 L TO Create a Wipeout using POINTS eerdirini ea a E a a E 213 To create a wipeout from a polyline sssssssssssssssssnnsnssrsnnnsssnrsnsrrunnnsnenrensnennnnenenrrnsnenne 213 To control the display of the edges Of wipeouts cc cece cece eeeeeeee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeesanaaeeees 214 MECialIGalitrisiiiarsrsiiiaveaneuiesereisinesisieinierievisieaeeeieiniersiemieieiresiane 2 Components and Component InSertS s 2222 22 22222u22u22u20u22u2uu2uunuununnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 215 Commands anG TOOLDAES ssri ainahan Aaaa AN AA raaraa 215 MeEChaliCal BrOWS Ch iiciiiccunaatccaneasssannsantensnnaiastnnsdnacdansaahanansandadsheutasdansiseuWansaabaaantansauebnn 216 Bill Of Materials siincstsanniccnadannaadisanseaorsannonasannieapnsadeaapraawiaaeneareNaRNieMpANepIaRMaaOREERieeDS 217 Organizing Geometry IN COMPONeE DS s sss 25 22u22u20u20u20u2uu2uunuununnnnnnnnnnnnn 217 Changing Mechanical Structure ccntncccaresesconanvnaransscaveadadaarsaadeeiearaweberiantecsaaieedsanaaaeaeaws 218 Usiig Standal Gara Wal C riras anaE ceawerd vac clegas eae A naan 218 ASSEMDIY COMSEFAIAES eiea E A EE E E painaaaaas eee T E 218 COmMDONCHEVISIDITY ornate rre aaa A A E A E a e Sowbrinanauate 218 Assembly Design and Kinematic Analysis Tutorial ssssssseesseeeeee
162. STYLE DIMSTYLE TABLESTYLE EXPUCS VIEW VISUALSTYLES LIGHTLIST MATERIALS RENDERPRESETS EXPBLOCKS XREF IMAGE PDF eTRANSMIT PAGESETUP SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Sy The Drawing Explorer Internet connection needed The Drawing Explorer window consists a number of sub windows or panes Drawings Open Drawings a list of all drawings that are currently open Folders your favorite drawing folders Details the details of the selected drawing or the details of the selected category in a drawing e g layers blocks images Preview a preview of the selected drawing layer block view dimension style table style XRef image or material Use the arrow keys to browse through the items Fditor to define or edit the properties of Multiline Styles Multileader Styles Table Styles Views Visual Styles Sunlight settings Materials Render Presets and Section Planes You can select which panes you want to have open or closed in the View menu BricsCAD remembers the display settings for each category 495 BricsCAD V14 Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Drawings Open Drawings E C BricsCAD House Plans Foundation dwg C BricsCAD House Plans Plan_Level0 dwg geet Layers 5 Layer States ois Linetypes i Multiline Styles 2 Multileader Styles Ay Text Styles wf Dimension Styles a Table Styles Coordinate Systems 2 EP Views 4 Visual Styles Es Materials RenderPresets EH Blocks i
163. Setting the current properties in the Properties Bar sssssssssssususnsnsusnsnsnsnsnsnnnnneneneneneneno 17 Edit the properties OF a single entity rasina nervni e AE EA E meal 18 TOecditthe endpoints OF aS ee a a a a Y 19 To edit the vertices of a polyline s sssssnssssssssnnnsssnrsssnssnnnsrensrnsnesrnnensnenrrnenrunnnenenrrnrnenne 20 Edit the shared properties of a selection Set cccccceseeeeueeeceeeueeeeuceueenueereetseeerettsueeuenneas 21 KEV bOard SNOFECUES irirna 2 Model Space and paper Space ssescccccnnecccccnnnececccnnnsescesnnnsssessnnesses 24 Understanding paper space and model Space ssssssssssssssnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnnnsnsnsnnnsnsnnnnnnnne 24 Switching between model space and paper Space sssssssssssrensesrrsnsrsuenrrnereunnnrnenrrnrnenne 24 using the modeland layout ta BSairiire r ee E AE E AE E i 24 Toggle between model space and paper space in a layoUut sssssssrsrersrrsrsnerrnrnrerenrererenns 25 CUSTOMIZING BricSCAD wicccissriscntsscissniaredssncavederniesedsaaiasiereaeecinneO BricSCAD Startup Options cccccnsessccenneesseecnnnsescecnnnssscsnsenssssssenesss D7 BriGSCAD USEF TIES icisiativsire cies anO The BricsCAD USEF fil emanager sivcucserccineaideasseteqnanaatewendedaarnanieesneea Wht eanas de aatakdaewenas ene 29 Understanding the Customize Dialog cccccccssscnnnnnnsesseeseessseeeesssss OO Wide are the CUT Tiles a2 abicasacrtancuatiiar ons cau A onamiar ies seat namear
164. Settings dialog then expand the Coordinate input sub category under Drafting in the Drawing settings class Expand the Snap Tracking settings group El Snap tracking El AutoSnap Ox003F 63 1 AutoSnap marker 2 AutoSnap tooltips 4 AutoSnap magnet 8 Polar tracking 16 Entity snap tracking 32 Tooltips for polar tracking and entity snap tracking Polar angle 45 0 Polar add angles 30 60 E Polar mode OxO00F 15 1 Relative 2 Use polar tracking settings in entity snap tracking Use additional polar tracking angles 8 Press SHIFT to acquire entity snap tracking points Track path 0 Display full screen entity snap tracking path 2 Adjust the settings e 1 Autosnap marker not used required for AutoCad compatibility only e 2 Autosnap tooltips not used required for AutoCad compatibility only e 4 Autosnap magnet not used required for AutoCad compatibility only e 8 If checked Polar Tracking is on 110 User Guide e 16 If checked Object Snap Tracking is on e 32 If checked tooltips display for polar tracking and entity snap tracking e Polar angle Sets the polar angle increment e Polar add angles Sets the additional polar angles Separate angles by semicolons e 1 If checked polar angles are measured relatively from selected entities e 2 If checked the polar angles interval and additional angles are also used in entity snap tracking e 4 If checked the additional angles for polar tracking are used
165. TAB key to select an obscured face Click the DUCS field in the Status Bar to toggle the dynamic ucs feature The following direct modeling operations are available in BricsCAD Icon Command Applies to dmPushPul Planar cylindrical Faces adds volume to or removes volume from the spherical conical and solid by cursor movement or direct distance input toroidal faces of a Closed 2D entity If attached to a face of a solid solid creates a solid by extruding the 2D entity The Closed 2D entities height of the extrusion is specified by cursor attached to a solid movement or direct distance input Depending on the extrusion direction the newly created solid is unified with or subtracted from the existing solid the 2D entity was attached to dmMove Cylindrical spherical Moves the selected geometry using a vector in the conical and toroidal XY plane of the current UCS When a face or an faces of a solid edge of a solid is moved adjacent faces and edges Linear and circular are adjusted to preserve the correct solid topology edges of a solid Solids 253 BricsCAD V14 dmRotate Planar cylindrical Rotates the selected geometry around an axis spherical conical and When a face of a solid is rotated adjacent faces toroidal faces of a and edges are adjusted to preserve the correct solid solid topology Solids a dmFillet Sharp edges of a Creates a fillet between adjacent faces sharing a solid sharp edge
166. TEM rinisin oiea a 2ocdwandi ete NRA Aa 117 T restore the WCS niri aoa aara re a OA RAEAN EE ia 117 WONREStCORG a UCS iia e bad noc eae bn a N ED 118 To setar latve UCS enaa a a a a O a a aA 118 Command ODON S vinereevivediacscaden vacenaveedageraatacsveneeds an ceweoqetareunae r AGA 119 W A A E E 2 O MEASURING distance S niron E T E E A are eae Aa 120 Measuring length esine E cata a aa a a a a A E T 121 Meas ring QhCAS ssrsrrironimieidor inn a aaa aar aaa ae awet 122 vi Table of Contents VIEWING YOUF Drawing siitisdieerivttivetniediteriiii nitive Leo Laver UTII IC S irinen Redrawing and Regenerating a Drawing ssss 2 2 L2O Regenerate the current viewport ssssssssssssssrsesrensnnssenrrnrnenrenereusnnsnenrenrnenennrneneunenrn 126 Regenerate all ViEWPOMMS ve scccsiscatandseedasevanwennsveanvariaiavinaataarianiessvesawtnaraniegaannendaanneneaians 126 Redraw the current VICW DOF sitisiaclecticpuares hace thadun tates saad amndne ia bya aa need T a 126 Redraw alli VICW DONS hice say cca cated cae wee ax seate nae E pence amen ie eee ue ee 126 mcllllleltherrrrrrerrtrirtre rer rr eer errr errr cere rer rcerrrrercrrrerere rece LA using the Dan COMMANG sw eatadradess iendnsiek viree aa cee ean nawel aaa AEAEE AEA 127 STG realtime panning sarena ae am Ge a tested a erates a A atten tees rae See eee eae 127 COOMA GS i a LO Usina CHE ZOOM COMMANG irise ornon a a etanaanaes sa onunracutaewes aetna A 128 Real time ZO
167. Table file F Dropbox ES default stb 29 11 2013 15 43 BricsCAD Plot Style Table file Recent Places ES displaycolors cth 29 11 2013 15 442 BricsCAD Plot Color Table file di Art ka displaycolors darkbg ctb 29 11 2013 15 42 BricsCAD Plot Color Table file iCloud Photos ES Mechanical ctb 10 11 2013 18 26 BricsCAD Plot Color Table file f SkyDrive ES menochrome cth 29 11 2013 15 442 BricsCAD Plot Color Table file Ee monechrome stb 29 11 2013 15 43 BricsCAD Plot Style Table file Libraries ES StandardPens ctb 22 09 2013 13 00 BricsCAD Plot Color Table file E3 Documents Ea StandardPens stb 15 11 2013 17 33 BricsCAD Plot Style Table file al Music 10 tems The Add Plot Style Table Editor dialog opens Plot Style Table Editor Select Open plotstyle table Create new from scratch Create new from existing table Select file Open an existing plot style table file 3 Choose Create new from scratch Plot Style Table Editor Select 0 Open plotstyle table Create new from scratch Create new from existing table Table type Table name A color dependent plot style table will be created CTB containing 255 plot styles one for every color index 482 User Guide 4 Do one of the following e Select either CTB or STB from the Table type selection button CTB Color dependent Plot Style Table bases plots on entity colors Plotting parameters such as pen thickness and linetype are
168. Therefore these constraints can be used to keep lines at a fixed angle rather than only horizontal or vertical To constrain a line to a fixed angle L NOTE 92 Align the X axis of the coordinate system to the desired angle e Type UCS in the command bar then press Enter e Choose Z in the prompt menu or type Z then press Enter e Type the angle then press Enter Click the Horizontal tool button on the 2D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select an entity or 2Points lt 2Points gt Click the line or polyline segment The selected entity is constrained to be parallel to the X axis of the current UCS option Restore the WCS Type UCS in the command bar then press Enter twice Use the Vertica tool in the above procedure to constrain entities to be parallel to the Y axis of the current UCS User Guide Dynamic Dimensions Dynamic dimensions provide an interface at the cursor position to specify the length and angle of the linear entity being created or grip edited As such dynamic dimensions help you to focus on the drawing area The behavior and appearance of dynamic dimensions is controlled through a series of system variables and user preferences Defining the Dynamic Dimensions Settings 1 Right click the DYNMODE field in the Status Bar then choose Settings in the context menu The Dynamic input settings in the Settings dialog display O Drawing El Drafting Drawing units Coordinate in
169. Total area display in the command bar Optionally press the F2 function key to display the Prompt History window press F2 again to close the Prompt History window Do one of the following e Repeat steps 3 through 6 to add another area e Press the Esc key to stop User Guide Viewing Your Drawing BricsCAD provides various tools to control the display and view orientation of your drawing These tools can be found either in the View menu or the View toolbar or both e PPEP teme aH B mg Redraw Regen A el fet Er PP DLO LE Real Time Motion amp fp ty Look From lea Av AAB View toolbar and its flyouts Look From toolbar C eseipten REDRAW Refreshes the screen display in the current viewport Redraw All REDRAWALL Refreshes the screen display in all open viewports el Regenerate REGEN Recalculates the screen display in the current viewport Regenerate All REGENALL Recalculates the screen display in all open viewports Update Fields UPDATEFIELD Updates the selected fields ar Real Time Pan RTPAN Pans the view dynamically Real Time Zoom RTZOOM Zooms in out dynamically ZOOM I Zooms in on the center of the window by a factor of 2 123 BricsCAD V14 P Zoom Out ZOOM O Zooms out from the center of the window by a factor of 1 2 Zoom Extents ZOOM E Displays all the entities in the drawing referred to as the drawing extents a Zoom Window ZOOM W You are prompted to pick two corner
170. Visual Style 2dWireframe E misc Annotation scale 1 1 Properties Bar No selection The current entity properties View properties and Annotation scale display NOTE Properties Bar E3 Posie ooo y F Ej General _ E ey aver layer FURNITURE Linetype scale 2 5 cal 2 54 Lineweight ne E ByLayer ey 3D Visualization Material ByLayer Ej Geometry Pea Vertes 4 t en Bulge 0 Global width 0 z Bj Misc Linetype general Disabled Properties Bar Single entity selected The properties of the selected entity display The Properties Bar can be either floating or docked Properties Bar Povine _________ J Ej General _ a Layer FURNITURE Linetype scale 2 54 Lineweight yperink Thidness o El 3D Visua lization ByLayer ByLayer Ej Geometry Vertices Global width O Elevation Ej Misc Closed Yes Linetype general Disabled 650 Properties Bar Multiple entities selected The shared properties of the selected entities display To dock the Properties Bar drag it by its title bar to either the left or right hand side of the BricsCAD application window NOTE 16 Read only fields display in grey The content of a read only field can be copied though To copy a read only field click the field then press Ctrl C User Guide To adjust the size of the Properties Bar 1 Move the cursor over
171. WEFFECT system variables facilitate the selection procedure 349 BricsCAD V14 Composing a selection set before pre pick NOTE To compose a selection set before launching a modification command do one or more of the following Click an entity The entity highlights and grips show NOTE _ f the Quad cursor menu is active you must press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting entities Click again to unselect Click to define the first corner of a selection window All entities which overlap the window or are completely inside the window are added to the selection set The selection window displays in dashed lines with a green background Click to define the first corner of a selection window Move the mouse to the right to define a Window Inside All entities which are completely inside the window are added to the selection set The selection window displays in continuous lines with a blue background Press an hold the Shift key then use one of the above methods to select entities that you want to remove from the selection set If the PICKADD system variable is OFF you cannot add entities to a selection set Composing a selection set afterwards post pick Command SELECT 350 1 If you launch a modification command when no selection set is active you are prompted to select entities BricsCAD provides a range of selection methods to let you compose your selection set easily The various selection methods
172. Workspace Customize Workspaces e Type wscurrent at the command prompt The command bar reads New value for WSCURRENT or for none lt 2d DRAFTING gt Type the name of the new current workspace then press enter 146 User Guide Creating a workspace 1 Right click the Current Workspace field in the Status Bar then choose Customize Workspaces in the context menu 2 Do one of the following e Select Workspaces then right click and choose Append Workspace in the context menu e Select an existing workspace then right click and choose Insert Workspace in the context menu 3 Type a name for the new workspace then click the OK button Add workspace m When appending a workspace the new workspace is created below the last existing workspace When inserting a workspace the new workspace is created above the selected workspace A new workspace contains a Quad Group Order list and an empty On Switch sequence a D E T Quad Group Order E O On Switch T E Quad Group Order Wa 30 Constraints a Dimensions Smu 20 Constraints T Sheet Metal Editing a workspace 1 Right click the Current Workspace field in the Status Bar then choose Customize Workspaces in the context menu 2 If necessary click the Expand button of the workspace 3 option To change the order of the Quad command groups press and hold the left mouse button then drag a command group to its new
173. You repeat this procedure for different bend angles bend radius and sheet thickness and save the measurements in a bend table Then these measurements can be taken into account to compute the correct unfolded length for all parts made of the same material In a bend table you can add the results for as many different bend angles as you want However in most cases it suffizes to measure the length for a 90 degrees angle BricsCAD will 235 BricsCAD V14 automatically compute the length for other bend angles using a reliable interpolation technique Bend tables are stored in a csv comma separated values file format You can create such a table in an ASCII text editor such as Notepad but a more reliable and easier way is to create a table in a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel or LibreOffice and then export it to csv file format Bend tables in BricsCAD have the following structure 1 BricsCAD 2 Version 1 3 AngleType Internal 4 LengthType BendDeductionTangent 5 6 6 Thickness 1 7 AngleValues 45 60 90 120 135 Py Radius 1 1 333 2 0 976 0 657 9 Radius 2 0466 1 081 2 31 1 004 0 641 10 Radius 3 0 069 0 828 2 621 1 033 0 624 11 12 Thickness 1 13 DieWidth 10 14 AngleValues 45 60 90 120 135 15 Radius 1 1225 1 533 2 15 1 076 0 732 16 Radius 2 0616 1 214 2 41 1 071 0 691 17 Radius 3 0 006 0 895 2 671 1 066 0 649 The following rules apply e The content of the first cell reads BricsCAD e Version
174. _1 j Bend_1 3 1 Flange_ z BendRelief_1 i BendRelie f2 Bj Component Name Cower Description C Bricsys Reports Wis EW Sheet metal Thickness 3 Default KFactor 0 27324 El Bend Radius 7 Type Thickness ratio Value 1 Changing the bend radius To change the overall bend radius 1 Select the root node in the Mechanical Browser 2 Do one of the following e Set Type to Absolute Value then type the thickness in the Value field The Bend Radius field changes accordingly e Set Type to Thickness ratio then type a value in the Value field The Bend Radius field is calculated as the product of the Thickness and the Thickness ratio To change the bend radius for a particular bend 1 Select the bend node in the Mechanical Browser The selected bend highlights in the model 2 Do one of the following e Set the Type to Global value The current global bend radius is applied to the selected bend e Set the Type to Absolute value then type the thickness in the Value field The Bend Radius field changes accordingly e Seth the Type to Thickness Ratio and type a value in the value field The Bend Radius field is calculated as the product of the Thickness and the Thickness ratio 245 BricsCAD V14 To Unfold the Sheet Metal Body To unfold your sheet metal body select a start flange face and run SmUnfold command BricsCAD will automatically create a solid body corresponding to a flat sheet of metal ne
175. a displacement point All points and nodes inside the selected area will be moved over the specified distance As a result entities that cross the window or polygon boundary are stretched those completely within the window or polygon are simply moved The Copy option of the Grips Editing commands allows to create multiple copies of the entities being stretched moved rotated mirrored or scaled To stretch entities 1 Do one of the following e Click the Stretch tool button LA on the Extend Stretch flyout of the Modify toolbar e Choose Stretch in the Modify menu e Type stretch or S in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Select entities to stretch by crossing window or crossing polygon A prompt menu displays STRETCH Crossing window Crossing polygon Remove Add Cancel 2 option Choose Crossing window in the Stretch prompt menu then define the stretch area by a rectangular window 3 option Choose Crossing polygon in the Stretch prompt menu then define the stretch area by a polygon 4 option Repeat steps 2 and 3 to expand the stretch area 5 option Choose Remove in the Stretch prompt menu to select entities in the stretch area that must not be stretched 6 option Choose Add in the Stretch prompt menu to add previously remove entities to the selection of entities that must be stretched 7 Right click to conclude the selection of entities The command bar reads Base po
176. a hatch in a dialog box 1 Do one of the following e Double click a hatch or gradient fill entity e Type hatchedit at the command prompt then select a hatch or gradient fill entity 276 The Hatch Edit dialog displays FY Hatch Edit 5 MASONRY_EXIS va 150 pen width Cross Hatch Hatch Origin Use current origin Specified origin Pick new origin Edit the Pattern settings Edit the Boundary settings ore uN User Guide Boundaries Pick points in boundaries Select boundary entities Remove boundary entities Boundary set Current viewport Boundary retention Retain boundaries as Polylines Islands Boundary tolerance Tolerance 0 0 Options al Annotative E Create separate hatches Inherit properties option Select the Gradient tab to turn the Hatch into a Gradient fill Click the OK button to apply the changes To edit a gradient fill in a dialog box 1 Do one of the following e Double click a hatch or gradient fill entity e Type hatchedit at the command prompt then select a hatch or gradient fill entity The Hatch Edit dialog displays 277 BricsCAD V14 278 ao eS Hatch Edit Color One color i Two colors MG teroveterry ere Current viewport ft New Boundary retention _ Retain boundaries as Polyines Annotative Create separate hatches bow order Nene Centered Angle 0 0000 Inherit properties x
177. a light 524 1 Do one of the following e Type light in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Enter light type Point Spot Web Distant lt Point gt A prompt menu displays Distant Cancel Choose a light type in the prompt menu e Click the tool button of the light type you want to create on the Lights toolbar o New spot light Q New point light e New distant light Do one of the following e Specify the source position in the drawing e Type the coordinates of the source position in the command bar and press Enter e Press Enter to accept the default coordinates The command bar reads Specify target position lt 0 0 10 gt Do one of the following e Specify the target position in the drawing e Type the coordinates of the target position in the command bar and press Enter e Press Enter to accept the default coordinates The command bar reads Enter an option to change Name Intensity factor Status Photometry Hotspot Falloff shadoW Attenuation filterColor lt eXit gt A prompt menu displays LIGHT Name Intensity factor Status Photometry Hotspot Falloff shadow Attenuation filterColor 4 Do one of the following e Select Name inthe prompt box e Type N in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Enter light name lt Spotlight1 gt User Guide 5 Do one of the following e Type a name in the command bar and press Enter e Press Enter
178. able Editor Note A color dependent plot style table always contains 255 plot styles Apply global scale Specifies whether or not you want to scale all non ISO linetypes in the plot factor to non ISo_ Styles linetypes of entities controlled by the plot style table Scale factor Specifies the factor by which to scale non ISO linetypes and fill patterns The Form View tab The Form View tab lists the plot styles contained in the plot style table and their settings Plot styles are style overrides for your drawings that occur during plotting The first plot style in a Named Plot Style table is NORMAL and represents an entity s default properties no plot style applied You cannot modify or delete the NORMAL style 477 BricsCAD V14 Plot Style Table Editor MyPens ctb Style Properties Color Black olor 3 F Dither olor 4 eae z El Convert to grayscale lor 5 olor 6 Physical pen Automatic olor 7 olor 8 Virtual pen Automatic olor 9 olor 10 Screening 100 I olor 11 WB color 12 Wi Color 13 F Adaptive adjustment WE color 14 MB color 15 Lineweight 6000 mm Linetype Use entity linetype Description Line end style B Square Line join style gt Diamond Fill style Use entity fill style Save amp Close Cancel Property Plot styles Displays the names of plot styles contained in the selected plot style table Color dependent plot style table A
179. able Editor dialog displays If the Use this plotstyle for the current drawing option is chosen the new plot style table is used in the current layout NOTE The above procedure creates a CTB file in CTB type drawing and a STB file in a STB type drawing 483 BricsCAD V14 To edit a plot style table 1 Open the Plot Styles Manager 2 Double click the plot style table you want to edit The Plot Style Table Editor dialog displays To edit a plot style table in the Print dialog 1 Open the Print dialog 2 Select a plot style table from the Plot Style Table list button 3 Click the edit Edit plot style button E4 The Plot Style Table Editor dialog displays Batch Plot Commands PUBLISH SHEETSET The Publish command allows to print a sheet list a list of model space or paper space layouts to a printer A sheet list can be saved to a file The SheetSet command manages sheet sets and allows to print publish or etransmit a sheet set as a whole or a selection of sheets 484 User Guide Managing Drawings Opening and saving drawings Commands OPEN SAVE SAVEAS SAVEALL The way BricsCAD opens and saves drawings is controlled through a series of system variables and user preferences In the table below the SYSTEM VARIABLES are fully capitalized Name ___ Tite Description O O Z ShowFullPathInTitle Display full Controls wether the full path of a drawing path in title displays in the
180. ad command e Quad command sorting e Sort commands within groups most recently used command first e Sort command groups morst recently used group on top e Quad Controls the Quad display e Quad Width Defines the number of commands in a row Default 4 commands e Quad icon size Small icons 16 x 16 pixels or Large icons 32 x 32 pixels Small Icons Large Icons e Quad icon space Defines the size of the Quad tool buttons small normal or large x GOA X O A P X OJ A ea m Narrow Normal Wide e Quad show delay Sets the time lap in milliseconds between the highlighting of the entity and the Quad display e Quad hide margin Sets the distance in pixels the cursor can move away from the Quad If the cursor moves outside this limit the Quad is hidden e Quad hide delay Sets the time lap in milliseconds to hide the Quad when the cursor is outside the Quad hide margin limit e Quad tooltips Controls the display of command tooltips e Quad transparency delay Sets the time lap in milliseconds before the Quad display becomes transparent e Quad transparency factor Sets the Quad transparency factor in percent 0 Opaque 100 fully transparent 70 User Guide e Quad expand group Defines when a Quad command group is expanded on mouse enter or on mouse click e Quad warp pointer Defines what to do to keep the position of the pointer and the cursor in sync when a command group expands or collapses move the
181. ain customization file C Users Louis AppData Roaming Bricsys BricsCADW 14x64 en_US Support defar H O Hatch Object a Available tools H O Leader Object E O BRICSCAD E 7 i L oO veces O M E TF TAARI Bl eo IT F Multiple Leader Object J Attribute Definition Object Load partial CUI file H O Tolerance Object Create new partial CUI file El MYPERSONALCUI Se Unload MYPERSONALCUI Append tomes Name MYPERSONALCUI Fie OC WWsers Louis AppData Roaming Bricsys Bricscad W 14x64 en_US Support MyPersonalCui cui 3 Type a name for the new toolbox in the Title field of the Add toolbox dialog 36 User Guide Add toolbox rx Title 4 Click the OK button The toolbox is added in the Available Tools tree 5 Click the Apply button to save the definition To add a tool in a toolbox 1 In the Customize dialog select a toolbox in the Available Tools tree 2 Right click and choose Append tool in the context menu The Add tool dialog displays Add tool 3 Type a name for the new tool in the Title field of the Add tool dialog 4 option Type a help string in the Help field of the properties grid 5 Type a command or command macro in the Command field of the properties grid 6 Click the Browse button E then select an image for the new tool Do one of the following e Select Builtin then choose one of the built in icons Tool image a mleaderedit_remove_vertex mleaderedit_st
182. aint is applied to a line or a polyline segment the angle of the line or polyline segment is fixed The endpoints can still be moved e If you fix an arc or a circle the center point is fixed too NOTE Itis recommended to apply a fix constraint to important geometric features in your design This prevents the geometry from moving unexpectedly when you edit the design Using coincident constraints A coincident geometric constraint can be applied to two points or to a point and an entity The endpoints of lines polylines splines rays and arcs circular and elliptical and the center point of circles ellipses and arcs circular and elliptical are accepted These points can be made coincident to lie on the entity or on the extension of the entity with a line a polyline segment a circle or an arc circular and elliptical Coincident constraints between the endpoint of a line and two circles If the endpoints or center points of entities already coincide the Autoconstraint option of the GcCoincident command automatically applies coincident constraints to such points To apply a coincident constraint between a point and an entity 1 Click the Coincident tool button on the 2D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select first point or Entity Autoconstrain lt Entity gt A prompt menu displays GCCOINCIDENT Entity Autoconstrain Cancel 2 Do one of the following e Press Enter e Choose Entity in
183. aints e Horizontal distance between points 1 e Vertical distance between points 2 e Distance between points or the length of lines and polyline segments 3 e Radius of arcs circles and arc polyline segments 4 e Diameter of arcs circles and arc polyline segments 5 e Angle between entities or between points and entities 6 NOTE Dimensional constraints are created using the current dimension style To edit dimensional constraints Dimensional constraints can be edited e using the DDEDIT command e inthe Properties bar e inthe Mechanical Browser To edit dimensional constraints in the Properties bar 1 Select the dimensional constraint The properties of the entity display in the Properties bar 2 Type a new value or expression in the Expression field then press Enter The readout of the Va ue field changes accordingly 80 El Constraint Constraint Form Dynamic Reference No Name di Value 200 0 Description Length horizontal leg Text Text rotation 0 0000 option Edit the Name field option Edit the Description field option Edit the Text rotation field Press the Esc key to unselect oi 2 a NOTE Select multiple dimensional constraints simultaneously to set their value equally To edit dimensional constraints in the Mechanical Browser 1 If not already open open the Mechanical Browser Mechanical Browser Model a g Bracket B Parameters l PE IE di 700 Geet he d2
184. an asterisk option Select a dimension style to see a preview option Select a dimension style then right click e Choose New to create a new dimension style e Choose Delete to delete the selected dimension style e Choose Cut selected dimension style in the current drawing then paste it in another open drawing e Choose Copy then paste it in another open drawing e Choose Paste to copy a previously cut or copied dimension style in the current drawing e Choose Rename to rename of the selected dimension style e Choose Set current in the context menu to make it the current dimension style e Choose Save overrides to current style to save all current overrides to the current style e Choose Save to new style to create a new dimension style as a copy of the selected dimension style option Modify a dimension style definition option Select lt overrides gt to define override settings for the current dimension style 291 BricsCAD V14 Creating linear dimensions Commands DIMLINEAR DIMALIGNED DIMBASELINE DIMCONTINUE and DIMARC Linear dimensions annotate linear distances or lengths and can be oriented either horizontally vertically or aligned parallel to an existing entity or to the selected origin points Starting from a linear dimension you can add a baseline dimension or a continued dimension A baseline dimension inserts an additional dimension from a common first extension line origin of a pre
185. and sssssssssssrsssssssnssnsrrnnnnsnenrrnsnenennenenrrnrnenee 492 Tosetthe Template Path variaDle simie aa A a ARA NEA a 493 To create a drawing using a wizard ssssusssssnsnunnnrsnnarnnnnnennsnnnnnnunannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannannn 493 Drawing EX DIOFe lh crina aaa AO FOOpen The Dran EXDIOVG Teri a TE N E Sau aaeat aimee eae 496 TO CONtrOl Ene Drawing Explorer layout merio o ea a e a a A N 497 Opening a drawing irie rA N ENAT i 497 AGGING a drawing olde rayas N a A semaine E 498 To insert a block from an unopened drawing s ss sssssssrsrsrssrsrsrrrrnrnnenenrrrerrnrnrenrnrererenes 498 To copy definitions between drawingS ssssssssssssssssrsnersnenrrnrrennnnsnenrrnsnennnnenenrrnrnenne 499 To Merde the content of TWO layers ccs lesasa cits acecennented ac a E A 499 Repairing a draWwing s s 2 2222u222u2u2u2u2usununuunnnnnnnnnnnnne FOO To analyze the integrity of the current drawing ssssssessssssnrsnsrrnnnnsnenrrnsnenennenenrrnrnenae 499 Trepa a draw iorra nanei TAa E AA ine EE eaten eaanien 500 Drawing Properties ririri riiai a csi DOO TO pen the Drawing Properties dialog meneri ina E A AS 500 Defining default Properties errien aa S vied A oon A E 501 Adding custom properties miirrriierti orres oiae UTEE ARNA TAE EA aT ERa T 502 Drawing Security Options ssss s252 2 2 52 s DOD MOSEL EMC IDASSWOl daei A A E OTE 502 TO FEMOVe tHe MDasSWOrdran anaana A A ATA 5
186. and adjusts viewport angle zoom factor and pan position based on alignment points specified in model space and paper space The Vpclip command clips viewports in layouts short for view port clipping In a layout you can create multiple viewports each of which displays a unique view of the entities created in model space Each layout viewport functions as a window into your model Space drawing You can control the view scale and content of each layout viewport Separately A layout viewport is created as a separate entity that you can copy delete move scale and stretch as you would any other drawing entity You can snap to the viewport borders using entity snap When you are working in model space with floating viewports see Toggle between model space and paper space click any layout viewport to make it the current viewport and then add or modify model space entities in that viewport Any changes you make in one layout viewport are immediately visible in the other viewports if the other layout viewports are displaying that portion of the drawing Zooming or panning in the current viewport affects only that viewport Each viewport has its own layer visibility settings You can also turn off the display of the content of a viewport To preserve the scaling of a viewport you can lock the display It is no longer possible to zoom or pan in a locked viewport Apart from viewports you can add print related entities in a paper space lay
187. annenegs 402 Curving and decurving POlyliMes cceesseeeeeseeeeseccceceesssnsssssssssss 403 TO Ila Curve toa POVH aina hen a evden rauan arian ease uaa a aE 403 Setting the Linetype generation Mode sssss2 2 2 404 TO SEE Tie LINGLY DE OGG ossict vcd atnciins Osiga ut sadaGat E a E oan A amen erd eeaneaG uies baat 404 Editing polylines in the Properties Dar cccsssssccennesssecennessssesssss 406 TO MOVE polyline vertices aerarii eraa se snaeasemakarervenas deeded a aaa 406 To change the width of polyline segments ssosnennnsnnsrennssnsnrsnsrrsnnnsnenrsnsnennnnenenrrnsnesae 407 To convert straight segments into a CUFV sssssssssssssnssrenerrnenrsnsrrnnnnrnenrrnenennnnenenrrnrnenae 407 Converting ENTITIES siiiiiersincsasceneeeesviewesssesseesasseiveriiveiestseisies OS EX PIOGING NIIE S irira aaan OO TO GX DIOCESE CAULE S eiT a a a T N A O ater O A 408 Creating Regions r aaraa AOO ToO Crealo region Grids aime aE T E OEE E E ERA 409 XVII BricsCAD V14 Measuring and Dividing ENtitieS cccceessseseeseessennneeeesssesesssessess LQ MCASUPING ENUIS spriin aaa OO TO Meas re an entity USING POINTS sicads ci cintetcisen tte eas dea utaa a a a a aaa 410 To place blocks a specified interval along an entity sesssssssrsnsrrnrnnenrnrrrerrnrnrenrnrrrrrenns 410 Dividing ENtitiCS iidr aaa a aa Le TO dIVde amenity USING DOES eea A E E tacolecammeaeeeneieeanaes 412 TOrGivide anrentity USING
188. aosan 5 NV SU 005 01 bearing Ooa 6 NV WH 005 01 wheel There are two options for BOM listing top level components only or bottom level parts only Organizing Geometry in Components There are two main ways to design mechanical products top down and bottom up approaches It is also possible to add mechanical structure to existing geometry designed in BricsCAD or imported from another source BmNew command is called to create a new document for a new mechanical component Bottom Up Design With bottom up approach users start to design a product with detailing its low level component These components are then grouped into higher level components The process is continued till the very top component corresponding to the product itself will be designed The main command for bottom up design is BmInsert which is used to insert an existing component into the current drawing 217 BricsCAD V14 Top Down Design With top down approach users start to design a product with defining but not detailing its first level components Each component is then refined in more details by defining its sub components The process is continued till all low level components will be defined and detailed BmForm command allows to create a new subcomponent for the existing component Adding Mechanical Structure to Existing Geometry BricsCAD users can add component hierarchy to any existing drawing amp endash created in Bri
189. ap Tracking Setting the Snap Angle You can rotate a dotted grid using the Snap Angle setting if Snap Angle is different from zero grid lines do not display 5 Display the Snap Grid settings in the Settings dialog 6 Select the Snap Angle setting 7 Type anew value in the Snap Angle setting field 8 Close the Settings dialog NOTE You can also set the Snap Angle by typing snapang in the command bar When in a command type snapang with an apostrophe in front to set the Snap Angle variable transparently without interrupting the running command 103 BricsCAD V14 Entity Snaps Commands 2DINTERSECTION 3DINTERSECTION NEAREST CENTER ENDPOINT EXTENSION FROM INSERTION INTERSECTION MIDPOINT MTP NONE PARALLEL PERPENDICULAR POINT QUADRANT TANGENT Entity snaps enable you to quickly select exact geometric points on existing entities without having to know the exact coordinates of those points With entity snaps you can select the end point of a line or arc the center point of a circle the intersection of any two entities or any other geometrically significant position You can also use entity snaps to draw entities that are tangent or perpendicular to an existing entity You can use entity snaps any time you need to specify a point You can work with entity snaps in one of two ways e Enable a running entity snap that remains in effect until you turn it off by choosing an entity snap when no other command
190. apply to define the color linetype and lineweight of the entities in the block e Entities which are created on layers other than layer O or with explicitly specified color linetype and lineweight retain their original settings e Entities which are created on layer O and color linetype and lineweight BYLAYER are inserted on the current layer and adopt the color linetype and lineweight of the insertion layer e Entities which originally have their color linetype and lineweight assigned BYBLOCK adopt their properties of the block 414 User Guide Creating Blocks Commands BLOCK BLOCK WBLOCK PASTEBLOCK and SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK The Block command groups entities into a block using a dialog box The Block commands prompts you in the command bar The Wblock command writes blocks and other drawing parts to a separate drawing file short for write block The Pasteblock command pastes entities from the Clipboard as a block in the current drawing see Paste a selection as a block The SectionPlaneToBlock command saves the selected section plane to a 2D cross section elevation block or a 3D cutaway section block General procedure to create a block 1 Specify the name 2 Specify the insertion point The insertion point is the base point for the block and serves as the reference point when you later insert the block into a drawing 3 Select entities To create a block in a drawing 1 Do one of the following
191. ar Tracking you can type the length of the line in the command bar e Using Snap Tracking you can position the end point with respect to the start point and one or two snap points on entities in the drawing The prompt menu changes LINE 4 option Repeat step 3 to draw a series of connected lines When the second line is drawn the options in the prompt menu are LINE After the third line the options in the prompt menu are 198 User Guide LINE 5 Right click to stop drawing lines 6 option Right click to restart Solids Command SOLID Solids are rectangular square triangular or quadrilateral areas filled with a solid color Left to right quadrilateral rectangular square and triangular solids Drawing solids 1 Do one of the following e Click the Solid tool button cS on the Polygons flyout of Draw toolbar e Choose Solid in the Draw menu e Type solid in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Rectangle Square Triangle lt First point of solid gt A prompt menu displays SOUD Rectangle square Triangle Cancel 2 Specify the first point of the solid 3 Specify the second point of the solid 4 Specify the third and fourth point of the solid The solid is created 5 option Repeat step 4 to add more solids A series of connected solids is created 6 Right click to conclude 199 BricsCAD V14 NOTE When Fill Mode is turned off all filled entiti
192. arallel copies of curved entities creates larger or smaller curves depending on which side of the original entity you place the copy For example placing a parallel copy of a circle outside the circle creates a larger concentric circle positioning the copy inside the circle creates a smaller concentric circle NOTE he OFFSETGAPTYPE settings variable controls how potential gaps between segments are treated when closed polylines are offset Making a parallel copy at a specified distance 1 Do one of the following e Click the Offset tool button l on the Modify toolbar e Choose Offset in the Modify menu e Type offset in the command bar The command bar reads Offset Through point Erase lt Distance gt lt current distance gt A prompt menu displays OFFSET 371 BricsCAD V14 Option Choose Erase in the prompt menu or type E then press Enter Respond Yes at the command prompt to erase the source entity Do one of the following e Press Enter to accept the current distance e Type anew distance in the command bar e Define a new distance by specifying two points The command bar reads Select Entity Select the entity The command bar reads Both sides lt Side for parallel copy gt Click the side for the parallel copy The parallel copy is created The command bar reads Select Entity Do one of the following e Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create more parallel copies e Right click or press Enter to stop
193. are Add to set Selected entities are added to the selection set Subtract from set Selected entities are removed from the selection set Picking Place the pickbox over a part of the object and click Select all entities Select all entities in the entire drawing including entities which are on hidden layers Entities on frozen layers are not selected Previous selection Re use the previous selection set Last entity in drawing Select the most recent entity Window All entities which are inside overlap or are completely outside a window are selected You can choose between a rectangle polygon or a circle Fence All entities that cross a multi segment line are selected Point Click a point to select all closed entities which enclose this point User Guide e Select by Properties Displays the Select by Properties context menu to select entities by Co or Layer Linetype Name Thickness Type Value Width or Handle e Undo Undoes the last selection action e Location Displays the Select Location context menu Outside window Window circle Crossing circle Outside circle Selection Methods Cancel Select Location and Select By Properties context menus Selecting overlapping entities When entities are close together or lie on top of each other it is difficult or sometimes impossible to select the entities needed Cycling through the overlapping entities highlighting each entity one by one helps you to sele
194. asaemnraeenna aes 168 RenNamMING NAY OUTS oerna E TA T A E saan se ols 169 Arranding the layout TADS arrr a AAE taaons sana 169 Deleting alayo Torero na E A ie A A E AA E AEA 169 Generated Drawing VICWS cssssssccccccnnneeseessceecnnnessessscssnssesssssssess LO ComimanGs and TOOLDArS warssnatatecunaseae tanner uacaate sume ale ane ncaa saan nue Aeinee a eum tes i StancdarG DFAWING VICWS s 4c9 0 dacont sana aaa a verter aaa veined aa 171 Generating Cross SeClION VICWS 3 052 took catia Sh gerh e Siamese tie oleae peu tang Saveeeel 173 Updating Drawing ViGWS s csicataawcte dt iumaadadandes shiaanwseeoennenawa nua saeed magn sani A a 173 EXPONO VIEWS Co Model Spacen aaa Sein aR seu nceatutns deine heise a Aa 174 CUSTOMIZING Drawing VIEWS sited oi tack arate R earls aww E E E A E AEEA 174 DRAWING ENUE S cisccictrsieiarsrscetainrcies peariietacdiedarnrarpasineaienatsiersisaee LD OVENI EW iaa Se tee a a E E E A 175 viii Table of Contents a OGG soosse a et aveessetevecstesavenevets 17 O Seting Tl OCC insin r ee dah aruaian duane Naeeaaaete heute E canadien ees 177 ENUY COLO geee reser ener acer rte rrrrer errr creer errr ec rr rr ere re crore rr creer rr rrr ererr rere a4 Index Colors sina A nies ksawaia Ws AARAA RAA NANa 177 Tru COIMOLS jascscsarsddsnvaavscanveusadanbanssanasavssdenvaaieansessadsnbanasaansiersadanaauieantarsadssnanaaamniansadanns 178 Setting Che curnrent entity COUO ercsi aaa A ahead eeaue dene bataensee tia ase meee sase
195. ation dwa Type ae Layers ack Layer States 7 Multiline Styles Multileader Styles Ay Text Styles _f Dimension Styles Ble ln lol H in wa EF rable Chian J PlotSheet dwg H E C Projects ime Adding a command Add to current Tool Palettes as block 1 Choose Customize in the Tools menu Under Available Tools on the Customize dialog expand the containing toolbox then select the command in the commands list 3 Right click and choose Add to Current Tool Palette in the context menu 52 User Guide Insert tool Delete tool E E E E El Tool ID Title Polyline Help Draws a polyline induding straight and arc segments Command c c_pline Image pline NOTE the topic Creating Custom Tools to create your own tools which you can then add to a tool palette 53 BricsCAD V14 Editing a tool General procedure to edit a tool on a tool palette 1 Right click the tool then choose Properties in the context menu The Tool Properties dialog box displays 54 Tool Properties E Pattern Tool Type Type Pattern name Angle Scale Spacing Double General Color Layer Linetype Plot style Lineweight Hatch Predefined SHAKES SHAKES 0 0000 1 1 Yes C ByLayer use current use current use current Hatch tool properties Tool Properties Image Name SIPL11 Description 1200 mm x 500 mm E Insert
196. ave amp Clase Cancel Assigning plot style tables In BricsCAD you can assign plot style tables to model space and to each of the layouts in a drawing By assigning different plot style tables to each layout in your drawing you can control how entities in the layout are plotted The plot style table affects both model space and paper space entities To plot the drawing without applying plot style properties choose None use Default from the list of plot style tables In STB type drawings each entity in the drawing either is assigned a plot style explicitly or By Layer Missing plot style table If a plot style table is not found the text missing is added to the plot style table name When you print the drawing the settings of the default plot style file Default ctb or Default stb will be used instead To assign a plot style table 1 Choose Model or the layout to which you want to assign a different plot style table 2 Do one of the following e Choose Print in the File menu e Type print in the command bar then press Enter 3 Select a Plot style table from the list box in the Plot Style Table pen assignments section 480 User Guide Plot style tabl pen assignments default ctb E B 4 Click the OK button Toggling the plot style table on off When you turn off plot style tables entities print according to their own properties However all of the plot style information is saved
197. awing Elevation_North dwg 3 ELEVATION_SOUTH 76 3kb 1 Attach 17 5 2013 C YProjects Starter Templ C Projects Barcelona Drawing Elevation _South dwg 4 ELEVATION_WEST w 37 3Kb 1 Attach 17 5 2013 C Projects Starter Templ C Projects Barcelona Drawing Elevation _West dwg 5 ISOMETRIC_NE 63 72Kb 1 Attach 17 5 2013 C Projects Starter Templ C Projects Barcelona Drawing ilsometric_NE dwg 6 ISOMETRIC_S5SW 68 56Kb 1 Attach 17 5 2013 C Projects Starter Templ C Projects Barcelona Drawing sometric_SW dwa 7 PLAN_LEVEL 0 614Kkb 1 Attach 17 5 2013 C Projects Starter Templi C Projects Barcelona Drawing Plan_Level 0 dwg B SECTION_AB 30 56Kb 1 Attach 17 5 2013 C Projects Starter Templ C Projects Barcelona Drawing Section_AB dwg SECTION cD v SL3Kb 1 Attach 17 5 2013 9 C Projects Starter Templ C Projects Barcelona Drawing Section_CD dwg The Drawing Explorer External References dialog allows to Attach a drawing as an external reference L2 Detach an external reference X Reload an external reference k Unload an external reference Henk Bind an external reference thy Insert an external reference eth Modify the attachment type Attach or Overlay Modify the Saved Path of an xref Modify the Found Path of an overlay To detach external references 1 Select the xref s you want to detach Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple xrefs or to unselect a selected xref 2 Click the Deta
198. ayernames of which the second and third character is _F only 5 Do one of the following e Click the Reference name button to select another PDF underlay e Click the OK button to stop 453 BricsCAD V14 To clip a PDF underlay 1 Type pdfclip in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select PDF underlay Click the frame of the PDF underlay The frame of the selected PDF highlights The command bar reads Enter PDF clipping option ON OFF Delete New lt New gt A prompt menu displays On Off Delete boundary New boundary Cancel Do one of the following e Choose New boundary in the prompt menu e Press Enter to accept the New default command option The command bar reads Enter PDF clipping type Polygonal Rectangular lt Rectangular gt Do one of the following e Press Enter to accept the Rectangular default command option to define a rectangular clipping boundary e Type P then press Enter to define a polygonal clipping boundary Define the clipping boundary The defining points must lie inside the frame of the PDF underlay If you click outside the PDF underlay the point is placed on the PDF underlay frame To toggle the display of the clipped part of a PDF underlay 454 Click the frame of the PDF underlay The frame of the selected PDF highlights The properties of the underlay display in the Properties Bar Under Misc click Show clipped in the Properties Bar then selec
199. ayout e Check uncheck the Print to file option 12 e Specify the Number of copies 13 e Click the Preview button to see a preview of the plot output e When in a layout click the Apply button to update the layout e Click the Print button to start printing NOTE All print settings and options are saved in the Model and each of the Layouts 464 User Guide Print A2 Plot style table pen assignments PDFCreator a7 Drawing orientation 6 Flot offset Page setup name Printer Plotter configuration Paper size Portrait Center on page ry Lands X 0 00 AZ b scape L Print upside down Y 0 00 420 00 x 594 00 Inches Milimeters Plat area 8 Plat options 10 Plot entity lineweights Plot with plot styles Plot paperspace last Hide paperspace entities E Plot stamp Save changes to layout Plot scale 9 Fit print area to size of page Shaded viewport options Sae shade plot 44 10 1 10 Printedmm 1 Scale lineweights E Print to file 12 To open the Print dialog Do one of the following e Choose Print in the File menu e Type print in the command bar then press Enter NOTE If you click the Print E button in the Standard toolbar the Qprint command is launched which will start printing the currently selected view tab using previously saved print settings To choose the paper size Press the down arrow then select the paper size in the Paper Size list The available sizes depend on
200. b page Drawing Properties Custom properties Click the Add button The Custom Property dialog displays Custom Property Name Value Type a name in the Name field The custom property name is listed under Document in the Field dialog Type a value in the Value field The value displays in multiline texts where the custom property is inserted as a field Drawing Security Options Command SECURITYOPTIONS The Securityoptions command allows to protect your drawings with a password Password protected drawings cannot be opened without entering the password first To set the password 1 502 Do one of the following e Choose Security Options in the File Drawing Utilities menu e Type securityoptions in the command bar then press Enter User Guide The Security options dialog opens Security options Enter Password Crypt Provider Key Length Miceentt Daca Oriunmntanr anhi Oreasder i Ary Microsott Base Cryptographic Provider v1 0 4 oo ol POT iv 2 Type the password in the Enter Password field 3 Choose a crypt provider from the Crypt Provider list ic Provider v1 0 Microsoft Base DSS and Diffie Hellman Cryptographic Provider Microsoft DH SChannel Cryptographic Provider Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider v1 0 Microsoft Enhanced DSS and Diffie Hellman Cryptographic Provider Microsoft Enhanced RSA and AES Cryptographic Provider Microsoft RSA SChannel Crypto
201. bar then press Enter The Drawing Explorer Lights dialog displays showing the sun properties in the Fditor pane EH Sun El General Status Intensity factor Color Shadows E Sun Angle Calculator Date Time Daylight Saving Azimuth Altitude Source vector E Rendered Shadow Details Type Softness 2 To edit a property Off 1 RGB 157 143 106 On 09 21 2010 15 00 e Expand the settings group if needed e Select the property e Edit the selected property To define the geographic location 1 Do one of the following e Click the Geographic location tool button E on the Render toolbar e Click the Geographic location tool button on Editor pane of the Drawing Explorer Lights dialog e Type geographiclocation or geo in the command bar then press Enter The Geographic Location dialog displays 526 User Guide GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris North direction Angle is 2 Do one of the following e Type the latitude and longitude of the location in the Latitude and Longitude fields and select the appropriate hemisphere for each setting e Click the Choose location button then select a city and timezone and click the OK button 3 Choose a time zone in the Time Zone list 4 Define the direction of the north 5 Click the OK button 527
202. be nested The attached drawing is based on the most recently saved version The origin point used when attaching an external reference is controlled by the INSBASE insertion base point settings variable Use the BASE command to define the INSBASE variable in the external reference drawing To attach an external reference 1 Do one of the following e Click the Attach Xref tool button EJ on the Insert toolbar e Choose Attach Xref in the Insert menu e Type xattach in the command bar then press Enter e Click the Attach Xref tool button CH on the Details toolbar on the Drawing Explorer Xrefs window The Attach External Reference dialog window displays 2 Select the drawing you want to attach then press the Open button on the Open dialog window 441 BricsCAD V14 The Attach External Reference dialog window opens Attach External Reference Name Ground Level Path C Bricscad Reports Ground_Level dwag External Reference Attachment O Overlay Insertion Point Scale Rotation Specify On screen Specify On screen Specify On screen x x 1 0000 Angle 0 Li icine Y 10000 Block Unit 7 0 0000 z 1 0000 Unit Unitess Uniform Scale Factor 1 0000 3 The full path to the selected drawing displays in the Path field option Select the Path Type C BricscadV8 Reports Plan_Levell dwa Full path a Bricscadya _Reports Flan_Level dwa Relative path J Plan_Level dwg No path
203. bic B spline 1 Extend or trim the selected entity to an imaginary extension of the cu 1 Project to the XY plane of the current UCS Chamfer mode wes Short Sets the input method by which chamfers are created Distance Distance or Length Angle gi Registry Adjusting the Draw Order Commands DRAWORDER HATCHTOBACK TEXTTOFRONT If new entities overlap existing entities they will display and print on top of the previously drawn entities The Draw Order tool can change the order in which overlapping entities are displayed and printed You can move entities to the front or the back or above or under another entity 339 BricsCAD V14 Using Draw Order 1 Do one of the following e Click the Draw Order tool button LI on the Draw Order toolbar e Choose Draw Order in the Too s menu e Type draworder in the command bar The command bar reads Select entities to change the draw order 2 Select the entities then right click or press enter The command bar reads Change draw order Above Under Clear Front lt Back gt 3 Choose the appropriate draw order tool option 4 Depending on your choice e If you have chosen Above or Under the command bar reads Select reference entity Identify the reference entity The display of the selection set is changed with respect to the reference entity e If you have chosen Front or Back the display of the selection set is changed accordingly Using Draw Order tools 1 Sel
204. bitmap DPI Defines the resolution of hatch patterns and gradient fills in DPI dots per inch Exporting a drawing to PDF 504 1 option Adjust the Export to PDF settings 2 Choose Export in the File menu The Export Drawing As dialog opens 3 Inthe Save as type list select Adobe PDF pdf 4 Select a folder to save the PDF file 5 option Type a name in the File name field to replace the default lt DRAWING_NAME gt pdf name 6 Click the Save button to create the PDF User Guide Etransmit Command ETRANSMIT The Etransmit command creates a package of a drawing file and all its dependencies such as external references images font files plot configuration files plot style tables and font map files The root drawing and all its dependencies can be copied to a folder are compressed in a ZIP file Optionally you can send the ZIP file attached to an email Digitizing Tablet Command TABLET The Tablet command configures and calibrates a digitizing tablet and toggles tablet mode This command requires that Wintab32 dll from Wacom Technology Corp be installed on the computer Download Wintab32 dll from the internet then place the file in your system directory C Windows System32 A digitizing tablet also called a graphics tablet a graphics pad or drawing tablet is a computer input device that allows you to hand draw images and graphics similar to the way one draws images with a pencil and pape
205. cal position of the dimension text is controlled through three settings variables DIMGAP DIMTAD and DIMTVP The scheme below illustrates the compound effect of these three settings variables DIMGAP 0 DIMTAD 0 DIMTVP 0 DIMGAP 0 2 DIMTAD 0 DIMTVP 0 DIMGAP 0 1 DIMTAD 0 DIMTVP 0 DIMGAP 0 DIMTAD 1 DIMTVP 0 DIMGAP 0 2 DIMTAD 1 DIMTVP 0 DIMGAP 0 1 DIMTAD 1 DIMTVP 0 DIMGAP 0 DIMTAD 0 DIMTVP 1 DIMGAP 0 1 DIMTAD 0 DIMTVP 1 287 BricsCAD V14 Fit Settings Description Variable Arrow and text fit DIMATFIT Determines how text and arrowheads are placed if there is not enough room to fit both text and arrowheads between the extension lines DIMTIX Forces text to be placed inside arrowheads outside Dinilinesineide DIMSOXD Suppresses the dimension lines to be drawn outside the extension lines Text movement DIMTMOVE Specifies whether the dimension line moves with the text or that text can be moved independently This setting also specifies if a leader needs to be drawn if the text is moved away from the dimension line Dim scale overall DIMSCALE Defines a scale factor for all entities in the dimension block Place text DIMUPT Allows to place text manually when creating the dimension manually block Dinine forced DIMTOFL Forces the dimension line to be drawn even when the text is placed outside Primary Units Settings Description Variable Dim units DIMLUNIT Defines the unit type fo
206. can be rendered and edited in other dwg based applications Users can create mechanical components from scratch or add them to existing dwg Commands and Toolbars Tools to work with mechanical components are available on the Mechanical toolbar and its Mechanical Visualization flyout toolbar Mechanical a Mecha nica Ea fo t G 3G aig con Command__ Description fy BmBrowser E a a the visibility of the Mechanical Browser window e eeoa Reloads all referenced components from external files and inasahan BOM tables creates a new mechanical component as a new drawing file Inserts an existing mechanical component into the current drawing F BmForm Creates a new mechanical component and inserts it into the current i drawing a Dissolves a mechanical component inserted into the current drawing Convert the current drawing into a mechanical main component Inserts a standard hardware solid as a mechanical component Jamie Hides a mechanical component or subcomponent in the current drawing BmShow Shows a previously hidden mechanical component or subcomponent in the current drawing BmvStyle Applies a visual style to a mechanical component Inserts the Bill of Materials BOM table in the current drawing 215 BricsCAD V14 a BmxXConvert Converts X Hardware solids in the current drawing to mechanical components Mechanical Browser Commands BMBROWSER BMHARDWARE The Mechanical Browser allows navigation
207. cancel option Select the Hatch tab to turn the Gradient fill into a Hatch Edit the Color settings Edit the Boundary settings Click the OK button to apply the changes User Guide Dimensions Dimensioning Concepts In BricsCAD there are five dimension types inear angular radial diametric and ordinate Dimensions are created by either selecting an entity or by identifying the origin points of the extension lines 1 310 01 326 43 129 2 310 01 11 Stacked baseline dimension Radial dimension Angular dimension Aligned linear dimension Ordinate dimension Center mark Vertical linear dimension Diametric dimension Rotated linear dimension 10 Leader with text 11 Horizontal linear dimension 12 Arc length dimension COONAN AWN Dimension Style Dimensions are created on the current layer using the current dimension style which controls the appearance of the dimension block A dimension style is a collection of settings and definitions which determine the type of arrowheads text style color of text lines and arrowheads unit type precision etc You can modify a dimension by editing one of the dimension settings or you can modify the dimension style to apply the changes to all dimension entities that are created with this style A drawing contains at least one dimension style 279 BricsCAD V14 Dimension Block A dimension entity is created as block which consists of the
208. cation of the UCS icon UCS icon Ox0005 3 Ox0001 Show icon ox0002 at origin UCS icon position Lower right Show icon 115 BricsCAD V14 Controls whether the icon shows or not at origin Controls the location of the UCS icon if on the icon indicates the origin point of the current coordinate system UCS or WCS However if the origin is not within the viewport borders the UCS icon moves to the corner of the viewport as defined by the UCSICONPOS UCS Icon Position settings variable When the at origin option is not checked the icon always displays in the corner of the viewport defined by UCSICONPOS Dynamic UCS With the Dynamic UCS feature enabled the coordinate system is aligned automatically with a face of a solid when drawing entities This feature is controlled by the UCSDETECT system variable To toggle the dynamic UCS Do one of the following e Press the F6 function key e Click the DUCS field in the status bar Using the Dynamic UCS 1 With the Dynamic UCS feature active launch a Draw command 2 Move the cursor over the face of a 3D solid e The face highlights e If ON the grid is aligned with the selected face e If the UCSICON system variable 3 On at Origin the UCS icon displays in the selected face 3 Pick a point to start drawing 4 When the drawing command concludes the current UCS or WCS is restored 116 User Guide To define a User Coordinate System i 8
209. cc cece cece eessceeeeneeeeeessecnsnneneeeesseuaaanneeegs 474 Named plot style Lables STB Tue siececsunsets trates a aaa a a a a a 474 Proedormed DOC SEVICS crinita a e a E A a a a 474 Changing Plot Style Table TypeS sssssss2us2 2 2 22 22 0 475 To convert a drawing from STB to CTB file type sssssssssssssnssssrrsnnnssenrsnsnessnnsnenrrnrnenee 475 To convert a drawing from CTB to STB file type ssssssesssssssrsnssrsnnnssenrsnsnrnnnnsnenrrnrnenee 475 To convert a Color dependent plot style table CTB to a Named plot style table STB 475 The PIot Style Table edit crru a AO To open the Plot Style Table editor ie cckcaae canted svcnde a a a aa eae 476 TE General ta Daaa a L see estates deeeaes puxesaaua tan rauanse nate ssutinex AT 477 MEFO VIEW taD ieren O R OEA a ANa debt e inaee ccna A gun deat ate oe tne oe ata 477 TNE LING WEI GIES ta Dinen a aaa a a a ceeus tee eaaiaeeee N 479 Assigning plot style tables sssssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn FOO TO aAssignNra DIOUSLY 1G table a ea Sota a A a A a AA ON 480 Toggling the plot style table on off sssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 481 XX Table of Contents The Plot Styles ManaG Gh crnan OL FOcOpen The PIO StYles Manager aiora eaa A E dawe sere E A eens 481 TO create a NEW DIOL Ste table aieo er a AE E A inate Sun uitexsouudumias te 482 To create a new plot
210. ce in the drawing You can snap to the geometry in the PDF underlay if the PDFOSNAP system variable is On Please notice that when snapping to geometry in a PDF underlay the precision is far less than Snapping to entities in the drawing or an xref If a PDF underlay contains layers you can control the display of these layers using the PDFLAYERS command The PDFCLIP command crops the display of a PDF You can choose between a polygonal or a rectangular boundary Each instance of the same PDF underlay file can have a different boundary To attach a PDF underlay 1 Do one of the following e Click the Attach pdf tool button aih on the Insert toolbar e Click the New tool button ES on the Details toolbar of the Drawing Explorer PDF Underlays dialog e Type PDFattach in the command bar then press Enter The Select PDF Underlay File dialog opens 2 Select the file then double click the file or click the Open button on the Select PDF Underlay File dialog The Attach PDF Underlay dialog opens 450 User Guide Attach Pdf Underlay Name Plan Leveld 4 Path C BricsCAD House Plans Plan_Levell pdf Insertion Point Scale Rotation Specify On screen Specdfy On screen Specify On screen Angle 0 0000 Uniform Scale 3 In case of a multi page PDF click the down arrow in the Name field then select the page of the PDF you want to load 4 Click the Path option button then select either e Full path The full path
211. ced with each projection plane parallel to one of the coordinate axes of the model The views are positioned relative to each other according to either of two schemes first angle or third angle projection In each the appearances of views may be thought of as being projected onto planes that form a 6 sided box around the model third angle projection American projection first angle projection European projection The projection type is set by the Projection Type option of the ViewBase command or by editing the PROJECTIONTYPE system variable e 0 First angle projection e 1 Third angle projection The value of the PROJECTIONTYPE system variable is saved in the drawing 172 User Guide Generating Cross Section Views A cross section is the intersection of a 3D solid model with a section plane In technical drawings the internal parts of the 3D model are hatched in cross sections To generate section views of a 3D solid model run the ViewSection command from the paper Space layout where the standard drawing views exist Oise B B 1 1 Updating Drawing Views By default BricsCAD checks whether the source 3D solid model was modified and automatically recalculates the drawing when e opening a paper space layout containing out of date views if the VIEWUPDATEAUTO system variable is ON e running the ViewUpdate command e running the BmUpdate command BricsCAD Platinum only 173 BricsCAD V14 Hidden line
212. ced regeneration of the drawing might be necessary This is done by the Regen command Don t confuse the Regen command with the Redraw command which simply repaints the screen without attempting to synchronize the screen display with the drawing database Regenerate the current viewport Do one of the following e Click the Regen tool button E on the View toolbar e Choose Regen in the View menu e Type re or regen in the command bar then press Enter The current viewport is regenerated Regenerate all viewports Do one of the following e Click the Regenal tool button ed on the View toolbar e Type rea or regenall in the command bar then press Enter All viewports are regenerated Redraw the current viewport Do one of the following e Click the Redraw tool button lel on the View toolbar e Choose Redraw in the View menu e Type ror redraw in the command bar then press Enter The current viewport is refreshed Redraw all viewports Do one of the following e Click the Redraw All tool button eh on the View toolbar e Type ra or redrawall in the command bar then press Enter All viewports are refreshed 126 User Guide Panning Commands PAN and RTPAN The Pan command moves the drawing in any direction horizontally vertically or diagonally The magnification of the drawing remains the same as does its orientation in space The only change is the portion of the drawing being displayed The cu
213. ch Xref tool button K on the Details toolbar The selected xref s are detached You are not prompted to confirm the detachment To unload external references Do one of the following Click the Loaded column of a loaded Xref Details toolbar or click the Loaded column of one of the selected Xrefs To reload external references Do one of the following Click the Loaded column of an unloaded Xref Select the Xref s then either click the Reload Xref tool button k on the Details toolbar or click the Loaded column of one of the selected Xrefs 443 BricsCAD V14 Editing blocks and external references Commands REFEDIT REFEDIT REFSET and REFCLOSE The Refedit command edits block references and externally referenced drawings Xrefs through a dialog box short for reference editor Refedit is referred to as in place reference editing RefEdit either works on a portion of the reference or on the entire drawing or all entities in the block The Refedit command edits block references and externally referenced drawings through the command bar The Refset command adds and removes entities from the reference being edited The Refclose command closes the reference editor The XFADECTL system variable sets the fading level for the entities which are not in the working in the current refedit session Ss Reference Editing Internet connection needed To edit Xrefs or blocks 1 Do one of the following e Click the R
214. ch constraint is introduced or the value of its parameter is changed BricsCAD automatically updates the solid geometry to satisfy the constraint For example the dimensions of a box can be controlled by the parameters of three distance constraints applied to its opposite faces Constraints can be created using 3D Constraints toolbar or Parametric 3D Constraints menu 247 BricsCAD V14 Fix Coincident Concentric Parallel Perpendicular Tangent Rigid Set Distance Radius hae bl OTSO o Bw Angle BricsCAD provides the following 3D constraints O i e Geometrical constraints Fix Coincident o Concentric 2 Parallel wu Perpendicular ib Tangent UW and Rigid Set 43 e Dimensional 3D constraints Distance A Radius LB Angle 8 Mechanical Browser The Mechanical Browser TE allows to navigate through all the constraints in the model and to edit dimensional constraints See the BmBrowser command to learn more about the Mechanical Browser 3D Constraints types The following entities are supported for constraints creation e Faces of ACIS solids of planar cylindrical spherical toroidal and conical geometry e Linear and circular edges of ACIS solids 3D Constraints and Direct Modeling 3D Constraints are taken into account when direct modeling operations are applied If there is a 3D constraint which fixes the placement of faces or edges this constraint will be preserved during Push Pull
215. chesteced eea E eer EES EET EEEE ET er E 3 4 Editing a table using the Table toolbar 1 To open the Table toolbar do one of the following e Click the cell you want to edit e Press and hold the left mouse button then define a rectangle to select multiple cells Column letters and row numbers display The column s and row s of the selection hightlight 329 BricsCAD V14 A rectangle with four handles is drawn around the selection Table 2 Do one of the following e Click a cell to select it e Press and hold the left mouse button then drag the cursor to select multiple cells option Drag the grips of the selection to modify the dimensions option Click a tool in the Table toolbar option Right click to display a context menu ou BR W Delete Cell Content Clear Cell Overrides Clear Table Overrides e Delete Cell Content deletes the text in the selected cells e Clear Cell Overrides resets all cell properties of the selected cells to the Cell Style settings as defined in the Table Style e Clear Table Overrides resets all cell properties of all cells to the Cell Style settings as defined in the Table Style Table tools Icon ss S C Tool name Description _ _ Y EF Insert row Inserts an empty row above the above selection EI Insert row Inserts an empty row below the z below selection a H Insert Inserts an empty column at the column
216. cide GcCollinear Forces lines or polyline segments to be collinear E GcParallel Forces two lines or linear polyline segments to be parallel to each other GcPerpendicular A Constrains two lines or polyline segments to lie perpendicularly to each other GcTangent Constrains two entities to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their extensions The following entities are accepted lines polyline segments circles arcs ellipses or elliptical arcs GcHorizontal Constrains lines linear polyline segments or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system GcVertical Constrains lines linear polyline segments or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system User Guide GcSmooth if Forces a spline to maintain fluid geometric continuity with another i spline line arc or polyline GcSymmetric F Constrains two entities or points to lie symmetrically with respect to a i selected line GcEqual Constrains arcs and circles to the same radius or lines and polyline segments to the same length Dimensional Constraints Dimconstraint Applies a dimensional constraint to an entity or between constraint points on entities Converts associative dimensions to dynamic dimensions DcHorizontal ir Constrains the horizontal distance X distance between two points with respect to the current coordinate system DcVertical T Constrains the vertical distance Y distance betwe
217. ck again to remove the selection NOTE By default in a new layer state all layer properties are selected to be restored To edit a layer state 1 Open the Layer States explorer 9 option Click the Overwrite button E to overwrite the layer state with the current layer settings If necessary click the Tree View button S Click the expand button of the layer state option Rename the layer state option Edit the layer state description option Expand the Layer Properties to restore list Click the check box to select a layer property click again to remove the selection DAO oY e ae To restore a layer state 1 Open the Layer States explorer 2 Select the layer state you want to restore 3 Do one of the following e Click the Restore button E e Right click then choose Restore in the context menu 4 Click the Regen button EH NOTE If REGENAUTO is on it is not necessary to press the Regen button in step 4 To copy layer states to another drawing 5 Open both the source and the target drawing 6 Make the source drawing the current drawing 7 Open the Layer States explorer 139 BricsCAD V14 8 9 10 Ld If the layer states display in Tree View choose either Detail View or Icon View 55 Do one of the following e Select the layer state you want to copy e Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple layer states With the cursor on a selected layer state
218. column of a view to choose a background The background definition of the view is applied during rendering Saving a view 1 Do one of the following e Click the Save Restore View tool button CE on the View toolbar e Choose Save Restore View in the View menu e Type view in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads View to list saved views Delete Restore Save Window 141 BricsCAD V14 2 Do one of the following e Choose Save in the View prompt menu e Type S in the command bar then press Enter 3 Type a name for the view in the command bar then press Enter The current view is saved NOTE If you type a name that is already used the current view is saved replacing the previously saved view There is no warning when overwriting a saved view Restoring a view 1 Do one of the following e Click the Save Restore View tool button FE on the View toolbar e Choose Save Restore View in the View menu e Type view in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads View to list saved views Delete Restore Save Window 2 Do one of the following e Choose Restore in the View prompt menu e Type R in the command bar then press Enter 3 Type the name of the saved view you want to restore in the command bar then press Enter The saved view is restored 142 User Guide 1 Inthe Drawing Explorer Views dialog window select Background in the Edit grid of the view 2 Click
219. command bar reads Select entities to change Select the text entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Change Entities Properties lt Change point gt Right click or press Enter to accept the default option The command bar reads New point for text or Enter for no change The first text entity is attached to the cursor Specify the new insertion point for the text or right click to accept the current location The command bar reads New text style lt current style gt Type a new text style and press Enter or right click to keep the current style The command bar reads New height lt current height gt Type a new height and press Enter or right click to keep the current height The command bar reads New rotation angle lt current angle gt Type a new angle and press Enter or right click to keep the current angle The command bar reads New text lt current text gt Type the new text and press Enter or right click to keep the current text option If multiple text entities were selected in step 2 steps 3 through 8 are repeated for each text The Change command cannot change Multi Line text Mtext entities To relocate blocks 366 Type change in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entities to change Select the blocks then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Change Entities Properties lt Change point gt Right click or press Enter to accept t
220. csCAD or imported from a different CAD format BmForm command is called to convert a selected set of geometric entities to a subcomponent of the current drawing Changing Mechanical Structure During design process users may realize than a particular component should be moved up or down in the component hierarchy BmForm command forms a new subcomponent for the current drawing that will contain a selected set of component BmDissolve command can be called to delete a particular component and move all its subcomponents into the level where the whole component was inserted Using Standard Hardware Standard hardware screws nuts washers bearings etc can be considered as a mechanical component BricsCAD supplies a huge library of standard hardware more than 30 000 details of different size Users can significantly increase the design performance by using standard parts BmHardware command is called to insert a standard part into the existing component Assembly Constraints Assembly constraints are ordinary 3D Constraints which link faces and edges of bodies that represent the components of an assembly 3D Constraints can link not only top level components but also any their subcomponents Component Visibility A particular component of a complex product can be invisible due to other components Surrounding it For example a piston is invisible inside a cylinder block To make such component visible users may hide some othe
221. ct such entities To select overlapping entities if SELECTIONPREVIEW is ON or OFF 1 2 Press and hold the Shift key then press and hold the space bar Click on the overlapping entities The entity lying on top highlights The command bar reads lt Cycle on gt Release the space bar then the Shift key Click anywhere in the drawing to highlight the next entity Right click hit the space bar or press Enter to select the highlighted entity The highlighted entity is selecte The command bar reads lt Cycle off gt option Repeat steps 1 through 5 to select more entities 351 BricsCAD V14 To select overlapping entities if SELECTIONPREVIEW is ON 1 Move the cursor to the overlapping entities The entity lying on top highlights Press and hold the shift key Hit the space bar repeatedly The overlapping entities highlight one by one Release the shift key then click to select the currently highlighted entity option Repeat steps 1 through 4 to select more entities Quick Select Gs Using Quick Select Internet connection needed Using Quick Select you can specify filters such as entity type color linetype or any other entity property to compose a selection set After composing the filter criteria you can choose to add the matching entities to a new selection set add the entities to the current selection set or remove them from the current selection Quick Select applies to the entire drawing
222. cters and symbols 1 You can use control codes and unicode strings to include special characters in text entities 2 To include control codes as you type text type two percent symbols followed by the special control code or character A single percent sign is treated as a normal text character Special text characters code String d U 00B0 Draws a degree symbol p U 00B1_ Draws a plus or minus symbol C U 2205 Draws a diameter symbol 311 BricsCAD V14 Symbols and Unicode strings Symbol Unicode String Meee 3 U 2248 equal Center U 2104 line Electrical b U 0278 phase Identity U 2261 U 2260 aaa Omega U 03A9 5 If supported by the text font To add a background mask 1 When creating or editing a multiline text entity click the Background Mask tool button li on the Text Formatting toolbar The Background Mask dialog displays Background mask Use background mask Fill color _ ByLayer Use drawing background color Border offset factor 1 2 Check the Use background mask option 3 Do one of the following e Choose a color in the Fill color drop down list e Choose Select co or in the Fill color drop down list and choose an Index color or a True color in the Select color dialog e Check the Use drawing background color option 4 Define the Border offset factor which defines the margin around the text fo
223. cts Create viewports Undo lt Create gt Press Enter to accept the default option The command bar reads Enter choice for layout options lt 0 3 gt none O single 1 std engineering 2 array of viewports 3 lt O gt Do one of the following e Type 3 in the command bar then press Enter e Choose Array of Viewports in the prompt menu The command bar reads Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport s User Guide 5 Pick a point in the layout The command bar reads Other corner of rectangle 6 Pick a second point in the layout The command bar reads Enter number of viewports in X direction lt 1 gt 7 Specify the number columns in the array The command bar reads Enter number of viewports in Y direction lt 1 gt 8 Specify the number of rows in the array The command bar reads Specify distance between viewports in X direction lt 0 000 gt 9 Do one of the following e Press Enter to create contiguous viewport columns e Specify the horizontal distance between the viewports The command bar reads Specify distance between viewports in Y direction lt horizontal distance gt 10 Do one of the following e Press Enter to set the vertical spacing equal to the horizontal spacing e Type O zero to create contiguous viewport rows e Specify the vertical spacing between the viewports The viewports are created 11 Press Enter to conclude the command To clip a viewport Command VPCLIP 1 Type vpc
224. currently supported version is 1 e AngleType Currently only internal bend angles are supported e LengthType amp endash the semantics of the value in the cells of the bend table corresponding to a particular bend angle and bend radius Now only bend deduction measured from the tangent point is supported BendDeductionTangent Bend deduction is the difference between the sum of the lengths of two flanges measured to the tangent point on a 3D model and the 236 User Guide length of the same fragment in the unfolded state e If you produce your sheet metal parts with different tools you can describe them in one bend table using DieWidth parameter A sample bend table is provided for your convenience in the Samples Mechanical bend_tables subfolder of the BricsCAD program folder e g C Program Files Bricsys BricsCAD V14 en_US Samples Mechanical bend_tables Please notice that writing rights to this folder might be limited In such case you need to copy the bend tables to a different folder in which you have full access rights To set the bend table for your sheet metal part L 2 Select the root node in the Mechanical Browser Select the Bend table field Bend table nA Click the Browse button uss Select the csv file then double click or press the Open button To update the bend table set previously Select the root node in the Mechanical Browser Select the Bend table field Press the Update butt
225. cursor to sketch The sketched line displays in light green 5 option Click to stop sketching pen up then click again pen down to resume 196 User Guide 6 option Choose Erase on in the prompt menu or type E Enter in the to start erasing sketch lines The cursor changes to the Erase tool oF e Move the cursor to the end of a sketch line to start erasing e Click to stop erasing and resume sketching 7 option Choose Record save in the prompt menu or type R Enter to save the Sketch lines and keep sketching 8 option Choose save and exit in the prompt menu or type X Enter to save the Sketch lines and exit the sketch command 9 option Choose Quit no save in the prompt menu or type Q Enter to exit the sketch command without saving Infinite Lines Command XLINE The X ine command creates infinite lines An Infinite Line is a line through a given point oriented at a specified angle and extending to infinity in both directions Because infinite lines extend to infinity they are not calculated as part of the drawing extents The default method for drawing an infinite line is to select a point and then specify its direction Rays and Infinite Lines or sometimes referred to as construction lines Drawing infinite lines 1 Do one of the following e Click the Infinite Line tool button W on the Lines flyout of the Draw toolbar e Choose Infinite Line in the Draw menu e Type xline in the command bar
226. cy property of the selected images off Transparency OFF left and Transparency ON right Modify the Image Frame setting 1 Click the Image Frame tool E in the Images toolbar 2 Choose On or Off in the Imageframe prompt menu IMAGEFRAME 462 User Guide The display of the image frames changes accordingly To clip an image 1 Make sure image frames display 2 Do one of the following e Click the Clip Image tool button xz on the Image toolbar e Type imageclip in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select image 3 Click the image frame The command bar reads Enter image clipping option ON OFF Delete New lt New gt 4 Press Enter to accept the New Boundary default option The command bar reads Enter image clipping type Polygonal Rectangular lt Rectangular gt 5 Press Enter to accept the Rectangular default option The command bar reads Specify first corner 6 Click a point to define the first corner of the clipping rectangle The clipping rectangle displays dynamically The command bar reads Specify opposite corner Click a point to define the clipping rectangle The image is clipped To toggle the clipping boundary of an image 1 Make sure image frames display 2 Click the image frame The properties of the image display in the Properties Bar 3 Under Misc Show clipped choose Yes or No 463 BricsCAD V14 Printing Commands PLOT PRINT
227. d Press Enter to stop making copies If the Copy option is chosen deletes the latest copy Reference Applies to Grip Rotate only Allows to specify a reference angle Type the angle in the command bar or specify two points Aborts the grip edit command To stretch entities using grips 1 Select the entity or entities 2 Select the grip or grips you want to manipulate 3 Click the grip you want to use as the base point All selected grips move simultaneously The GRIP_STRETCH prompt box displays GRIP_STRETCH The command bar reads Enter new point Base point Copy Undo exit 4 Do one of the following to define the displacement point e Click in the drawing e Enter the coordinates then press Enter e Key in the distance then press Enter Use ORTHO or Polar Tracking to control the angle To move entities using grips 1 Select the entity or entities 2 Select the grip or grips you want to manipulate 3 Click the grip you want to use as the base point for the move The Grip Stretch command is launched 4 Do one of the following e Right click then select Move in the context menu e Hit the Space bar or Enter key to cycle through the Grips Editing commands until Move is active The GRIP_MOVE prompt box displays 342 User Guide GRIP_MOVE Base Point Copy Undo The command bar reads Enter move point Base point Copy Undo exit 5 Do one of the following to define the displacement point
228. d Revolve dmRevolve commands applied to 2D contours e The creation of fillets dmFillet and chamfers dmChamfer on existing solid geometry e Modifying dmPushPull or deletion dmDelete of fillets and chamfers e Direct interactive manipulation of solid faces using PushPull dmPushPull Move dmMove and Rotate dmRotate operations e The creation or removing of a volume when 2D contour attached to a face of a solid is being pushed or pulled All these operations are performed in interactive mode the intermediate result of the operation is shown dynamically according to user input defined by mouse movement The key feature of direct editing capabilities provided by BricsCAD consists in preserving of design intent Design intent can be expressed by 3D dimensional and geometrical constraints which can be explicitly specified by user see 3D Constraints 3D dimensional constraints Distance Radius and Angle imposed for faces and edges give user full parametric control over the solid model different configurations and scales of the model can be obtained simply by changing the parameter of a dimensional constraint Geometrical constraints Coincident Tangent Parallel and others define how these changes influence the geometry of the model However there is no need to introduce all the geometrical constraints manually since most of them can be recognized automatically by BricsCAD see Design Intent to provide the expected result
229. d of a section plane to choose a different state for the section plane Volume Boundary 5 option click the Plane Transparency field of a section plane to change the transparency of the section plane entity in the drawing O Opaque 100 Transparent invisible 262 User Guide 6 option Click the Plane Color field then choose a new color in the Select Color dialog To modify the size and position of a section plane 1 Select the section plane entity in the drawing Depending on the current state of the section plane entity a number of grips display 2 option Switch on the Live Section property of the section plane to see the result of the modifications dynamically 3 option To grip edit a Plane state section plane entity Three grips display e Grip 1 origin point moves the position of the section plane in the XY plane e Grip 2 through point redefines the through point of the section plane The section plane is rotated around the origin point 1 e Grip 3 moves the section plane parallel in a direction perpendicular to the section plane 4 option To grip edit a Boundary state section plane entity Nine grips display e Grip 1 origin point moves the position of the section plane in the XY plane e Grip 2 through point redefines the through point of the section plane The section plane boundary is stretched and rotated around the origin point 1 e Grip 3 stretches the s
230. d perpendicularly onto the tracking line 3 Hit the Shift key again to unlock a tracking line 1 66 6 68 8000 Endpoint Using Entity Snap Tracking 1 Launch a drawing tool e g Draw Line 2 Hover the cursor over the first tracking point 1 A small plus sign displays to indicate the tracking point is active 3 Hover the cursor over the second tracking point 2 A small plus sign displays to indicate the tracking point is active 4 Move the cursor close to position 4 e Tracking lines display from both tracking points 3 e Across marker X indicates the intersection of the tracking lines e Snap markers display at the tracking points 113 BricsCAD V14 e An Entity Snap Tracking tooltip at the intersection of the tracking lines shows the distances from the tracking points 4 1 Endpoint 50 2 lt 0 0000 Endpoint 96 5 lt 270 0000 5 Click to accept the Entity Snap Tracking point 114 User Guide User Coordinate Systems When you create entities in a drawing they are located in relation to the drawing s underlying Cartesian coordinate system The ELEVATION system variable specifies the distance from the xy plane of the current coordinate system If ELEVATION O zero entities are created in the xy plane of the current coordinate system Every drawing has a fixed coordinate system called the World Coordinate System WCS You can also define arbitrary coordinate systems locat
231. de settings for the current dimension style Associative Dimensions Gs Creating Associative Dimensions Internet connection needed Dimensions created in BricsCAD are associative if the dimensioned entity is moved or modified the dimensions will update automatically The associative property of dimensions also applies to dimensions which are placed in paperspace and are associated with model Space entities If necessary you can use the DIMREGEN command to update all associative dimensions 315 i i za 2 ra i T soo s e The following Entity Snaps can be used to create associative dimensions endpoint midpoint center perpendicular quadrant insertion point intersection and apparent intersection 284 User Guide Dimension Settings A dimension style consists of six settings groups Lines and Arrows Text Fit Primary Units Alternate Units Tolerances To list the current status of the dimension variables 1 Do one of the following E A e Click the Dimension Variable Status tool button on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Dimension Variable Status in the Dimensions menu A list of all dimension variables displays in the command bar 2 Press the F2 function key to open the BricsCAD Prompt History window Press Enter to continue the listing 4 Press the F2 function key to close the BricsCAD Prompt History window na Lines and Arrows Settings Description Variable Arowi 1
232. der and the Roamable root folder of the current user If you have customized the files in these folders and if one or more of the corresponding files in the User Data Cache folder are more recent the BricsCAD user file manager is launched asking you whether to keep your files or to overwrite your files with the updated files 1 Do one of the following e Select a file in the file list then click the Yes button to overwrite or click the No button to keep your file Repeat this procedure for each file in the list e Click the Yes to all button to replace all your files with the more recent files from BricsCAD e Click the Stop Copying button to keep all your files Bricscad user file manager An update of customizable user files is available In order for the updated files to be used they will be copied to your user folder Below is a list of files containing changes which will be overwritten File name Type descri C Users tester AppData Roaming Bricsys Bricscad W en_US support sa pat Hatch patterns C Users tester AppData Roaming Bricsys BricscadW en_US support so lin Linetypes C Users tester AppData Roaming Bricsys BricscadW en_US supportidefault pat Hatch patterns C Wsers tester AppData Roaming Bricsys BricscadW en_US supportidefault lin Linetypes Is it Ok to overwrite your existing personal settings stored in file C Users tester AppData Roaming Bricsys Bricscad WW en_US support jso pat 103410 Bytes 03 07 2007
233. df use plotstyles Enables usage of plotstyles Hatch to bitmap DPI 300 Pdf embedded fonts Controls whether True Type Fonts are embedded in the PDF export Pdf TTF text as geometry If selected TTF text is exploded to geometry Pdf SHX text as geometry If selected SHX text is exploded to geometry Pdf simple geometry optimization Enable simple geometry optimization e g separate segments to one polyline use of Bezier curve control points Pdf zoom to extents mode If exporting model space zoom to extents first if the current model space view is zoomed in Pdf layer support Controls whether layers are included in the PDF export The options are do not export layers export layers which are on only export all layers Pdf layouts to export Controls which layouts are exported The options are Active only the active layout or model space is exported as a single page pdf All All layouts including model space are exported as a multi page pdf Pdf papersize override If on the papersize as defined in the BricsCAD Print settings is overridden The papersize width and height defined by PdfPaperWidth and PdfPaperHeight is used instead Pdf overridden paper width Width in mm of the PDF paper if PdfPaperSizeOverride is on Pdf overridden paper height Height in mm of the PDF paper if PdfPaperSizeOverride is on Pdf use plotstyles If on the plotstyle of the layout controls the color and lineweight in the PDF export Hatch to
234. dialog opens then right click to create the polyline s User Guide Rays Command RAY A Ray is a line that starts at a point and extends to infinity Because rays extend to infinity they are not calculated as part of the drawing extents The default method for drawing a ray is to select the start point of the ray and then specify its direction Rays and Infinite Lines or sometimes referred to as construction lines Drawing rays 1 Do one of the following e Click the Ray tool button w on the Lines flyout of the Draw toolbar e Choose Ray in the Draw menu e Type ray in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Infinite ray Bisect Horizontal Vertical Angle Parallel lt Start of Ray gt A prompt menu opens RAY Horizontal Vertical Angle Bisect Parallel Cancel 2 Specify the start point of the ray The ray displays dynamically 3 Specify the direction of the ray The next ray displays dynamically 4 option Keep specifying directions to draw a series of rays starting from the same point 5 Right click to stop drawing rays Rectangles Command RECTANG A rectangle is created as a closed four sided polyline A rectangle is drawn by specifying two opposite corners The Dimensions option allows to specify the width and height of the rectangle Unless the Rotated option is chosen the sides of a rectangle are always parallel to the x axis and y axis of the current coordinate
235. different layer you must first make that layer the current layer Setting the current layer Do one of the following e On the BricsCAD Properties Bar select Layer Make sure no entity is selected Choose a layer in the drop down list Properties Bar 0 Linetype Linetype scale _BRX_DIMPOINTS Lineweight _BRX_G HATCH _FRAM _BRX_SECTION HATCH Camera _BRX_SUBTRACTORS Target _BRX_VIEW_FORWARL Perspective g 1 ACCOMM 1 1 Baseline 2 1 CONSTRUCT 1 1 CONSTRUCT 1 2 CONSTRUCT 1 3 Annotation scale CONSTRUCT 1 4 PPR TT wor 41 e On the Entity Properties toolbar click the down arrow next to the Layer field then choose a layer in the drop down list e Right click on the Layer field in the Status Bar then choose a layer in the context menu Lens Length Field of view 186 User Guide Drawing 2D Overview All tools to create 2D entities can be found either on the Draw toolbar or in the Draw menu Toolbars Menu rs Line i Draw Ray LEB QGALR 00 O H OHA finite Line J Polyline Draw VOULE a 3D Polyline 7 p Ta Spline Lines S Hek og Sketch 8 Polylines p Multiline Polvlines if pees Polygon 0 Donut H Solid zZ Trace Arc Circle Elliptical Arc Ellipse eo Point Hatch Gradient Boundary Polyline Region Wipeout Revision Cloud Table Text Multiline Text Pre feo 187 BricsCAD V14 Name LINE Creates single lines or a series of connected
236. dimension line arrow heads extension lines and the dimension text 13 7 hal pa Dimension text prefix d Dimension text 258 Dimension tolerance 1 Dimension text suffix cm First arrowhead block Second arrowhead block Dimension line First extension line Second extension line Extension line extend Extension line offset Arrowhead size Vertical text offset the vertical position of the dimension text is controlled through three settings variables DIMGAP DIMTAD and DIMTVP ae ee ae ee e e O e WU N NOTE The Associativity DIMASSOC settings variable determines whether associative dimensions non associative dimensions or exploded dimensions are created 280 User Guide Dimensioning tools overview All tools to create dimension entities can be found either on the Dimensions toolbar or in the Dimensions menu Toolbar TET 1 1310 li fe IOA O FRA a Azar t AG A a Be Ea od Menu Linear Aligned Are Radius Diameter Angular Baseline Continue Ordinate SH BQO REAJI i Rotated Make Oblique Eis Leader QLeader Multileader Tolerance Center Mark Edit Dimension Text Rotate Dimension Text Reposition Dimension Text Restore Text Position Apply Dimension Style Save Dimension Style Restore Dimension Style Dimension Variable Status A A A A KH ah AR KH Ai KH wf H af E wl a He 281 BricsCAD V14 Icon
237. dimensions to grip edit EntitieS cc ccccceceee cece ee eee eeeeee seen ee eeeeaaeneeneeeees 96 Using dynamic dimensions tO measure E NtItICS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetesgeneenegs 96 BricsCAD V14 COOFGINate INDUL sii OF WOrKINO With Cartesian Coordinate Suerrin cick uaasa dene catmuncea A cute sae dua een od oe ane eee 97 Using relative Cartesian coordinates to draw a rectangle c cece cece ce eeeeeee sete ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 98 Working with cylindrical coordinates s sicavercisiveets vawraievaaccaateceeerse cee btns Ueveu ua laneweeas avevenvadaeees 98 Working with spherical Coordinat S i cancciwet aea muah olanatesnaasaaaareua seunanuennntes 99 USING Snap and Grid sviiivececsavtnns cc dtvncuscavcegrssevtensscatcansssctseunssacteccc LOO Display the Snap and GHG SCCUIMGS prirent e a E a tual ever cunioeeasaina A aA 101 TO synchronize SNAP ANC grid SPACING ccccces eee c eee eeseee irer a a a i 101 OSet Ene Draw iG LIM S asra a eeadarane taunt oataant eeu aa en eeaatinn eg rated enue 101 TO toggle the Drawing Limits ocrni e caus ated dauteaascowenadinamerendbeas dadsantecadoreasbaane aah 101 Using Isometric SnaPasrsiraeis danarra a aa a eia ETEN 101 seting the Snap ANGIE scria ia a a a a na iasatariaesaedeashramenntes 103 ERTICY SINGDS roria aaa aaa LOA To define the Entity Snap settings s sssssssssssssssnnsnssrsnnrsnrnrsnsrrnnnnsnenrrnsnennnnrnenrrnrnenne 104 TOSset the Entity SMAPS
238. dinate of the first point movement of the cursor is positive along the X axis and negative along the Y axis or vice versa The Reverse Direction option of the Edit Polyline tool changes the direction of a polyline Revision Clouds Command REVCLOUD A Revision Cloud is an open or closed polyline composed of arcs Revisions clouds are used to for reviewing or redlining purposes to indicate the parts of the drawing that need to be adjusted or annotated Before you start drawing revision clouds first define the Arc length and Style 208 User Guide Drawing revision clouds 1 Do one of the following e Click the Revision Cloud tool button gt on the Draw toolbar e Choose Revision Cloud in the Draw menu e Type revision cloud in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Specify start point or Arc length Object Style lt Object gt A prompt menu opens REVCLOUD 2 option To define the Arc length do one of the following e Choose Arc length in the prompt menu e Type A in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Specify minimum length of arc lt current minimum length gt Do one of the following e Press Enter or right click to accept the current minimum length e Type anew value in the command bar then press Enter e Define a new minimum length graphically by specifying two points The command bar reads Specify maximum length of arc lt current maximum length gt Do one of th
239. dit the description of Edit the Description field User Guide To de ete a user profile if 2 gt 4 NOTE Launch the User Profile Manager Select the user profile you want to delete Click the De ete button Click the Yes button on the confirmation box to delete the profile The current profile cannot be deleted To export a user profile if UI Launch the User Profile Manager Select the profile you want to export in the profile list Click the Export button The Save As dialog displays Select a folder to save the user profile in option Edit the name of the profile in the File name field Click the Save button The file is saved with an arg extension To import a user profile f Launch the User Profile Manager Click the Import button The Open dialog displays Select a user profile file arg Click the Open button The Import Profile dialog displays option Type a different name in the Profile name field option Edit the profile description Click the OK button on the Import Profile dialog The profile is added to the profile list 63 BricsCAD V14 To import a user profile from another user When you import a user profile of another user all user dependent search paths e g the local root and roamable root folders see BricsCAD User Files still refer to the other user as a result the folders cannot be found and error messages such as Unable to open program param
240. dius 191 BricsCAD V14 The ratio minor radius divided by the major radius defines the eccentricity of the ellipse A circle is an ellipse with an eccentricity of 1 Other methods to draw ellipses can be found in the Ellipse submenu of the Draw menu and in the Ellipses toolbar The Polyline Ellipse PELLIPSE settings variable controls whether real ellipses or a polyline representation is created If the variable is ON the Ellipse tool creates a closed polyline if the variable is OFF real ellipses are created The difference between a real ellipse and a polyline representation of an ellipse is visible when you select the ellipse A real ellipse has five handles center point and the endpoints of the axes A polyline representation of an ellipse is a closed polyline composed of arc segments eT es ee pu Boii S aS Eg E T aw Ca ee E l k p g L d L 4 a 4 od m Eg pT J TEn Fe oe be real ellipse left and the polyline representation of an ellipse right NOTE Since ellipses cannot be used as a clip boundary for external references or to create clipped paperspace viewports you must use a polyline representation to do these jobs Setting the Polyline Ellipse PELLIPSE system variable Do one of the following e Inthe command bar type pellipse then press Enter e Inthe Settings dialog go to Drawing gt Drafting gt Entity Creation gt Other entities E Other entities Cirde radiu
241. down and left right RTUPDOWN Keys while holding the Alt command Ctrl keys The incremental change in zoom with each mouse wheel action is controlled through the Zoom Factor variable ZOOMFACTOR On condition the Middle Button Pan MBUTTONPAN variable is set ON Setting the Zoom Factor variable 1 Type zoomfactor in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads New current value for ZOOMFACTOR 3 to 100 lt current value gt 130 User Guide 2 Type a value between 3 and 100 in the command bar then press Enter Or 3 Inthe Settings dialog open the Drawing category then expand the Display Viewing sub category In the Viewing group select the ZOOMFACTOR variable 4 Type a value between 3 and 100 in the zoomfactor field NOTE Increase the zoom factor to speed up scroll wheel zooming in large drawings Setting the Middle Button Pan variable 1 Type in mbuttonpan the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads New current value for MBUTTONPAN Off or On lt current value gt 2 Type On or Off in the command bar Or 3 Inthe Settings dialog open the Program Options category then expand the User Preferences sub category and select the MBUTTONPAN variable 4 Choose either Support panning or Support action defined in menu file View Rotation Commands RTROT RTROTCTR RTROTF RTROTX RTROTY RTROTZ DDVPOINT VIEW PLAN and VPOINT The Rtrot Real Time Constrained S
242. drawing template dwt then click the Open button User Guide To create a drawing from scratch 1 Do one of the following e Choose New wizard in the File menu e Type newwiz in the command window then press Enter 2 Onthe Create New Drawing dialog choose Start from Scratch then click the Next button The New Drawing Wizard enables you to set up anew drawing configured to your needs a lii Start from Scratch Ea Start from Template Ae Use a Wizard Tip Start from Scratch creates a new drawing and offers to choose between 2D or 3D and between imperial or metric default settings 3 option Check the Set Workspace option then choose a workspace from the list button See Workspaces to learn more about workspaces 4 Choose between either Imperial or Metric default settings Workspace viei 2D Drafting Default Settings j Imperial feet and inches Metric 5 Click the Finish button to create the drawing NOTE Using the above procedure it depends on the status of the BASEFILE and PSTYLEPOLICY variables whether C7B Color table or STB Named plot style table will be used to set up plotter configurations in the newly created drawing BASEFILE PSTYLEPOLICY CTB or STB not specified OFF specified ON or OFF as defined in the template drawing 491 BricsCAD V14 To set the Plot style policy 1 Open the Settings dialog 2 Under Program Options Plot and publish select Plot style
243. e Select one of the following to Select nested entities Automatically All the entities and nested blocks in the selected reference are included in the reference editing session Prompt After you close the Reference Edit dialog you are prompted to select the enties and nested blocks in the reference that you want to edit Only these entities will be temporarily extracted and be made available for modification within the context of the current drawing This temporary working set of entities can be edited and then saved back to update the reference being edited To distinguish current drawing from editing set BricsCAD displays all the entities of the current drawing as faded The fading level is controlled through the XFADECTL settings variable of which the default value is set to 50 445 BricsCAD V14 446 Check the Settings e Enable unique layer and symbol names e If selected named objects in xrefs are altered adding a prefix e If cleared the names of layers and other named objects remain the same as in the reference drawing e Display attribute definitions for editing Controls whether attribute definitions in blocks are extracted and displayed during reference editing e Lock entities not in working set Entities in the reference being edited that are not included in the temporary working set see step 5 cannot be manipulated nor entities in the host drawing or other Xrefs This behavior is simila
244. e A dialog box displays Select entities 0 entities selected Slope angle Under Array Type choose Rectangular Click the Se ect Entities button 5 The Array dialog box closes temporarily to let you select entities Select the entities then right click or press Enter The Array dialog box reopens Fill out the Settings fields or press the Pick Points buttons Ls to define the settings graphically The Array dialog box closes temporarily to let you pick point in the drawing 373 BricsCAD V14 OCICS More TDI Row offset A and column offset B can be defined by the spacing rectangle red 6 Click the OK button to create the array NOTE Positive values in steps 4 and 5 are measured along the positive X and Y axis of the current UCS Negative values are measured in the opposite direction Creating a polar array 1 Do one of the following OO e Click the 2D Array tool button 40 on the Modify toolbar e Choose 2D Array in the Modify menu e Type AR or array in the command bar then press Enter A dialog box displays 374 User Guide Array Type 0 Rectangular Polar Select entities 0 entities selected Center X 853 0 Angle between 60 0000 Angle to fill 359 9000 Number of items Rotate items as copied Entity base point Under Array Type choose Polar Click the Se ect Entities button 8 The Array dialog box closes temporarily to let you select entities
245. e Multiple polygons Cancel 2 Specify the number of sides then press Enter The command bar reads Specify by Edge lt Center of polygon gt The prompt menu changes POLYGON Specdfy by edge Cancel 3 Specify the center of the polygon The command bar reads Specify by Side lt Select vertex point gt the prompt menu changes POLYGON Specify by side Cancel 4 Specify a vertex point of the polygon The polygon is created NOTE When Fill Mode is turned off all filled entities such as wide polylines and planes display and print as outlines Polylines Commands PLINE BOUNDARY and BOUNDARY A polyline is an open or closed sequence of connected line and or arc segments which are treated as a single entity Each segment of a polyline can have a width that is either constant or tapers over the length of the segment The Pline command interactively creates open and closed polylines entering points The Boundary and Boundary commands create closed polylines from an enclosed area defined by other entities The THICKNESS system variable specifies the height of a polyline If THICKNESS O zero there is no visual difference between polylines and a series of lines and or arcs 202 User Guide THICKNESS O left THICKNESS 50 middle ELEVATION 50 right When a polyline is edited you can modify the entire polyline or change individual segments and you can add or remove vertices LL
246. e Toggle between model space and paper space in a layout Commands MSPACE and PSPACE 1 option When in model space Model Space with floating viewports do one of the following to switch to paper space e Type either pspace or ps then press Enter e Double click outside a viewport 2 option When in paper space do one of the following to switch to model space Model Space with floating viewports e Type either mspace or ms then press Enter e Double click inside a viewport NOTE MSPACE and PSPACE commands are available when working in a layout only 25 BricsCAD V14 26 Customizing BricsCAD Sy Customize BricsCAD Internet connection needed There are several ways to customize BricsCAD You can change the look of BricsCAD by adapting the layout of menus and toolbars but you can also compose macro s write LISP routines or use VBA to change the way BricsCAD works All customization that affects the user interface is done in the Customize dialog and saved in CUI files CUI stands for Customize User Interface The definitions for all menus toolbars and keyboard shortcuts are loaded from the main CUI file default cui when you launch BricsCAD Additional definitions such as your own customizations are loaded from partial CUI files Aliases and shell commands are loaded from the default pgp file NOTE It is recommended not to modify the default cui file With each new update the BricsCAD installer resplaces the e
247. e Width to zero for non wrapped multiline text ae ilar de ii op P 310 Multiline text justification User Guide The red dot indicates the insertion point of the multiline text entity This is a sample multiline text entity to illustrate the various justification settings that apply to multiline texts Top left This is a sample multiline text to ilustrate the various tion settings that apply to multiline texts Middle left This is a sample multiline text entity to ilustrate the various justification settings that PPply to multiline texts Bottom left This is a sample multiline text entity to illustrate the various justification settings that apply to multiline texts Top center This is a sampl multiline text entity to illu the Various justification settings that apply to multiline texts Middle center This is a sample multiline text entity to illustrate the various justification settings that apply to myhtiline texts Bottom center This is a sample multiline tex entity to illustrate the various justification settings that apply to multiline texts Top right This is a sample multiline text entity to illustrate the vario justification settings tha apply to multiline texts Middle right This is a sample multiline text entity to illustrate the various justification settings that apply to multiline texts Bottom right Including special text chara
248. e command edit field Command Edit field If the Enable flag of the AUTOCOMPLETEMODE system variable is set command entries are completed automatically Do one of the following e Press Enter if the currently completed command displays e Choose a command in the Suggestion list SELECTIONANNODISPLAY SELECTIONAREA SELECTIONAREAOPACITY SELECTSIMILAR L dq SELECTSIMILARMODE SELECT Autocomplete options are E Auto complete mode Ox000F 15 ox0001 Enable 0x0002 Auto Append Ox0004 W Suggestion List Ox0008 Display Icons unsupported 0x00 10 _ Exdude the display of System Variables Auto complete delay 0 3 Command history scroll buttons e You can modify the height of the docked command window by dragging its top edge when docked Lower or bottom edge when docked Upper e The size of a floating command bar can be adjusted by dragging one of its edges e When the command bar is closed command options and keyboard entries display in the status bar e Use the arrow up and arrow down keys of the keyboard to browse the command history To set the command line properties 1 Open the Settings window User Guide 2 Goto Program Options User Preferences Command Line E Command line Command line font name Verdana Command line font size 8 Command line list background color 255 255 221 Command line list foreground color 0 0 0 Command line edit backg
249. e polyline to the first vertex Opening a polyline removes the closing segment When you select a polyline for editing the prompt menu displays either the Open or Close option depending on whether the polyline you select is closed or open The following entities are created as closed polylines rectangles polygons donuts revision clouds You can open or close a polyline using the Edit Polyline tool or in the BricsCAD Properties bar To close or open a polyline 1 Do one of the following e Click the Edit Polyline tool button LA on the Modify toolbar e Choose Edit Polyline in the Modify menu e Type editpline or pedit in the command window then press Enter The command bar reads Select polyline to edit 2 Click the polyline you want to close or open The command bar reads Edit polyline Edit vertices Close or Open Decurve Fit Join Linetype Mode Reverse Spline Taper Width Undo lt exXit gt A prompt menu displays 3 To close or open a polyline do one of the following e Type C or O in the command bar then press Enter e Choose Close or Open in the prompt menu Opening and closing a polyline using the BricsCAD Properties bar 1 Select the polyline The current properties of the selected polyline display in the BricsCAD Properties bar 2 Select Closed in the Misc settings category in the BricsCAD Properties bar 3 Click the down arrow and select Yes or No El Misc No Linetype generation 39
250. e Click the Create Block tool button 6 on the Tools toolbar e Choose Create Block in the Tools menu e Type block in the command bar then press Enter The Block Definition dialog displays Flock Definition Base Point Entities Behavior Specify On screen Specify On screen Annotative v Match block orientation to layout il Pick point Select entities WIM La Scale uniformly No entities selected Retain Convert to block Delete 415 BricsCAD V14 NOTE Type a name for the new block in the Name field Do one of the following to specify the Base Point e Check the Specify On screen option You will be prompted to specify the base point after clicking the OK button e Click the Pick point button Tr The Block Definition dialog closes temporarily to let you pick a point in the drawing e Type the coordinates of the base point in the X Y and Z field Do one of the following to select the entities to be included in the block definition e Check the Specify On screen option You will be prompted to select the entities after clicking the OK button e Click the Select entities button Tr The Block Definition dialog closes temporarily to let select the entities in the drawing Set the block properties e Annotative creates an annotative the block e Match block orientation to layout if checked the orientation of an annotative block is preserved in a rotated viewport e Scale uniformly if ch
251. e Drawing Explorer Coordinate Systems dialog opens Click the blank tile in front of the UCS name to make it current Back 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 Front 0 0000 10 0000 0 0000 1 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 3 Left 10 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 4 W i 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 5 Rotated 0 0000 0 0000 10 0000 0 7071 0 7071 0 0 0000 0 4082 0 4082 0 8165 Close the BricsCAD Explorer dialog If no UCS is marked the WCS is the current coordinate system To set a relative UCS 118 Do one of the following e Click the UCS tool button on the Settings toolbar e Choose UCS in the Settings menu The User Coordinate System dialog opens User Guide User Coordinate System Set the selected UCS relative to Current UCS F Change view to plan view of the selected UCS Select UCS Previous UCS Current View Set to WES 2 Choose one of the following e Set the selected UCS relative to the Current UCS e Set the selected UCS relative to the World coordinate system WCS 3 option Enable the Change view to plan view of the selected UCS option 4 Click one of the Planar UCS s buttons The User Coordinate System dialog closes NOTES ee Ifthe UCSORTHO system variable is ON an orthographic UCS is restored automatically when an orthographic view is restored by the VIEW command or by one of the tools
252. e Mechanical Browser In the bottom part of the Mechanical Browser click the Name field and rename the main component Piston Engine El Component Name Description Visual style By Viewport The drawing name automatically matches the main component name 3 Save the drawing Step 3 Adding the components 1 Click the Insert Component tool button 3 on the Mechanical toolbar The Insert Mechanical Component dialog displays Open the BricsCAD Installation folder Samples Mechanical piston folder 221 BricsCAD V14 Insert Mechanical Component Lookin piston rpe a Name z Date modified Type Size Description F connecting rod dwg 7 03 2013 5 10 BricsCAD Drawing Size 43502 bytes Desktop JA crankshaft dwg 7 03 2013 5 10 BricsCAD Drawing t A E cylinder dwg 7 03 2013 5 10 BricsCAD Drawing F pin dwg 7 03 2013 5 10 BricsCAD Drawing Modified 7 03 2013 5 10 Computer piston engine dwg 13 03 2013 9 32 BricsCAD Drawing F d 7 03 2013 5 10 ccessea z Created 7 03 2013 5 09 FS piston dwg 7 03 2013 5 10 BricsCAD Drawing Favorites Open as read only e Use preview rhe y Recent Items Preview My Documents 2 Select the crankshaft dwg then double click or click the Open button The component is attached to the cursor with its origin point Dynamic dimensions display Distance from the origin of the current coordinate system and angle from the X axis 3 We will consider t
253. e Settings to edit the Entity Snaps settings Snap Tracking AutoSnap e click to toggle Snap Tracking on STRACK off STRACK e right click then choose Settings to edit the Snap Tracking settings Line Weight Display e click to toggle the display of Line Weights On LWT or Off LWT e right click then choose On or Off to control the display of Line Weights Viewport Mode e Inthe Model layout Tile Model space with tiled viewports Click to switch to the most recently opened paper space layout Right click to select a paper space layout Ww Model Ad Level Ad Levell A Levell A Levell Details e Ina Layout M Layout Model space with floating viewports P Layout Paper space Click to toggle between paper space and model space with floating viewports Right click then choose e Paper Space Switch to paper space e Model Space Switch to model space with floating viewports e Model Switch to model space with tiled viewports User Guide e Layout Switch to the selected paper space layout Paper Space Model Space Model Ww A4 Leveld Ad Levell A Level A Levell Details 17 Tablet Initializes the use of a drawing tablet 18 Dynamic UCS click to toggle the Dynamic UCS feature ON BUCS or Off DUCS 19 Dynamic Dimensions e click to toggle the display of Dynamic Dimensions On DYN or Off DYN e right click then choose Settings to edit the Dynamic
254. e alignspace in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads First alignment point in Model space Click inside a layout viewport then pick a point The command bar reads Second alignment point in Model space or lt Return gt for none Right click or press Enter The command bar reads Alignment point in Paper space Pick a point in the layout The command bar reads Activate the viewport which will be used for alignment Click inside the viewport you want to align Right click or press Enter to confirm The display in the selected viewport is moved to make the two points coincident Aligning 2 points 1 Type alignspace in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads First alignment point in Model space Click inside a layout viewport then pick a point The command bar reads Second alignment point in Model space or lt Return gt for none Pick a second point in the layout viewport The command bar reads First alignment point in Paper space Pick a point in the layout The command bar reads Second alignment point in Paper space Pick a second point in the layout The command bar reads Activate the viewport which will be used for alignment Click inside the viewport you want to align Right click or press Enter to confirm The display in the selected viewport is moved rotated and or scaled to make the points two by two coincident 167 BricsCAD V14 Layouts Command LAYOUT I
255. e command bar reads Parameter Included lt End angle gt The prompt menu changes ELLIPSE Parameter Induded angle Cancel User Guide 6 Specify the end angle of the elliptical arc Editing an elliptical arc 1 Select the elliptical arc The properties of the elliptical arc display in the Properties bar El Geometry El Start paint 10 743 100 3847 0 x 10 745 100 3847 Fa 0 E Center 25 58 70 3336 0 x 25 58 Fa 0 E End point 17 1995 57 1941 0 x 17 1995 Y 57 1941 7 0 Major radius 54 7481 Minor radius 29 1773 Radius ratio 0 5329 Start angle 234 End angle 154 Major axis vector 54 0321 8 8252 0 x 54 0321 Y 8 8252 Fi 0 H Minor axis vector 4 7033 28 7958 0 x 4 7033 Y 28 958 rd 0 Area 4196 6226 2 Type anew value in the Center Major radius Minor radius Radius ratio Start angle or End angle field then press Enter 3 Press the Esc key to stop editing the elliptical arc Freehand sketches Command SKETCH A freehand sketch consists of a series of straight line segments created either as individual line entities or as a polyline Before you begin creating a freehand sketch you must set the length or increment of each segment The smaller the segments the more accurate your Sketch but small segments increase the file size After you specify the length of the sketch segments the crosshairs change to a pencil tool og Ji A freehand sketch line is not added to the dra
256. e content of the first text entity that contains the search string displays in the Search results pane 6 option Click the Zoom To button _ZoomTo The drawing is zoomed in on the text entity 7 Do one of the following e Repeat steps 7 and 8 to find more instances of the same search string e Repeat steps 2 through 8 to find another text string Close e Press the Esc key or click the Close button Gee to stop NOTE If a selection is active when you launch the FIND command only text entities in the selection set are searched 316 User Guide To replace text 1 Open the Find and Replace dialog 2 option Set the Find and Replace options 3 Type the search text in the Find Text String field 4 Type the replacement text in the Replace with field 5 option Click the Se ect Entities button Te to compose a selection set e The Find and Replace dialog temporarily closes to let you select entities e Right click to conclude the selection of entities The Search in field reads Current Selection instead of Entire Drawing 6 option Click the Replace All button Replace All All instances of the search text are replaced by the replacement text 7 option Click the Find Next button _Find Next The content of the first text entity that contains the search text displays in the Search results pane e option Click the Zoom To button _ZoomTo The drawing is zoomed in on the text entity e Do one
257. e current coordinate system User Guide Measuring lengths To measure the length of single linear entity click the entity then read the Length field in the Properties Bar To add the lengths of a series of linear entities 1 Do one of the following e Click the Area tool button gt on the Inquiry toolbar e Type area in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Entity Add Subtract lt First point gt A prompt menu displays AREA Find area of one entity Add areas together Subtract areas Cancel 2 Do one of the following e Choose Add areas together in the prompt menu e Type A in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Adding Entity Subtract lt First point gt A prompt menu displays AREA Add entities to area Subtract areas Cancel 3 Do one of the following e Choose Add entities to area in the prompt menu e Type E in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Adding area lt Select entities gt 4 Click the first entity The area and length of the first entity display in the command bar The command bar reads Adding area lt Select entities gt 5 Click the second entity The area and length of the second entity and the total area and total length display in the command bar Optionally press the F2 function key to display the Prompt History window press F2 again to close the Prompt History window The command bar reads Adding area lt Sel
258. e following e Press Enter or right click to maximum length equal to the minimum length e Type anew value in the command bar then press Enter e Define a new maximum length graphically by specifying two points 3 option To define the revision cloud Sty e do one of the following e Choose Style in the prompt menu e Type Sin the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select arc style Normal Calligraphy lt current style gt A prompt menu opens REVCLOUD Do one of the following e Press Enter or right click to accept the current style e Select a new style in the prompt menu e Type N or Cin the command bar then press Enter 4 option To convert an existing polyline arc or circle to a revision cloud do one of the following e Press Enter then select the entity you want to convert e Choose Object in the prompt box then select the entity you want to convert 209 BricsCAD V14 5 option To draw the revision cloud click where you want to start and move the cursor Each time the cursor movement exceeds the minimum length an arc is added To stop do one of the following e Move the cursor over the start point to close the revision cloud e Right click The command bar reads Reverse direction Yes No lt No gt A prompt menu opens REVCLOUD 6 To create the revision cloud do one of the following e To accept the revision cloud right click e To reverse the direction type Y or cho
259. e ggg Fillet radius 5 00 Trim mode Trim selected edges to the endpoints of chamfer lines and fillet arcs Chamfer mode Sets the input method by which chamfers are created Distance Distance or Length Angle Ki Registry User Guide Chamfering Entities Command CHAMFER The Chamfer command connects two non parallel entities by extending or trimming them and then joining them with a line to create a beveled edge In BricsCAD you can choose between two chamfer methods distance distance specify how far to trim the entities back from their intersection distance angle specify the length of the chamfer and the angle it forms along the first entity The following entities can be chamfered lines polylines rays and infinite lines When chamfering a polyline you can create a chamfer between two polyline segments or you can chamfer the entire polyline Chamfering using the distance distance method 1 Do one of the following e Click the Chamfer tool button C on the Chamfer Fillet flyout of the Modify toolbar e Choose Chamfer in the Modify menu e Type chamfer or CHA in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Chamfer lt current chamfer settings gt Settings Polyline Angle Distance mEthod Trim Undo Multiple lt Select first entity gt A prompt menu displays CHAMFER Chamfer Settings Select all entities Last entity in drawing Inside window Crossing window Outside window Window p
260. e in a particular direction weighted by the luminosity function a standardized model of the sensitivity of the human eye to different wavelengths also known as the luminous efficiency function e Resulting intensity the product of the lamp intensity and and intensity factor e Lamp color defines the inherent color of the light or color temperature in Kelvin or standards 8000 Daylight Metal Halide Sai 5 500K D65White i Fluorescent 7000 Cool White Fluorescent Cool White 6500 _ White Fluorescent 6000 Sid Clear Metal Halide Daylight Fluorescent 5500 r 4000x Incandescent 5000 Warm OK Metal Halide Xenon ason 3 200K Halogen 4000 Quartz a Metal Halde 3500 oan Mercury 3000 Stance incandescent Phosphor Mercury 2500 2 700K High Pressure Sodium Png FPSO SOCAN Low Pressure Sodium 2000 2 200K 1500 color temperatures lamp color list e Resulting color this is the final color of the light a combination of the lamp color and the filter color e Photometric web If the light type is Web Photometric Web and Web offsets are available not implemented yet Geometry properties e Position controls the location of the light e Target defines the target point for point lights spotlighst and weblights e Targeted switches the target property on off Attenuation properties In the real world an object appears darker if it is farther away from the light source The attenuation properties define how the light d
261. e is inserted at the desired insertion point scale and rotation angle else You are prompted to specify the insertion point scale and or rotation angle on screen 459 BricsCAD V14 Load Unload images When an image is attached and then inserted in the drawing you can unload the image to temporarily remove it Unloaded images are still inserted in the drawing but they no longer display If the Imageframe setting is ON the frame around the image still displays though Load Unload a single image 1 Launch the Image Explorer 2 For the image you want to load or unload click the check box in the Loaded column Bx b Bl 4 hik wm 2 B Name Loaded Site In Pixels Referi 1 Chartres France r 128 116 i 2 ConcreteFactory 1109 735 1 3 ConcretePits 965 750 1 4 5 EscherSpace 350 414 1 6 MurcuttMustonHouse 1094 673 0 7 PaperSizes 1653 2080 D B Penrose 914 1108 0 9 reims plan 490 221 D Fi rn F 3 Ifthe Regen On Off button is not pressed click the Regen tool Eh in the Images Explorer toolbar NOTE Itis not necessary to select the image first in step 2 Load Unload multiple images 1 Launch the Image Explorer 2 Select the images you want to load or unload 3 For one of the selected images click the check box in the Loaded column 460 User Guide Xx Aina k di 350 414 1094 673 0 1653 2080 914 1108 490 221 4 ir I All selected images will be loaded or unloaded
262. e opened To insert a block from an unopened drawing The Block Manager feature of the Drawing Explorer allows to insert blocks in the current drawing from unopened drawings 498 User Guide To copy definitions between drawings a Ae Open both the source and the target drawing Launch the Drawing Explorer In the source drawing select the category you want to copy items from e g Blocks option In the Details toolbar click the Icon View button 222 Select the item s you want to copy e g a series of blocks Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple items Press and hold the left mouse button to drag the selection set to the Open Drawings section of the Drawing Explorer Release the left mouse button when on the target drawing name The selected items are copied to the target drawing You will be prompted to overwrite items of the same name To merge the content of two layers 5 Open the Drawing Explorer gt Layers dialog window Select the layer you want to merge into another layer Choose Merge to in the Edit menu The Merge Layers dialog box displays Select the layer you want to merge to Merge Layers Choose a target layer 5 METAL 5 ROOF 5 WINDOW 5 woop VENTILATION VIEWPORTS WALLS FIRST FLOOR 7 EDGES 7_ FACING BRICK 7 FREFSTIAF Note merged layers will be purged from the drawing Merge Cancel Click the Merge button The content of the first layer is merged
263. e second point 2 The command bar reads Specify next point or ENTER to finish Specify the other points 3 6 the right click or press Enter to stop The command bar reads Specify the direction of the section entity Click a point 7 to specify the direction of the section entity The part of the solid opposite to the direction of the section entity is cut away The Live Section property of the section entity is not switched on automatically x7 5 4 3 x x4 1 x The part of the solid Vertical jogged OEO opposite to the direction section plane PERUR of the section entity is cut away Live Section option Edit the properties of the section plane To create a horizontal jogged section plane 1 260 Choose Front in the Look From toolbar Look From A Align the UCS to the front view Type ucs at the command prompt choose the View option in the prompt menu or type V in the command bar Launch the Sectionplane command Choose Draw in the prompt menu or type D in the command bar The command bar reads Specify start point Specify the first point 1 The command bar reads Specify next point User Guide 6 Specify the second point 2 The command bar reads Specify next point or ENTER to finish 7 Specify the other points 3 6 the right click or press Enter to stop The command bar reads Specify the direction of the section entity 8 Click a point 7 to specify the direction of the section e
264. e thawed icon Cih of the layer s you want to freeze 4 Close the Drawing Explorer Layers window 5 option Repeat steps 1 through 4 to set the layer visibility in another viewport NoTE Use the Viewports Vpfreeze option of the LAYOFF and LAYFRZ commands to freeze layers in a viewport by clicking entities Setting the scale of a viewport 1 Make sure the Plot Scale property of the layout is set correctly 2 Switch to paperspace See Toggle between model space and paper space 3 Click the viewport border The viewport properties display in the BricsCAD Properties Bar 4 Do one of the following e Choose a scale in the Standard scale list e Type a scaling factor in the Custom scale field 5 option If necessary adjust the size of the viewport to the new scale 6 option Set the Display Locked property to Yes 164 NOTE User Guide In a locked viewport it is impossible to e zoom pan or rotate the view e modify the scale Setting the scale of a selection of viewports Command MVSETUP 1 2 Make sure the Plot Scale property of the layout is set correctly Type mvsetup in the command bar The command bar reads Enter an option Align Create Scale viewports Undo Do one of the following e Type Sin the command bar then press Enter e Choose Scale viewports in the prompt menu The command bar reads Select entities Select the viewports Press Enter or right click to stop selecting viewport
265. e to 1 because 5 divided by 2 leaves a quotient of 2 and a remainder of 1 Expressions are evaluated according to the standard mathematical rules of precedence 1 Expressions within brackets innermost sets first Standard operations order exponent multiplication and division addition and subtraction Operators of equal precedence from left to right x Oa et a Using functions in expressions The following functions can be used in expressions Function Syntax Arc atan expression tangent Hyperbolic cosh expression cosine Hyperbolic sinh expression sine Hyperbolic tanh expression tangent Arc acosh expression hyperbolic cosine Arc asinh expression hyperbolic sine Arc atanh expression hyperbolic tangent Square sqrt expression root 84 Signum function 1 0 1 Round to nearest integer Truncate User Guide sign expression round expression mee trunc expression decimal Round ae floor expression down Round up ceil expression Absolute value abs expression Largest max expression1 expression2 element in array min expression1l expression2 Smallest element in array Degrees d2r expression to radians Radians to r2d expression degrees Logarithm In expression base e 10 log expression exp expression exp10 expression pow expression1 expression2 1 Use the list separator character as
266. e type 2 DIMLTEX2 Sets the linetype for the second extension line Ext line fixed DIMLEXLON Determines whether fixed length extension lines are used Ext line fixed DIMFXL Specifies the length of the extension lines measured from the length dimension line DIMEXE excl if DIMFXLON is on Center mark DIMCEN Defines the type of entity that will be created by the Dimcenter tool The options are Mark Line None Center mark size DIMCEN DIMCEN 0O no center mark nor center lines are drawn DIMCEN gt 0 a center mark is drawn the value of DIMCEN defines the length of the center mark lines DIMCEN lt O a center mark and center lines are drawn the abosolute value of DIMCEN defines the extension of the center lines outside the arc or circle and the gap between the center mark and the center lines Arc length DIMARCSYM Controls how the arc symbol displays in an arc length symbol dimension Jog angle DIMJOGANG Specifies the angle of the oblique dimension line segment in jogged radius dimensions NOTE Dimension lines and extension lines are created in the current line type Text Settings Description Variable Text style DIMTXSTY Defines the text style of the dimension text DIMCLRT Defines the color of the dimension text Text fill DIMTFILL Sets the dimension text background Left Background drawing window background color BKGCOLOR Right Co or color defined by DIMTFILLCLR Text fill color DIMTFILLCLR Defines
267. eads Enter new width for all segments Type a new width in the command bar and press Enter The new width is applied to the entire polyline Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Cancel in the prompt menu or press Enter or right click to conclude the Edit Polyline tool To taper a polyline uniformly along its length 398 Do one of the following e Click the Edit Polyline tool button LA on the Modify toolbar e Choose Edit Polyline in the Modify menu e Type editpline or pedit in the command window then press Enter The command bar reads Select polyline to edit Select the polyline The command bar reads Edit polyline Edit vertices Close or Open Decurve Fit Join Linetype Mode Reverse Spline Taper Width Undo lt exXit gt A prompt menu displays Choose Taper in the prompt menu or type T and press Enter The command bar reads Enter new starting polyline width lt current starting width gt Type a new starting width in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Enter new ending polyline width lt current ending width gt Type a new ending width in the command bar and press Enter The polyline is tapered uniformly along its length Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Cancel in the prompt menu or press Enter or right click to conclude the Edit Polyline tool User Guide Editing polyline vertices Commands PEDIT and PE
268. ecked the X Y and Z scaling cannot be set differently e Allow exploding if not checked prevents the block from being exploded e Block unit set the insertion unit for the block see also To insert a block Set the behavior of the selected entities after the block is created e Retain The selected entities remain in the drawing e Convert to block The selected entities are replaced by the newly created block e Delete The selected entities are deleted Click the OK button to create the block If the Delete option in step 6 was set the OOPS command brings back the erased block entities To create a block using the Blocks Explorer 416 Do one of the following e Choose Blocks in the Settings menu e Type explblocks in the command bar then press Enter The Drawing Explorer Blocks dialog opens In the Drawing Explorer dialog do one of the following e Click the New button Gh on the Details toolbar e Choose New in the Edit menu The Drawing Explorer dialog closes The command bar reads Insertion point for new block Specify the insertion point of the new block The command bar reads Select entities for block Select the entities for the new block Right click to create the block The selected entities are removed from the drawing The Drawing Explorer dialog reopens The Name field of the new block is selected Type a name in the Name field replacing the default NewBlock1 name User Guide 7
269. ect Mirror in the context menu e Repeatedly hit the Space bar or Enter key to cycle through the Grips Editing commands until Mirror is active The GRIP_MIRROR prompt box displays GRIP_MIRROR The command bar reads Enter second point Base point Copy Undo exit Specify a second point to define the mirror axis The selection is mirrored To rotate entities using grips 344 5 Select the entity or entities Select the grip or grips you want to manipulate Click the grip you want to use as the base point for the rotation The Grip Stretch command is launched Do one of the following e Right click then select Rotate in the context menu e Repeatedly hit the Space bar or Enter key to cycle through the Grips Editing commands until Rotate is active The GRIP_ROTATE prompt box displays GRIP_ROTATE The command bar reads Enter rotation angle Base point Copy Undo exit Do one of the following to rotate the selection e Specify a point to define the rotation angle e Type the rotation angle in the command bar then press Enter User Guide To scale entities using grips 1 2 3 4 5 Select the entity or entities Select the grip or grips you want to manipulate Click the grip you want to use as the base point for the scaling The Grip Stretch command is launched Do one of the following e Right click then select Sca e in the context menu e Repeatedly hit the Space bar or Enter key to
270. ect entities gt 6 Repeat step 5 to add more entities or press the Esc key to stop 121 BricsCAD V14 Measuring areas To measure the area and length of single closed entity click the entity then read the Area and Length fields in the Properties Bar To measure areas and perimeters by specifying points in a drawing 1 122 Do one of the following e Click the Area tool button gt on the Inquiry toolbar e Type area in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Entity Add Subtract lt First point gt A prompt menu displays AREA Find area of one entity Add areas together Subtract areas Cancel Do one of the following e Choose Add areas together in the prompt menu e Type A in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Adding Entity Subtract lt First point gt A prompt menu displays AREA Add entities to area Subtract areas Cancel Click the first corner point of the area A dashed line displays dynamically from the first corner point The command bar reads Adding lt Next point gt Click the second corner point of the area A dashed polygon displays dynamically indicating the currently defined area The command bar reads Adding lt Next point gt Click the third corner point of the area The command bar reads Adding lt Next point gt Repeat step 5 to add more corner points or Right click to stop adding corner points The Total length and
271. ect the entities you want to change the draw order of 2 Do one of the following e Click the appropriate tool button on the Draw Order toolbar e Right click then choose Draw Order in the context menu and select the appropriate tool Em 2D Rotate g Draw Order H Bring to Front F Send to Ba Ed Properties send to Back EL Ering Above SJ Send Under Tool Tool Name Description Button Bring To Front Places the selection set on top Bring Above Places the selection set above the reference entity Send Under Places the selection set under the reference entity Send to Back Moves the selection set to the back Hatch to Back Sends all hatch entities to the back Text and Brings all texts and or dimension entities to front Dimensions to Options Text Dimensions Both can be chosen either in the Front command bar or in the prompt menu The default option is Both You are prompted to select the reference entity 340 User Guide Grips editing Sy Grips Editing Grips display as small colored squares at key points on selected entities Whether grips display or not and the appearance of grips is controlled through a series of grips settings When the display of grips is turned on grips can be dragged using the mouse in order to stretch move mirror rotate or scale entities The Copy option of the grips editing commands allows to create multiple copies of the entities being edited a om a a
272. ect the template drawing then click the Open button The drawing is created as a copy of the selected template To set the Template Path variable 1 Open the Settings dialog 2 Under Program Options Files Templates select Template Path templatePath Click the Browse button 4 On the Browse for folder dialog select a folder then click the OK button a To create a drawing using a wizard 1 Do one of the following e Choose New wizard in the File menu e Type newwiz in the command window then press Enter 2 Onthe Create New Drawing dialog choose Use a Wizard then click the Next button The New Drawing Wizard enables you to set up anew drawing configured to your needs 5 Start from Scratch B Start from Template a Xe Use a Wizard Tip The Wizard creates a new drawing using the settings you specify Sets measurement unit and angle type plot configuration type and other base settings 3 option Check the Set Workspace option then choose a workspace from the list button See Workspaces to learn more about workspaces 4 Choose between either Imperial or Metric default settings then click the Next button goemennenen Wl eti 2D Drafting Default Settings Imperial feet and inches Metric 493 494 BricsCAD V14 button Choose any one of the linear units of measurement listed below as the default for your drawing Unit of measurement Sdentific Decima
273. ection plane boundary parallel e Grip 4 modifies the shape of the section plane boundary 5 option To grip edit a Volume state section plane entity 263 BricsCAD V14 Eleven grips display e Grip 1 origin point moves the position of the section plane in the XY plane e Grip 2 through point redefines the through point of the section plane The section plane volume is stretched and rotated around the origin point 1 e Grip 3 stretches the section plane volume parallel e Grip 4 modifies the shape of the section plane volume Polar Tracking must be on to move grips 5 and 6 Polar 185 3 lt 7 e Grip 5 moves the top face of the section plane volume e Grip 6 moves the bottom face of the section plane volume Using Live Section When the Live Section property of a section plane is on the sectioning of a 3D solid surface or region displays in the drawing If the section entity is moved or modified the sectioning is updated dynamically The Live Section Settings of the section entity control the appearance of the live section To set the Live Section property of a section plane Method 1 Using the LIVESECTION command 1 Do one of the following e Click the Live Section tool button E on the Sections toolbar e Choose Live Section in the Model gt Sections menu The command bar reads Select a section entity 2 Click a section entity in the drawing The Live Section property of the selected secti
274. ed E Outer Ignore Boundary tolerance Tolerance 0 0 Options El Annotative Associative Create separate hatches Draw order Send behind boundary Inherit properties 2 option Click the One color radio button to create a color to white or color to black gradient fill e Click the colored tile to open the Select color dialog to pick a different base color e The color slider sets the transition from color to white or black Press and hold the left mouse button to move the color slider U Move the slider to the far right to create a color to white gradient fill Move the slider to the far left to create a color to black gradient fill 3 option Click the Two color radio button to create two color gradient fill Click the colored tiles to open the Se ect co or dialog to pick the base colors 4 Select one of the 9 gradient patterns The options are linear cylindrical inverted cylindrical spherical hemispherical curved inverted spherical inverted hemispherical and inverted curved 5 option Centered If centered the gradient fill is created symmetrical if not centered the gradient fill is built up from the left of the boundary 6 option Angle Specifies the angle of the gradient fill relative to the current UCS 273 BricsCAD V14 To define the boundary for a hatch or gradient fill 274 option Select the Boundary retention option option Select an
275. ed anywhere in three dimensional Space These are called user coordinate systems UCS and can be located anywhere in the WCS and oriented in any direction You can create as many UCS as you want saving or redefining them to help you construct three dimensional entities By defining a UCS within the WCS you can simplify the creation of most three dimensional entities into combinations of two dimensional entities When you create a new drawing the WCS is the current coordinate system by default which is indicated by the letter W in the UCS icon When you display a drawing in plan view you see the coordinate system icon from the top with the z axis directed straight toward you When you display a three dimensional drawing in a view other than plan view the coordinate system icon changes to reflect your new viewpoint NOTE You cannot delete or modify the WCS To help you keep your bearings in the current coordinate system BricsCAD displays a coordinate system icon UCS icon The visible portions of the axes are the positive directions Zz T hd 7 a r F Fa 4 A A WCS Top View UCS Top View WCS Isometric UCS Isometric View View Three colors represent the three axes making it easier for you to recognize the orientation in three dimensional space e x axis red e y axis green e z axis blue The Plan View command restores the Plan view or Top view of the current UCS or WCS The UCSICON settings variable controls the display and lo
276. ed simultaneously Click in a viewport to make it the current viewport You can print the current viewport only The Viewports command lets you manage your viewports in model space BricsCAD provides an additional work area called Paper Space Paper space represents a paper layout of your drawing In this work area you can create and arrange different views of your drawing similar to the way you arrange drawings on a sheet of paper In paper space you can also add keynotes annotations borders title blocks and other print related entities which you don t want to see in model space Each drawing has at least one Layout in which you can have one or more Layout Viewports Such layout viewports are to be considered as a view window on your drawing in model space Layout viewports can be placed anywere in a paperspace layout Each viewport has its own scale and layer visibility All viewports in the same layout can be printed simultaneously The Mview command lets you manage your viewports in paper space Although not necessary to print your drawing paper space offers a lot of advantages e Create multiple layouts to print the same drawing with different print settings such as pen widths printer configuration files lineweight settings drawing scale and more e Add print related entities that are not essential to the model itself such as keynotes annotations title blocks etc e For a single layout create multiple layout viewports to pr
277. eded to manufacture your sheet metal part using bending techniques This sheet is placed on XY plane and is oriented along the coordinate axes similarly to the orientation of the initial body in 3D space To change the orientation of the unfolding in OZ axis run SmUnfold command again and select the opposite face of the initial body The SmUnfold command prompts you to either Keep the 3D solid in the model e Save the 3D solid in a separate drawing file e Convert the solid to a 2D drawing file dwg or dxf e Overall dimension and bending annotations for manufacturing are added to the exported drawing automatically The SmUnfold command takes the deformation of the sheet metal material during bending into account When a flat sheet of metal is bent into a 3D part with a bending tool like a press break the material is plastically deformed amp endash it is compressed inside the bend and stretched outside of it So the length of the part measured along its surface is different in flat and bend states BricsCAD is able to automatically compute the proper unfolded length of your part based on the material deformation properties These properties can be defined by setting the value of K Factor parameter or by attaching a bend table 246 User Guide Direct Modeling Overview BricsCAD provides advanced easy to use functions for working with ACIS solid geometry including e The creation of solid geometry using Extrude dmExtrude an
278. edure also applies to edit the insertion point of texts images blocks Xrefs 19 BricsCAD V14 To edit the vertices of a polyline 1 Select the polyline 2 On the Properties Bar under Geometry select Vertex 3 Click the Next Previous arrow buttons to select a vertex General E y aver _ sylaver 3D Visualization ByLayer El Geometry 7 Bj Vertex ioo LE 3245 5 759 x 3245 5 759 0 0 041421356 0 0 10054 78 Length 426 81 El Misc Yes Linetype generatiol Disabled An X indicates the vertex being edited 4 Do one of the following e Select the X or Y field then enter a value e Under Vertex select Position and click the Pick Point button Cia then specify the point in the drawing 5 Press the Escape key to stop 20 User Guide Edit the shared properties of a selection set i NOTES Select the entities The shared properties display in the Properties Bar Click the property you want to modify The settings field of the selected property is activated Type anew value in settings field of the selected property or choose a setting from the list box then press the Enter key or select another property All selected entities are updated simultaneously option Repeat steps 2 and 3 to modify another property Press the Escape key to stop e Varies displays for shared properties which are defined differently If you edit such property all entities
279. eeseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 219 stept Preparing for tHe CxerciS e aiena a E a E wees 219 Step 2 Creating the assembly drawing s ssssssssesssssssrsnnnsnsnssesrrunnnssenrensnennnnrsenrenrnenne 221 SlLep 3 AGGING the COMPONENTS rrirarniereeniere ien a E E A a AE tee TEANA 221 Step 4 POSITIONING tHE COMPONEN Snina ae E A E E A EN 223 Step 5 Preparing for the kinematic analySiS senssssnssennnsssnrsnsrrunnnrnenrrnenennnnrnenrrnsnenne 229 Step 6 Kinematic ANALYSIS siririca innare a aR TAa AT EN Aat 232 SHECEM Cla lecun aana sheet Metal FEatUrE Simi roen aa a A A N aa 234 BENG TADIC arroa N a aa a a a a a A 235 The Mechanical Browser for Sheet Metal ssssssunsnsnnsrennssssnnsnsrrnnnnsnenrrnsnennnnrnenrrnrnene 238 Commands aNd TOODA Soir a E E E A E A TO 239 Sheet Modeling Op ration Sosina arnan A a AN 240 Creating the Base Flange rraioa aa aa a araa 240 creatino Edde Flange S wactasirctactariiaetenmacess Gagan eaaaaeaeaune tee Gaad woraan tad elaeauimacceeegmennaes 241 Corner Rellets ahd JUNCUOMS cxcscscnmnrectianeera tea catadsenkectannusig outsaorssacnaa cd EEA EA 243 Table of Contents TORO a Fango i xneerd votes asatauiwarantegatd aw panes A ET 244 TOSECOMNECE TaN GES cs arcu e a EEE E A E E a 244 Changing the TRICKNESS isiriiosiriorrsuicirianina reari a aaa aaia 244 changin the bend radis aari iinnare aa aan aa a aa a a aaa aa 245 FO ChanGe the Overall DENG rails erani E A a ais 245 To change the bend radius for a
280. efedit tool button A on the Refedit toolbar e Type refedit in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select reference Click the Xref or block e Double click the Xref or block 444 User Guide The Reference Edit dialog opens Reference Edit Path C BricscadV8_Reports Plan_Level0 dwa Reference Name Preview EET Pian_Levelo e TESTE m 5 y ila Z OM CPD E f H 9 i eae pe E 4 Ti i l HA L E S i ATN TH p F i 2 i i r a E 4 On peer a Select nested entities Settings Automatically E Enable unique layer and symbol names Prompt E Display attribute definitions for editing Lock entities not in working set The Reference Edit dialog helps you to visually identify the reference to edit and controls how the reference is selected Path Location of the selected reference if the reference is a block no path is displayed Reference Name The name of the currently selected reference and any references that are nested within the selected reference Preview Displays the reference as it was last saved in the drawing Please note that the preview image is not updated when changes are saved back to the reference option If multiple nested references display in the Reference name tree select a reference to modify Click the expand collapse button to show hide nested references You can edit only one reference a tim
281. eld then select a command You can start typing the command name in the Command field to easily find the command in the list e Type the command alias for the command in the Alias field e Click the OK button 57 Br 58 icSCAD V14 4 option To edit an existing alias e Select the alias in the list e Click the Edit button The Edit Alias dialog box displays Edit Alias Alias EDITLEN Command LENGTHEN ox cae e Type anew alias in the Alias field If the alias already exists you are prompted to overwrite the existing alias e Click the OK button 5 option To delete an alias e Select the alias in the list e Click the De ete button A Confirm box displays e Click the OK button on the Confirm box to delete the alias 6 Click the OK button on the Customize dialog to stop NOTE Tf you use the Customize dialog to edit the alias file it is not necessary to execute the REINIT command User Profile Manager Command PROFILEMANAGER In BricsCAD you can customize the settings that control your drawing environment which can then be saved in a user profile You can create multiple user profiles e g a profile to run BricsCAD with a white background and a limited set of toolbars and another profile with no command bar and all toolbars and snap settings needed to draw comfortably in 3D User profiles can also be used when multiple users share the same computer and each user likes to create his personal dra
282. elect Co or dialog window e right click to select one of the basic colors 5 Linetype displays the name of the current linetype e click to open the Linetype Explorer e right click to select the current linetype 6 Text Style displays the name of the current text style e click to open the Styles Explorer e right click to select the current text style 7 Dimension Style displays the name of the current dimension style e click to open the Dimensions Settings dialog window e right click to select the current dimension style 8 Work Space Indicates the current workspace e click to set the value of the WSCURRENT system variable in the command bar e right click then select the current workspace BricsCAD V14 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Snap e click to toggle Snap on SNAP off NAF e right click then choose Settings to edit the Snap and Grid settings Grid click to toggle the display of grid points on GRID off GRID in the current viewport Orthogonal Mode click to toggle Orthogonal mode on ORTHO off ORTHO Turning Orthogonal mode on automatically disables Polar Tracking Polar Tracking AutoSnap e click to toggle Polar Tracking on POLAR off POLAR Turning Polar Tracking on automatically disables Orthogonal mode e right click then choose Settings to edit the Polar Tracking settings Entity Snaps e click to toggle Entity Snaps on ESNAF off ESNAF e right click then choos
283. election area effects Selection area opacity 25 Crossing area color P Green Window area color H Blue El Selection preview E Selection preview display 1 2 C When no commands are active When a command prompts for entity selection Selection preview effect 2 Dashed and thickened lines El Selection preview filter Ox0027 39 Exdude entities on locked layers Exdude entities in xrefs Exdude tables Exdude multiline text entities Exdude hatch entities Exdude entities in groups Subentity preview order 0 Subentities like faces edges are highlighted first Delay to preview selection 30 PICKADD f Boolean Ki Registry 346 Pick add When set to 0 The most recently selected entities become the selection set Press SHFIT to add entities When set to 1 Newly selected entities are added to the selection set Press SHIFT TO remove enttes User Guide Name System Variable HIGHLIGHT Determines wether or not entities highlight on screen when selected Highlight Image highlight Pick add Pick automatic Pick drag Pick first Pick style IMAGEHLT PICKADD PICKAUTO PICKBOX PICKDRAG PICKFIRST PICKSTYLE Determines whether the entire raster image highlights or only the raster image frame when selected Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it ON The selection set is extended if you select additional entities Press
284. election set each block is named differently Copying Entities Between Drawings Commands COPYCLIP COPYBASE PASTECLIP PASTEORIG and PASTEBLOCK Entities can be copied between drawings in several ways e Copyclip and Pasteclip pastes the selection using a default base point e Copyclip and Pasteorig pastes the selection using the coordinates of the source drawing e Copybase and Pasteclip pastes the selection using a user defined base point e Copybase and Pasteblock pastes the selection as a block in the target drawing NOTE Use Ctrl Tab press and hold the Ctrl key then press the Tab key to cycle between open drawings Si Copy Between Drawings Internet connection needed Using Copy and Paste to copy entities between drawings 1 Inthe source drawing select the entities you want to Copy 2 Do one of the following e Right click then choose Copy in the context menu e Choose Copy in the Edit menu e Press Ctrl C press and hold the Ctrl key then press C The entities are copied to the Clipboard 3 Switch to the target drawing 4 Do one of the following e Right click then choose Paste in the context menu e Choose Paste in the Edit menu e Press Ctrl V press and hold the Ctrl key then press V The bottom left corner of the bounding rectangle of the selection is attached to the cross hairs in the target drawing 369 BricsCAD V14 5 Do one of the following e Specify the displacement point e Pres
285. en press Enter The command bar reads Select objects 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar displays how many regions have been created 409 BricsCAD V14 Measuring and Dividing Entities The Measure tool places markers points or blocks at a specified interval along the length or circumference of an entity The Divide tool places markers points or blocks along a selected entity The markers evenly divide the entity into the specified number of equal parts Measuring Entities Command MEASURE The Measure command places markers points or blocks at a specified interval along the length or circumference of an entity The Measure tool starts placing markers at the closes endpoint to where you select the entity You can measure lines polylines arcs circles ellipses elliptical arcs and splines You cannot measure rays and infinite lines You measure a circle along its circumference starting from the Angle Base value as defined in the Settings dialog If Angle Base is set to zero a circle is measured starting at 3 o clock east To measure an entity using points 1 Do one of the following e Click the Measure tool button C on the Modify toolbar e Choose Measure in the Modify menu e Type measure in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entity to measure 2 Click the entity you want to measure The command bar reads Block lt Segment length g
286. en right click and choose Snap to middle of 2 points in the context menu The command bar reads First point of mid Specify the first point The command bar reads Second point of mid Specify the second point The point in the middle of the two points is snapped 109 BricsCAD V14 Polar Tracking Polar tracking assists you to draw at exact angles e at fixed intervals starting from 3 O clock or East e at specific additional angles A polar tracking path line displays from the origin point when you move the cursor close to one of the polar tracking angles The tracking path lines display as long as the Snap Aperture box overlaps the polar tracking line In 3D views an additional tracking line displays parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS Snap track lock to lock a snap track path press the Shift key To unlock a track path press Shift again it works as a toggle Locked tracking paths turn red NOTE he display of the tracking path line is controlled through the TRACKPATH settings variable The color of the tracking path line is controlled through the AutoTrackingVecCol or user preference Gs Draw isometric Internet connection needed Learn how to draw an isometric perspective using Polar Tracking and Entity Snap Tracking To define the Polar Tracking settings 1 Do one of the following e Right click on the POLAR field in the Status Bar then right click and choose Settings in the context menu e Open the
287. en two points with respect to the current coordinate system DcLinear Ha Constrains the horizontal distance X distance or vertical distance Y distance between two points with respect to the current coordinate DcAligned Constrains the distance between two points or the length of a line or polyline segment DcRadius a Constrains the radius of a circle an arc or an arc polyline segment DcDiameter a Constrains the diameter of a circle an arc or an arc polyline segment DcAngular Constrains the angle between two lines or linear polyline segments i the total angle of an arc or an arc polyline segment or the angle between three points on entities DcConvert Converts an associative dimension to a dimensional constraint NOTE The PARAMETERCOPYMODE system variable controls copying of constraints and related parameters when entities are copied 0 Do not copy 2D constraints 1 Replace all expressions with constants 2 Use existing parameters if a parameter is missing replace it with a constant 3 Use existing parameters create a new parameter if a parameter is missing A d Use existing parameters create a new parameter if a parameter is missing or has a ifferent value 79 BricsCAD V14 Using Dimensional Constraints Commands DIMCONSTRAINT DCALIGNED DCANGULAR DCCONVERT DCDIAMETER DCHORIZONTAL DCLINEAR DCRADIUS DCVERTICAL DELCONSTRAINT The dimensions of the geometry can be controlled by dimensional constr
288. enaaees 179 LIN SWIG A cnir aaa LOO SEEING The CULLEN CIIMGW CIM ana vatindancaeduavavaadeve ciate a denver a a A 180 Defining thelineweilght settings awaken piaiidiaihev a civie deere AE A aan areas 181 ENUY LINNEY DE ipress aanne LO Seting Me current OetyDE an a a A A E A 183 Addam anew lnet DOn a A a a a a a aa ia 184 Setting the Entity LINGty DE SCale ss doisaderwicter a a an A A A E A a AE AEA 185 Setting the Global Linetype Scale sssssssssnsssssssssnnsnsrrsnnnsnenrnrnerrnnnnssenrsnsnennnnsnenrrnrnenne 185 C rrent Lay CF f riiciroinnia a aaa aaa aaa LOO Seting ENG CUPFENE 1AY Cl eena aa nee vend cia a a n A 186 Drawing 2D Ov rvieWssisirirrainiarnnaininnnna nannaa aaa aa LO General procedure LO Craw an AC isa cestwa na aae a a a a o aa Aa seaaaal 189 Editino an dian a T N E O 189 CIVIS ssistdanma eaaa L OO General procedure to draw a circle sssssssssssnssssnsssssnnsnsrrenensnenrrnerennnnsnenrensnenrnnerenrnnne 190 EJIDO a GIGS arn a AE N A A A 191 EVNDSGS sriccstescivndsesscrnctecsivesancsoedieosnerssneabausauneseusennesensstumsensivensenne LO L Setting the Polyline Ellipse PELLIPSE system variable sssnssnnnsnsnnnsssnrsnsnrnnnnsrenrrnrnenne 192 General procedure to draw an ellipSe s nssssnnnsssnsssusnnsnssrenensnenrsnerennnnsnenrensnenrnnrrenrnnne 192 EdiUNO Gil CUD SS a a a A A TO cee ama eae 193 Eliptical AtGS cirina a aaa L A General procedure to draw an elliptical Arc sssssossssesnnsnssrunnns
289. entities 2 Inthe Properties bar select Contents 313 BricsCAD V14 3 Press the Browse button uh on the right hand side of the Contents field El Text Contents saries 4 The Text formatting toolbar opens for the first Mtext entity in the selection Edit the Mtext 6 Press the OK button or click in the drawing The next Mtext entity in the selection can be edited now 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the last Mtext is edited UI To select a different multiline text editor Edit the MTEXTED system variable under Drawing Drafting Texts Multiline Texts in the Settings dialog or 1 Type mtexted in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads New value for MTEXTED or for none lt current value gt 2 Type the file name and full path of the alternate text editor in the command bar then press Enter e g C Program Files Windows NT Accessories Wordpad EXE NOTE To restore the built in text editor type a period in step 2 of the above procedure then press Enter Exploding text Command TXTEXP The TXTEXP command explodes Text and Mtext entities into 2D polylines To explode text 1 Type txtexp in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select text to be exploded 2 Select a single text entity or multiple text entities then press Enter The selected text s are exploded NOTE The solid fill of certain TTF fonts is removed when exploding such text leaving the text o
290. enu e Type editlen in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Edit length DYnamic Increment Percent Total lt Select entity to list length gt Choose Total in the prompt menu or type T and press Enter The command bar reads Angle lt Enter total Length 0 00 gt A prompt menu displays LENGTHEN Angle Cancel Choose Angle in the prompt menu or type A and press Enter The command bar reads Enter total angle lt 00 0 0 gt Type the new angle in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Mode lt Select entity to change gt A prompt menu displays LENGTHEN Click the arc at the end you want to lengthen or shorten The arc is modified The command bar reads Mode Undo lt Select entity to change gt A prompt menu displays LENGTHEN Do one of the following e Select another arc e Choose Undo in the prompt menu or type U and press Enter to undo the previous action e Choose Edit mode in the prompt menu or type M and press Enter to choose a different Edit Length command option e Choose Cancel in the prompt menu to conclude the Edit Length command User Guide NOTE nthe Properties bar you can edit the start angle end angle and radius of an arc Stretching Entities Command STRETCH The size and shape of entities can be changed by stretching them You select an area in your drawing using either a rectangular window or a polygon then you specify a base point and
291. er Images toolbar e Launch the Image Explorer select a raster image file in the list then click the Insert tool button Eh in the Drawing Explorer Images toolbar e Click the Attach Raster Image tool button Eh in the Insert toolbar The Attach Raster Image dialog opens 458 User Guide Attach Raster Image Name O06 Camera Target Geocoding Information F Use Geocoding Information Path Insertion Point Scale Rotation Specify On screen E Specify On screen E Specify On screen 0 00 x 100 Angle o 0 0 Y 1 00 7 1 00 Uniform Scale Do one of the following e Accept the currently selected image file e Click the down arrow button in the Name field to select a different raster image file in the list Raster images which are already attached are listed e Click the Browse button to select a new raster image file in the Se ect Raster Image dialog option Check the then click the Browse button to open an appropriate world file to be used with the selected raster image If the Use Geocoding Information option is checked the Insertion Point Scale and Rotation settings fields are not available option Do the following e Specify an insertion point or select the Specify on screen check box e Specify scale or select the Specify on screen check box e Specify rotation angle or select the Specify on screen check box Click the OK button If none of the Specify on screen options is selected the imag
292. ertically parallel to the screen y axis rotates the view about the screen x axis ap ra q Real Time X RTROTX Rotates the view dynamically about the screen x axis Real Time Y RTROTY Rotates the view dynamically about the screen y axis Real Time Z RTROTZ Rotates the view dynamically about the screen z axis Set View Point DDVPOINT Opens the Preset Viewpoints dialog is Plan View PLAN Restores the plan view with respect to the WCS the current UCS or a saved UCS E DVIEW Defines parallel and visual perspective views Save Restore VIEW Saves and restores named views A a VIEW e 1 N D User Guide VPORTS Manages viewports in model space Paper Space MVIEW Creates viewports in paper space Generate BMGENDRAFT Generates associative orthographic and standard Drafting Views isometric views of a 3D solid model in a paper space layout BMGENSECTION Creates a cross section view based on a standard drafting view generated by the BmGenDraft command in a paper space layout Ey 3D Context 3DCONTEXT Switches the drawing to a 3D modeling context lt command gt lt option gt type zoom followed by Enter then type the command option letter followed by Enter Layer Utilities The layer utility commands help you to easily manipulate the On Off Thaw Freeze and Unlocked Locked layer properties by selecting entities You can then save the result in a Layer State Command Icon Description _ _ _ O
293. es such as wide polylines and solids display and print as outlines Points Command POINT Since points are dimensionless a single pixel should be the nearly correct representation on the screen But this is hardly visible especially in a complex drawing Therefore you can choose between a number of possible display styles The point display style is chosen by means of the Point Display Mode PDMODE system variable The size of the point representation style is controlled through the Point Display Size PDSIZE system variable Defining the point display settings 1 Open the Settings dialog 2 Inthe Drawing settings category expand the Entity Creation sub category 3 Expand the Points settings group then expand the Point display mode setting El Points El Point display mode 0x0063 Ox000F x ox0020 drde 00040 square Point display size 0 0000 circle circle circle circle square _ square square square Point display modes 1 Set the Point Display Mode setting 200 User Guide e Choose the point location marker style point none X or e Choose to add a circle and or a square 2 Set the Point Display Size setting e Relative Type O zero to scale the point display style at 5 of the screen e Absolute Type the size of the point display style in drawing units 3 Close the Settings dialog NOTE If you need to draw a dot use a Donut with a zero inside diameter instead of a point entity
294. es the way fields are updated The value is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the values of all selected options General procedure to create fields 1 Do one of the following e Click the Insert Field tool button cE on the Insert toolbar e Choose Insert Field in the Insert menu e Type field in the command bar then press Enter e Click the Field tool button cE on the Text Formatting toolbar when creating or editing Mtext or a table cell content The Field dialog box displays 323 BricsCAD V14 324 Field Field names Date amp Time First capital Title Case Field expression lt 0 AcVar Filename f tcana gt Under Field Names expand a group then choose a field name The settings for the selected field display Adjust the settings then click the OK button The Field dialog box closes The field is created in the Mtext or table cell being edited or The command bar reads Specify start point or Height Justify A context menu displays e option Type H or choose Height in the context menu to define the text height User Guide e option Type J or choose Justify in the context menu to set the text justification FIELD e Specify the insertion point of the field in the drawing An Mtext entity containing the field is created To display an entity property in a field 1 Launch the Field command 2 Expand Objects in the Field names list and select Ob
295. eteneeneetees 47 TOO PAl lteS encccsvicceccindccedcandecadsawteoudtawvesutieuvesudiouvesudsowtesudeewvesateew ee TO Open Ine TOG Palettes Bali vieaancavevedard E vide teen laclawants voles tedanantueeeeavesss 47 TOSeb the VIEW ODLIONS rreren on eacaaeccadaweweaudas a6 fea dualeeen shan vevewsun pveudaaanened e naan teen 47 Toadd a MEW COO DAlGUl Gs iica carcasses Hsetatanewt sce ccsaatheannaaanoiees nates saan wenamnin nee oeersanse ei 48 TOM pOrta tool Palette inaari aae a ae paaairvaadieaeaa A Gon 24eeu ia ESE a a 49 TO rename a COO palettes raiiienirnin a NA a A A EA Taa 49 Todelete a LOO palete ieran a a A ae a nas ie cane ee sees 50 AGGING aAiNatempatter N isra A E N ae ae eee 50 AAO DOCK airain aE A A T T A A 50 TO addsa block from the current drawing eernisrrarienria nin a E E A A a ANE EE EAA 50 T a ddaDlock from any GraWING sinsi aA E A A 51 To add adra wng as A DIOCK sarankan iw e a a a a a EE 51 AGGING a command eraitsia eiT a E rE A ETI 52 ECNO a LOO a a EE a E E A A AT 54 Managing LOOMS srry aE a aT A EE EA E or aan E E EAT 55 COMMANG AW aSCS wiiitentietiteriiiieisicii ee iO To edit the alias file ina text editor ssessaiuacawseeee evetiia as ceolnarneruaas te aa Vana AEAT 56 Using the Customize dialog to edit the alias file cc eccceccceee seen te eeesecesnneneeeesseeuaaanneeegs 57 User Profile ManaG eh sivsccessaicccnscatvacnssavcuncadscsuaescavraneneatsenuiettecsise DO CONteHt Of a USeH Dl Ofll Gricaiiwnain sehen s
296. eters file default pgp might pop up when you start BricsCAD To correct this problem do the following 1 Open the exported user profile arg in a text editor such as Notepad 2 Replace the user name dependent references with an environment variable On a Windows XP computer replace C Documents and Settings username with USERPROFILE On a Windows Vista or Windows 7 computer replace C Users username with USERPROFILE Use the Find Replace procedure to quickly replace all references 3 Save the user profile arg 4 Import the user profile 5 Start BricsCAD using the imported profile The environment variable USERPROFILE will be replaced with e C Documents and Settings currentusername on a Windows XP computer e C Users currentusername on a Windows Vista or Windows 7 computer NOTE Environment variables in profiles using the lt variable_name gt format are supported in V10 3 11 and higher Projects Project names are especially useful to manage xrefs and images when exchanging drawings If external references xrefs and images are not found in the saved path the project search paths are used to find the external references and images Project names are saved in the registry and contain one or more search paths Opening the Project settings 1 Click the Settings tool button EB on the Standard toolbar or Choose Settings in the Settings menu The Settings dialog opens 2 Go to Program Optio
297. etes 372 Creating apolar anay oreen aE a A a aN 374 Arraying Entities IN SD wiissisiintrcsnssinseretorerecetecerseetirerceinteninceeno 70 creating a 3D rectangular allay outa nisin tae a aT E nee aa nd a eae 376 Creatnd a SDF DOldl Alia Veir E EA AA N E A Aa 378 RESIZING ENtitieS snini a 7 O EXtGnGing ENTITIES ciiiisiisascinissiieieei ares FO TOextend entities wirer achat vuiworesaa nares r eed sen sean vane neaudnd patentee en a aa Ei 379 TRIMMING ENtities sissivecsrivtvariveriviriretiver itineraries OOO TO timentes neo a a a a e arene sana 380 Changing the length of an entity sss2us s SOL Change the length of an entity dynamically sssassssessnsnssrennnsssnssnsnennnnssenrrnsnennnnrrenrnnne 381 Modity the Included angle ofan are eiririoriernen niiin EEN A aes a eens 382 SUFetCCninG ENntiticS aisiiiscccnrcniasenecesrssnicsasseuscsassseadesisesiiniasescrase oOo TOSHO GN lOS os a aseucnss akan a etre andere tes bata uate se actnte a a 383 Stretching Chutes USING GUIDS irsinin AE a TE a a A 384 Scaling Entities siciriestssdcvectercciastenicrsaviideeaatenivvestisieentieieeiiaOoo TOSCalesa SClCCLION SE orr Ta i A E E lade teieeepodlesnotausedet 384 Scaling entity USING apase Scaler ina E E A uae sade y nonanee eee 385 Breaking Entities acdiscaisissteresstarsirastiestsitistanasteeta tires OOO TOD AK ali CHlcy a tencatass A nation ceed caitencaderana hpi sacaueredataan es tian Denvenniouede anaes 386
298. ewport scale 163 BricsCAD V14 Navigating in a paper space layout View manipulation commands such as zoom pan and view manipulation using the mouse act Slightly different in a paper space layout compared to model space with tiled viewports If you are working in paper space no viewport selected view manipulation commands act on the complete paper space layout If you are working in a viewport model space with floating viewports view manipulation commands act on the active viewport only Except if the display of the current viewport is locked then the view manipulation commands act on the complete paper space layout NOTE Itis not possible to rotate the display of a paper space layout View Rotate commands are available in viewports of which the display is not locked only Setting the layer visibility in a viewport 1 Do one of the following e If Paper Space is the current workspace double click inside the viewport to make it the current viewport e If Model Space with floating viewports is the current workspace click inside the viewport to make it the current viewport 2 Do one of the following e Click the Layers tool button on the Settings toolbar e Choose Layers in the Settings menu e Type layer in the command bar then press Enter The Drawing Explorer Layers window opens 3 Inthe Curr VP Current Viewport column e click the frozen icon CF of the layer s you want to thaw e click th
299. ext menu 2 Select the target palette 3 Right click and choose Paste in the context menu The tool is added at the bottom of the palette To copy a tool To copy a tool from one palette to another do the following 1 Right click the tool on the source palette and choose Copy in the context menu 2 Select the target palette 3 Right click and choose Paste in the context menu The tool is added at the bottom of the palette Command Aliases Command aliases are alternative names for BricsCAD commands You can launch the LINE command by entering L at the command prompt There is no need to type the complete name After typing the command alias at the command prompt the command is executed Some commands have more than one alias e g REC RECT and RECTANGLE are all aliases for RECTANG whereas the last alias is even longer than the command name In general command aliases can increase your speed in entering the commands at keyboard Command aliases are saved in a pgp file ProGram Parameters file By default the default pgp file in the Support folder of the Roamable Root folder is used If a command can be executed transparently while another command is being executed the alias can also be used transparently To execute a command or an alias transparently precede the command name or alias with an apostrophe Command aliases cannot be used in scripts scr To edit the alias file in a text editor In order t
300. ext style MAIN TITLES and all entities using it Choose a text style to use for all entities currently using text style MAIN_TITLES MAIN TITLES will be deleted afterwards Cancel deleting text style MAIN_TITLES 307 BricsCAD V14 4 Do one of the following NOTE e Click the De ete button to delete the text style and all entities using it e Click the Change button to delete the text style and assign a different text style to the entities which currently use the selected style e Click the Cancel button to cancel the delete procedure It is not possible to delete the current text style Creating text Commands TEXT and MTEXT The Text command creates single line text while the Mtext command creates text entities which consist of multiple lines To create single line text NOTE 308 Do one of the following e Click the Text tool button WA on the Draw toolbar e Choose Text in the Text submenu in the Draw menu e Type text in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Text Style Align Fit Center Middle Right Justify lt Start point gt Specify the insertion point of the text The command bar reads Height of text lt current height gt Do one of the following e Press Enter or right click to accept the current text height e Type the new text height in the command bar then press Enter e Define the new text height graphically by specifying two points in the d
301. f Header cells B and one or more rows of Data cells C A table can have one of two directions Down title row at the top or Up title row at the bottom Table with a Down direction left and a Up direction right To create an empty table 1 Do one of the following e Click the Table tool button Fh on the Draw toolbar e Choose Insert Table in the Draw menu e Type table in the command bar then press Enter The Insert Table dialog displays Insert Table Table Style Table Options MyTable F Start From Empty Table From Data Cell Styles J From Dia First Row Cell Style ite File Second Row Cell Style Header tsi From Attribute Extraction All Other Row Cell Style Data Insertion Behavior Specify Insertion Point Preview i J Spedfy Window Column Row Settings Tile Columns Column Width 1 _ _ e i 5 2 0000 Data Rows 2 Row Height E gt 1 327 BricsCAD V14 2 Choose a Table Style from the Table Style list 3 option Set the cell style for the first second and other rows By default the cell style for the first row is Title the cell style for the second row is Header and the cell style for the other rows is Data 4 Under Table Options choose Start from Empty Table 5 Under Insertion Behavior do one of the following e Choose Specify Insertion Point then specify the number of columns and the column width and number of data
302. f no entity is snapped the block is aligned with the X axis of the WCS The Minsert command Inserts a block as a rectangular array combines the Insert and Array commands short for multiple insertion You can choose to select an existing block definition or to insert an entire drawing as a block When you insert a drawing a new block definition is created in the current drawing If you change the original drawing file those changes have no effect on the current drawing unless you redefine the block by reinserting the changed drawing When a block is inserted in a drawing it is treated as a single entity General procedure to insert a block 1 Specify a block definition or drawing file 2 Specify the insertion point Specify the scale 4 Specify the rotation angle w NOTES When inserting a drawing as a block the base point as defined by the INSBASE system variable of the inserted drawing is the origin point of the block The INSBASE system variable is set by the BASE command If a block contains attributes you will be prompted to fill out the text for each attribute in the command bar If the DRAGOPEN system variable is set to zero OFF drawings can be inserted as a block by dragging them from the Windows Explorer dialog into the current drawing if DRAGOPEN 1 ON the drawing will be opened instead The INSUNITS system variable defines a drawing units value for automatic scaling when inserting blocks or attaching
303. f the following e Select a toolbar then right click and choose Append Flyout in the context menu to add the flyout at the end of the toolbar e Expand the toolbar right click a tool then choose Insert flyout in the context menu to add the flyout above the selected tool The Add flyout dialog box displays Add flyout 4 Type a name in the Title field of the Add flyout dialog then click the OK button A new empty toolbar is created and inserted as a flyout in the selected toolbar Title Draw 30 Target Alias TB_Draw3D Own Icon No Image Revert to defaults 5 Do one of the following e Click the Target Alias field then click the settings field and select an existing toolbar in the drop down list e Add tools to the new toolbar 43 BricsCAD V14 To add a control to a toolbar 1 In the Customize dialog click the Toolbars tab If collapsed expand the menu group e g BRICSCAD 3 Do one of the following e Select the toolbar then right click and choose Append control in the context menu The new control will be added as the first item in the toolbar e Select an existing item in the toolbar then right click and choose Insert control in the context menu The new control will be added above the selected existing item 4 Select a control in the Add contro dialog Add control Control 5 Click the OK button 6 To specify the width of the control do one of the following e Accept the
304. fers to the current UCS The Angle Direction is controlled by the ANGDIR system variable which sets the positive angle direction from angle O with respect to the current UCS The Copy option of the Grips Editing commands allows to create multiple copies of the entities being stretched moved rotated mirrored or scaled Rotating a selection set 1 Do one of the following e Click the Rotate tool button CJ on the Modify toolbar e Choose Rotate in the Modify menu e Type rotate or RO in the command bar The command bar reads Select entities to rotate 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Rotation point 3 Specify the rotation point The command bar reads Copy Base angle lt Rotation angle gt A prompt menu displays ROTATE 4 option Choose Copy in the prompt menu or type C then press Enter to create a rotated copy of the selection set 5 Specify the rotation angle The selection set is rotated NOTE Use the Center option of the Array command if you want to keep the original entities 360 User Guide Rotating a selection set in reference to a base angle 1 Do one of the following e Click the Rotate tool button GD on the Modify toolbar e Choose Rotate in the Modify menu e Type rotate or RO in the command bar The command bar reads Select entities to rotate 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Rotation point
305. fied angle The Align gt Rotate option of the MVSETUP command rotates the content of a viewport relative to the X axis of the world coordinate system WCS Rotating the viewport display 1 Select the viewport then right click and choose 2D Rotate in the context menu The command bar reads Rotation point 165 BricsCAD V14 cy 4 Use the Center fe entity snap to select the center point of the viewport as the rotation point The command bar reads Copy Base angle lt Rotation angle gt lt 0 gt Type the rotation angle then press Enter The content of the viewport is rotated over the specified angle Defining the rotation angle of the viewport display NOTE L Type mvsetup in the command bar The command bar reads Enter an option Align Create Scale viewports Undo Do on of the following e Type A in the command bar then press Enter e Choose Align in the prompt menu The command bar reads Enter an option Angled Horizontal alignment Vertical alignment Rotate view Undo Do one of the following e Type R in the command bar then press Enter e Choose Rotate view in the prompt menu The command bar reads Specify basepoint in the viewport to be rotate Specify the rotation point in the viewport The command bar reads Specify rotation angle Type the rotation angle in the command bar then press Enter The viewport display is rotated over the specified angle with respect to the X axis of the WCS
306. folder to the Folders list on the Drawing Explorer Drawings dialog box Select the drawing in the containing folder on the Drawing Explorer Drawings dialog box Click the Expand icon of the containing drawing The Blocks icon of the drawing displays Click the Blocks icon of the containing drawing The blocks in the drawing display in the Details pane Select the block or blocks you want to add Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple blocks Right click and choose Add to Current Tool Palette in the context menu Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Drawings x Blocks Cars dwa Folders Add local folder Folders j rbe H 3 A Cars dwg EH Blocks Delete Purge Insert Insert External Save Block Options Cut Ctrl X Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Rename Select All Invert Selection Set current To add a drawing as a block 1 If not already available add the containing folder to the Folders list on the Drawing Explorer Drawings dialog box Select the drawing in the containing folder on the Drawing Explorer Drawings dialog box Right click and choose Add to Current Toolpalette as block in the context menu 51 BricsCAD V14 Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Drawings Add local folder A I nd Local Folders H H CBlodks20 a nd C BricsCAD House E Details Elevations j rE Plans ou Details Found
307. following e Click one of the colored tiles e Type the color number in the Color Number field option To define a true color click the True Color tab on the Select Color dialog then do one of the following e Click the in Color Selection pane 179 BricsCAD V14 e Set the color parameters in the Co or Parameter fields 4 Click the OK button to confirm Lineweight Lineweights determine how thick or thin entities appear on the screen and or when printed The following lineweights are available BYLAYER BYBLOCK DEFAULT and many additional lineweights in millimeters or inches depending on the Lineweight Units LWUNITS system variable You cannot assign lineweights to planes points TrueType fonts and raster images New entities are drawn using the current lineweight Lineweight BYLAYER When you create an entity it is created using the current lineweight By default the current lineweight for a new entity is BYLAYER This means that the entity lineweight is determined by the current layer When you assign BYLAYER changing a layer s lineweight changes the lineweight of all such entities on that layer Lineweight BYBLOCK Entities created using lineweight BYBLOCK are drawn using the DEFAULT lineweight until include them into a block The entities then inherit the block s lineweight setting when you insert the block into a drawing DEFAULT lineweight The default lineweight is saved in the Default Linewe
308. following e Inthe command bar type maxhatch then press Enter Type a new value and press enter 269 BricsCAD V14 e In the Settings dialog go to Drawing gt Drafting gt Entity Creation gt Hatches Type a new value in the Maximum hatch dashes settings field E Hatches Hatch pattern angle 0 Hatch pattern boundary Polyline Hatch pattern doubling Hatch pattern doubling Hatch pattern name ANSI31 Hatch pattern origin 0 0000 0 0000 Hatch pattern scale 1 0000 Hatch pattern spacing 1 0000 Hatch pattern style Standard Maximum hatch dashes 100000 Creating Hatches and Gradient Fills Commands HATCH and GRADIENT The Hatch command fills an enclosed area in your drawing with a pattern The Gradient command creates solid fills in nine different patterns and one or two colors The area can either be a single entity such as a circle or a closed polyline or an area enclosed by a selection of entities To create the hatch you can click inside the closed perimeter of a boundary or you can select entities Gs Creating Hatches Internet connection needed Ss Creating Gradient Fills Internet connection needed General procedure to create hatches and gradient fills 1 Do one of the following e Click the Hatch tool button 2 or the Gradient tool button on the Draw toolbar e Choose Hatch or Gradient in the Draw menu e Type hatch or gradient in the command bar then press enter The Hatch and Gradien
309. fy the attribute properties in the Properties Bar fields 3 Press the Esc key to stop editing NOTE Make sure the Properties Bar is open before starting this procedure 435 BricsCAD V14 Placing blocks with attributes Commands INSERT and INSERT When you place a block which contains attributes you will be prompted to define the attributes in the command bar or through a dialog box If the ATTDIA system variable is ON attributes display in a dialog box If the ATTDIA system variable is OFF you are prompted in the command bar to define the attributes To place a block with attributes 1 Launch the Insert Block tool 2 Position the block in the drawing All block entities are placed in the drawing except the attributes The command bar reads lt Attribute Prompt gt lt Default Text gt or A dialog box displays F Edit Attributes Block DESK Prompt Value Model Number DE 123 12 1234 Desk type Standard URER Brand Bulo Price EURO 3 Do one of the following e Inthe command bar The command bar reads lt Attribute Prompt gt lt Default Text gt e Press Enter or right click to accept the default text e Type anew text in the command bar then press Enter and define the next attribute e Inthe Edit Attributes dialog box e Select an attribute in the list The current value displays in the Value field e Type anew value in the Value field e Press OK when all attributes are properly
310. g E We aaa E a 313 To select a different multiline text editor ssssssssnssnssrennnsnsnrsnsrrunnnsnenrrnsnennnnenenrrnenenne 314 EXDIOGING COXE iississtisrssieassiarististnis steerer A VOX DIOG Cle XE arrun a cau etanmanaale AN ui Sacead eeenatans orannee a Manmantaaateaeanain 314 xiii BricsCAD V14 Finding and replacing text cccccssssseeesccscnneeeeesscceessnsesesssessssssesss OL4 Focopen the Find and Replace dialogic ninie a E dewe sere E eux ewiantawe anes 315 To set the Find and Replace optionS tii vacadastdoerekviuetagaaiiees aiieienedartacacasviuehaiawwalavetaideueiants 316 TO TING FOX irise a eE r Aa r ATENa 316 TO FE DIAC CNG aaa a N 317 CHECKING Spelling sicicsis cccecdavcacenediseussdathacnsiaicunensaetequctatremeeiemr LZ DICTION Ary Settings ora aa haut E a da E A bann ual akon 318 To open the Spell Checking dialog sscissisiiwisssvivariavseerss teers aatesseesanvadeeand caves sdaneaadeees 318 MOACHECK ENG SDONING imcini a tacos nw cawomasanatee Douisan naan TETE 318 NOcGnaNnGe CICHON APICES viisersanieciscuwaacn decease caer daukeansmowenadinamurendbeas E tomrnacubaane tas 320 TO add a new main GICTUIONALY iriennerien ra i aaie 321 TOadd a New c stoni dicUoNa y ooer A T a A a 322 Working with FieldS ssssssnunnnnuunnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ODO General procedure to create fieldS ccccceccccesseceeeeuseceeeeneeeeeuenteueetenteueerentseuetennsaueresnegs 323 To display an entity proper
311. g or png image file 7 Click the OK button to create the new tool 46 User Guide To change the order of the tools in a menu or toolbar 1 In the Customize dialog select the menu or toolbar 2 Drag the tool to its new position e Drop the tool on top of the item name to move it to the last position e Drop the tool on top of another tool to move the tool above this tool Tool Palettes Command TOOLPALETTES On a tool palette you can add blocks hatches and commands in a tabbed window Drag a tool from the palette to the graphic screen to launch the related tool Gi Tool Palettes Internet connection needed To open the Tool Palettes Bar Do one of the following e Hover over a toolbar Windows or an empty toolbar area Windows and Linux then right click and choose Tool Palettes Bar in the context menu e Type toolpalettes in the command bar then press Enter O Auto complete mode OxO00F 15 Ox0001 v Enable Ox0002 V Auto Append ox0004 Suggestion List ox0008 Display Icons unsupported 0x00 10 _ Exdude the display of System Variables Auto complete delay 0 3 To set the view options 1 Right click in an empty space of the icon area on the Too palettes Bar and choose View Options in the context menu The View Options dialog displays 47 BricsCAD V14 Too Palettes Bar BRICK PAIRS SOLID re SOLID ANCHORLOCK DEMOLITION SOLID Commands Hatches Draw Blocks Modeling Drag the I
312. geeettsegeneetens 66 Drawing Accurately ssssssuunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn OF Using Orthogonal Mod de s OF TO toggle OFLMOGON al MOUE rereirirnin a E E AAOAEAR 67 Direct Distance Entey wisstsivesssriivigicsivvensiisiiistisrissenisieenecOo To derner the COOrdinales Setting ascseceteanedensmece ty tuna sataeeesadanaene we Aaaieeasd Mage E A A 68 Un SGCEINGS niritiic en reds een OS Entering GANGES susterhsseooncnedaetcisanaideeteaiiteswenseieaianaas wanda nanianiiaeeine pine and a 68 THE Quad c rs r MENU ciniisiivinniciiiesincinecinreseresnernnentse cence O9 TO activate the Waa camaaussacanuche mavausannn daacun ou nua aura machi alan a tera neaneaamannats 69 Editing the Quad Settings inariana N vans ates a Sona a A E A ae aiaa 70 TAS Quad layouteren eiaa e a A AET A ATAN Ae 71 CUSTOMIZING CNG OUAG aa E A 72 To edit the workspace command groupS s sssssssssssrssssssrensrenenssnenrennenenenrrnerrunnnrnenrrnrnene 72 Vocedit the Custom command GrOUD sccvntraachtatietsieteaadaninnstoutanaueen saunas a aai 74 2D CONnSUFAINES iceride rarna EAEEREN ARIERO a 77 commands aNd OOD alS zsp i A A sadeunaaawous exmmnaaetnnes 78 Using Dimensional Constraints sssss2u 2 2 222 OO To edit dimensional ConstralNMtS siorr tinina a EA e A E A A A ii 80 Using expressions to define dimensional constraints sssssssssssssnsn
313. gle then press Enter NOTE To restore non rotated extension lines execute the above procedure and type O zero when asked to enter the obliquing angle 302 User Guide Adding Geometric Tolerances Command TOLERANCE Geometric tolerances specify the maximum variation that is allowed in form or position from true geometry The geometric tolerance is in essence the tolerance zone within which a surface or axis of hole or cylinder can lie which results in resulting feature being acceptable for proper function and interchangeability BricsCAD draws geometric tolerances using a feature control frame which is a rectangle divided into compartments Each feature control frame consists of at least two compartments The first compartment contains a geometric tolerance symbol that indicates the geometric characteristic to which the tolerance is applied such as location orientation or form For example a form tolerance may indicate the flatness or roundness of a surface The second compartment contains the tolerance value When appropriate the tolerance value is preceded by a diameter symbol and followed by a material condition symbol The material conditions apply to features that can vary in size The tolerance value can then be followed by primary secondary and tertiary datum reference letters along with the material conditions of each datum Datum reference letters are generally used as reference tolerances to one of up to three per
314. graphic Provider Microsoft Strong Cryptographic Provider 4 Set the Key Length to 40 48 or 56 5 Click the OK button or press Enter The Security options dialog closes The Password dialog opens 6 Type the password in the Confirm Password field 7 Click the OK button or press Enter The password is defined To remove the password 1 Type securityoptions in the command bar then press Enter The Security options dialog opens 2 Empty the Enter Password field 3 Click the OK button or press Enter A message box displays to confirm that the password is removed I The password protection was removed from drawing 4 Click the OK button or press Enter to close the message box Export to PDF Command EXPORT Drawing files can be saved as a PDF file optionally including layers Export to PDF settings Choose PDF Export Options in the File menu to display the PDF Export settings in the Settings dialog 503 BricsCAD V14 El PDF export Pdf embedded fonts Enable embedded TTF fonts Pdf TTF text as geometry Convert TIF text to geometry Pdf SHX text as geometry Convert SHX text to geometry Pdf simple geometry optimization Enable simple geometry optimization Pdf zoom to extents mode Zoom to extents Pdf layer support 1 Use layers Don t indude OFF ayers Pdf layouts to export 0 Active Pdf papersize override _ Enable papersize override Pdf overridden paper width 210 Pdf overridden paper height 297 P
315. grayscale in the plot output Pen Specifies a pen to use when plotting entities that use this plot style You can select a pen number from 1 to 32 Virtual pen Specifies a virtual pen number between 1 and 255 Choose Automatic to specify that BricsCAD should make the virtual pen assignment from the BricsCAD Color Index The virtual pen setting in a plot style is used only by non pen plotters and only if they are configured for virtual pens select 255 Virtual Pens under Color Depth under Vector Graphics on the Settings tab in the Plotter Configuration Editor Specifies the color intensity of the plot on the paper The valid range is O through 100 If you select 100 the drawing will plotted with its full color intensity In order for screening to work the Dithering option must be active Screening Displays a list with an example and a description of each linetype The default setting for plot style linetype is Use Object Linetype The selected linetype overrides the entity s linetype in the plot output Linetype Adjusts the scale of the linetype to complete the linetype pattern You can activate this property if a complete linetype pattern is more important than a correct linetype scaling Adaptive Displays a sample of the lineweight as well as its numeric value You can modify an existing lineweight if the one you need is not available The default setting for plot style lineweight is Use Object Lineweight The se
316. grips to edit a linear dimension 1 Select the dimension entity 5 grips display e 2 origin point grips 1 e 2 dimension line grips 2 e 1 dimension text grip 3 1 4 24 43 m2 2 option Drag the origin point grips to adjust the dimension origin points The dimension text is adjusted automatically 3 option Drag dimension line grips to move the dimension line 4 option Drag the text grip to move the dimension text NOTES Depending on the Text movement setting the dimension line will move along with the text or the text will move independently A leader will be drawn if the Text movement setting is set to Move text add leader If two adjacent dimensions continued dimensions are selected both you can move their coinciding grips simultaneously 300 User Guide Editing the dimension text Dimension text can be edited in the MText editor using the DDEDIT command double clicking the dimension entity in the Text override field in the Properties Bar using the Edit Dimension Text tool NOTES The following tags can be used to format the dimension text type L backslash upper case L to start underlined text backslash lower case L to stop underlined text type lt gt to add the default dimension text type to add the alternate units if alternate units is currently switched off in the dimension style type d to add the degree symbol type c to add the diameter symbol t
317. gs e If the user profile name contains spaces use double quotes e g P background white Restarting BricsCAD using a different user profile oo Choose User Profile Manager in the Tools menu Select the user profile you want to start up with Click the Set Current button on the User Profile Manager dialog Close and restart BricsCAD 61 BricsCAD V14 Managing user profiles Once you start using user profiles you may need to copy rename or delete them Copying a profile is a quick way to create a new profile based on an existing profile TO copy a user profile 1 2 3 4 5 Launch the User Profile Manager Select the user profile you want to copy Click the Copy button The Copy Profile dialog displays Copy profile Profile name Description Copy of Background White White screen background color in both Model Space and Paperspace Type a name for the new profile in the Profile name field option Type a description for the new profile in the Description field Click the OK button to create the profile To rename a user profile 1 2 gt Launch the User Profile Manager Select the user profile you want to rename Click the name of the selected user profile The Profile name field is active now MyDefault Type a new name in the Profile name field Click outside the Profile name field To edit the Description field 1 i 62 Select the profile you want to e
318. haft and one to its planar outer faces 6 Click the Fix tool button on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select an edge face or 3D solid 230 User Guide 7 Move cursor over the cylindrical face of the crankshaft then click see image below 8 Repeat the previous steps for the planar outer face of the crankshaft see image below 9 Select the Fix constraint applied in step 4 1 in the Constraints tree in the Mechanical Browser Right click and select De ete in the context menu 231 BricsCAD V14 Step 6 Kinematic Analysis In this assembly the crankshaft is the driving component To run the kinematic analysis we will rotate the crankshaft around its axis which in this case is the Y axis of the WCS 1 Move the cursor over the crankshaft then choose Rotate Te in the Quad cursor menu The command bar reads Select axial entity or define axis by 2Points Xaxis Yaxis Zaxis lt 2Points gt 2 Do one of the following e Type Y then press Enter e Choose Y axis in the prompt menu The command bar reads Pick start point in the rotation plane 3 Pick a point in the drawing then move the mouse to define the rotation angle The piston and the connecting rod move dynamically along with the rotation of the crankshaft while the cylinder stays at its fixed position 232 User Guide SheetMetal Commands SmFlangeBase SmFlangeEdge SmFlangeRotate SmFlangeConnect and SmUnfold
319. hasana aan a anaa the display of grips on entities in blocks on off blocks Grip color GRIPCOLOR Sets the color of unselected grips Default value is green index color no 72 Selected GRIPHOT Sets the color of selected grips so called hot grips Default grip color value is red index color no 240 Hover grip GRIPHOVER Sets the color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses color over it Default value is blue index color no 150 GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box expressed in pixels Default value 4 Grip object GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips if the number of selected objects exceeds the value of GRIPOBJLIMIT If set to O zero grips always display Grips EnableAttraction Toggles the magnetism of grips on off attraction Grips AttractionDistance Sets the grips attraction distance if the cursor is within this attraction distance the cursor is attracted by the grip and jumps to it distance limit User Preference Selection Methods Before you start to use modification commands you need to know how to compose a selection set If the PICKFIRST variable is ON you can build the selection set before starting the command else you are prompted to select the entities after you launched the modification command Using QUICK SELECT you can specify filters such as entity type color linetype or any other entity property to compose a selection set The SELECTIONPREVIEW and PREVIE
320. he Add Entity Type s button The Add Entity Alias dialog box displays A Add Entity Alias Add alias es for One entity Multiple entities 3DFACE E 3DS0LID ACAD _PROXY_ENTITY ACAD PROXY_ENTITY_WRAPPER ACAD TABLE E ACAD_7OMBI ACDBVIEWREPIMAGE ARC ARCALIGNEDTEXT ARC_DIMENSION ATTDEF ATTRIB Do one of the following e Check the One entity option the context menu applies if one entity is selected only e Check Multiple entities the context menu applies in multiple entities are selected only e Check both options the context menu applies if one or more entities are selected Select one or more entity types in the list Click the OK button to confirm 41 BricsCAD V14 42 6 Type a name in the Menu title field 7 Click the OK button to save the context menu 8 option Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add more context menus To add a toolbar In the Customize dialog click the Too bars tab Do one of the following e Select a menu group then right click and choose Append toolbar in the context menu e Select an existing toolbar in a menu group then right click and choose Insert toolbar in the context menu New toolbars are added above the selected existing toolbar or as the first toolbar if you select the menu group Type a name in the Title field of the Add toolbar dialog Add toolbar Se Title My Drawing Tools 4 Click the OK button 5
321. he Name list e Click the Browse button and select a drawing file 3 option Check the Explode option to explode the block after insertion 4 option Uncheck the Specify On Screen option then specify the Insertion Point by keying in the coordinates in the X Y and Z fields 5 option Uncheck the Specify On Screen option then specify the Scale by keying in the scaling factors in the X Y and Z fields Check the Uniform Scale option to equal the X Y and Z scale factors 6 option Check the Specify On Screen option to specify the Rotation angle when inserting the block 7 Click the OK button The command bar reads Insertion point for block A prompt menu displays INSERT 420 User Guide 8 Specify the insertion point The command bar reads Corner XYZ X scale factor lt 1 000000 gt A prompt menu displays INSERT Corner Scale X Y 7 Cancel 9 Right click or press Enter to accept the default X scale factor The command bar reads Y scale factor lt Equal to X scale 1 000000 gt 10 Right click or press Enter to set the Y scale factor equal to the X scale factor The block is inserted To insert a block using the Drawing Explorer Inserting internal blocks 1 Open the Drawing Explorer Blocks dialog 2 optional Choose either Detail View ES or Icon View 222 3 option Edit the insert options e Choose Options in the Settings menu or select a block then right click and choose Options
322. he block are updated option To bring back the selected block entities type oops in the command bar then press Enter To reload an external drawing as a block E 4 oF 426 Do one of the following e Click the Insert Block tool button 5h on the Draw toolbar e Choose Insert Block in the Draw menu e Type insert in the command bar then press Enter The Insert Block dialog opens On the Insert Block dialog click the Browse button then select the external drawing file Click the Insert button An alert box displays BricsCAD eS cylinder ts already defined Do you want to re define it Yes Click the Yes button to redefine the existing block definition The command bar reads Insertion point for block Continue with step 3 of the Inserting Blocks procedure User Guide Exploring Blocks Command EXPBLOCKS The Exp lblocks command opens the Blocks section of the Drawing Explorer dialog box short for explorer blocks In the Blocks Explorer you can Create new blocks Gh Delete blocks X Purge unused block definitions o Insert blocks h in the current drawing Insert external block files Ce Save a block as a new drawing ig Cut H or Copy Ry a block definition then Paste ED the block definition in another drawing Rename a block Open the Blocks Explorer 6 To open the Blocks Explorer do one of the following Choose Drawing Explorer gt Blocks in the Tools menu Type
323. he crankshaft as the anchor component of the assembly and therefore insert it at the origin 0 0 0 Please make sure the insertion point is exactly at 0 0 0 otherwise the kinematic analysis in step 6 might fail BricsCAD Platinum NOT FOR RESALE License Component_l PS Eile Edit View Insert Settings Tools Draw Model Dirnension Modify Parametric Mechanical Sheet Metgl Window Help z CREA BESS 4 RB P X ao BLEE eE rmn AAPAA eR wm al u nahla g eere E A BESO BX CWOLBG EEA ea a MOE TA AE T E TZ BESS Dr 52 HO G A a o ar u gt J Dieios E FT component sert Name crarkshaft Component name t Descnption Veble P gt E Visual style Fie View to list saved views Delete Orthographic Restore Save Window _ KIDDY B G ig a T amp o 90 5 607 0 0 0 0 Bytayer Bylayer Standard ISO 30Modeing SNAP GRID CATHO POLAR ESNAP STRACK LWT 4 Use the tools on the Look From toolbar to adjust the view orientation 5 Repeat the previous steps to insert the other components cylinder 1 piston 2 pin 3 and connecting rod 4 222 User Guide BricsCAD Platinum NOT FOR RESALE License Component_l cyl A File Edit View Insert Settings Tools Draw Model Dimenson Modify Parametric Mechanical Sheet Metai Window Help gt e x DRA BES d DEP X er Bge eE rma LPP tewm S alH naula g e rrer AG BAS E I e Ea a ORTA EAE T EN x r E J Model Library 4 i we h a a it a 3 Component i
324. he current date DateTime Adds the current date and time DwgName Adds the file name and path of the drawing NOTE The header and footer text consists of three parts left center and right separated by commas By default the header and footer text is centered The header and footer text can be outlined left center and or right by separating the text with commas e g Name Company Date places your name left company name centered and the current date at the right Type a space before one of the commas to leave one of the parts empty thus outlining the header or footer left or right Company Company lt space gt lt space gt outlines the company name left Company lt space gt lt space gt Company outlines the comapny name right To specify the number of copies Do one of the following e Type the desired number in the Number of copies field e Click the up arrow and the down arrow buttons to specify the number of copies j Number of copies q 470 User Guide To see a preview of the plot output 1 Do one of the following e Click the Preview button on the Print or Page Setup dialogs e Choose Print Preview in the File menu e Type preview in the command bar then press Enter 2 option Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom Double click the middle mouse button to zoom extents 3 To close the Print Preview window do one of the following e Click the Close button to return to
325. he cursor over an open toolbar then right click and select the required toolbars from the toolbar list Toolbars that are already open are marked in the list 3 Make sure that the Quad cursor menu is active Click the Quad field in the Status bar if necessary 4 Make sure that the Exclude entities in Xrefs option of the PREVIEWFILTER system variable is switched off Selection preview display O0x0003 3 Selection preview effect 2 Dashed and thickened lines Ox0025 37 Exclude entities on locked layer _ Exdude entities in xrefs Exdude multiline text entities _ Exdude hatch entities Exdude entities in groups Subentity preview order i Top level entity is highlighted first Delay to preview selection 30 Drawing Explorer PREVIEWFILTER Selection preview filter PS Short Controls which entity types are exduded from selection previewing The 3 Value is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the values of all selected Hi Registry options 5 Open the Mechanical Browser dialog box Do one of the following e Click the Mechanical Browser tool button Tea on the Mechanical toolbar e Choose Mechanical Browser in the Mechanical menu e Type bmbrowser in the command bar 220 User Guide Mechanical Browser Model Library Step 2 Creating the assembly drawing Click the New Component tool button Ka on the Mechanical toolbar A new drawing of the name Component_i1 dwg is created and Component_1i is added in th
326. he default option The command bar reads New point for block or Enter for no change The first block is attached to the cursor Specify the new insertion point or right click to accept the current orientation The command bar reads New rotation angle lt current angle gt Do one of the following e Right click to accept the current rotation angle e Type anew rotation angle in the command bar then press Enter e Click to specify the new rotation angle graphically option If multiple blocs were selected in step 2 steps 3 through 5 are repeated for each block User Guide Copying Entities You can copy a selection set making one copy or multiple copies within the current drawing or you can also copy entities between drawings The following procedures can be used to make a copy of existing entities Create a copy of a selection set within the current drawing Create multiple copies of a selection set within the current drawing Copy entities between drawings Create a copy of a linear entity aligned parallel to the original Create a copy as a mirror image of the original Create several copies in a rectangular or circular pattern in 2D Create several copies in a rectangular or circular pattern in 3D NoTE When DRAGSNAP is ON dragged entities display at the current entity snap location Copying Entities in a Drawing Commands COPY COPYCLIP COPYBASE PASTECLIP and PASTEBLOCK You can duplicate entities within the current drawi
327. he drawing If switched off a bounding box displays instead Displays a notice when you open a drawing containing proxy entities 1 created by an application that is not present 487 BricsCAD V14 PROXYSHOW Proxy show Controls how proxy entities 1 display in a drawing O Not displayed 1 Graphic images 2 Bounding box PROXYWEBSEARCH Proxy web Determines whether BricsCAD checks for object enablers 0 Never 1 If a live Internet connection is present SaveFormat Save format Sets the default dwg version to save a drawing SAVETIME Save time Sets the interval in minutes for automatic saves If set to zero automatic saves are turned off Automatic saves are created with a SV extension in the folder defined by the SAVEFILEPATH system variable search interval WorspaceSecurity Enable Defines whether macros are enabled when macros loading a VBA project AutosaveChecksOnlyFirstbitDBMOD Ignore all If this user preference is switched on no but first bit autosave file will be created for files that are viewed only of DBMOD 2 for autosave CloseChecksOnlyFirstBitDBMOD Ignore all If this user preference is switched on you but first bit can view a file then close it without getting of a request to save the file DBMOD 2 for close 1 Proxy entities are custom entities which are created by an add on application If the add on is currently not loaded or not installed such entities cannot be di
328. he edge flange and the angle between two flanges You can also use the corresponding dynamic dimensions to type the desired values Vie AA Ss Direct Modeling 30 Constraints Sheet Metal 7 Custom Polar 45 5 lt 90 0000 To create an edge flange of which the width is different from the width of the edge select the Width option of SmEdgeFlange command and define offsets from both sides of the edge 241 BricsCAD V14 Note that when you create an edge flange of different width the corresponding bend reliefs are created automatically Create Edge Flange With Taper Angle s You can create trapezoidal edge flanges using Taper angle option of SmEdgeFlange command 242 User Guide Corner Reliefs and Junctions When you pull an edge of a flange that is adjacent to a bend edge to create a new flange with SmFlangeEdge command a corner relief is created automatically in the corner where three flanges meet together This operation also creates a junction between two flanges which are not connected with a bend 243 BricsCAD V14 To Rotate a Flange You can rotate a flange with DmRotate command Try however you will usually obtain a better result with SmFlangeRotate This command automatically selects the rotation axis to respect the design intent of your sheet metal part E 3 Do one of the following e Click the Rotate Flange tool button a on the Sheet Metal toolbar e Choose R
329. he next cell in the same row e Press Shift TAB to go to the previous cell in the same row e Press Enter to go the next cell in the same column e Press Shift Enter to go to the previous cell in the same column e Press one of the Arrow keys 4 Click to stop editing the table content To export a table When exporting data to a CSV Comma Separated Values file the list separator character off your system is used in the CSV file see Defining the list separator character 1 Type tableexport in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select table to export 2 Click the table you want to export the data of The Export Data dialog opens 3 Select a folder to save the data in 4 Type a name in the File name field 5 Click the Save button The data in the selected table are saved as a CSV Comma Separated Values file Defining the list separator character 1 Click the Start button in the Windows Taskbar then choose Control Panel 2 Do one of the following e On the Control Panel Home window choose Clock Language and Region gt Regional and Language Options e On the Control Panel Classic View window double click the Regional and Language Options icon The Regional and Language Options dialog box displays 3 On the Regional and Language Options dialog box click the Customize this format button 334 User Guide The Customize Regional Options dialog box displays Customize Regional Op
330. he non rectangular viewport Right click or press Enter to create the viewport e Make sure no other viewports display when choosing the Fit to view option because they will be hidden behind the newly created viewport e Each newly created viewport shows all entities on the layers which are currently visible in model space e Since a new viewport is created on the current layer it is recommended to use a dedicated layer for viewport entities Make this layer current when you want to add a new viewport If you don t want the viewport outlines to be printed set the Do Not Plot property of the viewport layer e Only circles and closed polylines can be used to create a clipped viewport If you want to create an elliptical viewport use the Polyline Ellipse variable to create a polyline representation of an ellipse e To select a clipped viewport do the following Click the viewport border Both the viewport and the clipping polygon are selected then as indicated in the Properties Bar the list button caption reads A 2 Press the list button and select Viewport to see the properties of the viewport Creating an array of layout viewports Command MVSETUP 160 i Type mvsetup in the command bar The command bar reads Enter an option Align Create Scale viewports Undo Do one of the following e Type C in the command bar then press Enter e Choose Create in the context menu The command bar reads Enter an option Delete obje
331. hen press enter or select another attribute 438 User Guide Extracting attribute information Command ATTEXT and ATTEXT The Attext command copies data from attributes to a text file via a dialog box The Attext command copies data from attributes to a text file via the command line The text file can the be imported in a database or a spreadsheet You can save the file in any of the following formats e Comma Delimited Format CDF Contains one line for each instance of a block with individual attribute fields separated by commas Character string fields are enclosed with single quotation marks You must specify a template file when extracting to a CDF file e Space Delimited Format SDF Contains one line for each instance of a block Each attribute field has a fixed length there are no separators or character string delimiters You must specify a template file when extracting to a SDF file e Drawing Exchange Format DXF Creates a subset of a standard DXF file a dxx file containing all the information about each block including the insertion points rotation angles and attribute values No template file is required Before extracting attributes to a CDF or SDF file you must create a template file The template file is an ASCII text file that specifies the attribute data fields to be written in the extract file Each line of the template file specifies one attribute field BricsCAD recognizes 15 different fields which
332. ht e Edit the properties of a single entity e Edit the shared properties of a selection set e Edit endpoints of lines and vertices of polylines graphically To open the Properties Bar Do one of the following e Click the Properties tool button Ei on the Standard toolbar The pressed state of the tool button indicates that the Properties bar is currently open Click the tool button again to close the Properties bar e Right click when the cursor is on a toolbar A context menu displays The marked items in the context menu are currently open Select Properties Bar in the context menu BRICSCAD Mechanical Browser Command Bar Tool Palettes Bar w Status Bar Customize Double click an entity The Properties Bar opens showing the properties of the selected entity Double clicking entities such as texts blocks or polylines start an editing command See the Mouse tab on the Customize dialog 14 User Guide Customize Acad Proxy Entity Sie Arc v gt Attdef So Attribute Block Block Properties P Open Browser e Click the Properties tool button E on the Standard toolbar e Choose Properties in the Modify menu e Type properties in the command window then press Enter 15 BricsCAD V14 Properties Bar x _ assestata Ej General C Bytayer tayr o 1 ByLayer B yLayer Camera 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Perspective 01 LensLength 50 0 Field of view 38 5801 780
333. i E to replace this instance of the Current word by the word in the Suggestions field e Accept the word in the Suggestions field or select a word in the Suggestions list then click the Change All button change an to replace all instances of the Current word by the word in the Suggestions field e Click the Add button add J to add the Current word to the current custom dictionary e Click the Lookup button Lookup to list words similar to the word in the Suggestions field Repeat step 5 until the Spelling check is complete message displays 319 BricsCAD V14 NOTE If a selection is active when you launch the Spell command only text entities in the selection set are checked To change dictionaries 1 Open the Spell Checking dialog Change Dictionaries 2 Click the Change Dictionaries button The Change Dictionaries dialog opens Change Dictionaries Main dictionary Custom dictionary C Users Louis AppData Roamin Custom dictionary words 3 Click the Main dictionary list button to change the main dictionary Main dictionary ET JAL en GB dic en US dic Inl NL dic 4 Select a new main dictionary 5 option Click the Browse button to select a new Custom dictionary 6 option Type a word in the Custom dictionary words field then click the Add button to add a word to the current custom dictionary 7 Click the Apply amp Close button NOTE Custom dictio
334. ialog opens In the Drawing Explorer Layers dialog click the Detail view tool button 3 Click the Material column of the layer you want to assign a material to Click the down arrow and select the material in the Material list Commands DISTANTLIGHT GEOQGRAPHICLOCATION LIGHT LIGHTLIST POINTLIGHT SPOTLIGHT SUNPROPERTIES WEBLIGHT Lighting is the key to make the viewer believe to look at a realistic scene Lighting glossary Ambient light light from an unspecified source Back light light that adds depth and dimension by creating highlights Distant light light that is cast evenly throughout a scene with shadows all in the same direction Fall off the attenuation or decrease in brightness the further from the light source Fill light the light that brightens dark areas and softens shadows from the main light Point light light that shines in all directions from a central spot Spot light focusable light that is aimed in one area Photometric web a 3D representation of the light intensity distribution of a light source Web light approximates real world light distribution using a 3D representation of the light intensity Web lights can be created only if the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 American lighting units or 2 International lighting units Attenuation the fall off in brightness the further from the light source 519 BricsCAD V14 General properties The general properties are co
335. icsCAD V14 Right click to stop selecting entities Click the Pick point button to define the Base point of the new drawing or Type the coordinates of the base point in the X Y and Z field Set the behavior of the selected entities after the block is created o Retain The selected entities remain in the drawing Convert to block The selected entities are replaced by the newly created block o Delete The selected entities are deleted 6 Click the OK button to create the drawing file O If the Delete option in step 5 was set the OOPS command brings back the erased block entities NOTE 418 User Guide Inserting Blocks Commands INSERT INSERT INSERTALIGNED and MINSERT The Insert command lets you insert blocks through a dialog box The Insert command inserts blocks by prompting in the command bar BricsCAD will lookup the block name in the block definitions in the current drawing If the block is not found in the current drawing the paths defined by the SRCHPATH system variable are searched If the block is not found there either BricsCAD responds Could not find file lt blockname gt The Insertaligned command inserts a block entity with easy alignment on existing entities The Insertaligned command is similar to the Insert command but during the placement the block will be dynamically aligned with existing lines polylines arcs or circles The block is aligned with the entity to which the cursor snaps I
336. ide CIRCLE 2 Point 3 Point Tangent Tangent Riadius Turn arc into drde Multiple drdes Cancel 2 Specify the center point of the circle The command bar reads Diameter lt Radius gt lt current radius gt The prompt menu changes CIRCLE Diameter Cancel Do one of the following e Press Enter to accept the current radius e Type anew radius and press Enter e Click to define the radius graphically Editing a circle L Select the circle The properties of the circle display in the Properties bar El Geometry E Center 85 0057 163 4489 0 x 85 0057 Y 163 4489 a g Radius 59 6358 Diameter 119 2716 Circumference 374 7029 Area 11172 8589 E Normal 0 0 i xX 0 Y 0 Fa 1 2 Type anew value in the Center Radius Diameter Circumference or Area field 3 then press Enter Press the Esc key to stop editing the circle Ellipses Command ELLIPSE The default method for drawing an ellipse is to specify the endpoints of one axis of the ellipse and then specify a distance representing half the length of the second axis The endpoints of the first axis determine the orientation of the ellipse The longer axis of the ellipse is called the major axis and the shorter one is the minor axis The order in which you define the axes does not matter The program determines the major and minor axes based on their relative lengths Half the major axis is called the major radius half the minor axis is the minor ra
337. idpoint snap to Center snap to Perpendicular snap to Parallel snap to Tangent snap to Quadrant snap to Insertion H OONHOAN Snap to Point snap to Intersection Snap to Apparent Intersection snap to Extension Clear Entity Snaps Entity Snap Settings From snap to Middle of 2 Points WL eo OR OK When no command is active the above procedures toggle the Entity Snap modes on off When a command is active the above procedures set a one shot override of the current Entity Snap modes Alternatively you can type a single letter shortcut as indicated in the table below 106 User Guide Entity Snap Modes Context Description menu shortcut NEAREST ca ae Snaps to the nearest point on an entity ENDPOINT E Snaps to the nearest endpoint of an entity or polyline segment MIDPOINT Zy mM Snaps to the midpoint of an entity or polyline segment CENTER a D C Snaps to the center point of an arc circle ee polygon ellipse or elliptical arc Snaps to the center of gravity of a closed polyline PERPENDICULAR 4 J Snaps to the perpendicular point of another entity You can snap to an arc circle ellipse line polyline infinite line ray spline or edge of a plane to form a perpendicular alignment with that entity or with an extension of that entity PARALLEL A L Displays a tracking line parallel to the selected va entity TANGENT T Snaps to the point on an arc ellipse spline or circle that whe
338. ies When Entity Snap Tracking is turned on BricsCAD displays temporary alignments based on entity snap points Entity Snap Tracking works in combination with Entity Snap tools At least one Entity Snap mode must be on if you want to use Entity Snap Tracking Click the STRACK field in the Status bar to enable disable Entity Snap Tracking Entity Snap Tracking alignments are parallel to the X and Y axis of the current UCS by default If the Polar mode gt 0x0002 setting is checked the polar angles used in Polar Tracking interval and additional angles are also used in Entity Snap Tracking Alignment points are acquired using entity snaps Acquired points display a small plus sign To remove an acquired point use the entity snap again The small plus sign is then removed If the Polar mode gt 0x0008 is checked you must press and hold the Shift key to acquire entity tracking points Alignments relative to an acquired point are displayed as you move the cursor over their tracking paths You can then define points either on the alignments or at the intersection of two alignments Esnap track markers to distinguish between regular esnap markers and markers drawn together with related snap tracking lines esnap track markers display in the color of the tracking lines Hitting the Shift key when a tracking line displays locks the tracking line Lock tracking lines display in red 1 Entity snaps 2 or specified points are projecte
339. ies the current dimension style to the selected A dimension s F Save Style DIMSTYLE Saves the current dimension settings in a new S dimension style mi DIMSTYLE Sets the current dimension style Style Dimension DIMSTYLE Displays the status of the dimension variables in the command bar and the Prompt History window V Variable Status 282 User Guide Dimension Styles explorer Command DIMSTYLE A dimension style is a collection of settings and definitions which determine the type of arrowheads text style color of text lines and arrowheads unit type precision etc Dimension styles are saved in the drawing You can create edit and delete dimension styles Dimension styles can be copied between drawings NOTES You cannot delete the current dimension style You cannot delete a dimension style that is used in the drawing Each drawing contains at least one dimension style Exploring dimension styles 1 To open the Dimension Styles Explorer do one of the following e Choose Dimension Styles in the Tools gt Drawing Explorer menu e Double click the Dimension Style field in the Status bar e Right click the Dimension Style field in the Status bar then choose Properties in the context menu e Type dimstyle in the command bar then press Enter Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Drawings Dimension Styles House dwg Open Drawings Folders Sheets m ig AL z aaa
340. iewports can be divided into multiple viewports each of which can contain a different view of the current drawing All viewports are displayed in a tiled manner You can work in only one of these viewports at a time but all viewports are updated simultaneously When no command is active click in a viewport to make it the current viewport You can print the current viewport only The following settings can be defined differently for each viewport e grid display and snap e coordinate system WCS or UCS e e e m m is e Model Space divided in 3 viewports Creating viewports in model space 1 Do one of the following e Click the Viewports tool button Hh on the Views toolbar e Choose Viewports in the Views menu e Type vports in the command bar The command bar reads Viewports to list Save Restore Delete SIngle Join 2 3 4 lt 3 gt A prompt menu opens 153 BricsCAD V14 154 2 option To create 2 viewports do one of the following e Choose Create 2 viewports in the prompt menu e Type 2 in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Two viewports Horizontal lt Vertical gt Horizontal Vertical option To create 3 viewports do one of the following e Choose Create 3 viewports in the prompt menu e Type 3 in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Three viewports Horizontal Vertical Above Below Left lt Right gt Horizontal Ver
341. ight LWDEFAULT system variable Entities created using the default lineweight will be adjusted if the Default Lineweight setting is redefined NOTE For entities using an index color lineweights will be used for printing only if the Color Table CTB or Plot Style STB is defined as Use object lineweight Otherwise the line weight is defined by the objects color or plot style Entities which are created in a true color always use the object line weight when printed Setting the current lineweight 1 option On the BricsCAD Properties Bar select Lineweight Make sure no entity is selected Choose a lineweight in the drop down list 180 2 Properties Bar resend B General O Color _ ByLayer Layer 0 Linetype Continuous Linetype scale 2 54 Lineweight ByLayer ByLayer Camera ByBlock Target Default Perspective 0 00 mm 0 05 mm 0 09 mm 0 13 mm 0 15 mm 0 18 mm Lens Length Field of view Height Width Visual Style 0 25 mm 0 30 mm mn Se Annotation scale option On the Entity Properties toolbar click the down arrow next to the Lineweight field then choose a lineweight in the drop down list Defining the lineweight settings as Choose Settings in the Settings menu The Settings dialog opens Select the Drawing settings category Expand the Display Viewing settings sub category Expand the Lineweights settings group O Drafting Drawing u
342. imension if any 2 option Press enter then select the starting dimension see note below 3 Specify the origin of the next extension line The command bar reads Baseline ENTER to select starting dimension lt Origin of next extension line gt 4 Do one of the following e Repeat steps 2 and 3 e Press the Esc key to stop creating baseline dimensions 293 BricsCAD V14 NOTES When selecting the starting dimension make sure to click the first extension line or the first half of the dimension line in order to use the first origin point of the starting dimension as the origin point for the baseline dimension If you select an angular dimension stacked angular dimensions are created The distance between the stacked dimension lines is controlled by the Dim baseline Spacing setting in the dimension style To create continued dimensions NOTE Do one of the following e Click the Continue tool button FA on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Continue in the Dimensions menu e Type dimcontinue in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Continue ENTER to select starting dimension lt Origin of next extension line gt A continued dimension displays dynamically starting from the most recently added linear or angular dimension if any option Press enter then select the starting dimension see note below Specify the origin of the next extension line The command bar reads Continue ENTER to selec
343. iminishes over distance Attenuation does not apply to photometric lights An alternative method to control the distance a light shines is the use of limits which define the points from where a light starts to shine and where it stops Using limits decreases the time needed to calculate the illumination of a scene Attenuation properties apply to spot lights and point lights e Type the options are none inverse linear and inverse square e None no attenuation The distance to the light source has no influence e Inverse Linear the attenuation is the inverse of the linear distance from the light at a distance of 2 units from the light source light is half as strong ata distance of 4 units light is one quarter as strong 521 BricsCAD V14 Inverse Square the attenuation is the inverse of the square of the distance from the light at a distance of 2 units light is one quarter as strong ata distance of 4 units light is one sixteenth as strong Use Limits if this property is set to Yes the Start limit offset and End limit offset fields become active Start limit offset defines the point where the light starts to shine measured from the center of the light End limit offset defines the point where the light stops to shine measured from the center of the light No attenuation Inverse linear attenuation Inverse square attenuation To open the light list in the Drawing Explorer 522 Do one of the following Click the
344. in the command bar then press Enter e Click the Explore Table Styles tool button FA on the Insert Table dialog To create a table style 1 Open the Drawing Explorer Table Styles dialog displays 2 Inthe Drawing Explorer Table Styles dialog do one of the following e Choose New in the Edit menu e Click the New tool button Gh A new style is created using default settings Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Table Styles House dwa X Edit Table Style NewStyle1 x ax 6 Bie A 2 Ese Cell Style Settings TableStyle Name 1 Standard 2 ewStyle1 Text Style Cell Type DATA Color ByBlock v Style Height Cell Margin Display Background Color ByEntity s ner Tene TE Dato a Ea a BOe800000 Table Direction Down Rename the style replacing the NewSty e1 default name Select a cell type Data Header or Title Define the cell style settings for the selected cell type Repeat the previous steps for each cell type oe a ae 336 User Guide To edit a table style 1 Open the Drawing Explorer Table Styles dialog displays 2 Inthe Details pane of the Drawing Explorer Table Styles dialog select the table style you want to edit 3 Select a cell type Data Header or Title 4 Edit the cell style settings for the selected cell type 5 option Repeat the previous steps for another
345. in the selection set will be equally defined for this property e Step 3 Properties such as the General properties which are chosen from a list are updated instantly 21 BricsCAD V14 Keyboard Shortcuts The following keyboard shortcuts are available Fi Opens the BrcsCAD He SSS F2 Toggles the display of the Prompt History window mo ToogesemwySmas O OOOO OO ma Toooesmetaetmo OOO O oS s Sets the sopiane see Using Isometric snap SSS F6 Toogles the Dynamic UCS feature SSCS 7 Toagles the display ofthe gr SOS S Toggles the Ortho setting Disables Polar Tracking if on o Toooestmesnepseitno OO O OOS S y OSO F0 oogjes the Polar Tracking setting Disables Ortho ifon Fi2_ Togglesthe Quad display o o o o ooo Toggles entity snaps on off selection of groups and associative hatches Ctrl K Attach a hyperlink to an object or modify an existing hyperlink HYPERLINK command Toggles the Ortho setting Ctri Q Quits the application prompts to save changes QUIT command Ctri R Iterates through viewports Ctril S Saves the current drawing QSAVE command Ctrl T Turns the tablet on off Ctrl V Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the drawing PASTECLIP command F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F12 Ctri Alt V Pastes the contents of the Clipboard in a specified format PASTESPEC command Ctri Shift V Pastes the contents of the Clipboard as a block PASTEBLOCK command 22 User Guide Do
346. inal entities lt N gt 5 Do one of the following e Press Enter to keep the original entities e Type Y then press Enter to delete the original entities e Choose Yes Delete entities in the context menu Mirroring entities about a plane 1 Do one of the following e Click the 3D Mirror tool button Alt on the Modify toolbar e Choose 3D Mirror in the Modify menu e Type mirror3d inthe command bar The command bar reads Select entities 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Define mirror plane by Entity Last View Zaxis XY YZ ZX lt 3points gt 3 Specify the first point of the mirror plane 4 Specify the second point of the mirror plane 5 Specify the third point of the mirror plane The command bar reads Delete the original entities lt N gt 362 User Guide 6 Do one of the following e Press Enter to keep the original entities e Type Y then press Enter to delete the original entities e Choose Yes Delete entities in the context menu Aligning Entities Command ALIGN The Align command lets you reposition a selection set with respect to an existing entity in the drawing The selection set is moved and rotated in a single action If necessary you can even scale the selection to fit in its new location The command can be used both in a 2D and 3D environment Aligning an entity in 2D oF Do one of the following e Click the Align tool button Eh on the M
347. indicating the image icons are displayed The selected image displays in the Preview sub window of the Drawing Explorer Bowmore Les Edit View Settings Help Drawings Images Images dwg Open Drawings Sheets Rx elS l e Dla 2 SE B B C Bricsys Reports Images dwa A lt E i gZ ayes Chartres concret ad Decago EscherS Murcutt PaperSizes Penrose reims_p its a ed 457 BricsCAD V14 Open the Tree View of the Images Explorer E Click the Tree View button in the Drawing Explorer toolbar The Tree View button is now pressed indicating the image tree is displayed The selected image displays in the Preview sub window of the Drawing Explorer Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Drawings X Images Images dwa Open Drawings Folders Sheets Ox 6 8 4 Dh 2 E col E AI C Bricsys Reports Images dwa a Current fF Layers JA Chartres_France Layer States ff ConcreteFactory ie Unetyoes A concrans J Multiline Styles JA Decagon_Motif 2 Multileader Styles Ag Text Styles Dimension Styles Table Styles i Coordinate Systems D Views feat External References PDF Underlays fly Page Setups Placing images in a drawing 1 Do one of the following e Launch the Image Explorer then click the New tool button C in the Drawing Explor
348. ines not yet supported filter selection previewing GL HIGHLIGHTEFFECT Specifies the highlight method O dashed Selection Highlight lines 1 use different color 2 use thickened Style line 3 use different color and thickened line color HIGHLIGHTEFFECT is 1 or 3 Subentity preview PREVIEWTOPDOWN Controls the order in which subentities of an order entity are previewed and selected O Subentities such as faces and edges highlight first 1 The top level entity e g the whole solid highlights first Repeatedly pressing the TAB key highlights all entities one by one User Preference Preview selection PreviewDelay Specifies how many milliseconds to wait before delay highlighting the sub entities under the cursor Grips settings If the Grips system variable is ON grips display on selected entities Grips settings sit under Display Viewing in the Drafting settings group of the Drawing settings category in the Settings dialog Grips can be used to manipulate entities see Grips Editing 348 User Guide El Grips Grips Turn on grips Grips in blocks _ Assigns grips to entities within the block Grip color 72 Selected grip color 240 Hover grip color E 150 Grip size 4 Grip object limit 100 Grips attraction Enable grips attraction Grips attraction distance 3 System Variable Grips o GRIPS GRIPS Toggles the display of grips on off o the display of grips on off Grips in GRIPBLOCK
349. ineterseeitrrntitere AOS To la nch the eClION Plane command iiis raina a E A A areas eas uae 258 AlIGN lt aSCCtION DIANE tOo ATIC nia AA A A 258 T cr ate a vertical section DIANE arreirar ianei a a a a a T a 258 TO create a horizontal Section plahe irii erri ii pentane eu AAEE ewe ieee EAE A 259 To create a vertical jogged section plane ssssssssssssssrsnnrssenrsnsrrnnnnsnenrrnsnennnnsnenrrnrnenne 260 To create a horizontal jogged section plane sssssssssssssssnsnsnsnsnsnsnensnnnensnennnenenenenenenennno 260 To create a orthographic section plane ssssssssssssssssrsnsrssrnrrnsrrunnnsnenrrnsnennnnenenrrnsnenne 261 To open the Drawing Explorer Section Planes dialog sssssssssnssrnrensnnnrsnsrrnrnrerenrrrerenes 262 To edit the properties Of a section plane s sssssssssssusssnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnenenennnnnnneneneneneneneneneno 262 To modify the size and position of a section plane sssesssssssrsnsrrnrnrenenrsrsrenrnrenenrrrerenen 263 USNO LVS S ECHUO aii a na E AA A T TAAA 264 To set the Live Section property of a section plane s sssssssssessssnnnssenrsnsnensnnenenrrnrnenee 264 To define the live section settings sssssssssssssssssnnsnsrrsnsrsnrnrsnsrrunnnsnenrrnsnennensenenrrnenenne 265 TO2SaV C d SECUO pastina nE Eaa ENA E tenes onal NA E E giana eat 266 To launch the SectionPlaneToBlock command sasssssssssnssrersrsnnnrsnrrrnrnnenrnrerrerrnrnrenrnrrrerrnns 266 TO ANSEL a SCCHONiraS a 2D
350. inetypes in layouts are drawn at the viewports scale Linetypes are normally generated from vertex to vertex Polylines of which the vertices are very close together might be rendered as a continuous line if the linetype pattern does not fit between two subsequent vertices The Polyline Generation PLINEGEN system variable addresses this problem when set to 1 or ON the linetype is drawn from one end of the polyline to the other end instead of from vertex to vertex 182 User Guide p T r The same polyline drawn with PLINEGEN on left and off right Setting the current linetype Do one of the following e On the BricsCAD Properties Bar select Linetype Make sure no entity is selected Choose a linetype in the drop down list Properties Bar _ ByLayer Layer 0 Bylayer Linetype scale m ByLay Line weight Camera Target Perspective Lens Length Field of view rl arre ins e On the Entity Properties toolbar click the down arrow next to the Linetype field then choose a linetype in the drop down list e Right click on the Linetype field in the Status Bar then choose a linetype in the context menu 183 BricsCAD V14 Adding a new linetype 1 Inthe Tools gt Drawing Explorer choose Linetype The Drawing Explorer Linetypes dialog displays Linetypes Plan_Level0 dwa x B fe 2 Beles Linetype Name Linetype Description Linetype Appearance 1 ByBlock 2
351. ing the paths defined by the SRCHPATH system variable are searched If the block is not found there either BricsCAD responds Could not find file lt blockname gt Redefining Blocks Commands BLOCK BLOCK and INSERT To redefine a block that was created in the current drawing you create a new block using the Same name If the block was inserted from a separate drawing reinsert that block When a block definition is redefined all instances of that block in the current drawing are updated automatically See also Editing blocks and external references To redefine an internal block definition Type block in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Name for new block or to list existing blocks Type the name of the block in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads The block lt name gt already exists Do you want to redefine it lt N gt A prompt menu displays BLOCK YesRedefine block No Do not redefine Cancel To redefine the block definition do one of the following e Type Y then press Enter e Choose Yes Redefine block in the prompt menu The command bar reads Insertion point for new block 425 BricsCAD V14 Specify the insertion point of the new block The command bar reads Select entities for block Select the entities for the new block Right click to create the block The selected entities are removed from the drawing All existing instances of t
352. ing Entities Commands MIRROR and MIRROR3D The Mirror command creates a mirror image of a selection set The selection is mirrored about a mirror line which you define by specifying two points You can choose to either delete or retain the original entities The Mirror3d commands creates a mirror image of selected entities in three dimensional Space In this case the selection is mirrored about a mirror plan which can be defined by either specifying three points selecting an existing two dimensional planar entity aligning the plane parallel to the xy yz or xz plane of the current UCS or aligning the plane with the current view You can choose to either delete or retain the original entities The Copy option of the Grips Editing commands allows to create multiple copies of the entities being stretched moved rotated mirrored or scaled NOTE Whether text is mirrored or not by the Mirror command is controlled by the Mirror Text MIRRTEXT system variable Mirroring entities about a line 1 Do one of the following e Click the Mirror tool button lh on the Modify toolbar e Choose Mirror in the Modify menu e Type mirror or MI in the command bar The command bar reads Select entities to mirror 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Start of mirror line 3 Specify the start point of the mirror line 4 Specify the endpoint of the mirror line The command bar reads Delete the orig
353. ing displays a p Furniture dwg 6 Click the Blocks icon The blocks in the drawing display in the Details pane If necessary click the Icon View button 222 in the Details toolbar to see thumbnail images of the blocks 7 option Edit the insert options e Choose Options in the Settings menu or select a block then right click and choose Options in the context menu e Set the insert options in the Drawing Explorer Options dialog box Drawing Explorer Options Insert Block When inserting blocks from the Explorer a a Align Fixed Scale WlFixed Rotation 0 The available options are e Align If checked launches the InsertAligned command to insert the block When the Align option is checked the Fixed Scale and Fixed Rotation options are not available 422 9 User Guide e Fixed Scale If checked allows to insert the block at a fixed scale e Fixed Rotation If checked allows to insert the block at a fixed rotation To insert a block do one of the following e Click the Insert Block button 64 on the Details toolbar e When in Icon View double click the thumbnail image of the block e When in Detail view double click the number in front of the block name The Drawing Explorer dialog closes temporarily to let you insert the block in the drawing The command bar reads Multiple blocks lt Insertion point for block gt A prompt menu displays INSERT Follow the instruction
354. ing lines to the annotation text then press Enter or right click to create the leader and annotation e Press Enter or right click to see the annotation text options The command bar reads Dimension text options Block Copy None Tolerance lt Mtext gt A prompt menu displays DIMLEADER e Press the Esc key to abort the Leader tool To create a leader only 1 Do one of the following e Click the Leader tool button on on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Leader in the Dimensions menu e Type dimleader in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Start of leader 2 Specify the position of the arrowhead The command bar reads Next point 3 Specify the endpoint of the first leader segment The command bar reads To point Format Undo lt Annotation gt 299 BricsCAD V14 4 Add more segments to the leader then press Enter or right click to stop adding segments The command bar reads First line of annotation text lt options gt 5 Press Enter then choose None in the prompt menu or type N Editing dimensions Commands DIMEDIT Changes the wording and angle of dimension text changes the angle of extension lines DIMTEDIT Changes the position of dimension text Dimension entities can be edited in the following ways use grips to edit dimensions edit the dimension text rotate dimension text reposition the dimension text restore the text position make the extension lines oblique Using
355. ing to Isometric Snap and then set the Snap Isometric Pair setting to Left Top or Right the snap intervals grid and crosshairs align with the selected plane The grid is always shown as isometric and uses y coordinates to calculate the grid Spacing If the Orthogonal Mode is active the movement of the crosshairs is constrained to the current isometric plane Press the F5 function key to toggle the Snap Isometric Pair setting 1 Display the Snap Grid settings in the Settings dialog El Coordinate input Orthogonal mode Orthogonal mode Tablet mode 0 Command selection mode El Snap Grid Grid mode Grid on Grid unit 0 5 0 5 Grid major 5 Grid display Ox0003 3 Grid style Ox0000 0 Grid axis color E 251 Grid major color i 252 Grid minor color E 253 Grid XYZ tint Ox0001 1 Snap angle 0 0000 Snap base 0 0 0 0 snap isometric pair pon for current viewpa Snap style 1 Isometric snap Snap type 0 Grid snap Snap unit 0 5 0 5 Entity snap coordinates 2 Keyboard entry overrides entity snap settings except in sa Ignore entity snap elevation Replace 7 value with current elevation Polar distance 0 0 2 Turn on the Orthogonal Mode 3 Use the SNAP command to set the Snap Style setting to Isometric Snap 102 User Guide 4 Press the F5 function key to set the appropriate drawing plane Top Left or Right Gs Draw isometric Learn how to draw an isometric perspective using Polar Tracking and Entity Sn
356. int When a tracking line in the appropriate direction displays type the distance from the temporary tracking point Specify the endpoint of the line Using the TK option 112 ls Launch a draw command e g Line The command bar reads ENTER to use last point Follow lt Start of line gt Type TK in the command bar then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Specify first temporary tracking point Use an Entity Snap to pick a point on existing geometry A small red cross indicates the temporary tracking point The command bar reads Specify next temporary tracking point press ENTER to end Move the cursor in the desired direction Depending on the value of the POLARANG and POLARADDANG system variables tracking lines display from the first temporary tracking point When a tracking line in the appropriate direction displays type the distance from the temporary tracking point A small red cross indicates the second temporary tracking point The command bar reads Specify next temporary tracking point press ENTER to end Do one of the following e Right click or press Enter to accept the second tracking point as the start point of the line e Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the desired point is specified then right click or press Enter to accept the point Specify the endpoint of the line User Guide Entity Snap Tracking Entity Snap Tracking assists you to draw entities with respect to other entit
357. int multiple views of your drawing at different scales 151 BricsCAD V14 Switching between model space and paper space e To switch between Model Space and Paper Space Layouts use the Model and Layout tabs at the bottom of the drawing window e When working in a layout use the MSPACE and PSPACE commands to toggle between paper space and model space Using the model and layout tabs 1 option To open model space click the Model tab 1 at the bottom of the drawing window 2 option To open a paper space layout click the corresponding Layout tab 2 at the bottom of the drawing window 4 gt pI MODEL J DETAILS A PLANT PLAN2 A TITLE A TEST 1 2 NOTE A drawing contains at least one layout which is named Layout1 by default Toggle between model space and paper space in a layout Commands MSPACE and PSPACE 1 option When in model space Model Space with floating viewports do one of the following to switch to paper space e Type either pspace or ps then press Enter e Double click outside a viewport 2 option When in paper space do one of the following to switch to model space Model Space with floating viewports e Type either mspace or ms then press Enter e Double click inside a viewport NOTE MSPACE and PSPACE commands are available when working in a layout only 152 User Guide Model Space Viewports Command VPORTS The display in model space Model Space with tiled v
358. int of displacement 8 Specify the base point The selection stretches dynamically The command bar reads Second point of displacement 9 Do one of the following to specify the second displacement point e Click the displacement point e Use Direct Distance Entry type the displacement distance then press Enter The distance is measured in the cursor direction Use ORTHO or POLAR TRACKING to constrain the movement of the cross hairs The selection is stretched 383 BricsCAD V14 NOTES To add or remove entities from the selection set in steps 5 and 6 you can use any selection method picking window inside or crossing window Stretching entities using grips NOTES Click the entity you want to stretch The entity grips display Do one of the following e Click a grip to activate it The grip is attached to the drawing cursor e Press and hold the Shift key to select multiple grips then release the Shift key and move one of the selected grips Click to relocate the grip The grip is released from the drawing cursor Use Ortho Mode Polar Tracking or Snap Tracking to constrain the movement of the drawing cursor If you select two or more entities with coinciding grips the shared grips move simultaneously Scaling Entities Command SCALE The Scale command resizes a selection set in relation to a base point You can specify the scale factor by selecting a base point and a length or by typing an explicit sca
359. int the tablet overlay on a A3 paper size e overlay cm dwg a DWG in which the overlay png is attached as an image The drawing contains two layouts to print the overlay using decimal units e overlay inch dwg a DWG in which the overlay png is attached as an image The drawing contains two layouts to print the overlay using imperial units e tablet cul a partial cui file to be used with a tablet e tablet acadLike cui an AutoCAD like partial cui file to be used with a tablet Please make sure the overlay png image file is extracted to the same folder as the DWG s User Guide To load the overlay CUI file 1 Extract the overlay CUI files to the Support folder of the roamable root folder see BricsCAD User Files E g C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data Bricsys BricsCAD V en_US Support on Windows XP C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Bricsys BricsCAD V en_US Support on Windows Vista and Windows 7 2 Load Tabl et cui as a partial CUI see To load a partial CUI file The next time you start BricsCAD Tab et cu will be loaded automatically NOTE It might be necessary to repeat the above procedure after upgrading BricsCAD To switch the tablet ON OFF Do one of the following e Click the TABLET field in the Status Bar e Press the F4 function key to toggle the tablet mode e Choose Tablet On or Tablet Off in the Settings menu e Type tablet in the command bar press Enter then t
360. ion Change the table direction option Modify the width and or height of the table option Modify the vertical and or horizontal cell margins Press the Esc key to stop editing the table Ye a 332 User Guide Editing a cell in the Properties bar 1 Click the cell The properties of the cell display in the Properties bar Properties Bar ME j General Color _ ByLayer g ByLayer 1 ByColor ByLayer El 3D Visualization Material El Ta ble Cell io Hi Text rotation 3 ci om B E S o i i Vertical cell margin 2 Horizontal cell margin 2 El Geometry Position 1355 905 0 1355 Oo S T a 2 option Modify the width and or height of the cell The width and height of the column and or row of the cell are changed 3 option Modify the text rotation The options are 0 90 180 and 270 4 option Edit the cell content 5 option Choose a different text alignment option MiddleCenter ray Rid Bottom 333 BricsCAD V14 To edit the table content 1 Do one of the following e Double click the cell you want to edit e Type tabledit in the command bar then press Enter and click the cell you want to edit The Text Formatting toolbar displays above the selected cell see Create multiline text 2 Edit the text in the cell option Press Alt Enter to create a second line in the same cell 3 To edit another cell e Press the TAB key to go to t
361. isplay DIMTOL Adds tolerances to dimension text If DIMTOL is On DIMLIM is switched Off Limits display DIMLIM Sets the default text to dimension limits If DIMLIM is On DIMTOL is switched Off leading zeros trailing zeros Tolerance DIMTDEC Sets the precision for dimension tolerances precision Tolerance limit DIMTM Sets the lower limit for dimension tolerances lower Tolerance limit DIMTP Sets the upper limit for dimension tolerances upper Tolerance text DIMTFAC Sets the text height for the tolerance settings with respect to height the dimension text height E g if set to 0 5 the tolerance text height is half the height of the dimension text Tolerance pos DIMTOLJ Determines the vertical position for dimension tolerances with vert respect to the dimension text 289 BricsCAD V14 Tolerance DIMTZIN Suppresses leading zeros Suppress leading zeros Tolerance DIMTZIN Suppresses trailing zeros Suppress trailing aaa zeros feet inches Alt tolerance DIMALTTD Sets the precision for dimension tolerances in alternate units precision ee Alt tolerance DIMALTTZ Suppresses leading zeros Suppress leading zeros Alt tolerance DIMALTTZ Suppresses trailing zeros Suppress trailing hana zeros Alt tolerance DIMALTTZ Suppresses zero feet values in imperial units aa a Alt tolerance DIMALTTZ Suppresses zero inch values in imperial units Suppress zero inches Dimension Styles explorer Command DIMSTYL
362. isplay of the drawing views 174 User Guide Drawing Entities In a drawing you can create a variety of different entity types Drawing entities can be very simple such as lines circles arcs points and rays or complex such as polylines splines and planes Apart from 2D entities you can also create 3D surface entities or 3D solids in BricsCAD To further complete your drawing BricsCAD provides a series of tools to add text hatching and dimensions To create an entity you can choose between selecting the command in the Draw menu using the tools on the Draw Draw 3D and Solids toolbars or typing the command in the command bar When you use a tool or a drawing command the program prompts you to enter coordinate points such as endpoints or insertion points You can enter the points or distances either using a mouse or by typing coordinate values in the command bar As you draw BricsCAD also displays a context sensitive prompt menu with appropriate additional options for the type of entity you are drawing New entities are created on the current layer using the current color linetype and lineweight Overview The following settings control the display and or creation of entities Command Description or System Variable Fill mode FILL Specifies whether multilines traces solids hatches including solid fill and wide polylines are filled in Current Entity Color COLOR Sets the color of new entities Whip Arcs WHIPARC
363. itch to camera view Yes lt No gt Choose Yes to display the camera view This option concludes the Camera command Choose Drawing Explorer gt Views in the Too s menu to edit a camera view User Guide To toggle the perspective property of view 1 Do one of the following e Click the Perspective tool button B on the View toolbar e Choose Perspective in the View menu e Type perspective in the command bar The command bar reads New current value for PERSPECTIVE Off or On lt On gt A prompt menu displays 2 Do one of the following e Type off or on in the command bar then press Enter e Choose Off or On in the prompt menu NOTE In named views you can set the Perspective property in the Drawing Explorer Views dialog Model space and paper space Understanding paper space and model space When you start a drawing session your initial working area is called Model Space Model Space is an area in which you create two dimensional and three dimensional entities based on either the World Coordinate System WCS or a user coordinate system UCS You view and work in model space while using the Model tab In general model space consists of a single view that fills the screen If needed you can create additional views called viewports which can show different views of your drawing or 3D model All viewports are displayed in a tiled manner You can work in only one of these viewports at a time but all viewports are updat
364. ities Command JOIN The Join command joins lines LW polylines 2D polylines 3D polylines circular arcs elliptical arcs splines and helixes at their common endpoints The type of the resulting entity depends on the types of the input entities and on their coplanarity To join colinear lines When you join colinear lines the farthest endpoints remain at their existing locations BricsCAD draws a new line between these points 1 Do one of the following e Click the Join tool button CI on the Modify toolbar e Choose Join in the Modify menu e Type join in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select source entity or multiple entities to join at once 386 User Guide 2 Select the lines The command bar reads Select entities to join 3 Right click or press Enter The lines are joined To join two arcs Coplanar arcs sharing midpoint and radius are joined counterclockwise therefore the result depends on the selecting order 4 Do one of the following e Click the Join tool button E on the Modify toolbar e Choose Join in the Modify menu e Type join in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select source entity or multiple entities to join at once 5 Select the first arc The command bar reads Select entities to join 6 Select the second arc and press Enter The command bar reads 2 entities joined into 1 arc Joining two arcs start situation left and
365. ity Grouping dialog window opens Select the group you want to modify option Double click in the Name field to edit the group name option Double click in the Description field to edit the group description option Click in the Selectable column to toggle the Selectable option on off option Click the Add entities to group button to add new entities to the group The Entity Grouping dialog temporarily closes to let you select the new group entities option Click the Remove entities from group button to remove entities from the group The Entity Grouping dialog temporarily closes to let you select the entities Click the OK button to close the Entity Grouping dialog To ungroup entities E NOTE 448 Do one of the following e Click the Group tool button 1 on the Tools toolbar e Choose Group in the Tools menu e Type group in the command bar then press Enter The Entity Grouping dialog window opens Select the group or groups you want to delete Click the Un group selected groups button The selected groups are removed When you ungroup entities the entities remain in the drawing but the group is deleted from the drawing User Guide To change the order of entities 1 Do one of the following e Click the Group tool button G1 on the Tools toolbar e Choose Group in the Tools menu e Type group in the command bar then press Enter The Entity Grouping dialog window opens 2 Click the Re Order en
366. jDIMBLKI Defines the arrow type for the arrow of the first dimension DIMBLK1 pA Dim line 1 TrON fai DIMBLK2 Defines the arrow type for the arrow of the second dimension line Dim line 2 If DIMBLK2 equals DIMBLkK2 it will be modified automatically mar Ses DIMBLK1 has changed Sets the color of the dimension line Dim line ext DIMDLE Defines the extension of the dimension line beyond the extension lines when arrowheads are set to oblique or architectural ticks Dim baseline DIMDLI Sets the spacing of the dimension line for stacked baseline spacing dimensions Dim line 1 DIMSD1 Controls the display of the first half of the dimension line from the first extension line to the origin point of the dimension text Dim line 2 DIMSD2 Controls the display of the second half of the dimension line from the origin of the dimension text to the second extension line Ext Ext line color color DIMCLRE DIMCLRE Sets the color of the extension lines Ext line LW DIMLWE Sets the line weight of the extension lines 285 BricsCAD V14 c Alias e DIMEXE Defines the extension of the extension lines beyond the dimension line Ext line offset DIMEXO Defines the offset of the extension lines from the dimension Origin points Ext line 1 DIMSE1 Controls the display of the first extension line Ext line 2 DIMSE2 Controls the display of the second extension line Ext line type 1 DIMLTEX1 Sets the linetype for the first extension line Ext lin
367. ject Click the Select Entity button try on the Field dialog box The Field dialog box closes temporarily The command bar reads Select Entity 4 Click the entity you want to display a property of The Field dialog box displays again 5 Select the entity property in the Property list Field Field names Date amp Time _ HyperlinkBase Keywords LastSavedBy RevisionNumber Field expression Object type Polyline Architectural Engineering Fractional Sdentific Convert 0 0001 Prefix Suffix Decimals Comma Thousands None Suppress 0 Leading 0 feet E Trailing C 0 inches lt lt 4AcObjProp 16 2 Object lt _Objld 368524304 gt Area f lu ct8 0 0001 psL p m2 ods44 gt 4 6 Set the display layout e Format choose a unit format e Precision select a precision in the list button 325 BricsCAD V14 e Convert this option allows to recalculate the field value e Choose a formula in the list e g f where f is the factor you type in the Convert field and is the field value e Type a factor in the Convert field e g 0 0001 to express the area of a polyline in Square meters in a cm drawing e Prefix type a text string e Suffix type a text string e Decimals select a decimal separator character e Thousands select a thousands separator character e Suppress 0 allows to suppress leading and or trailing zeros 7 Click the OK button 8
368. l Engineering Architectural Fractional button Choose any one of the angular units of measurement listed below as the default for your drawing Angle of measurement Degrees Minutes Sec Grads Radians E Surveyor s units Select the Unit of measurement and the display Precision then click the Next Select the Angle of measurement and the display Precision then click the Next 0 00 Choose between Co or Dependent plot styles CTB or Named plot styles STB then click the Next button Do you want to use Color Tables CTB or Style Tables STB to set up plotting configurations Color Tables assign plot settings based on the color of entities while Style Tables offer a more advanced and complex way to control plotting configurations Plot Style 8 Select the default Co or and Linetype Choose how you want to create entities in your new drawing Once you are working in the drawing you will be able to change any of these as needed Entity Color ByLayer User Guide 9 Define the Grid Snap UCS icon and Marker Blips settings E Grid On UCS icon L Snap On Marker Blips 10 Click the Finish button to create the drawing 11 option Choose Save As in the File menu to save the drawing as a template in the Templates subfolder of the Local root folder Drawing Explorer Commands EXPLORER LAYER LAYERSTATE LINETYPE MLSTYLE MLEADERSTYLE
369. le e On the Sheet Metal toolbar Sheet Metal A REMEE e Inthe Sheet Metal menu kE Create Base Flange Create Edge Flange Rotate Flange fo RE Unfold Body 239 BricsCAD V14 e In the Quad cursor menu depending on your selection Direct Modeling 3D Constraints Sheet Metal E Custom Sheet Modeling Operations Creating the Base Flange Start to design your sheet metal part with creating its base flange To create a base flange select a closed planar profile and call SmFlangeBase command Do one of the following e Click the Create Base Flange tool button SY on the Sheet Metal toolbar e Choose Create Base Flange in the Sheet Metal menu e Choose Create Base Flange in the Sheet Metal group of the Quad cursor menu OR Direct Modeling Sheet Metal Custom 2D Editing Dimensions 2D Constraints 240 User Guide A base flange is a body created by extruding the selected profile to a height equal to the default value of the Thickness property of the sheet metal part To change the thickness of your sheet metal part type the appropriate value in the Thickness field in the Mechanical Browser Creating Edge Flanges You can add an additional flange to your sheet metal part by pulling a linear edge of an existing flange Select an edge and select the SmEdgeFlange command in the Sheet Metal section of the Quad cursor menu Move your mouse pointer to define the desired length of t
370. le factor in the command bar The scale factor can also be defined with respect to a base scale factor E g when the base scale factor is 2 and the new scale is 3 the new size is 3 2 of the original The base scale and the new scale can also be defined graphically in the drawing The Copy option of the Grips Editing commands allows to create multiple copies of the entities being stretched moved rotated mirrored or scaled To scale a selection set 1 384 Do one of the following e Click the Scale tool button A X on the Modify toolbar e Choose Scale in the Modify menu e Type scale or SC in the command bar The command bar reads Select entities to scale Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Base point Specify the base point for the scaling The selection set scales dynamically The command bar reads Base scale lt Scale Factor gt Type the scale factor in the command bar and press Enter The selection set is scaled User Guide The length of the vector between the base point and the current cursor position is used as the dynamic scale factor in step 3 Scaling an entity using a base scale Select the entity Do one of the following e Click the Scale tool button A h on the Modify toolbar e Choose Scale in the Modify menu e Type scale or SC in the command bar The command bar reads Base point Specify the base point 1 The command bar reads Base Scale lt Scale
371. le has been modified Save changes to the following file C Users Louis 4ppD ata Aoamings8ricsyesBricscadhy 8 en_US plotcor lita Cancel option Adjust the PC3 file name The default name is lt Se ected Printer gt pc3 Click the OK button on the Changes to a Printer Configuration File dialog The PC3 file is created If you want to create multiple plotter configurations for the same printer you must adjust the default name in step 7 If you accept the default name the existing plotter configuration will be overwritten To edit a plotter configuration NOTE Do one of the following e Choose Page Setup in the File menu e Type pagesetup in the command bar then press Enter Select a plotter configuration PC3 in the Printer Plotter configuration list Click the Edit Plotter Configuration button Ei on the Print or Page Setup dialogs The Plotter configuration editor dialog opens Proceed in the Create a plotter configuration procedure starting from step 3 If you select a system printer in step 2 a new plotter configuration is created for the selected printer When you click the Edit Plotter Configuration button Ei in step 3 the Properties dialog of the selected printer opens first After clicking the OK button on the Properties dialog the Plotter configuration editor dialog opens You can then complete the Create a plotter configuration procedure To assign a plotter configuration Choose Model or
372. lect line arc or circle gt Select the arc The angular dimension displays dynamically The command bar reads Angle Text lt Location of dimension arc gt Do one of the following e Position the dimension arc e Type A and press Enter to define the angle of the dimension text then position the dimension arc e Type 7 and press Enter to modify the dimension text then position the dimension arc To create an angular dimension defined by a vertex and two endpoints 296 L Do one of the following e Click the Angular tool button h on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Angular in the Dimensions menu e Type dimangular in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Press Enter to specify angle lt select line arc or circle gt Right click or press Enter The command bar reads Vertex of angle Specify the vertex of the angle The command bar reads first side of angle Specify the endpoint of the first side of the angle The command bar reads Other side of angle Specify the endpoint of the second side of the angle The angular dimension displays dynamically The command bar reads Angle Text lt Location of dimension arc gt User Guide 6 Do one of the following Position the dimension arc Type A and press Enter to define the angle of the dimension text then position the dimension arc Type T and press Enter to modify the dimension text then position the dimension arc Creating diame
373. lected lineweight overrides the entity s lineweight in the plot output Lineweight Displays a list of several end styles for the lines By default the option Use Object End Style is selected If you select a line end style the object s line end style will be overridden in the plot output Displays a list of several join styles for the lines By default the option Use Object Join Style is selected If you select a line join style the object s line join style will be overridden in the plot output Line end style Line join style Displays a list of several fill styles By default the option Use Object Fill Style is selected If you select a fill style the object s fill style will be overridden in the plot output Fill style NOTE Objects which are created in true color are always plotted using their own object properties color lineweight The Lineweights tab The Lineweights tab lists the available lineweights Lineweights with a tick are used in the Lineweight field on the Form View tab To edit a lineweight select the lineweight in the list then click the Edit button 479 BricsCAD V14 Plot Style Table Editor MyPens ctb Lineweights Lineweights Units 0 0000 Millimeters mm oii Inches in 0 0900 0 1000 EF 0 1300 0 1500 0 1800 0 2000 0 2500 0 3000 0 5500 0 4000 0 4500 0 5000 0 5300 0 6000 0 6500 0 7000 0 8000 0 3000 w 1 0000 1 0600 1 2000 S
374. left left of the selection Insert Inserts an empty column at the right of the selection 330 User Guide Delete Deletes the column s of the column selection Merges the selected cells Unmerge Splits previously merged cells Border Sets the border style of the style selection not implemented yet Text Sets the text alignment of the alignment selection Lock Locks Unlocks the selection Unlock Set cell Sets the cell format of the format selection not implemented yet Set cell Sets the style of the selected cells style Title Header or Data 7 ByEntity Set cell Sets the background color of the background selection 6 option Repeat steps 3 and 4 to continue editing the table 7 option Double click a cell to edit the cell text 8 option Do one of the following e Click another cell e Press and hold the left mouse button then drag the cursor to select multiple cells 9 Click outside the table to close the Table toolbar 331 BricsCAD V14 Editing a table in the Properties bar 1 Click one of the grid lines The properties of the table display in the Properties bar Properties Bar ME Ei General 0 Layer ByColor Lineweight ByLayer i j SD Visualization Material ByLayer Table Style Standard Rows 5 Columns 5 Down 45 Height 51 Ej Geometry Position 1355 905 0 1355 3 i i i O S T a option Apply a different Table style opt
375. lip in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select viewport to clip 2 Select the viewport The command bar reads Polygonal lt Select clipping object gt A prompt menu displays VPCLIP 3 Do one of the following e Select the clipping object e Choose Polygonal in the prompt menu or type P then press Enter You are prompted to draw a polyline The viewport is clipped NOTE e Only closed polylines and circles are accepted as clipping boundaries e If you want elliptical viewports use the polyline representation to create the ellipses To remove the clipping boundary of a viewport Command VPCLIP 1 Type vpclip in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select viewport to clip 161 BricsCAD V14 2 Select a clipped viewport The command bar reads Polygonal Delete lt Select clipping entity gt 3 Do one of the following e Type D then press Enter e Choose Delete in the prompt menu Defining viewport properties 1 Select the viewport The viewport properties display in the Properties Bar Properties Bar M j General Color E Blue Layer VIEWPORTS Linetype Continuous Linetype scale 2 54 Plot style ByColor Lineweight ByLayer Hyperlink Geometry E Center 12 73 11 43 0 00 12 73 11 43 0 00 17 93 Width 23 58 E On Yes Clipped No Display locked Yes Annotation scale 1 1 Standard scale 1 100 Custom scale 0 01 UCS per viewpor No
376. lue of a radial constraint other faces that share the same diameter are recognized by BricsCAD and modified automatically to keep the radii synchronized Apart from the recognition of equal radii BricsCAD automatically recognizes other geometrical relations between surfaces of a solid and preserves them during direct modeling operations To define the design intent recognition click the buttons on the Design Intent toolbar A pressed button indicates the feature is selected An unpressed button indicates the feature is not active Design Intent e tangent surfaces planes cylinders and cones IF e coincident planes OF e parallel planes le e perpendicular planes Ce e cylinders perpendicular to planes Ae e coaxial surfaces cylinders and cones G e surfaces of equal radius cylinders and spheres EF e switch off on all The design intent options can also be set by editing the DMRECOGNIZE system variable in the Settings dialog Click the Options tool button SB on the 3D Constraints toolbar to set the Automatic 3D geometry constraints recognition The state of tool buttons on the Design Intent toolbar pressed or unpressed is adjusted accordingly 249 BricsCAD V14 El Automatic 3D geometry constraints recognition Ox0066 102 LI Switch off automatic 3D geometry constraints recognition Tangent surfaces YI coincident planes 0xo004 Parattet planes E Perpendicular planes C cyinders perpendicula
377. lways contains 255 styles 1 for each color They are tied to entity color You cannot add nor delete a plot style You cannot rename a plot style Named plot style table Contains one or more plot styles You can add or remove plot styles except for the Normal style which cannot be deleted Plot styles can be renamed except for the Normal style which cannot be renamed Displays a description for the selected plot style Specifies the plotted color for an entity The default setting for plot style color is Use Object Color If you assign a plot style color the color overrides the entity s color in the plot output Choose Other to select one of 255 colors from the Select Color dialog box Choose True color to select a color from the Color dialog box If the plot device does not support the color you have specified the nearest available color will be used When you have a monochrome device black will be used Depending on the capabilities of your plotter dithering approximates the colors with dot patterns When this option is not active the colors are 478 User Guide mapped to the nearest color resulting in a smaller range of colors when plotting Dithering is available only whether you select the object s color or assign a plot style color By default this option is active Setting it to Off has no effect in BricsCAD Grayscale Depending on the capabilities of your plotter converts the colors to
378. ly The Shade Plot mode of a paper space viewport is defined in the Shade Plot property of the viewport To define the plot stamp 1 Click the Edit plot stamp button Ei The Plot stamp dialog opens Plot Stamp Header and footer Header Footer Font style and size Font Arial Size 10 0000 2 In the Header field do one of the following e Type the header text e Click the down arrow button then choose a variable in the drop down list e Type one or more variable names e Leave the field empty 3 In the Footer field do one of the following e Type the footer text e Click the down arrow button then choose a variable in the drop down list e Type one or more variable names e Leave the field empty 469 BricsCAD V14 4 Select a font in the Font list button 5 Enter a value in the Font Size field 6 Set the unit type to Mi limeters or Inches 7 Click the OK button to confirm The plot stamp settings are saved to a series of user preferences in the current user profile which can be edited in the Settings dialog under Program Options Plot and Publish Plot Stamp O Plot stamp Header Footer Font Style Arial Font Size 10 Units 1 Milimeters Variables Name Description O Z O Z Name Adds the name of the current user as definied in the User Name field of the License Information Company Adds company name of the current user as definied in the Company field of the License Information Adds t
379. m in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads gt gt ENTER Right click or Esc to complete Press and hold the left mouse button Move the mouse forward to zoom in Move the mouse backward to zoom out To abort the Real Time Zoom command do one of the following e Right click e On the keyboard press Enter space bar or Esc Dynamic zooming if Do one of the following e Choose zoom in the View menu e Type zoom in the command bar e Type Z in the command bar A prompt menu displays The command bar reads In Out All Center Dynamic Extents Left Previous Right Window lt Scale nX nXP gt Do one of the following e Choose Dynamic in the prompt menu e Type D then press Enter A view extents or view limits if larger is executed first A view box displays The original size of the view box matches the size of the previous view a _ A dashed rectangle indicates the area of the previous view option To resize the view box e Click to switch to resize mode A right pointing arrow indicates you are in resize mode e Move the mouse to adjust the size e Click to leave resize mode Move the view box to the area you want to enlarge then right click The drawing is zoomed in on the selected area Repeat steps 1 through 4 to zoom in on another part of the drawing 129 BricsCAD V14 View manipulation using the mouse and keyboard In BricsCAD you can navigate through a 3D model using
380. mage Size slider to adjust the image size Select either Icon with text or Icon only Choose either Current Palette or All Palettes from the Apply to list button Click the OK button to confirm a a a To add a new tool palette 1 Move the cursor to the icon area of the Tool Palettes Bar then right click A context menu displays View Options Paste Update Palette New Palette Delete Palette Rename Palette Customize Palettes Add Tool 2 Choose New Palette in the context menu A new tab is added 3 Type aname for the new palette in the Name field 48 User Guide To import a tool palette 1 Move the cursor to the icon area of the Too Palettes Bar then right click View Options Paste Update Palette New Palette Delete Palette Rename Palette Customize Palettes Add Tool 2 Choose Customize Palettes in the context menu The Customize dialog box displays Customize eee So Currrent Palette Group 3 Inthe Palettes pane on the Customize dialog box right click and choose Import in the context menu 4 Onthe Import Palette dialog select a folder then select a palette file btc or xtp 5 Click the Open button or double click to import the palette The palette is added in the Palettes list 6 Click the Close button to close the Customize dialog box To rename a tool palette 1 Right click tool palette tab and choose Rename Palette in the context menu
381. mand group of the Quad cursor menu to modify the radius of the hole 255 BricsCAD V14 Y S AA AK au 9 option Use the dmDistance3d command to apply distance constraints between the side faces of the solids and the center of the cylindrical surface of the hole to control the position of the hole 10 option Use the dmRadius3d command to control the radius of the hole Deleting holes To delete a hole you must delete all internal faces and or surfaces of the hole To delete a circular hole 1 Hover over the cylindrical surface of the hole then click to select the face 2 Choose Delete in the Direct Modeling command group of the Quad cursor menu _ 3c Delete on py Deletes 3D solid faces or whole entity a SS a 256 User Guide To delete a rectangular hole 3 Hover over one of the visible internal faces of the hole The face highlights 4 Click to select the face 5 Move the cursor to the next internal face of the hole Repeatedly press the TAB key until the face highlights then click to select the face 6 Repeat the previous steps until all internal faces of the hole are selected 7 Choose Delete in the Direct Modeling command group of the Quad cursor menu 257 BricsCAD V14 Working with sections Commands SECTION SECTIONPLANE LIVESECTION SECTIONPLANESETTINGS SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK The Section command creates section planes of 3D solids the results a
382. menu Exit are Pan gt foom i Constrained Sphere gt Sphere 4 To abort the Real Time Z command do one of the following e Right click e Press Enter space bar or Esc Using Preset Viewpoints 1 Do one of the following e Click the Set Viewpoint tool button on the View toolbar e Choose Set Viewpoint in the View menu e Type ddvpoint in the command bar then press Enter The Preset Viewpoint dialog opens 2 Click the Angle Precision button 4527 to choose a different display mode for the Set Viewpoint dialog Then choose either 45 15 or 5 134 User Guide Set Viewpoint 270 00 Vertical 45 display mode In 15 or 5 mode click in the inner area of the Horizontal and Vertical fields to choose a 45 display mode viewpoint Click in the outer area of the Horizontal and Vertical fields to choose another angle 3 To set the Vertical view angle do one of the following e Skip this step to accept the default vertical view directions o Horizontal for East North West and South o Downwards for the other directions If both the down and left arrow show in the Vertical field the default vertical view directions are active e Select a 45 mode angle in the inner area then click to confirm your choice A single arrow indicates the selected vertical view direction e Ifin 15 or 5 mode in select a view direction in the outer area then click to confirm your choice The selected
383. menu displays 2 Specify the start point of the arc The command bar reads Angle Center Direction End Radius lt Second point gt The prompt menu changes ARC Center Direction 3 Specify the second point of the arc The command bar reads End point 4 Specify the end point of the arc Editing an arc 1 Select the arc The properties of the arc display in the Properties bar 189 BricsCAD V14 El Geometry El Start point 38 5381 191 1854 0 X 38 5381 Y 191 1854 Z 0 E Center 3 7399 153 1902 0 x 3 7399 Y 153 1902 F 0 El End point 47 553 158 0457 0 x 47 553 Y 158 0457 Fa 0 Radius 51 5223 Start angle 4 End angle 175 Total angle 127 Arc length 114 2725 Area 1884 86 76 E Normal 0 0 1 x g Y 0 a 1 2 Type anew value in the Center Radius Start angle or End angle then press Enter 3 Press the Esc key to stop editing the arc Circles Command CIRCLE The default method for drawing a circle is to specify a center point and radius Other methods to draw circles can be found in the Circle submenu of the Draw menu and in the Circles toolbar General procedure to draw a circle 1 Do one of the following e Click the Circle tool button CH on the Draw toolbar e Type circle in the command bar then press Enter e Type C in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads 2Point 3Point RadTanTan Arc Multiple lt Center of circle gt A prompt menu displays 190 User Gu
384. mmon to all lights e Name a user defined name for the light e Type defines the type of light spot point web or distant e On Off specifies whether the light is turned on or off e Shadows specifies whether the light casts shadows or not Turning shadows off to increases performance e Intensity factor multiplies the Lamp Intensity property the result is the Resulting Intensity e Filter color defines the color of the light e Plot glyph if on the light glyphs are plotted Spotlight hotspot and falloff properties When a Surface is illuminated by a spotlight there is an area of maximum illumination hotspot that is surrounded by an area of lesser intensity falloff e Hotspot angle angle of the central light cone defines the hotspot e Falloff angle angle of the full light cone Hotspot angle 55 Falloff angle 60 Hotspot angle 30 Falloff angle 60 The difference between the hotspot angle and the falloff angle defines the area of lesser light intensity If the falloff angle and the hotspot angle are almost equal the edge of light cone is rather Sharp left The greater the difference between both angles the softer the edge of the light cone right 520 User Guide Photometric properties not yet implemented e Lamp intensity Defines the brightness of the light The lamp intensity is expressed in candela cd which is the SI base unit of luminous intensity the power emitted by a light sourc
385. n 222 in the Drawing Explorer toolbar The Icon View button is now pressed indicating the block icons are displayed A preview of the selected block displays in the Preview sub window of the Drawing Explorer Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Drawings Blocks Ship dwa Open Drawings F x ih amp E of ig ey g B C BricsCAD Training Bricscad Trair ne s hH ber Layers is 5 Layer States pty Linetypes ma Multiline Styles 5 D Multileader Styles Ay Text Styles ow Dimension Styles 3 _ Table Styles ee Coordinate Systems sg Visual Styles on Lights EHE Materials RenderPresets fy Blocks al External References Images PDF Underlays zo Dependencies Page Setups Section Planes cranelOOOO p crame23000_p crane29000_p alee DB 11 00 087 drarrangeme oa P am a dr_bottomval dr_bottomwal drdraghead_ dr_gatewalwel dr_gatevalvel dr_gatewalwel 428 User Guide To rename a block 1 Open the Blocks Explorer dialog 2 Select the block then click the Block Name field 3 Type a new name in the Block Name field and press Enter Exploding Blocks Command EXPLODE If the Exp odable property of a block is set you can explode an inserted block to its original component entities Exploding a block affects that single instance of the block only The original block definition remains in the drawing and you can still insert additional copies of the
386. n BricsCAD you can create up to 255 layouts in a single drawing Each layout represents a sheet of paper For each layout you can specify the print area print scale lineweight scale pen mappings and add viewports dimensions a title block and other geometry specific to the layout The entities you add to a layout in paper space do not appear in model space Each layout requires at least one layout viewport If the CREATEVIEWPORTS system variable is ON a viewport is added automatically in a new layout If this variable is OFF newly created viewports are empty To add new layouts you can either define them yourself or your can import layouts from another drawing template file dwt drawing file dwg or drawing interchange file dxf Viewports can display all or part of the drawing s model space entities The CACHELAYOUT system variable controls whether the content of layouts is cached The extra memory required for caching is made up for by improvements to the memory requirements for displaying entities the net result being that the memory needed to display drawings has been reduced As a result of this switching between layouts is up to 10 times faster now Creating a new layout 1 Do one of the following e Click the New Layout tool button Ss on the Layout or the Insert toolbar e Choose New Layout in the Insert menu e Type layout in the command bar press Enter then type N and press Enter The command bar reads Enter a
387. n Linetype Mode Reverse Spline Taper Width Undo lt exit gt A prompt menu displays 3 Choose Join in the prompt menu or type J and press Enter The command bar reads Select entities to join 4 Select the entities to join The number of already selected entities displays in the command bar 5 Right click or press Enter to stop selecting entities and add the selection to the polyline 6 Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Exit in the prompt menu or press Enter to conclude the Edit Polyline tool NOTE You can select multiple entities in step 3 on condition they form one chain with the parent polyline 397 BricsCAD V14 Changing the polyline width Command PEDIT The Width option of the Edit Polyline tool applies a uniform width to the entire entity while the Taper option tapers the polyline uniformly along its entire length To apply a uniform width to a polyline Do one of the following e Click the Edit Polyline tool button LA on the Modify toolbar e Choose Edit Polyline in the Modify menu e Type editpline or pedit in the command window then press Enter The command bar reads Select polyline to edit Select the polyline The command bar reads Edit polyline Edit vertices Close or Open Decurve Fit Join Linetype Mode Reverse Spline Taper Width Undo lt exXit gt A prompt menu displays Choose Width in the prompt menu or type W and press Enter The command bar r
388. n MethOd Siirsin aa a a O40 Composing a selection set before pre pick ssssssssesssssssrsnnnsusnrsnsrennnnssenrrnsnenrnnrrensnnne 350 Composing a selection set afterwards POSt PiCk s s sssssrsrerensnrsrsrrnrnrenrnrersrrnrnrerenrenne 350 Selecting OV ChlaPDInG entte S rerea a T A A E 351 QUICK SCICCE ncira aaO De To create aS leCUON SEE aaae EOE A A A AA E O ts 352 Re airanging EntitiCS iccse aaa D MOVING ENTIS iiisccisetssdctsncenivisacrssdreecteniniastesdmnntindciesteninaiiea O MOVING tities inm a AFA WING ieissa aaia 357 SIG Ne MOV ECO Mal daa A A A wees 357 MOVING CHULICS USING Gri DS sece a aA a e A E a N a ce 358 Moving entities between drawings 22u22u22u22u22u20u20u20unuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 359 Using Cut and Paste to move entities between drawingS sssssssrsssrsrssrsrerrnrnrerrnrrrrrrnns 359 Move a SEICCEOM AS APIOCK irae aea aa E A a a e Aaa e Ta NA 359 ROLAUING ENUGS ci aaa S OC Rotating a selection SOE eiae a E a EE E EE ET E E E 360 Rotating a selection set in reference to a base angle s sssssssssrunersnrsrsnrnrnrerenrnrsrerenrnrens 361 ROtatNG Io Dias a a a T a A a a sunt T EE EEEE 361 Mirroring Entities ciii aaO O Mirroring entities apout a NING naiss ienien i A AA AE aaa 362 Mirroring entities about a DIANE moii a AE AE coal a sawtetgoumnn 362 ALGHING ENTITIES siririn sisisecscestieccnrasausscessausewasturss a aa SOS AUG amenity M 2D arna aa A EA A a a a A 363
389. n connected to the previous QUADRANT WS point forms a line tangent to that entity Snaps to the closest quadrant of an arc circle ellipse or elliptical arc POINT po B Snaps to a point entity I Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute block or text entity INTERSECTION 4 kA Snaps to the intersection of any combination of entities APPARENT y A Snaps to the apparent intersection in the INTERSECTION current view of two entities that do not intersect in three dimensional space EXTENSION YX Snaps to the extension of an entity or to the e intersection of the extension of two entities NONE w fo fy Turns off all entity snap modes FROM ig F Prompts for a base point Use relative coordinates to define the offset NOTE You can toggle the Entity Snaps on off e by clicking the ESNAP field in the Status Bar e by pressing the F3 function key Eg from the base point 2 Snaps to a point in the middle between two points 107 BricsCAD V14 Working with multiple Entity Snap modes 1 Move the cursor to the entity you want to snap One of the active Entity Snap modes markers display 2 Do not move the mouse press the TAB key The entity the snap point is on highlights 3 Do one of the following e Click to accept the snap point e Press the TAB key The next possible Entity Snap mode marker displays The entity the snap point is on highlights 4 option Repeat step 3 until the
390. n you explode it The resulting lines and arcs follow the centerline of the original polyline e If you explode a block containing attributes the attributes are lost but the original attribute definitions remain Colors and linetypes assigned BYBLOCK may appear different after exploding an entity because they will adopt the default color and linetype The TxtExp command explodes text into polylines short for text explode To explode entities 1 Do one of the following e Click the Explode tool button T on the Modify toolbar e Choose Explode in the Modify menu e Type explode in the command bar then press Enter The command window reads Select entities to explode 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter NOTE If you select the entities first then launch the Explode tool the selected entities are exploded immediately 408 User Guide Creating Regions Command REGION The Region command converts closed entities into a solid entity You can create regions from closed entities such as polylines polygons circles ellipses closed splines and donuts Creating regions typically has no visible effect on a drawing However if the original entity had a width or lineweight that information is lost when you create the region To create regions 1 Do one of the following e Click the Region tool button G7 in the Draw toolbar e Choose Region in the Draw menu e Type region in the command bar th
391. naries are best saved in the Support folder of the Roamable root folder If you want to share the custom dictionary with MS Word point to the MS Word custom dictionary in step 5 in the above procedure By default CUSTOM DIC is the custom dictionary in MS Word which can be found under C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data Microsoft Proof CUSTOM DIC on a Windows XP computer C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Microsoft Proof iCUSTOM DIC on a Windows Vista or higher computer 320 User Guide To add a new main dictionary 1 Open the Spell Checking dialog Change Dictionaries 2 Click the Change Dictionaries button 3 Click the Download button Your browser opens http wiki services openoffice org wiki Dictionaries 4 Do one of the following e If necessary click show next to Contents to display the list of available dictionaries Click the language you want to download the dictionary for You are prompted to Save or Open a ZIP file e g En_GB zip containing the dictionary files LEE F http wik services openoffice org wiki Dictionaries Contents hide 1 Afrikaans South Africa 2 Amharic Ethiopia 3 Arabic North Africa and Middle East 4 Armenian Eastern and Western 5 Azerbaijani Azerbaijan 6 Basque T Bengali India 8 Bulgarian Bulgaria 9 Catalan 10 Chichewa Malawi 11 Coptic N
392. nate dimension displays dynamically 3 Position the ordinate dimension NOTE Adjust the origin point of the current user coordinate system UCS before placing ordinate dimensions if necessary Creating leaders and annotations Commands DIMLEADER LEADER QLEADER and MLEADER A leader consists of an arrowhead a line polyline or a spline and an annotation The general procedure to place an annotation is Specify the position of the arrowhead Create the leader line segments Type the annotation text To create a leader and an annotation 1 Do one of the following e Click the Leader tool button M on the Dimensions toolbar 298 User Guide e Choose Leader in the Dimensions menu e Type eader or dimleader in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Start of leader 2 Specify the position of the arrowhead The command bar reads Next point 3 Specify the endpoint of the first leader segment The command bar reads To point Format Undo lt Annotation gt A prompt menu displays DIMLEADER 4 Add more segments to the leader then press Enter or right click to stop adding segments The command bar reads First line of annotation text lt options gt 5 Do one of the following e Type the first line of the annotation text then press Enter The command bar reads Next line of annotation text Do one of the following e Press Enter or right click to create the leader and annotation e Keep add
393. nates x y Z Use polar tracking to type the distance from the base point see Direct distance entry Using the Parallel entity snap 1 Make sure Entity Snap Tracking is active Launch an entity create command to create a linear entity e g Line Specify the first point of the entity The line displays dynamically Do one of the following e Press and hold the Shift key then right click and choose Snap to parallel in the context menu e Click the Snap to parallel toolbutton A in the Entity Snaps toolbar Hover the cursor over the entity you want to draw parallel to The Parallel Entity Snap marker 2 displays on the selected entity Wait until a small cross indicates the entity is recognized Move the cursor in order to place the dynamics of the line more or less parallel to the selected entity A tracking line displays from the start point of the line Do one of the following to specify the second point while the tracking line displays e Click a point e Enter the desired length and press Enter e Use a second entity snap tracking point then move the cursor to the intersection of the parallel tracking line and the second entity snap tracking line Using Midpoint snap 1 When prompted to specify a point do one of the following e Click the Snap to the middle of 2 points button P on the Entity Snaps toolbar e Type mtp or m2p in the command bar then press Enter e Press and hold the Shift key th
394. nd dynamically defines parallel perspective or visual perspective views of your 3D models The Camera command creates perspective views The projection method of a view is controlled by the Perspective property of the view e If ON the view is a visual perspective view e If OFF the view is a parallel perspective view Parallel Perspective View Visual Perspective View The following parameters are used in the Define View procedure e Target Point Defines the center of the view 1 e Camera Point Defines the view point and view direction 2 e Distance to Target Distance between the camera position an the target point 3 NOTE View manipulation tools such as zoom pan real time motion are not available in visual perspective views However you can use the mouse to manipulate the view 149 BricsCAD V14 Defining a camera view The Camera command creates a named view l NOTE 150 Do one of the following e Click the Camera tool button iS on the View toolbar e Choose Camera in the View menu e Type Camera in the command bar The command bar reads Specify camera location Do one of the following e Click a point in the drawing e Type the coordinates of the camera location in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Specify target location Do one of the following e Click a point in the drawing e Type the coordinates of the target location in the command bar and press Enter
395. nd might take a considerable amount of time to draw and display To improve performance add hatching as one of the last steps when you create a drawing or insert hatches on a separate layer that you can freeze as you continue to work on your drawing Or use the FILLMODE system variable to switch off the display of hatches gradient fills and filled entities e Hatches that are too dense are not displayed If such hatches exist in a drawing a warning displays in the command bar after opening the drawing The maximum number of dashes is controlled by the MAXHATCH settings variable By default the maximum number of dashes is 100 OOO The predefined and user pattern files sit in the Support folder of the current user The MEASUREMENT setting controls which predefined hatch pattern file will be used e Imperial uses Default pat e Metric uses Iso pat Defining the MEASUREMENT setting Do one of the following e Inthe command bar type measurement then press Enter Type ON then press Enter to set measurement to Metric Type OFF then press Enter to set measurement to Imperial e Inthe Settings dialog go to Drawing gt Drafting gt Drawing units Choose either Metric or Imperial in the combo box El Drawing units Insertion units Inches Metric use 150 Hatch and 150 Linetype Unit mode Imperial use ANSI Hatch and ANSI Linetype Dimension zeros Metric use ISO Hatch and ISO Linetype Defining the MAXHATCH setting Do one of the
396. ndow opens 2 option Click the blank tile in front of the View Name to restore a saved view The current view is marked r Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Drawings X Views House dwg X Edit View Garage x gt AE Open Drawings Folders Sheets kel x DlA 2 l E General Name Garage gt l C BricsCAD Training Bricscad Tra 4 View Name UCS anes amp F Layers ini Say 1 Dining Visual Style 2dWireframe GG Jarang 2 M Z Linetypes Background lt None gt Multiline Styles 7 pasa E View B Multileader Styles 4 Hall Camera 0 00 0 00 1 00 Ay Text Styles 5 Kitchen Target 0 00 0 00 0 00 4 Dimension Styles 6 Living Perspective Off z a Styles Width 1269 30 Coordinate Systems i H t 699 23 c a th 50 00 S5 Visual Styles ee Lights Roll angle 0 0 0 EHS Materials E Clipping ig RenderPresets Front plane 0 00 b Blocks a Back plane 0 00 u Clipping off 3 option Click the New button h in the Drawing Explorer toolbar to save the current view 4 option Click the Delete button A in the Drawing Explorer toolbar to delete the selected view 5 option Click the View Name then right click and choose Rename in the context menu Type a new name for the saved view 6 option Check the Perspective property to make the view a visual perspective view If not checked the view is a parallel perspective view See also Define a View 7 option Click the Background
397. nenrsnsrennnnssenrrnsnenrnnrrenennne 194 Editing ai elliptical are aricii enar AE A E G 195 Freehand SKCUCHES ciounari aaa LOS Setting the Sketch Poly SKPOLY system variable sssesnsnsnsnsnssrnnnnsssnrsnsnrnnnnssenrrnrnrsne 196 reatino a Threeall SKEECH imsiu aa a aa a A EA 196 MANIS LE Sinna O Drawing INNE E Sorsien A A A A AE AAE ERa 197 LINES oraria aaae LOO Dra winonihe S criaria a a a aa aa a aa re ere eer 198 Sollas arana aa LO Drawing Solds aarisertinern eaaa aaraa aa a a a ae 199 POINES crocie O Defining the point display settings aristi aaa a E S A a 200 Drawing POINTS carare E a a a a A a a a A a ED 201 BricsCAD V14 POIVGONS wesiivsricsinterideiiwravnsnetteriinininn einen Tenner OL Drawing DOIW G OLS and lt i wiasine sure acas cataracts na ence aah wera suntan Naaru tame E A anes 202 meh dL ener reer rere rccrer errr rrererer rr rrererr rrr rrerer rr errr rere rere rr cre rere re 4 0 P Drowing DOV MM GS arria a Ta a AE A TAE T eonmuitee O A want aeadoneaanains 203 creating boundary DOW SS seniririiiir riein aaa EEEE EAE CA TEE 205 Kayson aaa Drawing Mesh certo Ten eT E ere eee E E E rn ener Tet 207 Rectangles ricinos TT LOT Drawing FECLAN GIES inva neideasuas inten iubchasieneeue ante dueea nau Maeenawel ale Frau Aa 208 REVISION ClOUGS siiccscctincciesvisdceinvcnernenteniversteeeeeeiinneNciicaneeer eo Drawing PEVISION ClOUGS ict mci recat esc a Sac ranasateuce Sg as aa uama sieare pb aaa been eae eeaatee saa 209
398. netse 30 Opening the customize didlog sin cvsuctcacndus tO AEA EATA eee EANA exntunancas tees 30 Loading and unloading CUIT files ssssssnsnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 9 2 Tolpad e Malr CULME iror NE E E E E A a E 32 TOload aparia CUDNE onmino eaa a O T amemenuwaa nee ese new 33 TOUMoad a Parak CUr Mie uaa a A A A AA A E 33 Managing customization GFOUDS zersicririandrirrenran iranta a a aa ia aiara 34 BricsCAD V14 Creating CUSLOM LOOIS siiiiidireiidniirihiinieinnie OO General procedure to create CUSTOM tOOIS cccccccceneeceeeetseceueeteeceeeeneueueenteueueenteueueentauens 35 Tocreate a Partial CULUNG inana E n AA E TA E sd wenetnGaumidaxseutdeusman tens 36 TOs addsa toolbox m a menu GQrOuUp wisscsseivadanece eea eaaa ATA ER AAKA 36 Toadd a TtToolmM a LOO DO saaa a a E AA a ea 37 Toadd amain MENU aen eins ana a a a EE a tobe A A S EI ia 39 TO adda SUDMENU to a MENU rirorio tirerian TAAA TONNALI 39 To addAcontext Menine e E E A E A E 39 ONaAG Cs COO Dells arer A E E A 42 TOceaG ca TYOULLO a LOOl DAI ens E a a es 43 Toadd a control TO a toolbar ririri nien AE AAE A E a a 44 TO add a keyboard SNO CUT eae a A S 44 To add an existing tool to a menu toolbar or SHOrtcCut ccceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteegeneetegs 45 To create a new tool in a menu toolbar Or shortcut ccccceeee eee eeeeeeeeeueeeeueeenauueneauuensaunes 45 To change the order of the tools in a MENU OF toolbar cc ccee cece esse eee eeeeeeeeeeteeseee
399. ng When freezing layers in external references which are saved with a layer index INDEXCTL 1 or 3 entities in the external reference on thawed layers are loaded only If xref dependent layers are thawed more entities are loaded 0 Demand loading is OFF The entire external reference is loaded 1 Demand loading is ON Referenced drawings are kept open and locked Other users can open such drawings only as read only 2 Demand loading is ON Temporary copies of referenced drawings are kept open and locked Other users can open and modify the referenced drawings Controls the creation of a backup file BAK Improves the speed of incremental saves if switched off especially for large drawings Please notice that in some cases i e a power failure during a save it might be possible drawing data are lost This system variable controls how often BricsCAD performs a full save A full save reorganizes all the data in the drawing database and creates a compact file A partial save stores all changes a the end of the drawing data base A full save takes longer to be executed than a partial save If ISAVEPERCENT OQO each Save is a full save The higher the value of ISAVEPERCENT the longer the time between two full saves Specifies the number of files shown in the Recent Files flyout of the File menu Values between 0 and 20 are accepted Default 10 Determines whether images of proxy entities 1 are saved in t
400. ng Explorer In the Images Explorer you can e See a preview of the attached images e Place images 2 or ES e Load Unload inserted images e Detach images X Images Explorer display options You can choose between Detail View list Icon View and Tree View to see the images in the current drawing 456 User Guide Open the Detail View of the Images Explorer Click the Detail View button EE in the Drawing Explorer toolbar The Detail View button is now pressed indicating the image details are displayed The selected image displays in the Preview sub window of the Drawing Explorer Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Drawings Open Drawings Folders Sheets Rx s 8l Dil e ls P C Bricsys Reports Images dwg 7 Size In Pixels eeterenes vedo 3 a Eu Ai 1109 735 C ba el ea rcs Reports concreteFactory Jpg a a a er 1672 1604 C BricsCad Training Images Decagon_M C evicsys Reports Decagon_Motif jpg EscherSpace 350 414 C BricsCad Training Images EscherSpac C Bricsys Reports EscherSpace JPG MurcuttMustonHouse v 1094 673 C BricsCad Training Images MurcuttMus C Bricsys Reports MurcuttMustonHouse jt 1653 2080 C BricsCad Training Images PaperSizes C Bricsys Reports PaperSizes jpg Open the Icon View of the Images Explorer Click the Icon View button 22 in the Drawing Explorer toolbar The Icon View button is now pressed
401. ng their default color OG Ce x Model Hides all dimensions and texts Model Displays walls only 137 BricsCAD V14 e Click the Icon View button 22 Layer States House dwg CX bl SMORB 4 Dhilae 2 E Black Colored CEE NoDim Walls 4 4 amp 4 E e Click the Tree View button 5 Layer States House dwg ex b SehMORG g Bie g Sas Fl Black Fl Colored Name NoDim_NoTexts Space Model Description Hides all dimensions and texts H Layer Properties to restore On off Frozen Thawed Locked Unlocked Color Lineweight Plot style Plot No plot Walls WOOO To save the current layer state 138 Open the Layer States explorer Click the New button L A new layer state is created Type a name for the layer state replacing the NewLayerState1 default name option When in Detail View or Tree View type a description in the Description field E option Click the Tree View button S to select the layer properties to restore User Guide e Expand the Layer Properties to restore list El Layer Properties to restore On Off Frozen Thawed Locked Unlocked Color Linetype Lineweight Plot Style Plot No Plot e option Click the All Properties Off button Lh then select the properties to restore e option Click the All Properties On button dh to select all properties 6 Click the check box to select a layer property cli
402. ng using the Copy command The default method is to create a selection set and then specify a starting point base point and an endpoint second point for the copy You can also specify the displacement as a direction vector X Y Z Depending on the COPYMODE system variable you can create multiple copies of the selection set or just one Copybase and Pasteblock pastes the selection as a block The Copy option of the Grips Editing commands allows to create multiple copies of the entities being stretched moved rotated mirrored or scaled To copy a selection set 1 Do one of the following e Click the Copy tool button on the Modify toolbar e Choose Copy in the Modify menu e Type copy or CO in the command bar The command bar reads Select entities to copy 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter If Copy Mode is Multiple The command bar reads Enter base point mOde lt Displacement gt If Copy Mode is Single The command bar reads Enter base point mOde Multiple lt Displacement gt 3 Specify the base point The selection set is now attached to the cross hairs The command bar reads Enter second point lt Enter to use the base point as displacement gt 4 Do one of the following e Click the second point e Use Direct Distance Entry type the displacement distance then press Enter The distance is measured in the cursor direction Use ORTHO or POLAR TRACKING to constrain the movement of the cro
403. nits Coordinate input Dynamic input Direct Modeling El Display Viewing Coordinates Drawing display Grips El Lineweights Entity lineweight Default lineweight Lineweight display Lineweight units Lineweight display scale 2 Coordinates in polar form for point distance and z ByLayer 0 25 mm Display lineweight 1 Milimeters 0 55 User Guide 181 BricsCAD V14 5 option Select the Defau t Lineweight LWDEFAULT system variable then select a lineweight in the drop down list 6 option Select the Lineweight Display LWDISPLAY system variable then click the checkbox to toggle the display of lineweights 7 option Select the Lineweight Units LWUNITS system variable then choose Millimeters or Inches 8 Close the Settings dialog NOTE Click the lineweight field LWT in the Status Bar to toggle the display of lineweights on off Entity Linetype You use different linetypes to differentiate the purpose of one line from another A linetype consists of a repeating pattern of dots dashes or blank spaces Linetypes determine the appearance of entities both on the screen and when printed By default every drawing has at least three linetypes CONTINUOUS BYLAYER and BYBLOCK Your drawing may also contain an unlimited number of additional linetypes Linetype definitions are saved in the drawing New linetypes are either imported from other drawings or loaded from a linetype file e g iso lin or default lin
404. nnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn FOL Toattach an external TELETEnNCE areir oone aa Ea e a T A E a a EA A A 441 ManaGinG Xl Gls iorsin en aA Todetach external FETerenCes rirni a AEA TO AA deans E RREO ANSA 443 TO UNOoOad external reference Sinna a a a E A a OA E 443 TO rel ad external referentes vinci serin inisa Raa AANA aAA a Aa a Ea A A AAA 443 Editing blocks and external references ssssssunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 444 TO SGI STS Or DIOCKS reiri ei C anders eh A ecg eal se cadence eee le ea eas ea rt iad a aie 444 Working WIEN GrOUDS sssss s 2222222u2uu2u2u2u2unununununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn AAA FO Create a roU D eiere e a E E E a a E a a 447 Ort O GIL AOLO ira a a E a A a a a O 448 TOUNOrOUD GALTI S Aaaa R ET E A R E AA AE O OEA 448 TO CAange tHe order or CnuiUleS ara inea aan a A E 449 Working with underlayS 90 Toca tach a PDF UNGSMAY aieia A A T E a aa tian a 450 TOINSerta PDF UNdENaYV creien e a AAE A E A E E EAA 451 TO control the display ofa PDF Underlay eserim ironi EA E AE 452 To set the layer display in a PDF Underlay sssssssnsssnnsrennnsssnrsnsrrunnnsnenrsnsnennnnsnenrrnrnene 452 To cip a PDF nderlay visernit ena a a aa a a akii 454 To toggle the display of the clipped part of a PDF Underlay ssssssasessnssrsnsrrnrnrerrnrsrerenns 454 1 0 Geleleca Cll PPlAG DOUNGALY errre tannat oa daaande casempriasaiacenes dens a E E A 455 EXDIOFING LMaGe
405. not press the Shift key on AZERTY keyboards 23 BricsCAD V14 Model space and paper space Understanding paper space and model space When you start a drawing session your initial working area is called Model Space Model Space is an area in which you create two dimensional and three dimensional entities based on either the World Coordinate System WCS or a user coordinate system UCS You view and work in model space while using the Model tab In general model space consists of a single view that fills the screen If needed you can create additional views called viewports which can show different views of your drawing or 3D model All viewports are displayed in a tiled manner You can work in only one of these viewports at a time but all viewports are updated simultaneously Click in a viewport to make it the current viewport You can print the current viewport only The Viewports command lets you manage your viewports in model space BricsCAD provides an additional work area called Paper Space Paper space represents a paper layout of your drawing In this work area you can create and arrange different views of your drawing similar to the way you arrange drawings on a sheet of paper In paper space you can also add keynotes annotations borders title blocks and other print related entities which you don t want to see in model space Each drawing has at least one Layout in which you can have one or more Layout Viewports Such la
406. nplanesettings in the command bar then press Enter To edit the properties of a section plane 1 Open the Drawing Explorer Section Planes dialog Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Section Planes Sections dwg o Edit Section Plane Settings Jogged Vertical ax amp 2 GQ Section Plane Name Live Section State Plane Transparency Plane Color D Section block creation settings mt E Plane 70 E s Live Section Settings Horizontal Plane 70 g Jogged Horizontal Volume 70 Intersection Boundary waged Vertic a a E caa Linetype Left Plane 70 are Linetype Scale 1 Right Volume 70 35 p gi Lineweight Sloping L Plane 70 Mis E Intersection Fill Top a Plane 70 His chow Yes Face Hatch Predefined ANSI31 Angle 0 0000 Hatch Scale 3 Hatch Spacing 3 0 Color M Red Linetype Continuous Linetype Scale 1 Lineweight Default Surface Transparency 0 El Cut away Geometry Show Yes Color E Blue Linetype DASHED Linetype Scale 1 Lineweight Default Face Transparency 50 20 Section elevation block creation settings Edge Transparency 50 2 option Click the Section Plane Name field then click again to type a new name 3 option Click the Live Section check box of a section plane to toggle the Live Section property of the section plane If necessary click the Regen tool button EH in the Details toolbar to update the display 4 option Click the State fiel
407. ns gt Files gt Projects gt Project search paths Creating projects To create a project 1 Open the Project settings 2 Click the Browse button at the right hand side of the Project search paths settings field El Projects Project name Project search paths 64 User Guide The Project Settings dialog opens Project Settings Project Search Paths Ea 3 To create the first project e Click the New button L2 on the Project Settings dialog El Projects mn NMewProject1 e Type a name to replace the NewProject1 default name 4 Tocreate additional projects e Click Projects on top of the projects tree then click the New button CH e Type a name to replace the NewProject1 default name Adding search paths to a project To add a search path to a project 1 Open the Project settings 2 Select the project in the Projects tree 3 Click the Browse button EQ The Browse for folder dialog opens 65 BricsCAD V14 Browse For Folder Choose a path 4 Local Disk C SAVGS VAULTS di _AcroTemp di Backup di Bricscad di Bricscad Training 4 Do one of the following e Select a folder e Select a parent folder then click the Make New Folder button to create a new folder 5 Click the OK button to add the selected folder to the project search paths Changing the order of the search paths 1 Open the Project settings Click the expand button of the project you
408. ntext menu or type off then press Enter to hide the edges of all wipeouts in the drawing e Choose ON in the context menu or type on then press Enter to display the edges of all wipeouts in the drawing User Guide Mechanical Components and Component Inserts Assembly modeling consists in using mechanical components to group geometric entities in hierarchies representing the structure of a designed product Assembly modeling is commonly used in Mechanical Computer Aided Design MCAD applications because it simplifies design of complex products containing thousands and millions of geometric entities A mechanical component is a named group of entities A particular example of a mechanical component is any dwg file Another example of a component is a standard hardware Users can define their own components A component can be inserted one or several times into one or more other components A component insert is a named entity which default name is composed by the name of the component and the serial number of the insert An assembly is a mechanical component with other components inserted in it An assembly with inserted components which in turn can be assemblies with other inserted components forms a tree that is called a mechanical structure of the drawing This tree is displayed in the Mechanical Browser Mechanical components are stored in dwg files as custom objects The geometric entities represented particular components
409. ntity The part of the solid opposite to the direction of the section entity is cut away The Live Section property of the section entity is not switched on automatically The section plane gets the Boundary state The part of the solid Horizontal jogged opposite to the direction section plane of the section entity is cut away Live Section 9 option Edit the properties of the section plane Specify points To create a orthographic section plane 1 Make sure the WCS is the current coordinate system 2 Launch the Sectionplane command 3 Choose Orthographic in the prompt menu or type O in the command bar The command bar reads Align section to Front bAck Top Bottom Left Right lt Top gt 4 Pick the orthographic section orientation of your choice in the prompt menu or type the corresponding option in the command bar Orthographic section planes are created through the center of the solid parallel to the XY plane Top and Bottom YZ plane Left and Right or XZ plane Front and Back of the current coordinate system The Live Section property of the section entity is not switched on automatically Top Front Right 261 BricsCAD V14 5 option Edit the properties of the section plane To open the Drawing Explorer Section Planes dialog Do one of the following e Choose Drawing Explorer gt Section Planes in the Tools menu e Choose Sections gt Section Plane Settings in the Model menu e Type sectio
410. o define the X scale factor do one of the following e Press Enter to accept the default e Type the X scale factor then press Enter e Click to define the X scale factor graphically The command bar reads Y scale factor lt Equal to X scale current X scale gt Repeat step 5 to define the Y scale factor The command bar reads Rotation angle for block lt 0 gt ve 10 11 NOTES User Guide Do one of the following e Press Enter to set the rotation angle to 0 e Type a rotation angle then press Enter Click to define the rotation angle graphically The command bar reads Number of rows in the array lt 1 gt Type the number of rows then press Enter or press Enter for one row The command bar reads Number of columns lt 1 gt Type the number of columns then press Enter or press Enter for one column The command bar reads Vertical distance between rows or spacing rectangle Type the row spacing distance then press Enter The command bar reads Horizontal distance between columns Type the column spacing distance then press Enter The block array is created as a single entity If you choose Multiple blocks in step 3 you are prompted to create multiple instances of the block array It is not possible to explode a MInsert Block entity If you type the name of block in step 2 BricsCAD will lookup the block in the block definitions in the current drawing If the block is not found in the current draw
411. o m ny P y a_a h m aF T pn a a Te Pa 1 Ta a a A F Fy i L 5 i Pa i L T a F WA s k a q a 7 fa R Polar 3D array about a horizontal axis red 378 User Guide Resizing Entities You can resize entities using the following methods Extend entities to a boundary entity Trim entities by a cutting entity Edit the length of lines two dimensional polylines rays or arcs length or included angle Stretch Scale Extending Entities Command EXTEND and TRIM The Extend command lets you extend entities to a boundary which is defined by one or more other entities If the Edge Mode setting EDGEMODE is On you can extend entities to an implied edge of the boundary entities If the boundary entity is not in the same plane as the entity you want to extend the Projection Mode setting PROJMODE lets you choose how the intersection is to be calculated The options are Project to the XY plane of the current UCS Project to the current view plane True 3D mode No projection When extending entities first select the boundary edges and then specify the entities to extend selecting them either one by one or using the fence selection method The following entities can be extended arcs lines two dimensional polylines rays Boundary entities can be arcs circles ellipses lines splines polylines rays infinite lines layout viewports To extend entities 1 Do one of the following
412. o modify existing aliases or to create new ones the default pgp file can be edited using an ASCII text editor e g Notepad The first section of the default pgp file defines the She commands The second section of the default pgp file defines command aliases The following syntax is used to define a command alias alias command alias the character string to be entered at the command prompt The command alias must be followed by a comma command the BricsCAD command The command name must be preceded by an asterisk Comment lines must be preceded by a semicolon Comment lines can be used to add additional information e g when the file was last edited and by whom Some commands such as HATCH or BOUNDARY can be preceded by a hyphen to access the command line version of the command instead of the dialog box version Command aliases can be created for these commands also e g vi view Execute the REINIT command to reload the alias file when it was externally edited 56 User Guide Using the Customize dialog to edit the alias file 1 Open the Customize dialog 2 Click the Aliases tab on the Customize dialog Customize File ATTEXT BLOCK HATCH BOUNDARY CHANGE OLOR LOLOR DIMSTYLE HATCH INSERT LAYER 4 INFTYPF Edit 3 option To create a new alias e Click the Add button The Add Alias dialog box displays e Click the down arrow at the right hand side of the Command fi
413. o position the dimension line e Press O zero to place the dimension line at the dimension points thus omitting the extension lines User Guide To create a rotated linear dimension 1 Do one of the following e Click the Rotated tool button RE on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Rotated in the Dimensions menu The command bar reads ENTER to select entity lt Origin of first extension line gt 2 Do one of the following e Press Enter then select the line or linear segment of a polyline you want to dimension e Specify the origin of the first extension line then specify the origin of the second extension line The command bar reads Angle of dimension line lt 0 gt 3 Do one of the following e Type the rotation angle in the command bar then press Enter e Enter the rotation angle by specifying two points The dimension line displays dynamically 4 Position the dimension line You can place the dimension line either at the specified rotation angle or perpendicular to this direction To create baseline dimensions 1 Do one of the following e Click the Baseline tool button FA on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Baseline in the Dimensions menu e Type dimbaseline in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Baseline ENTER to select starting dimension lt Origin of next extension line gt A baseline dimension displays dynamically starting from the most recently added linear or angular d
414. o the cursor Follow the instructions in the command bar to place the block in the drawing To insert a section as a 3D block H ee a option Adjust the 3D cutaway section settings of the section plane entity Launch the Section Plane to Block command Set the Destination to Insert new block Under Source Geometry do one of the following e Choose Include all entities to include all 3D solids in the drawing e Choose Select entities then click the Select button te to select 3D solids Under Section plane click the Se ect button Tr then select a section plane entity in the drawing Set the Section type to 3D cutaway section Adjust the Insert options see Insert a block Click the OK button The Create Section Elevation dialog closes The block is attached to the cursor Follow the instructions in the command bar to place the block in the drawing To replace an existing block Ls Launch the Section Plane to Block command Set the Destination to Replace existing block Click the Se ect button tr then select the block to be replaced in the drawing Under Source Geometry do one of the following e Choose Include all entities to include all 3D solids in the drawing e Choose Select entities then click the Se ect button te to select 3D solids Under Section plane click the Se ect button a then select a section plane entity in the drawing Under Section type do one of the following e Choose 2D cross
415. odify toolbar e Choose Align in the Modify menu e Type align in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entities Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Specify first source point Snap to the first source point in the selection set 1 The command bar reads Specify first destination point Snap to the first destination point on the reference entity 2 A witness line is drawn between the source point and the target point The command bar reads Specify the second source point n Snap to the second source point in the selection set 3 The command bar reads Specify second destination point Snap to the second destination point on the reference entity 4 A witness line is drawn between the source point and the target point The command bar reads Specify the third source point Right click to skip the third source point The command bar reads Scale objects based on alignment points Yes No lt No gt 363 BricsCAD V14 8 Do one of the following e Press Enter if you don t want to scale the selection set e Type Y and press Enter to scale the selection set Result of the Align procedure with scaled selection set Aligning an entity in 3D 1 Do one of the following e Click the Align tool button Eh on the Modify toolbar e Choose Align in the Modify menu e Type align in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entitie
416. of the following Click the Replace button Replace e Repeat this step to find another text entity that contains the search string e option Repeat this step until no more occurrences of the search text are found in the drawing or selection set 8 Do one of the following e Repeat steps 2 through 7 Close e Press the Esc key or click the C ose button Ges to stop NOTE If a selection is active when you launch the FIND command only text entities in the selection set are searched Checking Spelling Command SPELL The spelling checker checks the spelling of text in the current drawing You can check the spelling of one or more selected text entities or check the entire drawing During the spelling check the Spe command matches the words in the drawing or the current selection set to the words in the current main dictionary and the current custom dictionary If a word is not found in either dictionaries you can select the correct spelling in the suggestions field or you can add the word to the current custom dictionary Custom dictionaries are used for discipline specific words such as medical or mechanical 317 BricsCAD V14 Dictionary settings Which dictionaries are used by the Spell command is defined by the DCTMAIN main dictionary and DCTCUST custom dictionary system variables El Dictionaries Custom spelling dictionary C Users Louis AppData Roaming Bricsys BricscadW9 en_US support Sample cus Main s
417. olygon Crossing polygon Outside polygon Window arde Crossing drde Outside crde Point Fence Cancel 389 BricsCAD V14 390 option Choose Chamfer Settings in the prompt menu or type S and press Enter In the Settings dialog window e Specify the Chamfer first distance e Set the Chamfer second distance e Set the Chamfer mode to Distance Distance E Chamfer Fillet Chamfer first distance Chamfer second distance Chamfer length 2 5000 Chamfer angle 30 Chamfer mode Distance Distance Fillet radius 0 5000 Trim mode Trim selected edges to the endpoints of chamfer lines and fillet arcs Close the Settings dialog window The command bar reads Chamfer lt current chamfer settings gt Settings Polyline Angle Distance mEthod Trim Undo Multiple lt Select first entity gt Select the first entity or polyline segment The command window reads Select second entity Select the second entity or polyline segment The chamfer is created Chamfering using the length angle method Do one of the following e Click the Chamfer tool button i on the Chamfer Fillet flyout of the Modify toolbar e Choose Chamfer in the Modify menu e Type chamfer or CHA in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Chamfer lt current chamfer settings gt Settings Polyline lt Select first entity gt A prompt menu displays Choose Chamfer Settings in the prompt menu or type S and press
418. on aN 237 BricsCAD V14 The Mechanical Browser for Sheet Metal All features of a sheet metal part are listed in the Mechanical Browser When you select a feature in the Mechanical Browser its faces are highlighted in the model area Mechanical Browser El Component Name Connector Plate Description File C Bricsys Reports W 14 Sheetm Sheet metal Thickness 2 Default KFactor 0 27324 El Bend Radius 1 Type Thickness ratio Value 0 5 The Mechanical Browser automatically opens when switching to the 3D Modeling workspace To open the Mechanical Browser manually do the following 1 Move the cursor over a toolbar then right click A context menu displays 238 User Guide BRICSCAD v Command Bar Properties Bar Tool Palettes Bar w Status Bar Toolbar size Customize 2 Choose Mechanical Browser in the context menu NoTE When you right click a feature in the browser then select Dissolve from the context menu the selected feature is removed from the part but it will keep its geometry However design intent spatial and parametric relationships between the feature s faces associated with the geometry of a dissolved feature is removed Commands and Toolbars Icon Command _ Description SmFlangeBase Creates a base flange SmFlangeEdge Creates an edge flange 3 SmFlangeRotate Rotates a flange 4 SmUnfold Unfolds the ma sheet metal body The Sheet Metal tools are availab
419. on plane is toggled Method 2 Using the Properties bar 1 Select the section plane entity in the drawing 264 2 Method 3 Using the Drawing Explorer Section Planes dialog I Select the section plane in the Drawing Explorer Section Planes dialog 2 Click the check box in the Live Section field To define the live section settings 1 2 3 Open the Drawing Explorer Section Planes dialog Select the section plane Select Live Section Settings in the Edit pane on the Drawing Explorer Section Planes dialog The live section settings display Edit Section Plane Settings Section Plane 1 x 2D Section elevation block creation settings Linetype Continuous Linetype Scale 1 Lineweight Default Intersection Fill Show Yes Face Hatch Predefined ANSI31 Angle 0 0000 Hatch Scale 1 Hatch Spacing 5 0 Color ByEntity Linetype Continuous Linetype Scale 1 Lineweight Default Surface Transparency 0 O Cut away Geometry Show Yes Color E Blue Linetype DASHED Linetype Scale 1 Lineweight Be fault Face Transparency 30 Edge Transparency 50 User Guide In the Properties Bar under Selection Entity click the Live Section field and select Yes 265 BricsCAD V14 Cut away Geometry ON Cut away Geometry OFF To save a section The SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK command allows you to e Insert a section in the drawing as a 2D section eleva
420. on the Look From toolbar e The UCSVP UCS viewports system variable controls whether the UCS in a viewport is fixed UCSVP ON or changes to match the UCS in the current viewport UCSVP Off As a result in a multiple viewport drawing the UCS of all viewports that have UCSVP Off matches the orthographic UCS of the current viewport if UCSORTHO On Command Options See the SETUCS command 119 BricsCAD V14 Measuring Commands DIST AREA MASSPROP ID and LIST The Dist command reports the distance and angle between two points The Area command finds the area and perimeter or length of 2D entities The Massprop command reports the area perimeter and other mathematical properties of 3D solids and 2D regions short for mass properties The JID command reports the x y z coordinates of picked points The List command lists the properties of selected entities Measuring distances To measure a distance between two points 1 120 Do one of the following e Click the Distance tool button E on the Inquiry toolbar e Type dist in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Starting point for distance Identify the first point The command bar reads End point Identify the second point The following information displays in the command bar see image below Distance Angle in XY Plane alpha Angle from XY Plane beta Delta X Delta Y Delta Z The values are calculated with respect to th
421. on the hierarchy of mechanical components for the current drawing and calling different commands for the inserts 2D and 3D Constraints also display in the Mechanical Browser With the mechanical browser you can e click a component to highlight its geometric entities in the drawing window e click a component to change its name e right click a component to run a command for it e edit 2D and 3D constraints e insert a standard hardware parts as a mechanical component in the current drawing To open the Mechanical Browser do one of the following e Choose Mechanical Browser in the Mechanical menu e Place the cursor on a toolbar then right click and choose Mechanical Browser in the context menu BRICSCAD x Command Bar Properties Bar Tool Palettes Bar v Status Bar Toolbar size Customize 216 Bill Of Materials Command BMBOM User Guide Engineering Bill of Materials BOM is a list of unique mechanical components used in a drawing The list is represented as a BricsCAD table entity see Tables and can be placed at any location in the drawing area Each entity has its serial number starting with 1 name and the number of occurrences Bill of materials NV ENT Railway_inspection_car No Pat Quantity ee a a l owas e omowe S ower 8 a omona 2 ean f 8 NV AX 005 01 axis_2 9 NV AX 010 01 axis_1 o waooo e wR0 06 0 a 2 NV RD 005 01 rod_1 a P NV SBS 005 01 platform EE ua O w
422. one of the edges of the Properties Bar 1 The cursor turns into a double headed arrow 2 Press and hold the left mouse button to drag the edge of the Properties Bar eee X No Selection T E General Color E Eue 1 Layer 2 FURNITURE Gp Linetype E HIDDEN Linetype scale 0 1 Lineweight ByLayer a Annotation scale 1 1 3 Move the cursor over the boundary between the Setting Names and the Setting Fields columns 2 The cursor turns into a double headed arrow 4 Press and hold the left mouse button to drag the boundary Nore When docked only the left or right edge of the Properties Bar is adjustable Setting the current properties in the Properties Bar 1 option Click on Color then click the down arrow button to select a color 2 option Click on Layer then click the down arrow to select a layer 3 option Click on Linetype then click on the down arrow to select a linetype 4 option Click on Linetype scale then type the new value in the Linetype scale field 5 option Click on Lineweight then click on the down arrow to select a lineweight 17 BricsCAD V14 Edit the properties of a single entity 1 Select the entity The entity s properties display in the Properties Bar Properties Bar G E General OOOO Color B EyLayer Layer FURNITURE Linetype ByLayer Linetype scale 2 54 Plot style ByColor Lineweight ByLayer Hyperlink Thickness Ey 3D Visualization
423. operties Ctrl Shitt P Scroll Bars Shitt F4 option Type scro bar in the command bar then do one of the following e type off in the command bar or choose Off in the context menu e type on in the command bar or choose On in the context menu e type T in the command bar or choose Toggle in the context menu User Guide Toolbars The following toolbars are available in BricsCAD Some of the tools are available in BricsCAD Pro and or BricsCAD Platinum only Please see the Command Reference guide for more information These toolbars are new in BricsCAD V14 2D yi ma 2D Constraints hea x Constr aints 3D Constr aints 3D Solid Editing HGsoerele aeeSGQuGe D 3 Solids Chapo o Circles eeeBbOon Design ERIA Intent Design Intent Preitkhk Gg x Dimen SIONS Dimensions A Direct Direct Modeling Modeli ng FoGl A AAI r amp QS OAH Agata t Ar lah Ail ef Bs 88 a BricsCAD V14 Draw Order A Ellipse S Elliptic al Arcs Entity Entity Data Ea Data 3 Ae ae oe aT Entity Entity Properties Proper ties lt oN o s6 r _ ByLayer Entity Entity Snaps Snaps E KP FOAY HOB X lE H Inquiry wEeekb E he Look From Layout Layout Ea IS BY BY Hl Mecha nical Mechanical th amp GGe e E Meshe Meshes S GPAG HAO CHSISGR User Guide Modify Modify a C Ref Edit Edit Render ing S amp e amp GAe
424. orth Africa 12 Croatian Croatia 13 Czech Czech Republic 14 Danish Denmark 15 Dutch Netherlands 16 English AU CA GB NZ US 2A4 17 Esperanto anywhere 15 Estonian Estonia e Go to the Extensions Repository to get the new dictionaries xe IMPORTANT NOTE From OpenOffice org 3 0 on the dictionary wizard is no longer available All new dictionaries are now available viajthe Extensions Repository Scroll down to the language of your choice then click the link to open the page of the selected language Click the Get it button to start downloading the oxt file 321 BricsCAD V14 Operating System System Independent Compatible with OpenOffice org 3 2 or higher Version AP 4 1 Date 2011 Mar 27 Size 2 1 MB View all releases Change the oxt extension to Zip 5 Extract the aff and dic files in the ZIP file to the C Program Files Bricsys BricsCAD Vx Support folder Extract C Users Louis AppData Local lemp en_GB zip Extract to C Program Files Bricsys Bricscad V9 Support Documents Ms Computer a Vondle Tray Files Selected files folders All files folders in curent folder Al files folders in archive E Skip older files 0 Files in Archive Use folder names Open Explorer window Overwrite existing files The dictionary is now available in the Main Dictionary list on the Change Dictionaries dialog box Main dictionary en_US dic
425. ose Yes in the prompt menu e To leave the command without creating the revision cloud choose Cancel in the prompt menu or press the Esc key Revision Clouds 1 Normal 2 Calligraphy 3 Reversed calligraphy based on a rectangle 210 User Guide Splines Command SPLINE A spline is an open or closed smooth curve defined by a set of points You can use splines to draw curved shapes which cannot be drawn as a polyline Drawing splines 1 Do one of the following cr e Click the Spline tool button on the Draw toolbar e Choose Spline in the Draw menu e Type spline in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads First point of spline 2 Specify the first point of the spline 3 Define the second point of the spline The command bar reads Close Fit Tolerance lt next point gt A prompt menu displays SPLINE Close Fit tolerance Cancel 4 option Repeat step 3 to define more points 5 Right click to stop adding more points The command bar reads Select starting tangent point A line that is tangent to the spline displays dynamically from the start point of the spline 6 Click to define the curve of the spline The command bar reads Select ending tangent point A line that is tangent to the spline displays dynamically from the start end of the spline 211 BricsCAD V14 7 Click to conclude the spline command 8 option Right click to restart NOTES oe The red da
426. ose button E To set the icon size You can choose between small 16 x 16 or large 32 x 32 icons on toolbars Move the cursor over a toolbar then right click 2 Choose Toolbar size then select either Small Icons or Large Icons 1 To set the position and visible property of a toolbar The Visible property determines whether a toolbar is visible when a cui file is loaded The Position property determines where a toolbar displays when a cui file is loaded In the Customize dialog click the Too bars tab If necessary expand the BricsCAD menu group Select the toolbar Choose Position in the Properties grid on the Customize dialog Click the settings field and choose the desired position in the list The options are Floating Top Left Bottom Right Choose Visible in the Properties grid on the Customize dialog Click the settings field and choose either Show or Hide in the options list 1 wi gt IN a i 12 User Guide Prompt Menus BricsCAD commands often provide several options These options appear in the status bar or command bar and also in a prompt menu which initially displays in the top right corner of the screen Choose the appropriate option by clicking in the prompt menu E g click Radius in the PLINE prompt menu to define the radius of the current arc segment of a polyline PLINE Draw lines Center Direction Halfwidth Radius Second point Width Cancel To control the display of prompt
427. otate Flange in the Sheet Metal menu e Type smflangerotate in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select a flange face to rotate Flange faces highlight under the cursor Click to select a flange face The flange rotates dynamically A dynamic dimension shows the current angle with respect to the base flange Do one of the following e Click a point e Type a value in the dynamic dimension field e Press the TAB key then specify the absolute rotation angle in the dynamic dimension field To connect flanges The SmFlangeConnect command closes gaps between two arbitrarily oriented flanges 1 Do one of the following e Click the Connect Flanges tool button H on the Sheet Metal toolbar e Choose Connect Flanges in the Sheet Metal menu e Type smflangeconnect in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select planar thickness faces of two flanges Flange faces highlight under the cursor Select the thickness face of the first flange The command bar reads Entities subentities in set 1 Select planar thickness faces of two flanges Select the thickness face of the second flange The selected thickness faces are connected Changing the Thickness To change the thickness of a sheet metal part 1 244 Select the root node in the Mechanical Browser User Guide 2 Type a value in the Thickness field Mechanical Browser l Bodies cue Tha Body_1 a T Flange
428. ou can reduce the time it takes to display or print a drawing by turning FILLMODE off 176 User Guide Setting Fill Mode 1 To toggle Fill Mode on off do one of the following e Choose Fill in the Settings Menu e Type fill or fillmode in the command bar then type 7 Enter 2 Regenerate the viewport NOTE if multiple viewports are open click the Regen All tool button ED on the View toolbar Redraw Regen flyout to regenerate all open viewports simultaneously Entity Color Commands COLOR and COLOR The Color command specifies the current color through a dialog box The Color command sets the current color through the command bar An entity s color determines how it is displayed and how it prints Entities are created in the current color You can choose between 255 index colors or define a true color Index Colors Index color is the specification of the color of a pixel on a display screen using a an 8 bit color value allowing up to 256 possible colors Each of the Index Colors has a unique number from 1 to 255 Seven of the index colors can also be referred to by name red 1 yellow 2 green 3 cyan 4 blue 5 magenta 6 and white black 7 Index color 7 displays white on a black screen background and black on a white screen background Index color 7 always prints in black The two additional color properties are BYLAYER and BYBLOCK These color properties cause an entity to adopt the color eithe
429. ou ve customized the context menus your versions are used instead of the default ones since yours are in the main file You don t have to delete the default context menus or make any change at all to the new default menu file when you update In any case if you customize menus toolbars accelerators aliases it is recommended to keep a copy of these files including default cui and default pgp before doing an update User Guide BricsCAD Startup Options When starting up BricsCAD it is possible to add arguments or switches E g the command line BricsCAD exe drawing1 dwg drawing2 dwg drawing3 dwg will start the BricsCAD application and load the specified drawings while the command line bricscad exe P MyProfile will load BricsCAD using user profile MyProfile P MyProfile is called a command line switch Both a slash or a hyphen are accepted to precede the switch e g P MyProfile will also work The space is optional e g PMyProfile would also work and the switch character is case insensitive e g p MyProfile is also fine Switch Description _ _ gt Z gt P userProfileName Starting without the P option BricsCAD re uses the last used user profile called current user profile which is not necessarily the Default profile If the user profile specified with the P option doesn t exist at startup a new empty user profile will be created with that name If the P argument is an arg file the arg file is u
430. ough these points and perpendicular to the XY plane 258 User Guide of the current coordinate system The part of the solid at the right hand side of the section plane is cut away The Live Section property of the section entity is not switched on automatically Vertical section plane Specify two points Live section 4 option Edit the properties of the section plane To create a horizontal section plane 2 Align the UCS to the front view Type ucs at the command prompt choose the View option in the prompt menu or type V in the command bar 3 Launch the Sectionplane command 4 Specify two points The section plane is created through these points and perpendicular to the XY plane of the current coordinate system The part of the solid at the right hand side of the section plane is cut away The Live Section property of the section entity is not switched on automatically The part of the solid at the Horizontal section plane Specify two points right hand side of the section plane is cut away Live Section 259 BricsCAD V14 5 option Edit the properties of the section plane To create a vertical jogged section plane 1 8 Make sure the WCS is the current coordinate system Launch the Sectionplane command Choose Draw in the prompt menu or type D in the command bar The command bar reads Specify start point Specify the first point 1 The command bar reads Specify next point Specify th
431. oups of faces of your 3D part Each feature maintains specific spatial and parametric relationship between its faces and some adjacent faces Form features allow you to embed design intent into your model You do not create features by hand they are created automatically depending on a particular geometric operation you apply junction Flange Main feature of any sheet metal part is a flange which consists of two parallel planar faces This distance between them is equal to the material thickness When you modify the model this distance relation is always maintained automatically Other faces which are adjacent to flange faces and do not belong to bends are called thickness faces They are always perpendicular to flange faces Bend Two flanges are connected by a bend A bend consists of two coaxial cylindrical faces which are always tangent to the adjacent planar faces of the flanges 234 User Guide Bend Relief Group of faces representing a technological cut between two flanges of different width connected with a bend The bend relief feature maintains the distance between two opposite faces of the cut Corner Relief Group of faces representing a cut in the corner where three flanges meet together Corner relief feature maintains the form and size of this cut Junction Junction feature consists of two thickness faces of adjacent flanges which are not connected via bend K Factor The material deformation
432. out that are not essential to the model itself such as keynotes annotations title blocks etc Such entities are part of a specific paper space layout and do not appear in other layouts or in model space When you are working in a layout either Model Space or Paper Space is your current workspace The Workspace field in the Status Bar indicates which workspace is current M lt Layout Name gt indicates you are working in Model Space while P lt Layout Name gt means Paper Space is the current workspace Model Space with floating WT MEPLAN T viewports of layout PLAN AT EPLAN T Paper Space of layout PLAN 156 User Guide Displaying the paper sheet and the printable area TER a 4 TER aa HH HR A Ea TEE LEE r Viewport Printable area The display of the printable area is controlled through the DISPPAPERMARGINS system variable Paper sheet The display of the paper sheet is controlled through the DISPPAPERBKG system variable Creating viewports in a layout Command MVIEW 1 2 Click the appropriate layout tab at the bottom of the drawing window Do one of the following e Click the Paper Space Views tool button B on the Views toolbar e Choose Paper Space Views in the Views menu e Type mview at the command prompt then press Enter The command bar reads Viewports ON OFF Fit 2 3 4 lt First corner gt A prompt menu opens 157 BricsCAD V14 Horizontal Vertical 158 MVIEW
433. owing e Click the Edit Polyline tool button LA on the Modify toolbar e Choose Edit Polyline in the Modify menu e Type editpline or pedit in the command window then press Enter The command bar reads Select polyline to edit 2 Select the polyline The command bar reads Edit polyline Edit vertices Close or Open Decurve Fit Join Linetype Mode Reverse Spline Taper Width Undo lt exit gt A prompt menu displays 3 Do one of the following e Choose Fit in the prompt menu of type F and press Enter e Choose Spline in the prompt menu or type S and press Enter 403 BricsCAD V14 Original polyline After applying Fit After applying Spline 4 Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Done in the prompt menu or press Enter to conclude the Edit Polyline tool NOTES Use the Decurve option in step 3 of the above procedure to restore the original polyline The SPLINESEGS Spline Segments settings variable controls the number of segments lines or arcs to be generated for spline fit polylines Setting the Linetype generation mode Command PEDIT The Linetype mode option of the Edit Polyline tool lets you change the way how a dashed linetype is applied to a multi segment polyline To set the Linetype mode 1 Do one of the following e Click the Edit Polyline tool button LA on the Modify toolbar e Choose Edit Polyline in the Modify menu e Type editpline or pedit in the command windo
434. pecify the new location for the selected vertex The vertex is moved Choose Exit in the prompt menu or type X and press Enter to leave the Polyline vertex editing mode Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Exit in the prompt menu or press Enter to conclude the Edit Polyline tool Delete vertices in a polyline Start the polyline vertex editing mode Select the vertex before the first vertex you want to delete Choose Next vertex Previous vertex in the prompt menu to select a vertex The X indicates the currently selected vertex Choose Straighten in the prompt menu or type S and press Enter The command bar reads Straighten Next Previous Select Go exit lt Next gt Do one of the following to select the vertex after the last vertex you want to delete e Choose Next vertex Previous vertex in the prompt menu e Choose Select in the prompt menu or type S and press Enter You are prompted to select a vertex Choose Go in the prompt menu or type G and press Enter The vertices between the selected vertices are removed A straight segment is drawn between the selected vertices Choose Exit in the prompt menu or type X and press Enter to leave the Polyline vertex editing mode Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Exit in the prompt menu or press Enter to conclude the Edit Polyline tool Change the width of a polyline segment 402 Start the
435. pect lt Snap spacing gt 4 Type anew value for the snap spacing then press Enter The value is applied to both snap and grid NOTE he grid spacing remains in sync with the snap spacing until you set the grid spacing differently using the Grid command or in the Settings dialog To set the Drawing Limits See the LIMITS command To toggle the Drawing Limits Click the Drawing Limits tool button HA on the Settings toolbar to toggle the LIMCHECK system variable on off If LIMCHECK ON it is not possible to draw outside the drawing limits The appearance pressed or unpressed of the Drawing Limits tool button reflects the current status of the Drawing Limits The Display beyond LIMITS area option of the GRIDDISPLAY system variable defines wether or not the grid display indicates the drawing limits Using Isometric Snap You can use the Isometric snap and grid option to create two dimensional isometric drawings With the isometric option you can draw a simulated three dimensional view on a two dimensional plane much the same as you might draw on a piece of paper Do not confuse isometric drawings with three dimensional drawings 101 BricsCAD V14 The isometric option always uses one of three preset planes which are denoted as Left Right and Top You cannot alter the arrangement of these planes If the Snap Angle is 0 the three isometric axes are 30 degrees 90 degrees and 150 degrees When you set the Snap Style sett
436. pelling dictionary en_US dic We only deliver the English dictionary because of the license type on the dictionary files the English version can be distributed freely all other languages are not free However you can download other languages and use them for free see To add a main dictionary NOTE To open the Spell Checking dialog Do one of the following e Choose Check Spelling in the Too s menu e Type spell in the command bar then press Enter spell Checking Current dictionary en_US dic Where to check Entire drawing al th Current word To check the spelling 1 Open the Spell Checking dialog 2 option Click the Se ect button Te to compose a selection set 318 Ji 4 Click the Start button Starts 5 User Guide option Change the current dictionaries The first possibly misspelled word displays in the Current word section The content of the text entity in which the Current word is found displays in the Context section Spell Checking Current dictionary en_US dic Where to check Entire drawing h Current word Change Dictionaries Do one of the following e Click the Ignore button Imore gnore y to leave this instance of the Current word unchanged e Click the Ignore All button ignore Al to leave all instances of the Current word unchanged Accept the word in the Suggestions field or select a word in the Suggestions list then click the Change button
437. pendent plot style tables CTB files to Named plot style tables STB file with CONVERT CTB before you convert your drawing 2 Do one of the following e Click the Cance button and convert your CTB files first The drawing is not converted e Click the OK button The Select style table file dialog displays 3 Select a stb file created by the CONVERTCTB command then click the OK button The drawing is converted To convert a Color dependent plot style table CTB to a Named plot style table STB 1 Type convertctb at the command prompt then press Enter An Open File dialog opens listing the CTB files in the Plotstyles subfolder of your Roaming root folder 475 BricsCAD V14 Select the CTB file you want to convert Click the Open button The Open File dialog now lists the STB files in the Plotstyles subfolder of your Roaming root folder Do one of the following e Click the Save button to accept the default file name e Type a name in the File name field them click the Save button Bricscad m MonoChrome stb was successfully created The plot styles are named Style 1 Style 2 etc To modify the names of the plot styles use the Plot Style Table Editor available in Plot Style Manager To rename plot styles you must do so before attaching them to layouts Otherwise the plot style name in the table will not match the plot style names attached to objects in your drawings The Plot Style Table editor
438. pendicular planes from which a measurement is made although datum reference letters can also indicate an exact point or axis gt Z1 489 V A 1 2 3 4 5 Geometric characteristic symbol Diameter symbol Tolerance value Material condition symbol 8 Datum reference When two tolerances apply to the same geometry you can also add a composite tolerance consisting of a primary tolerance value followed by a secondary tolerance value To make a tolerance even more specific it can also contain a projected tolerance consisting of a height value followed by a projected tolerance symbol For example you can use a projected tolerance to indicate the perpendicularity of an embedded part te To create a geometrical tolerance frame 1 Do one of the following e Click the Tolerance tool button z in the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Tolerance in the Dimensions menu e Type tolerance in the command bar then press Enter The Geometric Tolerance dialog opens 2 Compose the geometrical tolerance frame in the Geometric Tolerance dialog 3 Click the OK button The Geometric Tolerance dialog closes 4 Click to insert the geometric tolerance frame in the drawing 303 BricsCAD V14 Geometric Tolerance dialog Geometric Tolerance a 1 a 2 Datum E Mis Projected Tolerance Zone Datum Identifier cana Hep 1 Geometric Tolerance Symbol buttons Click to open the Symbol lt Symbol TTL aanas
439. phere command rotates 3D drawings in real time The Rtrotctr Real time Sphere Center command freely rotates 3D drawings in real time about a user defined center point The Rtrotf Real time Free Sphere command freely rotates 3D drawings in real time The Rtrotx Rtroty and Rtrotz commands rotates 3D drawings in real time about the x y or z screen axis The Ddvpoint command sets 3D viewpoints or plan view through a dialog box short for dynamic dialog view point The Plan command displays the plan viewpoint of drawings The Vpoint command changes the 3D viewpoint In order to view your 3D drawings from any angle you can rotate a view The Real Time Motion tools of BricsCAD allow you to rotate a view in real time You can rotate the view about the X Y or Z screen axis or in any direction real time sphere If the Continuous Motion variable is set the view rotation continues until you conclude the Rea Time Motion command See also View manipulation using the mouse NOTE _ Real time commands should not be used when drawing in 2D Use the Plan View tool to restore top vie Restoring orthographic and isometric views The tools on the Look From toolbar allow to restore orthographic and isometric views using the VIEW command options 131 BricsCAD V14 Look From av g gt Qo G NOTE If the UCSORTHO system variable is ON the related orthographic UCS is restored automatically Rotating a view freely
440. polyline vertex editing mode Select the start vertex of the segment you want to change the width of Choose Next vertex Previous vertex in the prompt menu to select a vertex The X indicates the currently selected vertex Enter starting width lt current width gt Do one of the following User Guide e Type the new width in the command bar and press Enter e Click to define the width graphically The command bar reads Enter ending width lt current width gt 5 Do one of the following e Type the new width in the command bar and press Enter e Click to define the width graphically 6 Choose Exit in the prompt menu or type X and press Enter to leave the Polyline vertex editing mode 7 Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Exit in the prompt menu or press Enter to conclude the Edit Polyline tool NOTE The new width is applied when you conclude the Edit Polyline tool in step 6 Curving and decurving polylines Command PEDIT The Fit or Spline options of the Edit Polyline tool convert a multi segment polyline into a smooth curve The Fit option creates a smooth curve connecting all the vertices The Spline option computes a smooth curve that is pulled toward the vertices but passes through only the first and last vertices The Decurve option removes Fit or Spline curves and arcs leaving straight segments between the vertices To fit a curve to a polyline 1 Do one of the foll
441. pose the select entities Controls the selection of groups and associative hatches 0 No group selection nor associative hatch selection 1 Group selection if a member of a selectable group is selected all members of the group are selected 2 Associative hatch selection the hatch and 347 BricsCAD V14 its boundary are selected no matter what is picked the hatch or the boundary not Supported yet 3 Group selection and Associative hatch selection Match options for SELECTSIMILARMODE Controls which properties must match for an SELECTSIMILAR entity of the same type to be selected with the SELECTSIMILAR command Selection area SELECTIONAREA Controls the display of selection area effects Selection area SELECTIONAREAOPACITY Controls the transparency of the selection opacity area the higher the value the more opaque the selection area CROSSINGAREACOLOR Specifies the color for crossing selection areas WINDOWAREACOLOR Specifies the color for window selection areas Selection preview SELECTIONPREVIEW Controls when entities highlight when the display cursor hovers over them O never 1 when no commands are active 2 when a command prompts for entity selection 3 both when no commands are active and when a command prompts for entity selection Selection preview PREVIEWEFFECT Controls the appearance of highlighted entities effect O dashed lines 1 thickened lines 2 dashed and thickened l
442. position 147 BricsCAD V14 4 option Right click a Quad command group then choose Switch off in the context menu to remove the command group from the Quad cursor menu 5 option Right click a currently switched off Quad command group then choose Switch on in the context menu to add the command group to the Quad cursor menu 6 option Add a command to the On Switch sequence select a command in the available commands pane and drag it to the On Switch sequence town intern dodo vinno aiian i fal ng wee E E J D On Hide Mechanical Browser 2D Context T Disable Xref Selection Preview Draw Orthogonal 3D Modeling fll Entity Snap Settings Sheet Metal a i Entity Snap Precision O Quad Group Order aF Select Color On Switch a O re D A A C O Quad Group Get fo Se 3 No Workspace Men AO Quad Group Ord NOTE See To create a new tool if you want to add a custom tool to the On Switch sequence Deleting a workspace 1 Right click the Current Workspace field in the Status Bar then choose Customize Workspaces in the context menu 2 Right click the workspace then choose Delete in the context menu A Confirm dialog box displays Confirm ee So Are you sure you want to delete the selected item Don t show this again 3 Press the Yes button to delete the selected workspace 148 User Guide Define a View Commands DVIEW and CAMERA The Define View comma
443. press Enter The Open Drawing dialog window displays Select the drawing then press the Open button on the Open Drawing dialog window The drawing is repaired and if the repair succeeded opened option Press F2 to open the Prompt History window in order to read the recover report Drawing Properties Command DWGPROPS The Dwgprops command opens the Drawing Properties dialog box showing the general information and user defined properties stored with a drawing Drawing properties include general information summary statistics and user defined custom properties Drawing properties can be referenced in a field in multiline text entities or tables To open the Drawing Properties dialog do one of the following 500 e Choose Drawing Properties in the File menu e Type dwgprops in the command bar and press Enter User Guide Drawing Properties Ground _Level dwg Drawing R21 2007 C Bricscad Training Bricscad TrainingCD Exercises SIZE 510 47 KB 522720 bytes Created Thursday January 15 2009 21 59 08 Modified Friday September 12 2008 16 13 22 Accessed Thursday January 15 2009 21 59 08 Defining default properties 1 Open the Drawing Properties dialog 2 Open the Summary tab page Drawing Properties 3 Fill out the property fields 4 Click the OK button 501 BricsCAD V14 Adding custom properties 1 Open the Drawing Properties dialog 2 Open the Custom ta
444. press Enter The distance is measured in the cursor direction Use ORTHO or POLAR TRACKING to constrain the movement of the cross hairs The first copy of the selection set is created The command bar reads Enter second point Undo Exit 6 Do one of the following e Repeat step 5 to create additional copies e Right click choose Exit in the prompt menu or press Enter to stop e Choose Undo in the prompt menu or type U in the command bar then press enter to delete the previous copy of the selection set To paste a selection set as a block 1 Do one of the following e Choose Copy with Base Point in the Edit menu e Type copybase in the command bar then press Enter e Press and hold the Ctr and Shift keys then press C The command bar reads Select base point 2 Specify the base point origin point The command bar reads Select entities to copy to the clipboard 368 User Guide 3 Select the entities 4 Press Enter to conclude the selection of entities 5 Do one of the following e Choose Paste as Block in the Edit menu e Type pasteblock in the command bar then press Enter e Press and hold the Ctrl and Shift keys then press V The selection set is attached to the cursor The command window reads Select insertion point 6 Specify the insertion point The selection is pasted as a block 7 option Repeat steps 5 and 6 to paste another copy as a block NOTE If you paste multiple copies of the same s
445. press and hold the left mouse key then drag the selection to the target drawing in the Open Drawings section of the Drawing Explorer dialog window When on the target drawing release the left mouse button The selected layer states are copied to the target drawing To export a layer state UI Open the Layer States explorer Select the layer state Click the Export button 4 The Export Layer States dialog opens In the File Name field type a name for the layer state Choose a folder to save the layer state in Click the Save button To import a layer state NOTE 140 10 Click the Open button 11 Open the Layer States explorer Click the Import button Le The Import Layer States dialog opens Browse to the folder where you have saved the layer state file Select the layer state The layer state is imported If a layer state of the same name already exists in the drawing a warning displays It is not possible to overwrite a layer state definition User Guide Named Views Commands VIEW VIEW CAMERA You can save the view in the current window as a named view Saved views can be restored at any time A Background can be assigned to a named view which will be used when the view is rendered Exploring views 1 Do one of the following e Choose Drawing Explorer gt Views in the Too s menu e Type either view or V in the command bar then press Enter The Drawing Explorer Views wi
446. profile is created using default hard coded values for all settings Use the Copy option to create a new user profile as a copy of an existing profile Starting BricsCAD with a specific user profile When you start BricsCAD the user profile that was current when you closed the previous BricsCAD session is used To launch BricsCAD using a specific user profile do one of the following 60 e Add the P option to the Target settings of the BricsCAD shortcut To open the shortcut settings dialog right click the shortcut icon on the desktop and choose Properties in the context menu A typical BricsCAD shortcut could be C Program Files Bricsys BricsCAD Vx bricscad exe P lt UserProfileName gt NOTE User Guide Bricscad 3D Properties Target type Application Target location Target e Launch the User Profile Manager then either double click a user profile or select a user profile and click the Start button e The P option is case insensitive e If you load a user profile when BricsCAD is already running a second instance of BricsCAD is launched at least on condition that the SINGLETON variable is OFF This variable controls whether multiple BricsCAD sessions can run simultaneously See the Settings dialog for more information about variables and settings e If the user profile in the argument of the P option does not exist the user profile is created automatically using default hard coded values for all settin
447. projection is an illustration technique in which up to six images of an object are generated with each projection plane parallel to one of the coordinate axes of the object Isometric projection is a method represent three dimensional objects in two dimensions in technical and engineering drawings It is an axonometric projection in which the three coordinate axes appear equally foreshortened and the angles between any two of them are 120 degrees To generate the standard views of your 3D solid model run the ViewBase command from model space You can choose between first angle European projection or third angle American projection Orthographic projection or orthogonal projection is a means of representing a three dimensional object in two dimensions It is a parallel projection where all the projection lines are orthogonal to the projection plane resulting in every plane of the scene appearing in affine transformation on the viewing surface It is further divided into multiview orthographic projections and axonometric projections Two projection planes one horizontal H P and one vertical V P divide the space in four quarters e Inthe first angle projection system the model is placed in the first quarter space first angle e Inthe third angle projection system the model is placed in the third quarter third angle 171 BricsCAD V14 With multiview orthographic projections up to six pictures of a 3D model are produ
448. properties for bending is based on the assumption that an internal Surface is not deformed when the sheet is bent K factor is a ratio of location of the neutral internal surface to the material thickness as defined by t T where t location of the neutral surface and T material thickness The K Factor formulation does not take the forming stresses into account but is simply a geometric calculation of the location of the neutral surface after the forces are applied and is thus the roll up of all the unknown error factors for a given setup The K factor depends on many factors including the material the type of bending operation the tools etc and typically lies between 0 3 to 0 5 The default value of K Factor for bend radius equal to thickness is 0 27324 In BricsCAD K Factor is defined for bend radius equal to the material thickness to compute the value of K Factor for bend radius greater than the thickness BricsCAD uses special interpolation technique proved to be valid for industrial sheet metal applications For each sheet metal part you can specify your own K factor or use the default one To change the K Factor for your sheet metal part 4 Select the root node in the Mechanical Browser 5 Type a value in the K Factor field Bend Table Bend tables are a more reliable way to express material deformation properties When you bend a flat sheet of a particular material you can measure its length before and after this process
449. ption Repeat the above procedure to further refine the selection set User Guide Rearranging Entities The following tools to modify the location or orientation of existing entities are available Move a selection set Rotate a selection set about a specified point Change the insertion point height style and rotation angle of single line texts Change the insertion point an rotation angle of blocks Modify the display order of overlapping entities Moving Entities Commands MOVE CUTCLIP PASTECLIP PASTEORIG and PASTEBLOCK The Move command moves entities in the drawing The Cutclip command copies entities to the Clipboard and then erases them from the drawing The Pasteclip command pastes entities from the Clipboard into the current drawing short for paste clipboard The Pasteorig command pastes entities from the Clipboard into another drawing using the coordinates of the source drawing The Pasteblock command pastes entities from the Clipboard as a block into the current drawing Use Cutclip then either Pasteclip Pasteorig or Pasteblock to move entities to another drawing The Copy option of the Grips Editing commands allows to create multiple copies of the entities being stretched moved rotated mirrored or scaled NoTE When DRAGSNAP is ON dragged entities display at the current entity snap location Moving entities in a drawing The default method is to create a selection set and then specify a starting point
450. put Dynamic input Dynamic input mode Ox0003 3 negative Switch all off temporarily Ox0001 Dynamic input at pointer not supported ox0002 Editable dynamic dimensions Show dynamic dimensions 0x001F 31 Ox0001 Resulting length ox0002 Extended length ox0004 Absolute angle ox0008 v Relative angle 0x00 10 Arc radius Dynamic dimension visibility Only the first dynamic dimension Dynamic dimension hover color i 142 Dynamic dimension hot color i i42 Dynamic dimension distance 1 Dynamic dimension linetype Dotted 2 Define the DYNMODE system variable to switch the display of dynamic dimensions and or dynamic input on off Please notice that dynamic input at the pointer is not implemented yet 3 Define the DYNDIGRIP system variable to select the dynamic dimension types to be displayed e Resulting length total length of the line or polyline segment 93 BricsCAD V14 Extended length incremental length of the line Absolute angle angle relative to the X axis of the current UCS 94 Relative angle angle relative to the original angle of the linear entity User Guide Define the DYNDIVIS system variable to choose the number of dynamic dimensions that display simultaneously e Only the first dynamic dimension DYNDIVIS 0 hit the TAB key to display and edit the next dynamic dimension as defined by the DYNDIGRIP system variable e Only the first two dynamic dimen
451. r In a CAD program a digitizing tablet can be used to trace paper drawings into a drawing file or to launch drawing commands from a digitizing tablet overlay To use a digitizing tablet in BricsCAD In order to prepare BricsCAD for using a digitizing tablet do the following e Install the appropriate driver for your tablet e Make sure Wintab32 dll exists in C Windows System32 e Download the tablet overlay and CUI files e Print the BricsCAD tablet overlay e Load the overlay CUI file e Start BricsCAD then initialize the tablet e Configure the tablet part of the tablet surface is used as the menu area another part as the screen pointing area e Calibrate the tablet a calibrated tablet can be used to trace the geometry of a paper drawing or image into a drawing 505 BricsCAD V14 To download the tablet overlay and CUI files 506 Go to the BricsCAD Documentation and Tools page on the Bricsys website 4 INT BRICSYS BRICSCAD SOLUTIONS Overview Key features 5 reasons Tutorials Comparison Licensing Academic Program hk Documentation amp Tools Seea tt CARS mit we i Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click the DOWNLOAD button under Tablet overlay Tablet overlay Publisher Bricsys Overlay and CUl files to use your tablet with BricsCaAD Save the tablet zip file The zip file contains the following files e overlay png an image of the tablet overlay e overlay A3 pdf to pr
452. r circle The center marks are created 297 BricsCAD V14 NOTE The Center mark setting of the dimension style controls whether center marks or center lines are created The Center mark size settings of the dimension style controls the size of the center mark The center mark settings are saved to the DIMCEN system variable Creating ordinate dimensions Command DIMORDINATE An ordinate dimension annotates the perpendicular distance from an origin or base point the origin of the current user coordinate system UCS Ordinate dimensions consist of an x or y coordinate and a leader An x ordinate dimension measures distances along the x axis while a y ordinate dimension measures distances along the y axis As you select ordinate points the program automatically determines whether the point is an x or y ordinate based on which direction you drag the second point You can also specify whether the ordinate represents an x or y ordinate Ordinate dimension text is always aligned with the ordinate leader lines regardless of the text orientation specified by the current dimension style To create an ordinate dimension 1 Do one of the following e Click the Ordinate tool button 1 on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Ordinate in the Dimensions menu e Type dimordinate in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select point for ordinate dimension 2 Specify the origin point for the ordinate dimension The ordi
453. r components Users can hide any subcomponent inserted into the current drawing or any its subcomponent on any level of nesting There is also a possibility to make a component transparent amp endash to visualize it in wireframe model BmHide command is called to hide a particular subcomponent BmShow command is called to show a hidden subcomponent 218 Assembly Design and Kinematic Analysis Tutorial Gs Watch the movie about Kinematic Analysis on the Bricsys channel on YouTube The source files for this tutorial are installed in the BricsCAD Installation folder Samples Mechanical piston folder Assembly design is a typical application where constraints are commonly used Since V13 BricsCAD Platinum allows users to assemble mechanisms and run kinematic analysis This tutorial shows you how to start working with assemblies in BricsCAD You will learn how to assemble the different parts in a 3D model which lets you control the final result There are two approaches in MCAD Mechanical Computer Aided Design to build an assembly top down and bottom up In the top down approach you start with an empty assembly and the geometry of each component is then created one by one in the assembly In the bottom up approach each component is first created as a single entity All components are then inserted into the assembly The position of each component is controlled through 3D constraints We will now assemble a simplified
454. r of the layer or of the block in which it is a member BYLAYER is color number 256 and BYBLOCK is color number O In all commands where you would use a color you can indicate BYLAYER and BYBLOCK as well as by numbers 256 and O respectively Color BYLAYER Entities which have a color BYLAYER adopt the color of their layer This allows you to change the color of all such entities by adjusting the color of the layer Color BYBLOCK Entities which have a color BYBLOCK are drawn in index color 7 black or white depending on the screen background color When included in a block definition such entities adopt the color of the block NOTE Whether entities using an index color will print in this color depends on the Color Table CTB or Style Table STB that is used for printing Only if the Color setting in the CTB or STB definition file is set to Use Object Color the printed color matches the entity color 177 BricsCAD V14 Index color dialog Select Color Colors 10 249 Colors 1 to 9 Colors 250 255 Current Color Color Number field Color By Block button Color By Layer button eee oe 2 True Colors True color is the specification of the color of a pixel on a display screen using a 24 bit value which allows up to 16 777 216 possible colors The number of bits used to define a pixel s color shade is its bit depth True color is sometimes known as 24 bit color Some new color display sys
455. r the background The value is based on the text height and must be in the range 1 5 A factor of 1 0 exactly fits the multiline text entity 5 Click OK to create the background mask 312 User Guide Editing text Command DDEDIT You can edit and modify a text entity as you would any other drawing entity That is you can delete move rotate and scale text You can change the text color or layer in the Properties Bar To edit a multiline text you can use the built in text editor or choose an external program such as Wordpad The MTEXTFIXED system variable controls whether the view is zoomed rotated and or panned to fit the edited Mtext To edit a text entity 1 Do one of the following e Type ddedit in the command bar The command bar reads Select entity to modify e Double click the text entity Then go to step 3 2 Do one of the following e Click a single line text entity The Edit Text window opens Edit Text Text ingle line text ent e Click a multiline text entity The Text formatting toolbar opens Text Formatting Arial hia BEE A ok WY I Oo 01 lt gt 1 Ha et HF A 3 Edit the text 4 Press the OK button on the Edit Text window or Text Formatting toolbar to apply the changes 5 Do one of the following e Select another text entity to edit e Right click or press Enter to stop editing text entities To edit a selection of Mtext entities 1 Select the Mtext
456. r the primary units DIMDEC Sets the precision for the primary units Fractional type DIMFRAC Determines the fractional type if Dim Units is Fractional Decimal separator DIMDSEP Sets the decimal separator character Dim round DIMRND Specifies the roundoff rule for linear dimensions E g if set to 0 1 all dimensions will be rounded to the nearest 0 1 unit If set to 0 dimensions are not rounded DImposr Text string placed in front of the dimension text DImpost Text string placed after the dimension text Dim scale linear DIMFLAC Scale factor for the primary units E g if your drawing units are mm and you want your dimensions to be expressed in cm set the scale factor to 0 1 Suppress leading DIMZIN Suppresses the zero that is placed before the decimal zeros separator If on a distance of 0 0124 will display as 0124 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal values If on a distance of 125 00 displays as 125 and 82 50 displays as 82 5 if Dim Precision is 2 Suppress zero feet DIMZIN Suppresses zero feet values in imperial units DIMZIN Suppresses zero inches values in imperial units inches Dim angle units DIMAUNIT Sets the unit for Sets the unit for angular dimensions dimensions Dim angle DIMADEC Sets the precision for aa aa _ dimensions precision Suppress angle DIMAZIN Suppresses leading zeros in angular dimensions 288 Suppress trailing DIMZIN zeros User Guide
457. r to objects on locked layers Click the OK button to start editing the working set see step 5 The Reference Edit dialog closes option Click the Add to Refedit tool button Fp to add entities to the working set The selected entities will be removed from the host drawing and added to the reference being edited when the working set is saved back k option Click the Remove from Refedit tool button to remove entities from the working set The selected entities will be removed from the reference being edited when the working set is saved back These entities are added to the host drawing Do one of the following e Click the Refclose and Save button a to save the changes back to the Xref source drawing or the block definition in the current drawing e Click the Refclose and discard button Ex to stop the refedit session without saving The source drawing or block definition is left unchanged User Guide Working with groups Commands GROUP and GROUP The Group command creates and modifies named groups of entities in a dialog box The Group command creates and modifies named groups of entities at the command line Working with groups is a technique to manipulate a set of several objects as though it were a single object A group can also be considered as a Named Selection You can pick a single object and the entire set is selected as though it were a block or you can edit individual objects without affecting
458. r to planes X coaxial surfaces OK cylinders and spheres of equal radius NOTE 3D Constraints which are explicitly defined by the user are taken into account when solid model is being modified with direct modeling commands These constraints have a higher priority than automatically recognized ones and allow the user to better control the behavior of solid model modifications The following examples show the difference in the behavior whether automatic 3D geometry constraints are recognized or not tangent surfaces recognized AG tangent surfaces not recognized I 250 User Guide perpendicular planes recognized Ed perpendicular planes not recognized Ce 251 BricsCAD V14 perpendicular cylinders recognized dal perpendicular cylinders not recognized ds coaxial surfaces recognized coaxial surfaces not recognized G 252 User Guide equal radius recognized Sa equal radius not recognized EP Direct Modeling operations This section describes direct modeling operations offered by BricsCAD These operations are available from the Quad tool Alternatively you can use Direct Modeling Menu or Direct Modeling Toolbar Direct Modeling Vt Gl ba Oalr amp The Align UCS tool le launches the UCS command with the Face option selected If the UCSDETECT system variable is ON the ucs is aligned automatically to the currently highlighted face The UCS icon changes accordingly Press the
459. ratch Using a template drawing of your choice Using a wizard Double clicking a dwt file in a Windows Explorer window To create a drawing using a default template drawing First method i Do one of the following e Choose New wizard in the File menu e Type newwiz in the command window then press Enter On the Create New Drawing dialog choose Start from Default template then click the Next button The drawing is created as a copy of the default template The New Drawing Wizard enables you to set up anew drawing configured to your needs Open a Drawing Start from Default Template d Start from Scratch Start from Template Use a Wizard Tip Create new drawing with default template C Projects Template Project_Full Drawing drawing_template dwq Second method Do one of the following e Click the QNew tool button E on the Standard toolbar e type qnew in the command bar then press Enter The drawing is created as a copy of the default template defined by the BASEFILE system variable If the default template drawing is not specified the Create New Drawing wizard is launched if the STARTUP system variable is ON otherwise the Select Template dialog displays To set the default template drawing 490 w Open the Settings dialog Under Program Options Files Templates select Template BASEFILE Click the Browse button On the Choose a File dialog select a drawing file dwg or
460. rawing The command bar reads Rotation angle of text lt current angle gt Do one of the following e Press Enter or right click to accept the current angle e Type the new angle in the command bar then press Enter e Define the now angle graphically by specifying two points in the drawing The command bar reads Text Type the text in the command bar then press Enter The text is placed in the drawing The command bar reads Text Do one of the following e Repeat step 5 to create another text entity The new text is placed below the previous one e Press Enter or right click to conclude the Text command If you have already created text the most recent text entity highlights when you repeat the Text command If you want to place the new text right below the previously created text press Enter in step 2 of the above procedure User Guide Single line text justification LEFT Left Center Right Middle Q Bottom left or CENTER TOP Bottom center Bottom right MIDDLE iC f ii f el Middle left LEFT RIGHT Middle center BOTTOM Middle right Top left Top center CENTER MIDDLE Top right To create multiline text Do one of the following e Click the Multiline Text tool button AL on the Draw toolbar e Choose Multiline Text in the Text submenu in the Draw menu e Type mtext in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads First corner for block of text Specify the firs
461. re E A A 337 Tocdelete a tape SEY IG nav N E AE A EE a 337 Modifying Commands Overview ssss2 DOO Entity Modification Settings ssssss2 222 25222 2 22222202222 2 DOO Adjusting the Draw Order ssssssss2222222225222 22225 222222222 DOD XIV SIG Draw Order ead sek rar Se n a ates ahateua eoecen A A ea eaten ewe ees 340 Using Draw Order Tools reri niinen a A ANRE EANTA TAN 340 Table of Contents Grips EdItING eee eer re rrr rrr errr errr rrrrrrrrer ce rrrrrrrr rer rrr rrrrr rere ce selecting MUINPIE GN DS nison a ene nets A E senda made oa oe exteee aun eee 341 GAD Eqit ComManG OD UONS wscinneMexguvecaantes tov eral nana ted uevine audguaaehes E A EANA 342 TO Stretch Entities USING GHDS rreren EE e N T RAAEN ENa 342 TO MOove entities Using OUTIDS winasarinatiansaormubstenctaittawouasaleuad cnaascuubstanaaeabeueuanare area awemut ne 342 TOsCOPY CNEILIGS USING ONP Sastri sc buted sere sadah E E a Poon A a a a 343 To Mirror entities USING grips ievscnantnwerswncen saiora a EAA OET A EEE 343 TO rotate Cn UitleS USING GNIS wii wieder aa E E a S O E N 344 TOSCA CAES USING ODS eraan A AAA NA AA Aa 345 Selecting ENtitie sissisisnsrscsasiaveavscinivsssiseiiieies ia S46 Selection ANd grip SettingS ccccccccccennneeeeeseeeennnneeeeesseeensneeseessssss D4O SCISCTION Setting S serrer aaar EA EET ng tau vice AEri 346 GNpPS SeNGS aroe A E A AA E A EE 348 Selectio
462. re region entities The Sectionplane command creates a section entity that creates sections of 3D solids surfaces and meshes The Livesection command toggles the Live Section property of a section plane The Sectionplanesettings command defines the properties of a section plane entity in the Drawing Explorer Section Planes dialog The Sectionplanetoblock command saves the selected section plane to a 2D cross section elevation block or a 3D cutaway section block To launch the Sectionplane command Do one of the following e Click the Section Plane tool button e on the Sections toolbar e Choose Sections gt Section Plane in the Model menu e Type sectionplane in the command bar The command bar reads Specify start point or select Face Draw Orthographic Align a section plane to a face 1 Launch the Sectionplane command 2 Choose Select Face in the prompt menu or type F in the command bar The command bar reads Select entity 3 Select the face of a solid you want to align the section plane to Solid Select face Section plane aligned to face The section plane is aligned to the selected face The Live Section property of the section entity is switched on automatically 4 option Edit the properties of the section plane To create a vertical section plane 1 Make sure the WCS is the current coordinate system 2 Launch the Sectionplane command 3 Specify two points The section plane is created thr
463. reads Select entities o Select the entities you want to hatch o Right click or press Enter to stop selecting entities The Hatch and Gradient dialog displays again e Click the Remove Boundary Entities button x The Hatch and Gradient dialog closes The command bar reads Select entities o Select the current boundary entities to be removed from the selection o Right click or press Enter to stop selecting entities The Hatch and Gradient dialog displays again User Guide 10 Define the Hatch Origin The options are e Use current origin The origin as defined by the HPORIGIN system variable is reused e Specified origin Click the Pick new origin button Ah then pick a point in the drawing The new origin is stored in the HPORIGIN system variable NOTE If a selection set was active when you launch the Hatch tool this selection will be used as the Boundary Set if you click the New button in step 11 in the above procedure In this case the Hatch and Gradient dialog closes and immediately reopens Editing a hatch or gradient fill If you select a hatch or gradient fill its properties display in the Properties bar To edit a hatch or gradient fill in the properties bar 1 Select the hatch or gradient fill in the drawing The properties of the selected entity display in the Properties bar Ej General Color _ ByLayer Layer g Linetype ByLayer Linetype scale i Plot style ByColor Lineweight ByLayer
464. reference reports if Red SDK hardware rendering is fully supported and the initial value of RenderUsingHardware user preference is set accordingly The RenderPresets command allows to create and edit render presets and to set the current render preset through a dialog box Setting the render preferences 1 Open the Settings dialog 2 Under Program Options expand the Rendering settings category Rendering Current material ByLayer Lighting units 2 Use International lighting units Render using hardware i1 Prefer hardware faster Real world scale Render real world scale materials Sky status 0 No sky Texture map path C Program Files Bricsys BricsCAD V14 en_US Textures 1 Tile mode light synch Synchronize lighting Current material Specifies the material of new entities Lighting units Web lights can be created only if the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 American lighting units or 2 International lighting units Not implemented yet Render using hardware Choose User software only slower if hardware rendering fails Real world scale Controls the rendering of materials with units set to real world scale Sky status Specifies whether sky illuminiation is computed at render time Not implemented yet Texture map path The TextureMapPath user preference defines the search path for texture map images In the BricsCAD program folder exist three subfolders under Textures each containing a number of texture
465. removal calculation might take some time for complex 3D models In such cases it is recommended to set VIEWUPDATEAUTO OFF The viewport border of out of date drawing views turns red to indicate an update is needed When executing the ViewUpdate command BricsCAD prompts you to either select the drawing views to be updated or update all drawing views NOTE Exporting Views to Model Space The associativity mechanism of drawing views in a paper space layout allow limited control by the user Such views can be moved or scaled but you cannot edit the geometry In order to get the full control to the drawing views geometry the ViewExport allow to move or copy drawing views to model space Exported drawing views loose their associativity with the 3D model and become standard blocks which can be exploded edited erased etc amp ldots Customizing Drawing Views The first time the ViewBase command is launched four new layers are created two for basic orthographic views e BM_Ortho_Hidden hidden lines in orthographic drawing views e BM_Ortho_Visible visible lines in orthographic drawing views e BM_Isometric_Hidden hidden lines in isometric drawing views e BM_Isometric_Visible visible lines in isometric drawing views By default the display of the BM_Isometric_Hidden layer is switched off Switch the layer on to have hidden lines in isometric views Edit the properties of these layers such as linetype lineweight or color to modify the d
466. rename A context menu displays 2 Choose Rename in the context menu The Rename Layout dialog opens 3 Type anew unique name in the Name field of the Rename Layout dialog 4 Click the OK button on the Rename Layout dialog Arranging the layout tabs Drag the layout tab to the desired position Or 1 Right click the layout tab you want to move A context menu displays 2 Do one of the following e Choose Move Right e Choose Move Left 3 To move the selected layout tab do one of the following e Select the number of tab positions e Choose Move to Last Layout or Move to First Layout Deleting a layout 1 Right click the layout tab you want to move A context menu displays 2 Choose Delete in the context menu The selected layout is deleted 169 BricsCAD V14 Generated Drawing Views Commands ViewBase ViewSection ViewUpdate and ViewExport The Generated Drawing Views functionality allows to automatically generate associative orthographic and standard isometric views of a 3D solid model All drawing views are placed in a paper space layout they are not visible in model space Analytical hidden line removal HLR procedures are used to create the drawing views using Standard 2D entities mostly lines and arcs Much like the result of the FlatShot command Drawing views created in V14 1 will be automatically converted into HLR geometry by the ViewUpdate command Bill of Matenals 2 aoma s TE
467. retch_vertex mleaderstyle e Select Bitmap file and choose a bmp gif jpg jpeg or png image file 7 Click the OK button The tool is added in the toolbox 37 BricsCAD V14 Customize File Hatch Object Available tools Leader Object H O BRICSCAD O Multiple Leader Object J MYPERSONALCUI O Attribute Definition Object O Draw O Tolerance Object El MYPERSONALCUL O Main menus O Context menus El Tool ID internawalls Title InternaWalls Help Draws nternal walls Command c c_dayersm InteriorWalls _ Mline Image mline In the above example the Command field contains a macro that makes the InteriorWalls layer current then launches the Mline command If the layer does not exist yet it is created first NOTE e cc is the equivalent of pressing the Esc key twice which first ends a running command if necessary e an underscore _ in front of a command name ensures that the macro still works in a non English version of BRICSCAD e a point in front of a command name ensures that the macro still works if this command is temporarily undefined see the UNDEFINE and REDEFINE commands e a minus sign in front of a command launches the command line version of a command thus preventing the command dialog window to open e a semicolon is the equivalent of pressing the Enter key e a backslash waits for user input e g specifying a point 38 User Guide
468. reversing the direction or order of the vertices e merging a series of polylines lines or arcs which are connected endpoint to endpoint into a single polyline e turning a line or an arc into a polyline To modify a polyline you first select the polyline and then select a polyline editing option The available options vary depending on whether the selected polyline is a two dimensional or three dimensional entity Converting an entity into a polyline Command PEDIT Lines and arcs can be converted into single segment polyline Converting an entity into a polyline 1 Do one of the following e Click the Edit Polyline tool button LA on the Modify toolbar e Choose Edit Polyline in the Modify menu e Type editpline or pedit in the command window then press Enter The command bar reads Select polyline to edit Select a line or arc The command bar reads The entity selected is not a polyline Turn it into one lt Y gt A prompt menu displays PEDIT Yes Turn into polyline No Leave as is Cancel 2 Do one of the following e Press Enter to accept the default option e Choose Yes Turn into polyline in the prompt menu 3 Press Enter to conclude the Edit Polyline command NOTE The Explode tool turns a single segment polyline back into a line or arc 395 BricsCAD V14 Opening and closing polylines Command PEDIT When you close a polyline a straight polyline segment is drawn from the last vertex of th
469. right snap point is found NOTES e Do not move the mouse while pressing the TAB key e Entity snap cycling is not possible when Dynamic Dimensions are active Click the DYNMODE field in the Status Bar to toggle Dynamic Dimensions on off To snap to the extension of two entities 1 If not already on turn on the Extension Entity Snap mode Launch a drawing tool e g Draw Line 3 Move the cursor over the endpoint of the first entity 1 A small cross indicates the entity is marked for extension 4 Move the cursor over the endpoint of the second entity 2 A small cross indicates the entity is marked for extension 5 Move the cursor near the intersection of the extensions of the two entities An X indicates the intersection 3 3 6 Click to accept the snap point NOTE You can snap to the extension of lines polylines arcs and elliptical arcs 108 User Guide Using the From option The From entity snap option allows to define an offset from an entity snap point 1 NOTE When executing a drawing or modifying command do one of the following e Click the From tool button on the Entity Snaps toolbar e Type from in the command bar then press Enter e Press Shift then right click and choose From in the context menu The command bar reads Base point Identify the base point The command bar reads Base point offset or regular point Type the offset from the base point as relative coordi
470. rner of the bounding rectangle then specify the opposite corner Three viewports which fit in the specified bounding rectangle are created e Choose Fit to view in the prompt menu or type F then press Enter Three viewports which fit in the current drawing display window are created 6 option To create 4 viewports do one of the following e Choose Create 4 viewports in the prompt menu e Type 4 in the command bar then press Enter Create 4 viewports The command bar reads Fit to screen lt First corner of bounding rectangle gt 159 BricsCAD V14 7 NOTES e Click to specify the first corner of the bounding rectangle then specify the opposite corner Four viewports which fit in the specified bounding rectangle are created e Choose Fit to view in the prompt menu or type F then press Enter Four viewports which fit in the current drawing display window are created option To create a non rectangular clipped viewport using an existing polyline or circle do one of the following e Choose Object in the prompt menu e Type O in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select Object to clip viewport Select a closed polyline or a circle in the layout option To create a non rectangular clipped viewport do one of the following e Choose Polygonal in the prompt menu e Type P in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Specify start point Specify the vertices of t
471. round color 248 248 248 Command line edit foreground color i 0 0 0 Command line state Command line is visible Prompt prefix Scroll history 256 Text evaluation All responses to prompts for text strings and attribute values are taken literally Open Close the status bar Do one of the following e Choose Status Bar in the View Menu e Press the Shift F3 keyboard shortcut The Status Bar closes if it was open and vice versa Working with the status bar 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 Ready 4 1660 12 1043 53 0 FURNITURE g HIDDEN Arial DIAMETER 2D Drafting SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR ESNAP STRACK LWT TILE TABLET DUCS DYN QUAD 1 1 w The Status Bar fields are 1 Status e displays the status of the software e when the cursor is in a menu or on a toolbar gives a brief description of the tool or menu item e when the command window is closed displays the tool options and keyboard entry e double click to open close the Command Bar 2 Coordinates displays the coordinates of the current cursor position depending on the setting of the COORDS variable e Right click then choose Off Relative or Absolute in the context menu e Click to cycle the Coordinate setting The sequence is Off Relative Absolute 3 Layer displays the name of the current layer e click to open the Layer Explorer e right click to select the current layer 4 Color displays the current color e click to open the S
472. rows and the row height e Choose Specify Window then do one of the following e Specify the number of columns and data rows e Specify the column width and the row height e Specify the column width and the number of data rows e Specify the number of columns and the row height 6 Click the OK button Depending on your choice in step 5 you are prompted to specify an insertion point ora window The table is created and the Text Formatting toolbar displays see Create multiline text 7 Do one of the following e Start adding text in the table see Edit the table content e Click outside the table to close the Text Formatting toolbar To create a table from data When importing data from a CSV Comma Separated Values file please make sure the list separator character on your system is the same as the one used in the CSV file see Defining the list separator character 1 Do one of the following e Click the Table tool button Fh on the Draw toolbar e Choose Insert Table in the Draw menu e Type table in the command bar then press Enter The Insert Table dialog displays 2 Choose a Table Style from the Table Style list 3 Under Table Options choose From Data 4 Click the Browse button desh The Open dialog displays 5 Choose a CSV file then press the Open button 6 Click the OK button on the Insert Table dialog The dialog box closes and the table is attached to the cursor 7 Click a point in the drawing
473. rsor changes to a hand a when a Pan tool is active The Rtpan command pans the drawing in real time See also View manipulation using the mouse Using the pan command 1 To launch the Pan command do one of the following e Click the Pan tool button Eh on the View toolbar Zoom flyout e Choose Zoom gt Pan in the View menu e Type p or pan in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Left Right Up Down PGLeft PGRight PGUp PGDown lt Pan base point gt A prompt menu opens Page lett Page right Page up Page down Cancel 2 Specify the Pan base point The command bar reads Pan displacement point 3 Specify the Pan displacement point The display shifts over the specified distance and in the specified direction Using real time panning 1 To launch the Real time Pan command do one of the following errs e Click the Rea Time Pan tool button a on the Real Time Motion toolbar e Choose Real Time Motion gt Real Time Pan in the View menu e Type rtpan in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads gt gt ENTER Right click or Esc to complete 2 Press and hold the left mouse button to pan the view 3 To abort the Real Time Pan command do one of the following e Right click e On the keyboard press Enter space bar or Esc 127 BricsCAD V14 Zooming Command ZOOM and RTZOOM The Zoom command visually changes the size of the drawing within the current viewport
474. rties Bar os Attributes ms El Custom Fa E Door 1000 d Wall 150 ES Opening Right E Swing Inside Angle Open 45 2 Under Attributes gt Custom edit the properties needed The dynamic block is updated automatically Attributes El Custom Door 1000 p n wall 150 En Opening Right Ss Swing Inside ee Open 30 pee eee ee aoe eee ee E eelee see eee eee ee W Open 60 Open 90 Closed 430 User Guide Working with attributes An attribute is a particular entity that you can save as part of a block definition Attributes consist of text based data You can use attributes to track such things as part numbers and prices Attributes have either fixed or variable values When you insert a block containing attributes the program adds the fixed values to the drawing along with the block and you are prompted to supply any variable values After you insert blocks containing attributes you can extract the attribute information to a separate file and then use that information in a spreadsheet or database to produce a parts list or bill of materials You can also use attribute information to track the number of times a particular block is inserted into a drawing Attributes can be visible or hidden Hidden attributes are neither displayed nor plotted but the information is still stored in the drawing and written to a file when you extract it General procedure to work with attributes 1 Define the
475. s 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Specify first source point 3 Snap to the first source point in the selection set 1 The command bar reads Specify first destination point 4 Snap to the first destination point on the reference entity 2 A witness line is drawn between the source point and the target point 364 User Guide The command bar reads Specify the second source point Snap to the second source point in the selection set 3 The command bar reads Specify second destination point Snap to the second destination point on the reference entity 4 A witness line is drawn between the source point and the target point The command bar reads Specify the third source point Snap to the third source point in the selection set 5 The command bar reads Specify third destination point Snap to the third destination point on the reference entity 6 A witness line is drawn between the source point and the target point The entity is moved 365 BricsCAD V14 Changing Entities Command CHANGE The Change command lets you change the insertion point and orientation of texts and block inserts The Properties option of the command can also change the layer line type line type scale line weight etc but the BricsCAD Properties bar is much more versatile to do such things To change text entities NOTE Type change in the command bar then press Enter The
476. s Extract Attributes Blocks selected for attribute extraction 4 Format of Extracted Text File Extract in Drawing Exchange Format DXF Extract in Comma Delimited Format CDF 0 Extract in Space Delimited Format SDF Template File Output File 2 Click the Se ect button The Extract Attributes dialog closes temporarily 3 Select the blocks then press Enter or right click The Extract Attributes dialog reopens 4 Select the text file format DXF drawing exchange format CDF comma delimited format or SDF space delimited format 5 Select the Template file 6 Specify the Output file name 7 Click the Extract button The command bar reads lt number gt records extracted 440 User Guide Working with external references You can link entire drawings to the current drawing as external references Unlike inserting a drawing as a block in which you add all the entities from the separate drawing into the current drawing external references attach a pointer to the external file The entities in the external reference appear in the current drawing but the entities themselves are not added to the drawing Thus attaching an external reference does not significantly increase the size of the current drawing file External references provide additional capabilities not available when you insert a drawing as a block When you insert a drawing as a block the entities are stored in the drawing Any change
477. s User Guide Wiari NAR A A CEAAL CAIN LATAA Ao W NUA N f NN y i VAL VA A A A VV M y NCO d y M Y K v h K ny K f WN ne KK Sos Working with spherical coordinates In a cylindrical coordinate system we use three perpendicular axes the x axis the y axis and the z axis All axes originate in the origin point of the coordinate system The x axis and the y axis define a horizontal plane while the x axis and the z axis and the y axis and the z axis define vertical planes A point is defined using the following format R lt alpha lt beta e R distance from the origin e lt alpha angle in the xy plane positive angles are measured counter clockwise e lt beta angle measured from the xy plane positive angles are measured counter clockwise above the xy plane 99 BricsCAD V14 Using Snap and Grid Commands SNAP GRID and LIMITS Grid and snap help you to draw fast and accurately A grid is a set of evenly spaced lines or dots that serve as a visual distance reference The GRIDSTYLE system variable controls whether grid lines or dots display The GRIDDISPLAY system variable controls the display of the grid The grid can also indicate how far the drawing limits extend Minor grid ines Grid axis Upper right limit Origin Y value vertical spacing Lower left limit x value Majer grid lines fame spacing The snap feature create
478. s The command bar reads Set the scaling mode of viewports Interactively lt Uniform gt Do one of the following e Press Enter to set the scale of the selected viewports uniformly The command bar reads Enter the number of paper space units lt 1 0 gt e Press Enter to accept the number of paper space units The command bar reads Enter the number of model space units lt 1 0 gt e Type the desired scaling factor e g 50 to apply a 1 50 scale e Press Enter to apply the scale to all selected viewports e Press Enter to conclude the command e Choose Interactively in the prompt menu or type J then press Enter The first viewport in the selection set highlights The command bar reads Enter the number of paper space units lt 1 0 gt e Press Enter to accept the number of paper space units The command bar reads Enter the number of model space units lt 1 0 gt e Type the desired scaling factor e g 50 to apply a 1 50 scale e Press Enter to apply the scale to the viewport The next viewport highlights The command bar reads Enter the number of paper space units lt 1 0 gt e Repeat the previous steps for each of the selected viewports Press Enter to conclude the command To rotate the display in a viewport The display of a layout viewport can be rotated only if the display of the viewport is not locked If the VPROTATEASSOC system variable is ON the ROTATE command rotates the content of a viewport over a speci
479. s 59 6353 Polyline ellipse 0 Create real Polygon sides 4 Shape name General procedure to draw an ellipse 1 Do one of the following e Click the Ellipse tool button ED on the Draw toolbar e Type ellipse in the command bar then press Enter e Type EL in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Arc Center lt First end of ellipse axis gt A prompt menu displays 192 User Guide 2 Specify the the first end of the ellipse axis The command bar reads Second end of axis 3 Specify the second end of the ellipse axis The command bar reads Rotations lt Other axis gt A prompt menu displays ELLIPSE Rotation Cancel 4 Specify the length of half the other axis of the ellipse NOTE If the Polyline Ellipse variable is off the Arc option is not available Editing an ellipse 1 Select the ellipse The properties of the ellipse display in the Properties bar El Geometry H Start point 55 838 242 3398 0 x 55 838 Y 242 3398 7 g H Center 17 4752 242 3358 0 x 17 4792 Y 242 3398 Z 0 E End paint 55 800 242 5358 0 x 39 838 Y 242 do Fa 0 Major radius 38 3628 Minor radius 22 6197 Radius ratio 0 5896 Start angle 0 End angle 0 Major axis vector 38 3625 0 0 x 38 3028 Y 0 Fa 0 Minor axis vector 0 22 6197 0 x g Y 22 6197 7 g Area 2726 1383 193 BricsCAD V14 2 Type anew value in the Center Major radius Minor radius Radius ratio
480. s Enter The prompt menu closes The command bar reads Included angle for segment gt 0 is ccw O is straight lt 0 is cw lt current angle gt Type a new included angle for the segment and press Enter The direction of an arc segment is as follows e positive angles counter clockwise e negative angle clockwise direction e 0 for straight segments Choose Exit in the prompt menu or type X and press Enter to leave the Polyline vertex editing mode User Guide 6 Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Exit in the prompt menu or press Enter to conclude the Edit Polyline tool Break a polyline into two separate polylines 1 Start the polyline vertex editing mode 2 Select the start vertex where you want to break the polyline Choose Next vertex Previous vertex in the prompt menu to select a vertex The X indicates the currently selected vertex 3 Choose Break in the prompt menu or type B and press Enter The command bar reads Next Previous Select Go exit lt Next gt The prompt menu changes PEDIT Next Previous Select Go Exit Cancel 4 option Do one of the following to select a second vertex e Choose Next vertex Previous vertex in the prompt menu e Choose Select in the prompt menu or type S and press Enter You are prompted to select a vertex 5 Choose Go in the prompt menu or type G and press Enter The polyline s broken into two polylines If a
481. s Enter to paste the selection set using the coordinates of the source drawing Using Copy and Pasteorig to copy entities between drawings 1 In the source drawing select the entities you want to Copy 2 Do one of the following e Right click then choose Copy in the context menu e Choose Copy in the Edit menu e Press Ctrl C press and hold the Ctrl key then press C The entities are copied to the Clipboard 3 Switch to the target drawing 4 Do one of the following e Choose Paste to Original Coordinates in the Edit menu e Type pasteorig in the command bar then press Enter The selection is pasted using the coordinates of the source drawing Using Copybase and Paste to copy entities between drawings 1 In the source drawing do one of the following e Choose Copy with Base Point in the Edit menu e Type copybase in the command bar then press Enter e Press and hold the Ctr en Shift keys then press C The command bar reads Select base point 2 Specify the base point origin point The command bar reads Select entities to copy to the clipboard Select the entities Press Enter to conclude the selection of entities Switch to the target drawing Do one of the following e Choose Paste in the Edit menu e Press Ctr V press and hold the Ctrl key then press V OP ae an The selection set is attached to the cursor The command bar reads Select insertion point 7 Specify the insertion point to paste the
482. s a set of evenly spaced invisible magnetic points which make the crosshairs move in even increments Both grid and snap are like the intersection points of the lines on a piece of grid paper Grid points are for visual reference only and they do not print Snap constrains the points that you can pick with the mouse e Click the Grid tool FEE on the Settings toolbar or the Grid field in the Status Bar or press Ctr G to toggle grid display on off e Click the Snap tool on the Settings toolbar or the Snap field in the Status Bar or press Ctr B to toggle snap on off e Both snap and grid can be set differently in each viewport e The Snap option of the Grid command equals the grid spacing to the current snap Spacing e Grid lines or dots do not print 100 User Guide Display the Snap and Grid settings Do one of the following e Inthe Status Bar right click on the Snap field then choose Settings in the context menu On vV Off Settings Command Bar w Status Bar e Open the Settings dialog then click the Drawings button Under Drafting expand Coordinate Input and Snap Grid To synchronize snap and grid spacing 1 Type Grid in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Grid is on OFF Aspect lt Grid spacing synced with snap gt 2 Types then press Enter 3 Type Snap in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Snap is on x and y 0 2000 OFF Rotate Style As
483. s how the intersection is to be calculated The options are Project to the XY plane of the current UCS Project to the current view plane True 3D mode No projection When trimming entities you first select the cutting edges and then specify the entities to trim selecting them either one by one or using the fence selection method The following entities can be trimmed lines two and three dimensional polylines arcs circles ellipses elliptical arcs splines rays and infinite lines Cutting entities can be lines splines polylines arcs circles elliptical arcs ellipses rays infinite lines layout viewports Entities in a block can be selected as cutting entities To trim entities 1 Do one of the following e Click the Trim tool button OQ on the Modify toolbar e Choose Trim in the Modify menu e Type trim or TR in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select cutting entities for trim lt ENTER to select all gt 2 Select the cutting entities then press Enter or right click The command bar reads Fence Crossing Edge mode Projection eRase Undo lt Select entity to trim or shift select to extend gt A prompt menu displays 380 NOTES User Guide TRIM Fence Crossing Edge mode Projection Erase Undo Cancel Click the entity you want to trim the part of the entity that you click will be removed The entity is trimmed or Press and hold the shift key to extend the
484. s in the command bar to insert the block The Drawing Explorer window reopens 10 option Insert more blocks 11 Close the Drawing Explorer Blocks window To insert a block aligned with an entity E Make sure the appropriate Entity Snaps are active 2 Type insertaligned or insal in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads to list blocks in drawing to open the file dialog lt Block to insert gt lt name gt Do one of the following e Press Enter or right click to insert the most recently placed block again e Type the name of an existing block definition in the command bar then press Enter e Type the name of an external block file in the command bar then press Enter e Type tilde then press Enter to open the file dialog The command bar reads Multiple blocks lt Insertion point for block gt A prompt menu displays INSERTALIGNED 4 Snap to an entity The block is aligned with the entity 423 BricsCAD V14 NOTE NOTE Click to define the insertion point When you move the crosshairs the block is mirrored about the selected entity ora about a line tangent to the selected entity Click to specify the mirroring of the block If you type the name of block in step 3 BricsCAD will lookup the block in the block definitions in the current drawing If the block is not found in the current drawing the paths defined by the SRCHPATH system variable are searched If the block is no
485. s of a box on the existing view in order to enlarge that area to fill the display ZOOM P Restores the displayed view prior to the current one pt Zoom All ZOOM A Displays the whole drawing as far as its drawing limits or drawing extents whichever is the greater of the two P Zoom Left ZOOM L Pick the lower left corner of the next view then specify the magnification factor or the view height Zoom Center ZOOM C Pick the center of the next view then specify the magnification factor or the view height Pp Zoom Right ZOOM R Pick the upper right corner of the next view then specify the magnification factor or the view height Look Around RTLOOK Look around in a 3D scene Look Up and RTUPDOWN Move up down and left right in a 3D scene Down RTWALK Walk left right and forward backward in a 3D scene RTROT Rotates the view dynamically in 3D Real Time Constrained Sphere e Moving the mouse horizontally parallel to the screen x axis rotates the view about the world z axis Moving the mouse vertically parallel to the screen y axis rotates the screen x axis Real Time RTROTCTR Rotates the view dynamically in 3D about a user Sphere Center defined center point Behaves like RTROT Real Time Free RTROTF Rotates the view dynamically in 3D Sphere c e Moving the mouse horizontally parallel to the screen x axis rotates the view about the screen y axis Moving the mouse v
486. s of iso lin or 2 54 for linetype definitions of default lin Setting the Global Linetype Scale 1 Choose Settings in the Settings menu The Settings dialog opens 2 Select the Drawing settings category 3 Expand the Entity Creation settings sub category 4 Select the Linetype Scale setting LTSCALE El Drawing a El Drafting Drawing units Coordinate input Dynamic input Direct Modeling Entity creation Entity color BYLAYER Entity linetype scale 2 54 Entity linetype Continuous Entity lineweight By Layer Transparency for new objects ByLayer H m1 O H A H Current layer 0 Current table style Standard Line type scale jl Ai 185 BricsCAD V14 5 Type anew value in the Global Linetype Scale field then press Enter The drawing is regenerated 6 Close the Settings dialog NOTE When printing Model Space set the Global Linetype Scale with respect to the plot scale E g if you want to plot your drawing at 1 50 set the LTSCALE setting to 50 When printing a layout do one of the following e If the Paperspace Linetype Scale setting PSLTSCALE is Off set the Global Linetype Scale with respect to the plot scale E g if you want to plot your drawing at 1 50 set the LTSCALE setting to 50 e If the Paperspace Linetype Scale setting PSLTSCALE is On set LTSCALE to 1 Current Layer When you create new entities they are drawn on the current layer To draw new entities on a
487. s you make to the original drawing are not reflected in the drawing in which you inserted it When you attach an external reference however any changes you make to the original drawing file are reflected in the drawings that reference it These changes appear automatically each time you open the drawing containing the external reference If you know that the original drawing was modified you can reload the external reference anytime you re working on the drawing External references are useful for assembling master drawings from component drawings Use external references to coordinate your work with others in a group External references help reduce drawing file size and ensure that you are always working with the most recent version of a drawing Commands XREF XREF XATTACH and XCLIP The Xref command attaches DWG files to the current drawing through the Drawing Explorer short for external reference The Xref command attaches DWG files to the current drawing through the command bar The Xattach command attaches externally referenced drawings through a dialog box short for external attach The Xclip command clips externally referenced drawings and adjust front and rear clipping planes short for xref clip Attaching an external reference Command XATTACH The Xattach command attaches a drawing as an external reference xref The attached xref appears as an insert in the current drawing Like blocks attached xrefs can
488. screen with loads of grip glyphs While the Quad was initially conceived for easy and fast editing of 3D solids in V14 the Quad is extended to allow enhanced editing of all entity types To activate the Quad Activation of the Quad is controlled by the QUADDISPLAY system variable To toggle the Quad On Off do one of the following e Click the QUAD field in the Status bar e Press the F12 function key e Edit the QUADDISPLAY system variable in the Settings dialog e Type guaddisplay in the command bar then choose an option 69 BricsCAD V14 Editing the Quad settings 1 Right click the QUAD field in the Status bar then choose Settings in the context menu The Settings dialog opens showing the Quad settings E Quad Settings Quad aperture size 20 Quad default command launch 1 Launch default quad command on mouse right dick when quad is displayec Quad command sorting 0 Do not sort Quad Display quad Quad width 4 Quad icon size 16 Small icons Quad icon space 1 Normal Quad show delay 100 Quad hide margin 30 Quad hide delay 1000 Quad tooltips Display quad tooltips Quad transparency delay 2000 Quad transparency factor 75 Quad expand group 0 Expand on mouse enter Quad warp pointer C1 Warp pointer so it stays on same position relative to group button e Quad aperture size Distance in pixels to search for neighboring entities e Quad default command launch Sets the action to launch the default Qu
489. seagenegs 161 Denning VIEW DOLE PFOD EU CS ic ite r aE a edudaiaaatasnunigentaauecaateaeutan EA RA 162 Properties wcliculavedesticas uncetdaiiainenandeatesaivertiacks aaa or aaa adda aeae aaie 163 Navigating in a paper space lAVOUL wieniinicei inate eia a a aa a a aa a aaa 164 Setting the layer visibility in a viewport sssssssessssssssssnnssenssnsrennnnssenrsnnnennnnssenrrnrnenne 164 Setting the Scale of a VICWDOOI Cito arrea a ada a a aea E wes vaNaeiaa es 164 Setting the scale of a selection Of viewportS s sssssssrsssssusnrsesrrunnnsnenrrnsnennnnssenrrnrnrnne 165 F6srotate he display ira VIEW DO ane E N E E A A 165 Rotating Tne VIEwportaiSplay oraren tinia a Ea NA gh ET A R aA 165 Defining the rotation angle of the viewport display c cece cccccsee eee e tees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenananeeees 166 AO AIL GUINCV FOWW OPES weirs siarscccatececers asa aracastancate csmis N A Oaeereeta wie nua nee geamaas 166 To align model Space and paper space pointS s sssssssrsrsrsrssrsnrrrnrerenrnrrrerrnrnrenrnrererenns 167 AMNGTIIAG 1 DOIN oeren ease in nacal tach hove cae NEE a TN A va caWtaa eaten ened e ia 167 ArJOING 2 POMES mee auta cece tsa geese tadan by urtuerenve ee ca nuwan i eae aaa rete ana reaeen uae ae 167 a V OUCS ere a iets peimeurrinedieie irene OO creatino a New layout israk n A A annie saganeniantiasesas ain eoeds onic E OT A 168 CODVING layouts narrar aaa a aaa a aA Ae 168 MADOA AVOUT miie T TA E A sae eseun iaaaam
490. second point is selected in step 4 the segment s between the selected vertices is are deleted 6 Choose Exit in the prompt menu or type X and press Enter to leave the Polyline vertex editing mode 7 Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Exit in the prompt menu or press Enter to conclude the Edit Polyline tool Insert a new vertex in a polyline 1 Start the polyline vertex editing mode 2 Select the start vertex of the segment where you want to insert a vertex Choose Next vertex Previous vertex in the prompt menu to select a vertex The X indicates the currently selected vertex 3 Choose Insert vertex in the prompt menu or type J and press Enter The command bar reads Location for new vertex 4 Specify the location for the new vertex The new vertex is inserted 5 Choose Exit in the prompt menu or type X and press Enter to leave the Polyline vertex editing mode 401 BricsCAD V14 6 Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Exit in the prompt menu or press Enter to conclude the Edit Polyline tool Move a vertex in a polyline Start the polyline vertex editing mode Select the vertex you want to move Choose Next vertex Previous vertex in the prompt menu to select a vertex The X indicates the currently selected vertex Choose Move in the prompt menu or type M and press Enter The command bar reads New location for vertex S
491. sed to initialize the profile settings on the first run See Starting BricsCAD with a specific profile B scriptFileName scr Runs a script at startup Suppresses the startup splash screen LD Loads an application application arx brx drx S path Redefines the SRCHPATH system variable e g BricsCAD exe S C BricsCAD T TemplateFileName Creates a new drawing based on the template drawing specified regserver To register unregister BricsCAD COM Please note these arguments are unregserver to be used without a preceding NOTES e Switch arguments containing spaces should be enclosed by double quotes e g P My user profile e Switches can be combined e g P MyProfile L S C BricsCAD will start BricsCAD using the MyProfile user profile without the splash screen and sets the SRCHPATH system variable to C BricsCAD Besides these switches BricsCAD supports file names as command line arguments Supported file types are DWG to load a drawing DXF to load a drawing SCR to load a script LSP to load a LISP program DLL to load an ADS SDS or DRX ARX program SLD to load a slide file MNU to load a menu file CUI to load a menu file 27 BricsCAD V14 BricsCAD user files In BricsCAD the preferences of each user are stored in specific folders which are called the Local root folder and the Roamable root folder The Local root folder contains the Template folder where the drawing templa
492. selected category 496 Drawing Explorer ge Sheet Sets User Profile Manager Check Spelling mn Po OP Ik PN BE D g E tio GP IP EL 6 ee User Guide Layers Layer States Linetypes Multileader Styles Multiline Styles Text Styles Dimension Styles Table Styles Coordinate Systems Views Visual Styles Lights Materials Render Presets Blocks ARefs Images PDF Underlays Dependencies Page Setups Section Planes Folders e Type explorer in the command bar then press Enter The Drawing Explorer window opens showing the details of the most recently used category To control the Drawing Explorer layout e Inthe View menu check uncheck the sub window you want to open or close Open Drawings Drawings Details k k 474 Preview Editor StatusBar hS Details Icons Tree Regen Toggle Regen e If you click a settings category in the Drawings sub window when the Details sSub window is closed the Details window is re opened showing the content of the selected settings category e To close a sub window click the close button 4 in its title bar e To restore the default layout choose Restore Default Explorer Layout in the Settings menu Opening a drawing 1 To open a drawing using the Drawing Explorer do the following 2 Launch the Drawing Explorer 3 Inthe Dra
493. shed lines in the above images represent the polyline through the control points of the spline e The SPLFRAME Spline Frame settings variable defines whether the control polygon displays for splines and spline fit polylines Traces Command TRACE Traces are 4 sided filled entities created with two parallel sides When you create a series of traces they are L connected to each other Drawing traces 1 NOTE 212 Do one of the following Es e Click the Trace tool button Z on the Polygons flyout of the Draw toolbar e Choose Trace in the Draw menu e Type trace in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Width of trace lt current width gt Do one of the following e Right click to accept the current width e Type anew current width in the command bar e Define a new current width graphically by clicking two points The command bar reads Start of trace Specify the start point of the trace The command bar reads Next point Specify the end point of the first trace A line indicates the direction of the first trace The direction of the second trace displays dynamically Do one of the following e Right click to create the trace e Specify the endpoint of the next trace option Repeat step 5 to keep adding traces When Fill Mode is turned off all filled entities such as traces display and print as outlines User Guide Wipeouts Command WIPEOUT A wipeout is a polygonal area
494. sion DYNDIVIS 1 hit the TAB key to edit the next dynamic dimension as defined by the DYNDIGRIP system variable and display the next plus one e All dynamic dimensions as defined by DYNDIGRIP DYNDIVIS 2 hit the TAB key to edit the next dynamic dimension Set the dynamic dimensions user preferences to define the appearance color linetype and position of dynamic dimensions Using dynamic dimensions when creating entities 1 Launch the command to create a 2D entity e g Line and DYNDIVIS 1 or 2 Specify the first point then move the cursor to display the dynamic dimensions The Length dynamic dimension highlights Do one of the following e Type the desired length of the line then hit the TAB key to jump to the Angle dynamic dimension The Length dynamic dimension is locked and displays in red and the Angle dynamic dimension is selected e Type the desired length of the line then click to create the line at the angle defined by the cursor position e Hit he TAB key to jump to the Angle dynamic dimension 95 BricsCAD V14 96 NOTE If DYNDIVIS Q the Length dynamic dimension disappears when you hit the TAB key Do one of the following e Type the desired angle then hit the Enter key to create the line e Type the desired angle then hit the TAB key to return to the Length dynamic dimension e Hit the Enter key to create the line at the angle defined by the cursor position e Hit the TAB key to return
495. sional constraints When using constraints a drawing can be in one of three states e Unconstrained no entities are constrained The drawing can be modified using modification commands and procedures e Underconstrained some entities are constrained It might be impossible to apply some changes using modification commands and procedures e Fully constrained all possible and relevant geometric and dimensional constraints are applied to the design geometry The drawing can be modified only by changing the values of the dimensional constraints Gs Door Swing Internet connection needed Gs Bracket Internet connection needed Commands and toolbars 2D parametric constraints tools sit on the 2D Constraints toolbar 2D Constraints BxX S iOKvZ4KAV 1 CPM 4R BABS Al Command__ Icon Description o gt Z gt Z S O ConstraintBar B Controls the display of the constraint bar of entities Constraint bars are always hidden when opening a drawing Delconstraint Removes all dimensional and geometrical constraints from an entity 78 Geometric Constraints GeomConstraint Applies geometric relationships between entities and or valid constraint points on entities GcFix Constrains points and entities at a fixed position GcCoincident Applies a coincident geometrical constraint to two points or constrains a point to an entity GcConcentric Constrains the center points of circles arcs ellipses or elliptical arcs to coin
496. snrnsnrnrnrnrnrnenrnenensrrnne 82 Using Geometric ConstraintS sssss 2s2 2 22 2 22 2 2 2 OO TO COMEFON TNE GISDIay OF CONSEGAINE Dal Sisiar viens vasdviac cee ay eiulexantan stoned saneeaiessienenaw ee ese anata 87 To control the position Of a constraint DAL cccceeeeceeseeeeceeeeeeeteensueeueeneuceteensugeuteneugenesness 87 VVOrkKinGi WIEN tE Constraint Dar irre o weck ata veneseadoueoraanverdess wrannta wale AO 88 Dereta CONSTAINUS tice ca epeioed awe taa tenia A sca toe canmaanes as Sonnac ean aaa uae eaten 88 SHAG TIX CONSE ANN CS sirae A we ean a shaieae saatage A A 89 USING COIMGIGEML COMSERAINES eaire wen vicwtae neat aaa ited wadenva de tansura satan ia da wecoddduteus EAN 89 To apply a coincident constraint between a point and an entity ccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 89 Usage of a coincident constraint between a point and an entity cccec cece cece eeeeeee eee eeeees 90 Using horizontal and vertical CONStraiNts ccccceeceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeseeetteegeeetteagenennegs 92 TO CONnstrain a line toa fixed ANGIC wisessaiusciwaces even dude ee veo vnnenerua ce aoa Vue Pane leesw ata AeA 92 Dynamic DIMENSIONS ivssiietiteterednertininrnr rere OS Defining the Dynamic Dimensions SettiNGS cccceeecseee seen ee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeanneeeeeesteegannees 93 Using dynamic dimensions when creating EntitieS ccccccseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteueeeeetsegenetnegs 95 Using dynamic
497. splayed properly 2 DBMOD Stores the status of the drawing modification as a bit code as the sum of the following values 1 Object database modified 4 Database variable modified 8 Window modified 16 View modified 32 Field modified Using the Drag and Drop option menu 1 Select a file in a Windows Explorer dialog then hold down the right mouse button and drag the file onto the drawing area of the BricsCAD application window A context menu displays When a drawing file is selected Default by File Extension Insert Here Open Create XRef Create Hyperlink Here Cancel 488 User Guide When another file type is selected Default by File Extension Insert Here Create Hyperlink Here Cancel 2 Do one of the following e Choose Default by File Extension to e open a drawing file DWG DXF or DWT e attach a PDF e attach a raster image file e insert a file as an OLE object e g an Excel spreadsheet e Choose Insert Here to e insert a drawing file DWG DXF or DWT as a block in the current drawing e attach a PDF e attach a raster image file e insert the file as an OLE object e Choose Open to open a drawing file DWG DXF or DWT e Choose Create Xref to attach a drawing file DWG DXF or DWT as an external reference to the current drawing e Choose Create Hyperlink Here to create an hyperlink to the selected file Getting drawing information You can retrieve two types of
498. ss hairs 367 BricsCAD V14 e Press lt Enter gt the first point is interpreted as a relative X Y Z displacement E g if the coordinates of the base point are 2 3 0 the selection set is copied 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current position The selection set is copied If Copy Mode is Single the copy command is completed If Copy Mode is Multiple you are prompted to create the next copy See To make multiple copies To make multiple copies 1 Do one of the following e Click the Copy tool button on the Modify toolbar e Choose Copy in the Modify menu e Type copy or CO in the command bar The command bar reads Select entities to copy 2 Select the entities then right click or press Enter If Copy Mode is Multiple The command bar reads Enter base point mOde lt Displacement gt If Copy Mode is Single The command bar reads Enter base point mOde Multiple lt Displacement gt 3 Option If Copy Mode is Single do one of the following e Choose Multiple in the prompt menu e Type M then press Enter The command bar reads Enter base point mOde lt Displacement gt 4 Specify the base point The selection set is now attached to the cross hairs The command bar reads Enter second point lt Enter to use the base point as displacement gt 5 Do one of the following to specify the second point e Click the second point e Type the displacement distance then
499. ssatcawssdateemintatnenrssateemreceieunnns 2 79 DIMENSION SEY can cametan ines E AE adae ana ea T IAE 279 Dimension BIO G Keiac crenata ie aah Peretti a a tae aati ea ag pe ios oat ane AN edness Dinah eM isa 280 DIMENSIONING tools OVEFVICW sssssus2us222222222202uus 2usuususnsen DOL Dimension Styles explorer BHR HR ERR RRR RRR RRR RRR RR RRR RRR RRR RR RRR RRR RRR eR eR eRe ee eee eee eee 6 283 EXDIOMING GIMEMSION SUVIES sicercdatiecca betas of saaiGat can dea eroed rand ab ataa toon A ieee ed Pnrseanawees ok baa 283 Associative DIMENSIONS sssssss22n2n2n2n2222222222222222222n222nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn DOO DIMENSION SCULINGS cittitisiiatmiecrnwin eit LOD To list the current status of the dimension VAriableS ccccecccee sees cece ee eeeeee seen ee eeeeaaeneeees 285 Hnes and AFI OWS S aeaea A E eaaaaa once tau camarars E E A 285 TEX renan aE AAA A Aa AA E EEEE A E A A AAD 286 E P E E A E O E A E A E EE A E E AT 288 PRIN ALY UNNS aai a a E AE E AR new amneanne ns 288 Aitemate UNIUS rreme eai a a AN a a E A ON 289 TOL ANCO S aprenan TAE E Aa E N EE 289 Dimension Styles explorer sssssssusususuununnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn DOO EXDIOFIMGGIMENSION SUV IES onir a E a A O A A N 290 Creating linear GIMENSIONS sssss22222 2u222 2 2 2 2 2 s2sususu u DOD To create a horizontal or vertical linear dimension s sssssssssssrsnsrrnrenenenrsrerenrnrenenrererenes 292 To create an aligned linear dimension s ssss
500. ssesssssrsrsrrnrnrerenerrsrenes 424 Redefining BIOCKS scrissrersinermannrae nen ae 2D To redefine an Internal DOCK GelNINON iiscetesmaese ts caneiatoseiaaias tian a a a a aa 425 To reload an external drawing as a bloCK ssssssssssnnsnssssnsssssnrsnsrrnnnnsnenrrnsnennnnsnenrenrnenne 426 EXDIOFING BIOCKS siiisis citcretirsictrigridceuiarnectwid cricewiderinisierieme mine A7 ODEN Tne BIOGKS EXPIOrel iranan an a a a wnenneeneies aia tana cee a O i 427 The Blocks Explorer display Options sssssussusuunnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 427 Open the Detail View of the Blocks ExplOrer ccc ee eee ee eerseeesneeeeeeeeseensnaeneeeesseegnaatnenegs 428 Open the Icon View of the Blocks EXplOrer ccc cccce eee e eee eeeseeesneeeeeeesseeusnaeeeeeesseennaanneeegs 428 TOrename a DIOCKK ai nue amcadeceyraciaianscttataeuoamd ple easeutieaaannrbe E 429 Exploding BlOCKS iscediscsvssivsckecssendeerscescsnessaussuraatessueeegenvssaneenemene eo TOceX DiIOG Cra Ol OC K mrri T T A aahaniaddeooan tai conmuteniwnauntanaes tan AN a 429 Setting the Explodable property of a DIOCK cccccccseeeeceeeeeeeueeneeeueeueueeueensueeueeneugenesnegs 429 Dynamic BIOCKS vesccorsecracataceretecasaredotneereeurnesrnteratorninepeareesturareene OU EGIENG GY Naliic DIOCKS sicsacuairessannnmncssamereaateatedsamaaga te nausea R E A R 430 Working with attributesS ssssssss 2 2 252222u2020222222u2 2 FOL General procedure to
501. sssssssssssnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnenennnenenennnenenensnsnenennno 292 To create a rotated linear dimensiON nienean AE A SE 293 To create baseline CIMEMNSIONS ssssssssssssssssnsrenrnnsnssrnnnersnenrsnsrrunnnsnenrrneneunnnenenrrnrnenae 293 TOcCreale continued GIMENSIONS ernieren aa a e a A a TO oa 294 TO create am arcdlength dimensio Meicende ona A E S ann wenaeer reseeuewes 294 Creating angular dimensions s ss DOD To dimension an angle between two lineS s sssssesasessssrerurnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrn 295 To dimension an angle encompassed by an arC s sssssssrsrsrsnsnrsnrrrnrerenenrrrerrnrnrenenrrrerenns 296 To create an angular dimension defined by a vertex and two endpoints cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 296 1o0 create a diametrical GIMENSION acsi A AEA 297 TOMChea tea radial IPC SION saa vines tarda vagus ations dave Ganda ae vee A a a EA tau 297 Creating center marks or center LINES cccccesseeeeeesseneeeeeseceeuenteueeuenteueeuentsueeuennsagenesnegs 297 Creating Ordinate GIMENSIONS 22 222 2 2 298 TO Create AN Ordinate dimension ccc cccecsce seen eee eeeeeee een e eee e eee eee nena ne eeeeeeaennaneeeesteeannanens 298 xii Table of Contents Creating leaders and ANNOTATIONS s s2s2222222 2 2 2 298 To create a leader and aly annOlation N riain sean caeecn ides dvwe sere E wees ean ewia
502. system NOTE When Fill Mode is turned off all filled entities such as wide polylines and planes display and print as outlines 207 BricsCAD V14 Drawing rectangles 1 Do one of the following Click the Rectangle tool button E on the Draw toolbar Choose Rectangle in the Draw menu Type rectang in the command bar then press Enter Type rec in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Chamfer Elevation Fillet Rotated Square Thickness Width Area Dimensions lt select first corner of rectangle gt A prompt menu opens RECTANG Chamfer Fillet Rotated square Elevation Thickness Width of line Area Dimensions Cancel 2 Specify the first corner of the rectangle The rectangle displays dynamically when you move the cursor 3 Specify the opposite corner of the rectangle The rectangle is created option Right click to draw more rectangles NOTE Because a rectangle is created as a closed polyline rectangles have a direction The direction of a closed polyline is positive if it is drawn counter clockwise and negative if it is drawn in a clockwise direction Rectangles have a counter clockwise direction if both the X and Y coordinate of the second point are higher or lower than the coordinates of the first point movement of the cursor is positive or negative along both X and Y axis Rectangles have a clock wise direction if the X or Y coordinate is higher or lower than the X or Y coor
503. t 3 To define the measurement interval do one of the following e Type the measurement interval and press Enter e Specify two points in the drawing Points are placed along the selected entity at the specified interval NOTE It might be necessary to adjust the Point display mode settings to display the points correctly To place blocks a specified interval along an entity 1 Do one of the following e Click the Measure tool button on the Modify toolbar e Choose Measure in the Modify menu e Type measure in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entity to measure 2 Click the entity you want to measure The command bar reads Block lt Segment length gt A prompt menu displays 410 User Guide MEASURE 3 Choose Insert blocks in the prompt menu or type B and press Enter The command bar reads Name of block to insert 4 Type the name of the block in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Align blocks with entity lt Y gt A prompt menu displays MEASURE Yes Align blocks No Do not align Cancel 5 Do one of the following e Choose Yes Align blocks in the prompt menu or press Enter to align the blocks with the selected entity e Choose No Do not align in the prompt menu or type N and press Enter to place the blocks not rotated The command bar reads Segment length 6 To define the measurement interval do one of the following e Type the meas
504. t Style Insert Coordinates Justification E Annotative Height Rotation Define the Attribute Type a name in the Tag field The Tag Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing The name you type in the Tag field can be any combination of characters except spaces Lowercase letters are automatically converted to uppercase Type a prompt in the Prompt field The attribute prompt displays when you insert a block containing the attribute If a prompt is omitted the Tag is used as the prompt instead Do one of the following Type a default value in the Default text field For variable attributes the default value is replaced by the actual value when you insert a block containing the attribute a Click the Insert Field button cE to assign a field value to the attribute see Using sheet set and sheet properties in a title block If the Multiple lines flag is checked the Default text field is dimmed Default E Preset Lock position Text Text Style Standard Insert Coordinates Click the button next to the Default text field The Define Attribute dialog temporarily closes to let you create a Mtext entity Do one of the following Specify the x y and z coordinates for the attribute insertion point Click the Pick Point button 5 to specify the insertion point in the drawing The command bar reads Select insertion point The Define Attribute dialog closes temporarily option Set the
505. t Yes or No User Guide To delete a clipping boundary 1 3 Type pdfclip in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select PDF underlay Click the frame of the PDF underlay The frame of the selected PDF highlights The command bar reads Enter PDF clipping option ON OFF Delete New lt New gt A prompt menu displays On Off Delete boundary New boundary Cancel Do one of the following e Choose Delete boundary in the prompt menu e Type D in the command bar then press Enter The clipping boundary is deleted and the complete PDF underlay displays 455 BricsCAD V14 Exploring Images Commands IMAGE IMAGEADJUST IMAGEATTACH IMAGECLIP IMAGEFRAME IMAGEQUALITY The Image command Inserts images in drawings through the Images Explorer The Imageadjust command adjusts the properties of images through the Properties bar The Imageattach command attaches raster images to the drawing The Imageclip command clips images The Imageframe command toggles the display of the frame around images The Imagequality command toggles the display quality of images between draft and high Open the Images Explorer To open the Images Explorer do one of the following e Choose Drawing Explorer gt Images in the Too s menu e Click the Image Management tool button 2E in the Images toolbar e Type image in the command bar then press Enter e Select Images in the Open Drawings sub window of the Drawi
506. t a layer to display in blue sometimes and green at other times or you need some layers to be off or frozen or locked when editing a specific part of a drawing After spending a lot of time adjusting all layer settings you can use layer states to save your settings You can save multiple layer states in a each drawing Layer states can be copied between drawings and you can save a layer state to an external file which can then be imported in another drawing To easily create layer states the Layer Utility commands might be useful Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help Open Drawings nef Layers ie Layer States EEE Linetypes bases a Multiline Styles Y Multileader Styles A Text Styles L Tahle Styles ail Ready E gt C BricsCAD TrainingBricscadY a Layer States House dwg gt x JE EE e 2 Ey Black Model Displays all layers in black 2 Colored Model layers using their 4 NoDim_NoTexts Hides all dimensions and text 5 Wals Model Displays walls only Drawing Explorer Layer States Detail view Opening the Layer States Explorer 1 Inthe Tools gt Drawing Explorer menu choose Layer States 2 option Do one of the following e Click the Detail View button ES Layer States House dwg Cx ss 4M0RBi bhia 2 E NoDim_NoTexts Model Displays all layers in black Model Displays all layers usi
507. t attribute information to a separate file such as a database for further analysis External references With external references you can link separate reference drawing files to the current drawing to combine information without adding the contents of the reference drawings to a drawing If you make changes to the referenced file all references are updated automatically Blocks Sy Working with Blocks Internet connection needed A block is a single entity which consists of visible entities such as lines arcs circles text dimensions etc Apart from visible entities a block can also contain invisible data called attributes Blocks are stored as part of the drawing file Blocks can help you to better organize your work quickly create and revise drawings and reduce the drawing file size e Using blocks you can create a library of frequently used symbols Then you can insert a symbol as a block rather than redraw the symbol from scratch e You can insert multiple instances of a single block definition You can change the block definition to quickly revise a drawing and then update all instances of the block A procedure called nesting is used to combine blocks in a new block Nesting is useful when you want to combine and include small components such as nuts and bolts into a larger assembly and you need to insert multiple instances of that assembly into an even larger drawing When you insert a block the following rules
508. t click and choose Insert in the context menu e Choose insert in the Edit menu on the Drawing Explorer PDF Underlays dialog The Drawing Explorer PDF Underlays dialog closes 451 BricsCAD V14 5 Continue with steps 3 through 7 of the previous procedure To control the display of a PDF underlay 1 Click the frame of the PDF underlay The frame of the selected PDF highlights The properties of the underlay display in the Properties Bar 2 Under Misc click Show underlay in the Properties Bar then select Yes or No To set the layer display in a PDF underlay 1 Type PDFlayers in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select PDF underlay 2 Click the frame of the PDF underlay The frame of the selected PDF highlights The Underlay Layers dialog opens Underlay Layers Select an underlay to view its layers Reference name Plan_Leveld C Search for layer Name 0 DIMENSIONS HIDDEN SEWER 5 FACING BRICK 9 Q Q 9 The icon in the On column indicates the current state of the layers On P or Off Q 3 Click the icon in the On column to toggle the display of a layer 4 option Click the Search for layer field then type a layer name to search for a layer Use wildcard characters or to limit the number of layers in the list 452 User Guide Select an underlay to view its layers efeenerane Select an underlay to view its layers efeeerane L
509. t corner insertion point of the multiline text The command bar reads Justification Rotation Style Height Direction Width lt Opposite corner for block of text gt Do one of the following e Specify the opposite corner of the text block to define the maximum width of the multiline text e Type in the command bar then press Enter for non wrapped zero width text The Text formatting toolbar opens right above the text block Text Formatting pra 02 BT ITANA lowe gt o 3 p ap m J caa option Define the text properties Type your text Click the OK button to stop editing the text The Text formatting toolbar closes 309 BricsCAD V14 Text formatting toolbar tools and settings Button or setting Name Description O Z O Z fe eoo seo e pe zo p pe Terme pee B Upperease Converts selected text to uppercase am o Converts selected text to lowercase ByLayer tayer o Sets the text layer l oOo Sets the oblique angle Angle Character Sets hahaa character spacing Spacing Uadoeeeren eon recent actions Et hein Fraction ee TT Character so Justify Sets the text justification Background Adds a colored background Mask Closes the Text formatting toolbar and applies the changes E Cancel Closes the Text formatting toolbar and leaves Cancel the Mtext entity unchanged NOTE Ifthe line length exceeds the Width of the multiline text the text will be wrapped Set th
510. t dialog displays 2 Do one of the following e Click the Hatch tab to create a hatch then define the hatch properties e Click the Gradient tab to create a gradient fill then define the gradient fill properties 3 Define the boundary for the hatch or gradient fill 4 Click the OK button to create the hatch or gradient fill 270 User Guide To define hatch properties 1 2 On the Hatch and Gradient dialog click the Hatch tab Hatch and Gradient Boundaries Remove boundary entities Boundary set Current viewport New Boundary retention Retain boundaries as Polylines Islands Ange 0 0000 aa PZA Ve Nested Outer Ignore Boundary tolerance Tolerance 0 0 Cross Hatch Options E Annotative Associative Use current origin Create separate hatches Specified origin Draw order Send behind boundary Inherit properties Hatch Origin option Select the Pattern Type User detined Predefined e User Defined uses the pattern defined in this dialog box with the Angle Spacing and Cross Hatch options e Predefined uses patterns defined in so pat metric units MEASUREMENT ON and default pat imperial units MEASUREMENT OFF e Custom uses patterns defined in pat files one pattern definition per file BricsCAD searches for pat files in the folders that are defined in the SRCHPATH Support File Search Path system variable option
511. t face highlights then click and move the cursor to the second face 226 User Guide 13 Click the Concentric tool button Ch on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select a pair of subentities 14 Move the cursor over two cylindrical faces of the connecting rod 1 and the pin 2 as indicated in the image below Hit the TAB key until the correct face highlights then click and move the cursor to the second face T oMCONCENTRIC3D Previous selector 227 BricsCAD V14 15 Click the Concentric tool button PB on the 3D Constraints toolbar The command bar reads Select a pair of subentities 16 Move the cursor over two cylindrical faces of the piston 1 and the cylinder 2 as indicated in the image below Hit the TAB key until the correct face highlights then click and move the cursor to the second face 17 After applying the previous constraint it might be necessary to correct the position of the cylinder Move the cursor over the cylinder then choose Move 4 in the Quad cursor menu 228 User Guide Ko a R Mowe Moves faces edges or 3D solids h The command bar reads Enter base point lt 0 0 0 gt 18 Use an entity snap e g Endpoint to specify the base point for the move operation on the cylinder The cylinder now moves dynamically with the cursor 19 Hold down the Shift key to move the mouse cursor along the Z axis Click to position the cylinder as shown in the
512. t found there either BricsCAD responds Could not find file lt blockname gt The block is aligned as follows The block is rotated so that its local Z axis is parallel with the Z axis of the active UCS and its local X axis should be parallel with the tangent to the entity at the position of the snap point When you click a point on an entity the block is aligned with the entity Then by moving the mouse pointer around the insertion point you can choose how the block should be mirrored The origin point of the block lies on the entity To insert multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array 424 Type minsert in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads to list blocks in drawing to open the file dialog lt Block to insert gt Do one of the following e Type press and hold the alt gr key then press the key then press Enter The Insert Block file dialog displays Select the drawing file you want to insert and press the Open button or double click the file name e Press Enter to accept the lt Block to insert gt e Type a block name then press Enter Optionally type to display search for existing block definitions The block is attached to the cursor The command bar reads Multiple blocks lt Insertion point for block gt MINSERT Scale x Scale Y Scale z Scale Rotate Multiple blocks Cancel Specify the insertion point The command bar reads Corner XYZ X scale factor lt 1 00 gt T
513. t starting dimension lt Origin of next extension line gt Do one of the following e Repeat steps 2 and 3 e Press the Esc key to stop creating continued dimensions When selecting the starting dimension make sure to click the second extension line or the second half of the dimension line in order to use the second origin point of the starting dimension as the origin point for the continued dimension Otherwise the new dimension line will partly overlap the starting dimension If you select an angular dimension continued angular dimensions are created To create an arc length dimension 294 Do one of the following e Click the Arc tool button Eia on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Arc in the Dimensions menu e Type dimarc in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select arc or polyline arc segment Select the arc or polyline arc segment The arc length dimension displays dynamically Position the dimension line User Guide Creating angular dimensions Command DIMANGULAR Angular dimensions annotate the angle measured between two lines two linear segments of a polyline or the angle of a circular arc You can also dimension an angle by selecting an angle vertex and two endpoints Starting from an existing angular dimension you can add a baseline dimension or a continued dimension An angular baseline dimension inserts an additional dimension from a common first extension line origin An angular con
514. t style is set to BYLAYER inherits the plot style assigned to its layer Predefined plot styles When installing BricsCAD the following plot style tables will be installed in the Plotstyles subfolder of your Roamable root folder BricsCAD ctb 255 colors BricsCAD stb sample style table Default ctb 255 colors Default stb sample style table Monochrome ctb all colors plot as black Monochrome stb all colors plot as black 474 User Guide Changing Plot Style Table Types Commands CONVERTPSTYLES and CONVERTCTB A common problem is that Named Plot Style tables STB files are inadvertently assigned to a drawing and a user wants to assign Color Dependent Plot Style tables CTB files instead Or vice versa for a user who wants to use Named Plot Styles To convert a drawing from STB to CTB file type 1 Type convertpstyles at the command prompt then press Enter An alert box displays Bricscad eee So This command converts a Named plot style drawing to use Color Dependent plot styles All plot style names will be remowed from objects Mared plot style tables will be detached from the drawing 2 Click the OK button The drawing is converted To convert a drawing from CTB to STB file type 1 Type convertpstyles at the command prompt then press Enter An alert box displays Bricscad mmn This command converts a Color Dependent plot style drawing to use Named plot styles You should convert your color de
515. tems offer a 32 bit color mode The extra byte called the a pha channel is used for control and special effects information True colors use a RGB color definition Red Green Blue Each of these parameters has a range from 0 to 255 The RGB definition for black is 0 0 0 the RGB definition for white is 255 255 255 NOTE e In drawings that use Style Tables STB to set up plotting configurations entities in a true color will only be printed in this color if the Co or setting in the STB definition file is set to Use Object Color e In drawings that use Color Tables CTB to set up plotting configurations entities in a true color always print in this color 178 User Guide True color dialog Select Color Saturation Luminosity 3 True Color RGB 54 146 201 pa aa oe Color Selection pane Color Picker Luminosity slider Current Color Color Parameter fields Setting the current entity color Ls To open the Select Color dialog do one of the following e Inthe Color field of the Entity Properties toolbar choose Select Color e Click the Select Color tool button D on the Settings toolbar e In the BricsCAD Properties Bar click Color then choose Select Color in the drop down list e Double click the Color Field in the Status Bar e Type color in the command bar then press Enter option To select an index color click the Index Color tab on the Select Color dialog then do one of the
516. tes are saved The Roamable root folder contains three subfolders e plotconfig where the plotter configuration files pc3 are saved e plotstyles where the plot style table files stb and plot color table files ctb are saved e support where the hatch pattern files pat line style files lin alias files pgp unit files unt custom user interface files cui etc are saved a di Users E Documents and Settings a di Default User E 5 Default User a di AppData E Application Data P m Roaming El I Bricsys y m Bric El Bricscad n a di Bricscad E B E 9 enus a d V plotconfig a Ji enUS 9 plotstyles di plotconfig 9 support d plotstyles di support Roamable root folder in Windows Roamable root folder in Windows Vista or higher XP C Users lt user C Documents and Settings lt user name gt AppData Roaming Bricsys BricsCAD V en_US name gt Application Data Bricsys BricsCAD V en_US A home B louisv Name v 9 Bricsys 7 Bricscad vv V10 iz en US gt PlotConfig b PlotStyles gt Support p Templates Roamable root folder in Linux home lt user name gt Bricsys BricsCAD V en_US 28 User Guide The BricsCAD user file manager When you install an update of the software the first time you launch BricsCAD after the update the content of the User Data Cache folder C Program Files Bricsys BricsCAD UserDataCache is compared with the content of the Local root fol
517. that hides the underlying objects using the current background color Most commonly wipeouts are used to mask part of a drawing for clarity For example you may want to add text to a complicated part of a drawing A wipeout could be used then to mask an area behind the text to increase the readability of the text The Frames option of the wipeout command determines whether the edges of all wipeout entities in the current drawing are displayed or hidden To create a wipeout using points 1 Do one of the following e Click the Wipeout tool button ad on the Draw toolbar e Choose Wipeout in the Draw menu e Type wipeout in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Frames Polylines lt Start point gt 2 Specify the first vertex of the wipeout The command bar reads Next point 3 Specify the second vertex of the wipeout The command bar reads Undo lt Next Point gt 4 Do one of the following e Specify the third vertex of the wipeout e Type U then press Enter or choose Undo in the context menu to delete the previous vertex The command bar reads Undo Close lt Next Point gt 5 Do one of the following e Specify the next vertex of the wipeout e Type U then press Enter or choose Undo in the context menu to delete the previous vertex e Type C then press Enter or choose Close in the context menu to create the wipeout e Right click to create the wipeout 6 Repeat step 5 to create more vertices of the
518. the borders line work and fixed texts e Create attributes with fields that refer to sheet set subset and sheet properties see To define an attribute See the SHEETSET command to learn more about default and custom sheet set subset and sheet properties Custom sheet set properties O Sheet Set Custom Properties Architect Bricsys amp Partners ArchitectAddress Bellevue 5 201 ArchitectCity 9050 Gent ArchitectPhone 09 2440191 Contractor Robert Stone Itd ContractorAddress 123 Main Street Contractorcity New Town Owner Carpenter Owner Address 1 Church Road OwnerCity New Town OwnerTitle Mr amp Mrs SiteAddress 43 Brick Lane SiteCity New Town SiteReference Section Ano 123 Sheet properties and sheet custom properties 433 BricsCAD V14 El Sheet Number Title Description Layout Revision Number Revision Date Issue Purpose Category Sheet Custom Properties Date Papersize Printer Remark Scale 08 Elevation South South elevation drawing Indude for Plot Publish LAYOUT 1 C BricsCAD Trainir 1 15 08 2013 Final Design Elevation 12 08 2013 A2 pdf none 1 50 5 Create a block from the title block source entities another drawing Copy the block to drawing in one of your block folders see To insert a block form 7 Delete the title block source entities The title block can be inserted in the other sheets of the sheet set and in any other sheet set where the same custom sheet set and
519. the drawing window e Click the Print Settings button to open the Print dialog e Click the Print button to start printing Plotter Configuration Command PLOTTERMANAGER Starting from BricsCAD V5 configurations for Windows system printers are stored in plotter configuration files PC3 files Unlike in AutoCAD PC3 plotter configuration files in BricsCAD apply to Windows system printers only In a plotter configuration file you override one or more settings of the system printers installed on your computer You can configure BricsCAD for many plotting printing devices and keep multiple configurations for each single device Each plotter configuration file contains information such as The device driver and model The output port to which the device is connected Various device specific settings not supported on the Linux platform PC3 files are saved in the Plotconfig subfolder of your Roamable root folder After creating a PC3 file it is available in the list of plotter configuration names in the Printer Plotter configuration list on the Print or Page Setup dialog boxes Printer Plotter configuration Adobe POF a Ei To create a plotter configuration file 1 Choose Plotter Manager in the File menu then double click Create a Plotter Configuration shortcut The Plotter Configuration Editor dialog opens 471 BricsCAD V14 B Plotter Configuration Editor Canon MP520 series Printer p Information For
520. the opposite direction 377 BricsCAD V14 Creating a 3D polar array Do one of the following e Click the 3D Array tool button on the Modify toolbar e Choose 3D Array in the Modify menu e Type 3darray in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entities to array Select the entities then right click or press Enter The command bar reads Type of array Polar lt Rectangular gt Choose Polar in the prompt menu or type P in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads ENTER to specify angle between items lt Number of items to array gt Type the number of items you want in the array then press Enter The command bar reads Angle to array for ccw for cw lt 360 gt Do one of the following e Type the angle to array then press Enter e Press Enter to create a 360 array The command bar reads Rotate entities around the array No lt Yes gt Do one of the following e Press Enter to rotate the entities about the array axis e Type N and press Enter to keep the original orientation of the entities The command bar reads Center of polar array Specify the first point of the array axis The command bar reads Specify second point along central axis of array Specify the second point of the array axis The array is created pe i k B j e m j p Se i Fi Fi a at a we 7 j Fi F T j f Fa fa Fa Pa l p t i i 4 fi E 1 I r j F ia ii r y F ii i
521. the portion of the drawing contained in a user defined window maintaining the aspect ratio of the windowed area to the drawing Click the Select print area button then specify the two corners of the print area in the drawing or Type the the X and Y coordinates of the corners of the print area in the X and Y fields Windowed plot area x 0 000 Y 0 000 w 118 900 Y 84 100 To define the plot scale NOTE The SCALELISTEDIT command allows to edit the list of available scales in the Print dialog and the Standard Scale property of a paper space viewport When printing in paper space If you print in paper space the final scale of the plot output is the product of the viewport scale and the plot scale In order to keep control over the scale of the plot output e Specify the width and height of the viewports in drawing units e Set the scale of each viewport to the scale you want in the plot output e The plot scale reflects the relationship between paper units and drawing units see table below Paper units Drawing units Plot scale Printed Drawing Units Millimeters or Inches a FF a e E S E fmm e ooa o fetes ines tad finches ieee dea a E 467 BricsCAD V14 When printing in model space If you print in model space the scale of the plot output equals the plot scale on condition your drawing units equal the paper units Otherwise you need to multiply the plot scale with respect to the relationship between
522. the prompt menu The command bar reads Select an entity 89 BricsCAD V14 3 Select the entity The entity highlights The command bar reads Select point or Multiple 4 Snap to the endpoint of an entity or the center point of a circle or an arc The selected point is forced to lie on the selected entity or its extension If you choose Multiple in step 3 you can NOTE select multiple points Usage of a coincident constraint between a point and an entity By applying coincident constraints between the pentagon vertices and the circle and equal constraints between one side and the four other sides the circle radius defines the size of the pentagon 90 User Guide Coincident constraints between the endpoints of the tangent lines and the circles prevent the tangent lines to extend beyond the tangent points a Coincident constraints are used to force the endpoints of the red line to lie on the bold lines force the midpoint of the red line to lie on the dash dot line The bold lines and the dash dot line have a perpendicular constraint with the red line As a result the dash dot line will always lie in the middle of the two bold lines 91 BricsCAD V14 Using horizontal and vertical constraints Horizontal and vertical geometric constraints force two points a line or a polyline segment to be parallel to the X axis horizontal or the Y axis vertical of the current coordinate system
523. the property filters e g Co or Layer and Linetype Properties Bar M Apply to current selection set El General Z Bvayer 5_FACING BRICK Linetype HIDDEN 4 Flot style J 5 i 7g 5 1815 a Sl 3D Visualization terial El Geometry cu O gt gt start point 0 O HH Ud OU 6 option Specify a different selection operator for each entity property Click the sign then select an operator in the list Select AIl Equals Not Equal Srnaller Smaller Or Equal Greater Greater or Equal 7 Do one of the following e Click the Add to new selection set button The entities that match the selected criteria are selected 399 BricsCAD V14 356 8 Properties Bar G j General E reve Layer 5_FACING BRICK Linetype HIDDEN4 Linetype scale 2 54 Plot style ByColor Lineweight Hyperlink Thickness 0 00 j 3D Visualization ByLayer El Geometry E Start point aries x a E E Maries Fi 0 00 H End point aries x E Varies Fa 0 00 El Delta Varies x o Ai Varies F 0 00 Length 5306 45 Varies e Click the Add to the current selection set button The entities that match the selected criteria are added to the current selection e Click the Remove from current selection set button X The entities that match the selected criteria are removed from the current selection o
524. the rest of the group and without breaking up the group You can use nested groups if necessary and a single entity can be a member of different groups NOTE Make sure the value of the PICKSTYLE variable is set to either 1 or 3 to enable the selection of groups To create a group 1 Do one of the following e Click the Group tool button 1 on the Tools toolbar e Choose Group in the Tools menu e Type group in the command bar then press Enter The Entity Grouping dialog window opens Entity Grouping E Display unnamed Groups Find Groups by entity gt Create Group Name e ien m a Ermir Nodes mom Group 447 BricsCAD V14 Do one of the following e Type a name in the Name field e Check the Unnamed option to create an unnamed group option Type a description in the Description field option Check uncheck the Selectable option Click the Select entities and create group button The Entity Grouping dialog temporarily closes to let you select entities Select the entities you want to include in the new group Right click to conclude the selection of entities The Entity Grouping dialog reopens The newly created group is added Click the OK button to close the Entity Grouping dialog To modify a group 1 et 2 Do one of the following e Click the Group tool button G1 on the Tools toolbar e Choose Group in the Tools menu e Type group in the command bar then press Enter The Ent
525. the settings field to display the Background options lt None gt 3 Choose an option in the list The Background dialog box displays 4 option Select Solid in the Type list Click the Co or button to define the color 5 option Select Gradient in the Type list e Set the rotation angle 143 BricsCAD V14 e Choose Two or Three colors e Click the Top Middle and Bottom color buttons to define the color 6 option Select Image in the Type list Type Image settings C Bricscad_Reports V 11 Rendering douds_02 jpg e Click the browse button next to the Image settings field to select a raster image file e Choose an alignment The options are Center Stretch and Tile 7 option Right click then choose Set Current in the context menu if you want to use the newly defined background in a rendering right away 144 User Guide To edit the view background 1 In the Drawing Explorer Views dialog window select Background in the Edit grid of the view 2 Click the settings field to display the Background options Gradient Image Sun amp Sky Edit 3 Choose Edit in the list to edit the current settings The Background dialog box displays 4 Edit the settings needed then click the OK button Workspaces Workspaces define settings and preferences regarding a specific working environment such as 2D Drafting or 3d Modeling The name of the current workspace is stored in the W
526. the start vertex of the segment you want to modify A X indicates the currently selected vertex in the drawing a 2 1A Type a new value in the Bulge field and press Enter 1 000000 Continue editing the polyline or press the Esc key to stop The bulge is the tangent of one fourth the included angle for an arc segment A positive bulge creates a counter clockwise arc while a negative bulge creates an arc with a clockwise direction Straight segments have a zero bulge II N L UO Bulge Bulge tg Q 4 407 BricsCAD V14 Converting Entities The Explode tool converts complex entities such as blocks polylines solids or dimensions into their component parts The Region tool converts closed entities into a solid entity The Flatten command converts splines to polylines Exploding entities Commands EXPLODE and TXTEXP The Explode command converts complex entities such as blocks polylines solids or dimensions into their component parts Exploding a polyline or dimension reduces it to a collection of individual line and arc entities that you can then modify individually Blocks are converted to the individual entities possibly including other nested blocks that composed the original entity Multiline texts explode into single line text entities In general exploding entities will have no visible effect in the drawing except for e If the original polyline had a width the width information is lost whe
527. tical 4 User Guide Right option To create 4 viewports do one of the following e Choose Create 4 viewports in the prompt menu e Type 4 in the command bar then press Enter A Drawing in multiple viewports NOTES Click in a viewport to make it current The border of the current viewport highlights Draw the entities in the current viewport option Repeat step 1 to make a different viewport current e The crosshairs show in the current viewport only e You can start a command in the current viewport and finish the operation ina different viewport Joining adjacent viewports NOTE Launch the Viewports command Select the Join command option The command bar reads Select inside dominant viewport lt Current gt Click in the dominant viewport or press Enter to choose the current viewport The border of the selected viewport highlights The command bar reads Select inside viewport to join Click the viewport to join again to confirm The two selected viewports are joined You can join viewports which share an edge of equal length only 155 BricsCAD V14 Paper space viewports Commands MVIEW MVSETUP ALIGNSPACE and VPCLIP The Mview command creates one or more viewports in layout tabs short for make viewports The MvSetup command creates multiple viewports in model space the command creates a rectangle representing a paper sheet with respect to a specified scale The AlignSpace comm
528. ting e Press and hold the Shift key to reverse the Orthogonal Mode setting e Orthogonal Mode is overruled by entity snaps e Turning on Ortho Mode automatically disables Polar Tracking and vice versa To toggle Orthogonal Mode Do one of the following Click the ORTHO field in the Status Bar Press the F8 function key Press and hold the Shift key Type ortho in the command bar then choose the appropriate setting Set the Orthogonal Mode in the Settings dialog 67 BricsCAD V14 Direct Distance Entry Direct Distance Entry DDE means that you can type the length of lines polyline segments circle radii and diameters movement vectors in commands such as Move Copy and Stretch etc in the command bar When combined with either Orthogonal Mode or Polar Tracking Direct Distance Entry is a particularly efficient method to draw lines of a specified length and direction and to move or copy objects over a specified distance To help you keep track of the position of the cursor it is recommended to set the readout of the coordinate field in the Status Bar to Relative To define the Coordinates setting Do one of the following e Right click the then choose Relative in the context menu e Click the Coordinates field in the status bar to cycle the Coordinate setting The sequence is Off Relative Absolute e Press the F6 function key or use the Ctr I keyboard shortcut to cycle the Coordinate setting The sequence is Off
529. tinued dimension continues an angular dimension from the second extension line of a previous angular dimension gt lt angular dimension angular angular dimension measured between two dimension of defined by a lines an arc vertex and two endpoints angular baseline dimensions angular continued dimensions To dimension an angle between two lines 1 Do one of the following e Click the Angular tool button E on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Angular in the Dimensions menu e Type dimangular in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Press Enter to specify angle lt select line arc or circle gt 295 BricsCAD V14 Select the first line or line segment The command bar reads Other line for angular dimension Select the second line or line segment The angular dimension displays dynamically The command bar reads Angle Text lt Location of dimension arc gt Do one of the following e Position the dimension arc e Type A and press Enter to define the angle of the dimension text then position the dimension arc e Type 7 and press Enter to modify the dimension text then position the dimension arc To dimension an angle encompassed by an arc L 3 Do one of the following e Click the Angular tool button h on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Angular in the Dimensions menu e Type dimangular in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Press Enter to specify angle lt se
530. tion block or a 3D cutaway block e Replace a section block e g when the section entity has been modified e Save a section to a new drawing To launch the SectionPlaneToBlock command Do one of the following e Click the Section Plane to Block tool button Ps on the Sections toolbar e Choose Section Plane to Block in the Model gt Sections menu e Type sectionplanetoblock in the command bar then press Enter The Create Section Elevation dialog box displays Select No block selected Export to file Cs Wsers Louis Documents sectionplanetoblock dwg Include all entities Select entities Select No entities selected 2D cross section elevation 3D cutaway section 266 User Guide To insert a section as a 2D block w O ONO option Adjust the 2D Section Elevation settings of the section plane entity Launch the Section Plane to Block command Set the Destination to Insert new block Under Source Geometry do one of the following e Choose Include all entities to include all 3D solids in the drawing e Choose Select entities then click the Select button te to select 3D solids Under Section plane click the Se ect button Tr then select a section plane entity in the drawing Set the Section type to 2D cross section elevation Adjust the Insert options see Insert a block Click the OK button The Create Section Elevation dialog closes The block is attached t
531. tions Example Positive 123 456 789 00 Negative 123 456 789 00 Decimal symbol No of digits after decimal Digit grouping symbol Digit grouping Negative sign symbol Negative number format Display leading zeros List separator Measurement system Metric Standard digits 0123456789 Use native digits Never Click Reset to restore the system default settings for numbers currency time and date 4 On the Numbers page of the Customize Regional Options dialog box go to List separator then click the down arrow and select either comma or semicolon 5 Click the OK button on the Customize Regional Options and Regional and Language Options dialog boxes 335 BricsCAD V14 Table Styles Command TABLESTYLE The appearance of a table is controlled by a table style Each drawing contains the Standard table style which cannot be deleted You can modify the Standard table style to fit your needs or create your own table styles Table styles are created and edited in the Table Styles category of the Drawing Explorer dialog In a table there are 3 cell types Data Header and Title Each cell type has its own cell style settings By default all cells in a row share the same cell style settings but you can edit the settings of each cell afterwards To open the Table Styles Explorer Do one of the following e Choose Drawing Explorer gt Table Styles in the Too s menu e Type tablestyle
532. tities button The Order Group dialog opens Order Group Description secondary staircase Remove from position 0 23 Enter new position number for the object 0 23 Number of objects 1 24 3 option Click the Highlight button to see the current position of each entity The Object Grouping box opens Object Grouping 4 option Click the Reverse Order button to reverse the order of all entities in the group 449 BricsCAD V14 5 option To change the order of a single entity do the following e Inthe Remove from position field type the current position of the entity you want to move e Inthe Enter new position number for the object field type the new position e option Type the number of objects you want to reorder in the Number of objects field 6 Click the Re Order button A message box displays Message Working with underlays Commands PDFATTACH PDFLAYERS PDFCLIP PDF files can be attached as an underlay to a drawing file Much like raster image files and external references Xrefs a PDF underlay is not part of the drawing but is linked to it In the parent drawing the path to the underlay is saved You can edit the path to make sure the correct PDF is found By default the folder of the parent drawing is search first If the PDF underlay is not found there the saved path folder is searched If the PDF underlay is not found there either BricsCAD reports a Missing or invalid referen
533. title bar or the file name only DrawingPath Drawings Specifies an additional folder in the file dialog for path the Open and SaveAs commands On the Windows platform the fifth folder in the Open File dialog s Places bar PlacesBarFolder1 4 First Sets the folders 1 through 4 in the Places bar of Second the non standard Open File dialog Windows Third and platform only Values between O and 5 are Fourth folder accepted O Desktop 1 My Computer 2 My Documents 3 Favorites 4 Network 5 My Recent Documents Tip Place shortcuts to your favorite drawing folders on your desktop or in your Favorites folder Open Drawing Look in di Bricscad amp FF Date mo 29 11 20 templates 709 201 _Plotsheet dwg 16 11 20 Elevation_East dwg 8 01 200 Elevation_North dwq 6 01 200 Elevation_South dwg 23 01 20 Elevation_West dwq 31 08 20 E Elevations dwg 20 10 2C b 3 House dwg 31 08 2C Isometric_Section dwg 25 07 20 Isometric_SW dwg 21 01 20 F 4 NestedXref dwg 16 11 20 b Plan_Foundation dwqg 8 01 20 Plan_Level 0 dwg 16 1172 Plan_Level 1 dwg 8 01 20 I ee Bricscad ile name Training Computer Favorites My Documents Standard Drawing File dwa 485 BricsCAD V14 THUMBSIZE Thumbnail preview image size INDEXCTL Index Control 486 Range is 0 8 Default 1 O 64 x 64 1 128 x 128 2 256 x 256 3 512 x 512 4 1024 x 1024 5 1440 x 1440 6 1600 x 1600 7 1920 x 1920 8 2560 x
534. to accept the default name The command bar reads Enter an option to change Name Intensity factor Status Photometry Hotspot Falloff shadoW Attenuation filterColor lt eXit gt 6 Do one of the following e Click a light property in the prompt menu e Type the capitalized letter of a light property in the command bar and press Enter You are prompted to define the selected property in the command bar 7 Do one of the following to conclude the creation of the light e Choose Exit in the prompt menu e Press Enter NOTE Itis not possible to define a web light if the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is zero No lighting units To edit a light 1 Select the light in the drawing If the Properties bar is not open yet double click the light The properties of the selected light display in the Properties Bar Properties Bar Light EH General Name Spotight1 Type Spot On Off On Shadows On Hotspot Angle 60 0000 Falloff Angle 90 0000 Intensity factor 1 Filter color RGB 255 255 255 Plot glyph No Glyph display Auto Photometric Properties Photometric Web Web Offsets Geometry Attenuation Rendered Shadow Details 2 To edit a property e Expand the settings group if needed e Select the property e Edit the selected property 525 BricsCAD V14 To define the sun properties 1 Do one of the following e Click the Sun Properties tool button Dy on the Render toolbar e Type sunproperties or sun in the command
535. to the Length dynamic dimension If DYNDIVIS 0 the Arc dynamic dimension disappears when you hit the TAB key If ORTHO is on you can still specify the angle using the Angle dynamic dimension Using dynamic dimensions to grip edit entities Ls 3 4 Select the entity or entities All grips on the selected entities display Click the grip you want to edit then move the cursor Depending on the value of the DYNDIVIS system variable one two or all dynamic dimensions display dynamically The first dynamic dimension highlights Do one of the following e Type the desired value for the currently highlighted dynamic dimension then hit the TAB key to jump to the next dynamic dimension The dynamic dimension is locked and displays in red e Type the desired value for the currently highlighted dynamic dimension then press Enter to stop e Hit the TAB key to jump to the next dynamic dimension Repeat step 3 or press Enter to stop Using dynamic dimensions to measure entities i Select the entity or entities All grips on the selected entities display Hover the cursor over a grip The grip highlights and all dimensions related to the selected grip display User Guide Tie i i a ie ie pray en ha Ma o ZA Dynamic dimensions used to measure a rectangle left and a line right 3 option Click to start editing the selected grip Coordinate Input When you create entities in a drawing
536. trical and radial dimensions Commands DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS Diametrical and radial dimensions annotate the radii and diameters of circles and circular arcs The DIMCENTER command creates center marks in the center point of circles and circular arcs To create a diametrical dimension Do one of the following Click the Diameter tool button a on Circles toolbar or the Circles flyout of the Dimensions toolbar Choose Diameter in the Dimensions menu Type dimdiameter in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select arc or circle Select the arc or circle you want to annotate The diametrical dimension displays dynamically Position the dimension line To create a radial dimension Do one of the following Click the Radius tool button AD on Circles toolbar or the Circles flyout of the Dimensions toolbar Choose Radius in the Dimensions menu Type dimradius in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select arc or circle Select the arc or circle you want to annotate The radial dimension displays dynamically Position the dimension line Creating center marks or center lines 1 Do one of the following Click the Center tool button 45 on Circles toolbar or the Circles flyout of the Dimensions toolbar Choose Center in the Dimensions menu Type dimcenter in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select arc or circle to dimension 2 Select the arc o
537. ts Settings Printer name E Canon MPS20 seres Printer Plotter configuration file name Canon MPS20 senes Printer pos Description Driver Information not used for compatibility only System Driver gdiplot z hdi Version not specified Fort USBOO1 2 Inthe Printer name list select the printer you want to create a plotter configuration PC3 for 3 Click the Settings tab on the Plotter Configuration Editor dialog EB Plotter Configuration Editor Canon MP520 series Printer p Stings Canon MP520 series Printer pod iS Media GS Source and Size lt Size A4 gt el He Media Destination lt Detault fla Graphics ee Custom Properties Access Custom Dialog Ps Press the button underneath to access the device diver speciic user interface Custom Properties Defauts 4 Click the Custom Properties button The lt Selected Printer gt Properties dialog opens The layout of this dialog is different for each printer Custom Properties are not supported on the Linux platform 5 On the Properties dialog of the selected printer adjust the printer settings then click the OK button to confirm The lt Selected Printer gt Properties dialog closes 6 Click the OK button on the Plotter Configuration Editor dialog The Changes to a Printer Configuration File dialog opens 472 NOTE User Guide Changes to a Printer Configuration File eee Seen 4 PCS Printer Configuration Fi
538. ty in a field cece cceseeeeeceeseueuueeecueueeeeeucueeeeeucuuenseuuurenseuguregs 325 FOC CG eT CFG ieee acre ten teen htedeaian race ca a geet E T thew aan hana aGunesee nas ines ceri eeeNeN 326 FOND Gale a TelC asses an veassunesaata ssunsatu danas aaiperada cnmaaena ese eaaametan nae eabe rennet aman Seaaaanecanene es 326 TOCCOMV ERE te EITO TE K ne stein aanondeeee ai tank E A a 326 Ta o E A E E A A E A E E E E A oe 7 TOCreate an emp LAG anii AA A a a es eae eeanies 327 FOcreate a tade MoOmdata aoe E stead E T A E eames Mme 328 To create a table from an Excel spreadsheet s nusssssresnssssnrsnsrrunnnsnenrrnsnennnnsnenrrnrnenne 328 Editing a Tape USING ODS sirri trr re nnan A A O AA naa towne near aa 329 Editing a table Using he Table tOoba sanaa a E E T cane ennnene eee 329 TAIDE TOOL ur pir ne AT E EAA N A ET E RA E 330 Editing a table in the Properties bar sessssssssssssnsnnnssenrsnsnssnnnsrensnnsnenrenrnrnenrrnenennenrn 332 EGItING a Cellin the Properties Dar airin are e E S 333 To edit the table Conte NE nine a aa E E ea A a a reai 334 TO export a table areia aa aa aa a a a aa e at 334 Defining the list separator character s sssssssrsesrrsnnnssenrensnsnnenrrensnnsnsnrenenrnenrrneneunnnrn 334 TaD SVIE S ieena E E aa oO To open the Table Styles Explorer rirrciirrercirinii icine rn nA A O AEEA 336 TO create a table Stylin ara aa TAE Ai 336 TOCdta tape SVE a T a A 337 FO ADDIY d StVIE toa table e
539. u ttecdy nine ula a AA E vakantte 59 To Launch the User Profile Manager usssusssusnansnansnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnsnnannnnnnannannn 59 Creating User DEO CS sairone a E E ben wrataa otcie seat tana a tact wren oa acm nea wed AR ew nan eaare nee 60 Starting BricsCAD with a specific user Profile cece cece cece ee ee ee eee eeee seen ee eeeeaanenenneenes 60 Restarting BricsCAD using a different user Profile cc cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeetesenetteegeneenegs 61 Managing user Droes sr siosi tae otlennriniaets A E aunuennesapea aan aged ta anieaxeumeertatas 62 TOCH asUSEr DFOUIC t2ocsuwicecaapariznctsagunaaaiansetaunanieatacennreenteauinn ated EET NA 63 TOMPO ac HSE DOC rerne tera E E devas anh E E E 63 To import a user profile from another USEF s sssssssssssnsusnsnsnsnsnsnennnsnsnennnsnenenennneneneneneneno 64 Table of Contents Pro CCUS fisniiveriiniiiieidisivnt cine erat aaa OF Opening CAC Project SCLUNG See nde chaos E E need cancrateatea ncedade 64 creating Droe cto cian totenesvevutesownilecabsadaanlas DE nce tarauuiassabseretneuneanas sd ecesteGuwie tawabuadnamean ede 64 Adding Search paths toa DrOJECE reaivscswaiua danas wuts seve eadane Ee ene tes Vaneau wa iewasaean eaaeranee canes 65 Changing the order of the search DatnS vonisiiccsaiccesratbisnatiolces mab vian ete tiawwsaamertve biniwawnanalee 66 Assigning a project to the Current Crawinng cccccesecccesecseeeeeeseeeeteegeeeeteegeeeetee
540. uiawe anes 298 TO create a leader ONY orriaren a a tan seetucnatasanninedautarauntas terae inate sak AN 299 Editing GIMCNSIONS ecnin a a a aaa SOU Using grips to edita linear dimensi n srasrerercenore vinia A O EAE A 300 Editing the dimension textini arinaa r E 301 To edit the dimension text in the MText editor sssssnsssessnsssnnsnrrrunnnsnenrrnsnennnnsnenrrnrnenee 301 To edit the dimension text in the Properties Bar ssssssesssssnnrsnrrrnrnnrnenrsrrerenrnrenenrrrerrnes 301 To edit the dimension text using the Edit Dimension Text tool sssssssesereserernrnrernrnrnrerern 301 TO OLAS the CIIMICN SION LOX rorirori or ena A E A E EAA 302 To reposition the dimension teXt s ssssssssssssssesrnnsnerrenrrrnenrsnsrrunnnrnenrrnsnennnnenenrrnrnenne 302 TO restore the text POSITION eenaa A A ol sean oie eas 302 To make the extension lines ODMGU Cesc csaecscimedesntaannaeeen a A A N wees 302 Adding Geometric Tolerances ss ss 2 903 To create a geometrical tolerance fraMe s sssssssssssssrrenrrssenrsnsrrnnnnrnenrenenennnnenenrrnrnenae 303 GEOMERTIC TOlErance dalog area aa E A A ears causa ne 304 WOFKING WAD TEXTS isoveccvnussaresccesusuncssseceuccunssesscwuscatsupesssvemesnuses OO TExES YO Wag ah heccosca A A E AA EE E dena AE TR 305 TEXUFONUerirori anashinda aa r a aare a ar eraa ida i naa aTe 305 Text Varia DleS arrarua a A E E E a a a a a OD TeXt Style iaraa SOC TO
541. uraud shading and wireframe lines and _ Edges curves Light List lightlist Opens the Drawing Explorer Lights Sun Sunproperties Opens the sun properties editor Properties Geographic geographiclocation Opens the Geographic Location dialog i Location Set the DISPSILH system variable On to display silhouette lines instead of a polygon mesh for curved surfaces Hidden line of a cone a cylinder and a sphere with DISPSILH Off left and On right 512 User Guide To render a viewport 1 Do one of the following e Click the Render tool button oP on the Rendering toolbar e Type render in the command bar then press Enter The Render dialog displays Render Render destination Viewport Bile Width 800 Height 500 2 Click the OK button The view is rendered The background of a rendered view is defined by the Background property of the view To save a rendering to a file 1 Do one of the following e Click the Render tool button oP on the Rendering toolbar e Type render in the command bar then press Enter The Render dialog displays 2 Click the File radio button 1 on the Render dialog Render Render destination E Viewport E Permanent render mode File 1 2 3 E Width 800 3 Type a name for the output file in the name field 2 4 Click the browse button 3 The Render Output File dialog displays 513 BricsCAD V14 8
542. urement interval and press Enter e Specify two points in the drawing The blocks are placed along the selected entity at the specified interval Blocks aligned top or not aligned bottom 411 BricsCAD V14 Dividing Entities Command DIVIDE The Divide command places markers points or blocks along a selected entity The markers evenly divide the entity into the specified number of equal parts You can divide lines polylines arcs circles ellipses elliptical arcs and splines To divide an entity using points 1 Do one of the following e Click the Divide tool button Ca on the Modify toolbar e Choose Divide in the Modify menu e Type divide in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entity to divide 2 Click the entity you want to divide The command bar reads Blocks lt Number of Segments gt 3 Type the number of segments in the command bar and press Enter Points are placed along the selected entity to divide the entity NOTE It might be necessary to adjust the Point display mode settings to display the points correctly To divide an entity using blocks 1 Do one of the following e Click the Divide tool button Ca on the Modify toolbar e Choose Divide in the Modify menu e Type divide in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Select entity to divide 2 Click the entity you want to divide The command bar reads Blocks lt Number of Segments gt
543. uress 151 Model Space and paper Space ss s LOL Switching between model Space ANd paper SPACE cee eecccccceeeee eee e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaeeneeeees 152 USING ENG Model ANG lAVOUL LADS aieri cated scans sae tacacaten tata dae nwaniaue oataaga be miaiaute mane naasanaaneea 152 Toggle between model Space and paper Space in a IAYOUL cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeuueeeeneugeees 152 Model Space VIEW Ports csssssccennnsecccnnnesesccnnneessesseessssessnesssessssess LOGS Creating viewports in model Space 4 cneisinivescrsavcacerawcas ee wantiedoniiia spans aweraa ties wentvasrariaees 153 Drawing I UIE P1e VIEW DOMES aea crak rater a gasheaane taseay eae E N ante atammeueaens 155 Joining adjacent VIEW DOES techs dunes eliana AE GA viganncas deve e a OAA LETEN 155 Paper SPACE ViIieWpOrtS ssccccnncccccnnccccnneceennnssecnnassensussessussesssesssssss LOO Displaying the paper sheet and the printable Area cc cece cesses ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesgeeeeseggenegs 157 Creating ViEWDONLSVIN a lay OUU cessnaas te caguadsd cabenssemanmikeerncuaeesaisateexinen doen aE A ns 157 Creating an array O layout VIEW DORIS ieina cuter din itebsavatuten Seva ee eeds tees eaa ane rie Oa 160 TOClD a VIEW DOLE ws ssccvecaereanscanerauhaietenedsnwess ounerrtediazaviededaaenes tasaweea otal oceaiecatideetsareesasinn 161 To remove the clipping boundary Of a viewport ce cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeesseeetseugerst
544. utline only Finding and replacing text Command FIND The FIND command lets you specify the text you want to find You can than find or replace the text Optionally you can zoom in on the various instances of the text entities that contain the search text 314 User Guide To open the Find and Replace dialog Do one of the following e Choose Find in the Edit menu e Type find in the command bar then press Enter Find and Replace Find Text String Search in ooo Replace with Search results Find Next Replace Replace All Select All foom To 315 BricsCAD V14 To set the Find and Replace options 1 Open the Find and Replace dialog 2 Click the Options button Find and Replace Options Indude Block Attribute Value Table text Dimension Annotation Text Hyperlink Description Text MText DText Text Hyperlink Match case Find whole words only 3 Set the Find and Replace options 4 Click the OK button To find text 1 Open the Find and Replace dialog 2 option Set the Find and Replace options Type the text in the Find Text String field 4 option Click the Se ect Entities button Te to compose a selection set e The Find and Replace dialog temporarily closes to let you select entities e Right click to conclude the selection of entities The Search in field reads Current Selection instead of Entire Drawing 5 Click the Find Next button _Find Next _ Th
545. vious linear dimension A continued dimension continues a linear dimension from the second extension line of a previous linear dimension To create a horizontal or vertical linear dimension Do one of the following e Click the Linear tool button a on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Linear in the Dimensions menu e Type dimlinear in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads ENTER to select entity lt Origin of first extension line gt Do one of the following e Press Enter then select the line or linear segment of a polyline you want to dimension e Specify the origin of the first extension line then specify the origin of the second extension line The dimension line displays dynamically Move the cross hairs vertically to create a horizontal dimension or horizontally to create a vertical dimension Position the dimension line To create an aligned linear dimension 292 Do one of the following e Click the Aligned tool button Rs on the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Aligned in the Dimensions menu e Type dimaligned in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads ENTER to select entity lt Origin of first extension line gt Do one of the following e Press Enter then select the line or linear segment of a polyline you want to dimension e Specify the origin of the first extension line then specify the origin of the second extension line Do one of the following e Click a point t
546. w then press Enter The command bar reads Select polyline to edit 2 Select the polyline The command bar reads Edit polyline Edit vertices Close or Open Decurve Fit Join Linetype Mode Reverse Spline Taper Width Undo lt exXit gt A prompt menu displays 3 Choose Linetype mode in the prompt menu or type L and press Enter The command bar reads Linetype continuous along polyline ON OFF lt current setting gt The Editpline prompt menu changes PEDIT Continuous on Continuous off Cancel 404 User Guide 4 Do one of the following e Choose Continuous on or Continuous off in the prompt box e Type ON or OF in the command bar then press Enter The same polyline with Continuous On left and Continuous Off right 5 Do one of the following e Continue editing the selected polyline e Choose Cancel in the prompt menu or press Enter or right click to conclude the Edit Polyline tool 405 BricsCAD V14 Editing polylines in the Properties bar When you select polyline its current properties display in the BricsCAD Properties bar In the BricsCAD Properties bar the following polyline properties can be edited e Move vertices 1 e Change the width of polyline segments 2 e Convert straight segments into a curve 3 e Change the global width 4 e Change the Elevation 5 e Open close the polyline 6 e Change the Linetype generation mode 7 Properties Bar ByLayer Layer Doo Linet
547. will be searched when the drawing is loaded If the overlay is not found there the folder of the parent drawing is searched If the overlay file is not found there either Missing or invalid reference displays at the insertion point of the PDF overlay e Relative path The relative path with respect to the folder of the parent drawing will be searched when the drawing is loaded If the overlay is not found there the folder of the parent drawing is searched If the overlay file is not found there either Missing or invalid reference displays at the insertion point of the PDF overlay e No path Only the folder of the parent drawing is searched when the drawing is loaded If the overlay file is not found there Missing or invalid reference displays at the insertion point of the PDF overlay 5 Choose whether you want to specify the Insertion Point Scale and the Rotation angle on screen or not 6 Click the OK button The Attach PDF Underlay dialog closes 7 Depending on the insertion options chosen in the previous step you are prompted to specify the Insertion Point Scale and or Rotation angle To insert a PDF underlay 1 If you want to insert a second instance of a PDF that is already attached or another page of such underlay do the following 2 Choose Drawing Explorer gt PDF Underlays in the Tools menu The Drawing Explorer PDF Underlays dialog opens 3 Select the PDF underlay 4 Do one of the following e Righ
548. wing environment User profiles can be saved to a file which can then be imported on a different computer This allows you to copy your settings to a new computer or to install the same settings on multiple computers If you use a third party applications on top of BricsCAD you might want to create a user profile to use with each of these applications The User Profile Manager is a standalone tool that lists the existing profiles and provides all the tools needed to Load Create Set Current Copy Rename Delete Export and Import user profiles User Guide Content of a user profile User profiles save many settings that control the drawing environment Once you start BricsCAD using a user profile it automatically tracks and stores changes that you make to your drawing environment e Configuration settings all settings listed in the Settings dialog and which are saved in the registry Hi e Plot settings in Model Space e Settings in dialog windows e g search options in the Settings dialog e Project settings e Recent paths e Status bar settings e Tip of the Day settings e Toolbar settings To Launch the User Profile Manager Do one of the following e When BricsCAD is running choose User Profile Manager in the Tools menu e From the Windows Start menu choose All Programs gt Bricsys gt BricsCAD gt User Profile Manager e Double click userprofilemanager exe in the BricsCAD program folder e g C Program
549. wing until you write the sketch into your drawing 195 BricsCAD V14 Setting the Sketch Poly SKPOLY system variable Whether a chain of individual lines or a polyline is created by the Sketch tool is controlled through the Sketch Poly SKPOLY system variable When the setting is ON the Sketch tool creates polylines Do one of the following e Inthe command bar type skpoly then press Enter e In the Settings dialog go to Drawing gt Drafting gt Entity Creation gt Freehand Sketches El Freehand sketches Sketch increment 0 1000 Creating a freehand sketch 1 Do one of the following e Click the Sketch tool button lt on the Draw toolbar e Choose Sketch in the Draw menu e Type sketch in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Length of segments lt current length gt 2 Do one of the following to define the length of the segments e Press Enter to accept the current length e Type anew value in the command bar e Click two points to define the length graphically The length of the segments is saved to the Sketch Increment SKETCHINC system variable 3 Click to start sketching pen down The crosshairs are replaced by the Pencil tool The command bar reads Press ENTER or click to toggle Pen Quit without save Record save Erase Connect Straight exit with save A prompt menu displays SKETCH Erase Connect save and exit Quit no save Record save Cancel 4 Move the
550. wings gt Folders sub window browse to the folder of the drawing 497 BricsCAD V14 NOTE Drawing Explorer Edit View Settings Help ee Open Drawings Folders Sheets Type Add local folder s y Layers L to coo ogon to Chapoo Layer States E E Local Folders ae Hf C plocks2D Ea Multiline Styles ic C BricsCAD House B Multileader Styles H Details Ay Text Styles H E Elevations EI E Plans 4 Dimension Styles a Bisa Fo Table Styles Plan ern co Plan_Levell dwg Ea Sections i F PlotSheet dwg E T C P Porshes Double click the drawing The drawing opens while the Drawing Explorer window stays open optional Repeat steps 2 and 3 to open more drawings Close the Drawing Explorer When you select a drawing a preview displays in the Preview sub window Adding a drawing folder NOTE In the Drawings gt Folders sub window of the Drawing Explorer main window click the Add local folder button The Browse For Folder window opens In the Browse For Folder window do one of the following e To add an existing folder select the folder you want to add e To create a new folder click the Make New folder button Click the OK button The folder is added Drawings in the subfolders of the selected folder can be opened too The parent folder s of the selected folder is are greyed out in the drawing folder tree Drawings in such folders cannot b
551. work with attributes s sesessssssssnsnsnsnsnsnnnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnnnnnsnsnsnennnn 431 XVIII Table of Contents Defining AtLrIDUtLES srona aa aaa OL General procedure to define attributes ccc ccccccces seen ee eeeseeeenneeeeeeeseesanaeneeeesseeugaannenegs 431 TOP Gene anat DUTE ts rescensvesauvitenausemcnpuntawees nema tes aune ten ahegua tates denaenenene leGauuikexeuunmuniaN ee 431 Using sheet set properties in a title block cece ccccccee esse ener eeeeeceeneeeeeeesseeeanneneeeenseeuananes 433 Editing attribute definitions ssssssunnunnnunnunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 44 To edit tag prompt or default text Of AN attriDUte cece cece cece eee eeeeee seen ee eeeeaaaeeeees 434 TO eGit an altriDule defni HUON aiana a a A E AA A 435 Placing blocks with attributeS ssssssunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 430 TO placea DIOCK with attiDuUtTeS vori a a ane ANE OAA ERA tea area AAA 436 Editing attributes attached to blocks s sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn FOOD Usifig tie AtHIDULS EGON rroia a A A E A a a aA 437 Editing attributes in the Properties bar s ssssssssssssssnsssnrsnsnssnnnsrensnnsnsnrenenenenrrnenennnnsn 438 Extracting attribute information ssssss2s2u222222222222222 2 499 TO CXFact attribute INrOrMallON anae a a a a A 440 Working with external referenCeS s ssu22222222 2222022202222222 44L Attaching an external reference ssssssunnnnn
552. xisting default cui If the existing default customization file has changed you will be prompted whether or not keep the existing file see the BricsCAD user file manager However if new tools are added in an update you will not be able to access them until you load the new default cui If you are not sure whether the most recent default customization file is used press the Revert to defau t button on the Customize dialog Store your customizations in a partial CUI file with each new update the default cui is updated automatically To restore your customizations reload the partial CUI file The reference to your partial CUI file is stored in the main cui file default cui In any case if you customize menus toolbars accelerators aliases it is recommended to keep a copy of these files including default cui and default pgp before doing an update Another approach to keeping your menu customization when changing to a new version of BricsCAD is to make your custom CUI file the main CUI file See To load a main cui file and attach default cui to it as a partial CUI file see To load a partial cui file Then you don t have to do anything when you update The new default cui overwrites the old one and replaces it as the partial CUI attached to your custom CUI file It automatically updates very much like an xref drawing file that you edit or replace with another file of the same name Another advantage of this method is that if y
553. y the displacement point e Press Enter or choose Paste to Original Coordinates in the Edit menu to paste the selection set using the coordinates of the source drawing NOTE If you choose Undo in the Edit menu in the source drawing the deletion of the selection set is undone Move a selection as a block 1 In the source drawing select the entities you want to move 2 Do one of the following e Right click then choose Cut in the context menu e Choose Cut in the Edit menu e Press Ctrl X press and hold the Ctrl key then press X The entities are deleted in the source drawing and copied to the Clipboard 3 option Switch to the target drawing 4 Choose Paste as a Block in the Edit menu or press Ctrl Shfit V The bottom left corner of the bounding rectangle of the selection is attached to the cross hairs in the target drawing 5 Specify the insertion point 359 BricsCAD V14 Rotating Entities Commands ROTATE and ROTATE3D You can rotate entities about a specified point at a specified rotation angle or by an angle referenced to a base angle The default method rotates the entities using a relative rotation angle from their current orientation By default angles start at 3 o clock and increase in a counter clockwise direction If you want to rotate in a clockwise direction you can enter a negative angle by using a minus sign NOTES The Angular Base is controlled by the ANGBASE system variable which in turn re
554. yle used in a drawing is assigned when the drawing is created If you create a new drawing from a template the template s plot style table type will apply to the new drawing If you create a new drawing using a wizard you will be asked which type of plot style table you want to assign If you create a drawing from scratch it depends on the status of the BASEFILE and PSTYLEPOLICY variables whether CTB Color table or STB Named plot style table will be used to set up plotter configurations in the newly created drawing Color dependent plot style tables CTB file The color dependent plot styles tables use an entity s color to determine characteristics such as lineweight Use color dependent plot styles to ensure that all entities that share the same color are plotted the same way While you can edit plot styles in a color dependent plot style table you cannot add or delete plot styles There are 255 plot styles in a color dependent plot style table one for each BricsCAD color Named plot style tables STB file The named plot styles tables contain user defined plot styles When you use a named plot style table entities that have the same color may be plotted differently based on the plot style assigned to the entity A named plot style table can contain as many or as few plot styles as required Named plot styles can be assigned to entities or layers in the same way that linetype and color are assigned to entities An entity whose plo
555. ylines 1 Do one of the following e Click the Boundary Polyline tool button I on the Draw toolbar e Choose Boundary Polyline in the Draw menu e Type boundary in the command bar then press Enter The Boundary dialog box opens Boundary Pick points in boundaries Current viewport New Boundary retention Retain boundaries as Polylines Islands O O 7 Nested Outer Ignore Boundary tolerance Tolerance 0 0 2 option Click the Select button tt The Boundary dialog closes Select the boundary entities in the drawing then Press Enter The Boundary dialog opens 3 Click the Pick points in boundaries button on the Boundary dialog box The dialog box closes 205 BricsCAD V14 4 Click in the area where you want to create the boundary polyline point 1 in the NOTES 206 image below The boundary polyline displays in dashed lines option Keep picking points to create more boundary polylines Right click to accept the polyline s The Boundary dialog box opens again Click the OK button on the Boundary dialog box The polyline s is are created e If you select the boundary entities before launching the Boundary Polyline tool you can make the selection set active by pressing the Select button in step 2 e If you type boundary don t forget the minus sign in the command bar you are prompted to click the area where you want to create the polyline s immediately no
556. yout viewports are to be considered as a view window on your drawing in model space Layout viewports can be placed anywere in a paperspace layout Each viewport has its own scale and layer visibility All viewports in the same layout can be printed simultaneously The Mview command lets you manage your viewports in paper space Although not necessary to print your drawing paper space offers a lot of advantages e Create multiple layouts to print the same drawing with different print settings such as pen widths printer configuration files lineweight settings drawing scale and more e Add print related entities that are not essential to the model itself such as keynotes annotations title blocks etc e Fora single layout create multiple layout viewports to print multiple views of your drawing at different scales Switching between model space and paper space e To switch between Model Space and Paper Space Layouts use the Model and Layout tabs at the bottom of the drawing window e When working in a layout use the MSPACE and PSPACE commands to toggle between paper space and model space Using the model and layout tabs 6 option To open model space click the Model tab 1 at the bottom of the drawing window 7 option To open a paper space layout click the corresponding Layout tab 2 at the bottom of the drawing window NOTE A drawing contains at least one layout which is named Layout1 by default 24 User Guid
557. ype Bylayer Linetype scale 1 n Plotstyle ByColor Line weight ByLayer Hyperiink Thickness j SD Visualization Material ByLayer 5 Geometry _ Vertices El Vertex 1 E Position x 9 Start width End width 3 Bulge A Global width 9 Elevation T Linetype genera ton F Disabled To move polyline vertices 1 Select the polyline 2 Click the Vertex field in the Properties bar then press the arrow buttons to select the vertex you want to move A X indicates the currently selected vertex in the drawing HS aJe 406 3 User Guide Do one of the following e Adjust the X and or Y fie d and press Enter e Click the Vertex Position field and press the Position button to move the vertex in the drawing 4 Continue editing the polyline or press the Esc key to stop To change the width of polyline segments UI Select the polyline Click the Vertex field in the Properties bar then press the arrow buttons to select the start vertex of the segment you want to modify A X indicates the currently selected vertex in the drawing a 2 aE Type a new width in the Start width field and press Enter Type a new width in the End width field and press Enter Continue editing the polyline or press the Esc key to stop To convert straight segments into a curve NOTE Select the polyline Click the Vertex field in the Properties bar then press the arrow buttons to select
558. ype p to add the plus minus symbol e g if you type c L lt gt cm in the Text override field dimension text displays as 24 43 cm To edit the dimension text in the MText editor 1 Double click the dimension entity The Text Formatting toolbar displays 2 Edit the dimension text 3 Do one of the following e Click the OK button on the Text Formatting toolbar e Click outside the dimension text To edit the dimension text in the Properties Bar 1 Select the dimension entity 2 Inthe Properties Bar select the Text override field Type the new dimension text in the Text override field and press Enter 4 Press the Esc key to stop editing the dimension entity a To edit the dimension text using the Edit Dimension Text tool 1 Do one of the following e Click the Edit Dimension Text tool os in the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Edit Dimension Text in the Dimensions menu e Type dimedit in the command bar press Enter then type new and press Enter The command bar reads New dimension text lt gt 2 Type the new dimension text and press Enter The command bar reads Select dimensions to replace with new text 3 Select the dimensions and press Enter 301 BricsCAD V14 To rotate the dimension text 1 Do one of the following e Click the Rotate Dimension Text tool a in the Dimensions toolbar e Choose Rotate Dimension Text in the Dimensions menu e Type dimedit in the command bar press Enter
559. ype ON or OFF or click ON or OFF in the prompt box To Configure the tablet 1 Do one of the following e Choose Tablet in the Settings menu then choose Configure in the flyout menu Tablet Off Calibrate Configure e Type tablet in the command bar and press Enter The command bar reads Tablet ON OFF CALibrate ConFiGure lt On gt a prompt menu displays TABLET Type cfg in the command bar and press Enter or choose Configure in the prompt menu The command bar reads Do you want to align the tablet overlay Yes No lt No gt 507 BricsCAD V14 2 Type Y in the command bar and press Enter or choose Yes in the prompt menu The command bar reads Digitize upper left corner of the overlay 3 Click on the mark in the upper left corner 1 of the digitizing tablet overlay The command bar reads Digitize the lower left corner of the overlay 4 Click on the mark in the lower left corner 2 of the digitizing tablet overlay The command bar reads Digitize the lower right corner of the overlay 5 Click on the mark in the lower right corner 3 of the digitizing tablet overlay The command bar reads Digitize the lower left corner of the screen pointing area 6 Click on the mark at position 4 on the of the digitizing tablet overlay The command bar reads Digitize the upper right corner of the screen pointing area 7 Click on the mark at position 5 on the of the digitizing tablet overlay
560. ype P and press Enter The command bar reads Select 2D polyline to chamfer 4 Select a polyline All vertices of the selected polyline are chamfered NOTE When the chamfer method is distance angle the direction of the polyline defines which is the first entity of a vertex See drawing rectangles for more information about the direction of closed polylines 391 BricsCAD V14 Filleting Entities Command FILLET The Fillet command connects two entities with an arc of a specified radius to create a rounded edge You can fillet pairs of line segments straight polyline segments arcs circles rays and infinite lines You can also fillet parallel lines rays and infinite lines When filleting a polyline you can fillet multiple segments between two selected segments or you can fillet the entire polyline Filleting two entities or polyline segments 1 Do one of the following e Click the Fillet tool button on the Chamfer Fillet flyout of the Modify toolbar e Choose Fillet in the Modify menu e Type fillet or F in the command bar then press Enter The command bar reads Fillet lt current fillet settings gt Settings Polyline Radius Trim Undo Multiple lt Select first entity gt A prompt menu displays FILLET Select all entities Last entity in drawing Inside window Crossing window Outside window Window polygon Crossing polygon Outside polygon Window rde Crossing drde Outside drde Point Fence
561. ze Sets the size of the snap marker default size is 6 size SnapMarkerThickness Snap marker Sets the thickness of the snap marker default thickness thickness is 2 SnapMarkerColor Sets the color of the snap marker default color color 20 DisplaySnapMarkerInAllViews DisplayTooltips Snap marker in all views Snap tooltips 3 If multiple viewports are open enables the display of the snap marker in all viewports Enables the display of the Entity Snap tooltips System Variable Description OSMODE Entity snap Sets the entity snap modes and toggles entity snap mode on off APBOX Entity snap Toggles the display of the aperture box 2 aperture box APERTURE Entity snap Sets the size of the Autosnap aperture box default aperture size is 10 OSNAPZ Ignore entity Replaces the Z coordinate of the snapping point snap with the current value of the ELEVATION system elevation variable PDFOSNAP Pdf entity Enables snapping to the geometry in pdf underlay snap files 105 BricsCAD V14 To set the Entity Snaps Do one of the following e Click the buttons on the Entity Snaps toolbar The buttons of the currently active entity snap modes are pressed Entity Snaps KP FOLGHOH K YSN oH e Press and hold the Shift key then right click and select the Entity Snap mode in the context menu The icons of the currently active Entity Snap modes are outlined A Snap to Nearest Snap to Endpoint snap to M

Bricscad V10

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents